Exploring IBM eServer pSeries: The Instant Insider's Guide to IBM's Family of UNIX Servers, 12th Edition (Exploring IBM series)

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries Twelfth Edition

Other Titles of Interest From Maximum Press More Exploring IBM Books • Exploring IBM Technology, Products & Services • Exploring IBM e-business Software • Exploring IBM ~ pSeries • Exploring IBM ~ iSeries • Exploring IBM ~ xSeries • Exploring IBM ~ zSeries • and many more…

Top e-business Books • 101 Ways to Promote Your Web Site • Business-to-Business Internet Marketing • Marketing on the Internet • and many more…

Special Offers From IBM and other “Exploring IBM” team members For more information go to www.maxpress.com/ibmpromo1 or e-mail us at [email protected]

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries Twelfth Edition The Instant Insider’s Guide to IBM’s Family of UNIX Servers

Jim Hoskins Robert Bluethman

MAXIMUM PRESS 605 Silverthorn Road Gulf Breeze, FL 32561 (850) 934-0819 www.maxpress.com

Publisher: Jim Hoskins Manager of Finance/Administration: Joyce Reedy Production Manager: Gina Cooke Cover Designer: Lauren Smith Copyeditor: Andrew Potter Proofreader: Jacquie Wallace Indexer: Susan Olason Printer: P.A. Hutchison This publication is designed to provide accurate and authoritative information in regard to the subject matter covered. It is sold with the understanding that the publisher is not engaged in rendering professional services. If legal, accounting, medical, psychological, or any other expert assistance is required, the services of a competent professional person should be sought. ADAPTED FROM A DECLARATION OF PRINCIPLES OF A JOINT COMMITTEE OF THE AMERICAN BAR ASSOCIATION AND PUBLISHERS. Copyright 2004 by Maximum Press. All rights reserved. Published simultaneously in Canada. Reproduction or translation of any part of this work beyond that permitted by Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act without the permission of the copyright owner is unlawful. Requests for permission or further information should be addressed to the Permissions Department, Maximum Press. The photos throughout this book are reproduced courtesy of International Business Machines Corporation. Unauthorized use not permitted. Recognizing the importance of preserving what has been written, it is a policy of Maximum Press to have books of enduring value published in the United States printed on acid-free paper, and we exert our best efforts to that end. Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Hoskins, Jim. Exploring IBM eServer pSeries / Jim Hoskins, Robert Bluethman.— 12th ed. p. cm. ISBN 1-931644-16-0 1. IBM computers. 2. UNIX (Computer file) I. Bluethman, Robert, 1941- II. Title. QA76.8.I1015H665 2003 004.2’525—dc21 2003014398

Acknowledgements Many people gave assistance in preparation of this edition of the book. Some provided information concerning their product area of expertise. Others read the manuscript, helped with typing, and provided helpful comments. To all of those who assisted .... THANK YOU!! We would also like to express particular appreciation to Mitch Caldwell, Eric Finkel, Jennifer Goff, Siva Kodukula, John Manasso, Andy McLaughlin, Scott Vetter, and Sterling Weaver.

Disclaimer The purchase of computer software or hardware is an important and costly business decision. While the author and publisher of this book have made reasonable efforts to ensure the accuracy and timeliness of the information contained herein, the author and publisher assume no liability with respect to loss or damage caused or alleged to be caused by reliance on any information contained herein and disclaim any and all warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or reliability of said information. This book is not intended to replace the manufacturer’s product documentation or personnel in determining the specifications and capabilities of the products mentioned in this book. The manufacturer’s product documentation should always be consulted, as the specifications and capabilities of computer hardware and software products are subject to frequent modification. The reader is solely responsible for the choice of computer hardware and software. All configurations and applications of computer hardware and software should be reviewed with the manufacturer’s representatives prior to choosing or using any computer hardware and software.

Trademarks The words contained in this text which are believed to be trademarked, service marked, or otherwise to hold proprietary rights have been designated as such by use of initial capitalization. No attempt has been made

to designate as trademarked or service marked any personal computer words or terms in which proprietary rights might exist. Inclusion, exclusion, or definition of a word or term is not intended to affect, or to express judgment upon, the validity of legal status of any proprietary right which may be claimed for a specific word or term.

Foreword It’s an exciting time in the world of UNIX computing as UNIX® operating systems represent an increasingly important component of a successful infrastructure, driving many of the most business-critical functions in enterprises throughout the world. According to IDC analyst Jean Bozman, in the July 7, 2003 issue of ComputerWorld, “Unix is a tremendous presence, and it is still the single largest slice of the market.” And the reasons for this are quite simple: performance, RAS, total cost of ownership, application availability and flexibility to name a few. These attributes are critically important criteria for enterprise workloads, and customers are confident UNIX systems can deliver. In the case of IBM eServer™ pSeries™ systems, we’re making extraordinary advances in the underlying technologies that address these business critical criteria. The POWER™ architecture is perhaps the most proven and reliable 64-bit processor platform in the industry. Our extensive POWER roadmap helps assure customers that POWER processor-based offerings will continue to add value. The latest POWER4+™ processors, for example, were incorporated in the entry-class p615 through the flagship p690, in less than six months time. The common thread throughout all the pSeries product offerings is the “no compromises” value position. The basic premise behind “no compromises” is that customers shouldn’t have to sacrifice reliability or functionality for low-price solutions. The objective is to provide customers with mainframe strength technologies throughout the entire pSeries line at affordable prices. AIX 5L™, for example, continues to represent IBM as our strategic enterprise-class UNIX operating system, and IBM continues to commit extensive resources into AIX to extend its leadership as a world-class UNIX environment. Customers can be assured that the AIX excellence trend continues to advance, as is the case with the most recent release of the AIX 5L™ operating system, version 5.2, which enabled new levels of partitioning and capacity planning for customers to attain even greater functionality and flexibility. Flexibility is increasingly more important for customers and pSeries is making every effort to ensure our platform is ready to accommodate

viii

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

a wide range of infrastructure requirements. For example, we have integrated Linux into our overall pSeries ecosystem where it makes sense for customers. It’s clear that Linux is an option that customers want available to them, particularly at the entry and midrange levels, and pSeries has a number of Linux Ready Express Configurations that allow customers to integrate Linux using pSeries servers. In addition to native Linux on pSeries systems, our Dynamic Logical Partitioning (DLPAR) technology allows customers to utilize Linux, AIX 5L or both operating systems in any combination—all on one server. Customers have never had such extraordinary levels of flexibility and pSeries is only making it better. Taking flexibility to the next level is what IBM’s e-business on demand initiative is all about. IBM is connecting the future of how business gets done with technology in a way that is revolutionizing the entire concept of e-business. At its core, e-business on demand is fundamentally about taking organizational productivity to new levels of success. And pSeries technology plays a critical role in this new era of productivity. In fact, many of the pSeries technology advantages developed by IBM over the years are perfectly suited for an on demand operating environment. It’s in our DNA. We’ve been at this for a while and the pSeries heritage fits perfectly into an on demand era. IBM has a strong history in developing technologies that can breathe “on demand” life into customer enterprises in new and exciting ways. Market dynamics are altering the IT approach customers must take to support their business in an era of on demand computing. The pSeries platform is ready and waiting with a host of new on demand offerings customers can implement immediately. And with a solid on demand roadmap in place, the pSeries offerings are well-positioned to represent cutting-edge “no compromises” on demand UNIX and Linux solutions. I hope that you enjoy this latest edition of Exploring IBM eServer pSeries and that it provides you deeper insights on how IBM technology is breaking new ground to provide even greater levels of customer value. by Adalio Sanchez, General Manager, IBM eServer pSeries, IBM Corporation

Table of Contents

ix

Table of Contents

Introduction .......................................................................................... xvii What This Book Is ......................................................................... xvii What This Book Is Not .................................................................. xvii How To Use This Book ................................................................. xviii Your “Members Only” Web Site .................................................... xix A Glance Backward ......................................................................... xx The Who, What, Why, and How of the pSeries ............................. xxii Choices for Your Needs ................................................................ xxvi

Chapter 1: IBM eServer pSeries—An Overview

1

Meet the Family ................................................................................. 1 pSeries Systems Overview .................................................................. 5 pSeries Systems Detail ............................................................. 13 Entry pSeries and RS/6000 Servers .................................................. 14 pSeries 610 Specifics ................................................................ 14 pSeries 615 Specifics ................................................................ 20 pSeries 620 Models 6F1 and 6F0 Specifics ............................... 24 pSeries 630 Specifics ................................................................ 30 pSeries 640 Specifics ................................................................ 34 RS/6000 Model 150 Specifics .................................................. 37 RS/6000 Model 170 Specifics .................................................. 38 RS/6000 Model 270 Specifics .................................................. 39 RS/6000 Model B50 Specifics .................................................. 42 Midrange pSeries Servers ................................................................. 42 pSeries 650 Specifics ................................................................ 42 pSeries 655 Specifics ................................................................ 47 pSeries 660 Models 6H1, 6H0, and 6M1 Specifics .................. 50 pSeries 660 Model 6M1 Specifics ............................................. 54 pSeries 670 Specifics ................................................................ 57 High-end pSeries Servers .................................................................. 60 pSeries 690 Specifics ................................................................ 60 pSeries 690 Overview .............................................................. 61

ix

x

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Logical Partitioning.......................................................... 65 On Demand Capabilities .................................................. 66 Processor Capacity Upgrade on Demand .................... 66 Memory Capacity Upgrade on Demand ...................... 68 On/Off Capacity on Demand ...................................... 69 Trial Capacity on Demand ........................................... 70 Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability (RAS) ............. 70 IBM eServer Cluster 1600 ................................................ 71 Performance Overview ..................................................... 73 A Closer Look ................................................................................. 79 pSeries Hardware Architecture ........................................................ 80 The Processor .......................................................................... 81 Original Implementation .................................................. 81 PowerPC RS64 Microprocessors...................................... 86 POWER2 and POWER3 Microprocessors ....................... 88 POWER4 and POWER4+ Microprocessors ..................... 89 Logical Partitioning ................................................................. 94 Main Memory .................................................................. 97 Memory Management.................................................... 101 Symmetric Multiprocessor Implementation ................... 104 Storage ................................................................................... 105 Diskette Storage ............................................................. 106 Disk Storage ................................................................... 106 SCSI Disk Storage .......................................................... 108 Serial Storage Architecture Disk Storage .................... 110 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop and Storage Area Networks ....................................... 112 Tape Storage .................................................................. 113 Optical Storage .............................................................. 114 Expansion Slots .............................................................. 115 Standard Ports ............................................................... 116 Graphics ........................................................................ 117 The Quiet Touch Keyboard ............................................ 121 Mechanical Packaging ........................................................... 121

Chapter 2: Options and Peripherals

123

Memory Expansion Options .......................................................... 124 RS/6000 Models 150 and B50 Memory Expansion ............... 124

Table of Contents

xi

RS/6000 Model 170 Memory Expansion ............................... 124 pSeries 610 Models 6C1 and 6E1 Memory Expansion .......... 125 pSeries 615 Models 6C3 and 6E3 Memory Expansion .......... 125 pSeries 630 Models 6C4 and 6E4 Memory Expansion .......... 125 pSeries 640 Model B80 and RS/6000 Model 270 Memory Expansion ......................................... 126 pSeries 620 Models 6F0/6F1 and pSeries 660 Models 6H0/6H1 Memory Expansion ........................ 126 pSeries 650 Memory Expansion ............................................ 127 pSeries 655 Memory Expansion ............................................ 127 pSeries 660 Model 6M1 Memory Expansion ......................... 128 pSeries 670 and pSeries 690 Memory Expansion ................... 129 Storage Options ............................................................................. 131 Diskette Storage ..................................................................... 132 Internal Disk Drives .............................................................. 132 External Disk Systems ........................................................... 132 2104 SCSI Expandable Storage Plus .............................. 133 7133 TotalStorage Serial Disk System ............................ 134 7204 External Disk Drive .............................................. 135 7212 Model 102 TotalStorage Storage Device Enclosure ........................................... 136 RAID Technology .......................................................... 136 Storage Area Networks .......................................................... 138 IBM 3552 TotalStorage FAStT Fibre Channel Storage Servers .................................... 139 IBM 2105 TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server ......... 142 Optical Disk Storage ............................................................. 144 Internal Optical Drives .................................................. 144 7210 External DVD-RAM Drive ................................... 145 3995 Optical Library Dataservers .................................. 145 Internal Tape Storage ............................................................. 146 20/40 GB 4-mm Internal Tape Drive (#6158, #6185) .... 146 80/160 GB 8-mm Internal Tape Drive with VXA Technology (#6120, #6169) ...................... 146 60/150 GB 16-bit 8-mm Internal Tape Drive (#6134) .... 146 External Tape Options .......................................................... 147 4-mm Tape Options ....................................................... 147 7206 External 4-mm Tape Drive Model 220 ............. 147 7206 External Tape Drive Model VX2 ...................... 147 7332 4-mm Tape Autoloader ..................................... 148

xii

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

7207 Model 122 External 3-Inch Cartridge Tape Drive .. 148 7208 Model 345 External 8-mm Tape Drive ................. 149 DLT Options ......................................................................... 149 7205 Model 440 Digital Linear Tape Drive ................... 149 7205 Model 550 Digital Linear Tape Drive ................... 149 IBM TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Libraries ...................... 149 IBM TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Library 3582 ............... 150 IBM TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Library 3583 ............... 150 IBM TotalStorage UltraScalable Tape Library 3584 ....... 150 IBM TotalStorage 2-inch Tape Libraries ................................ 151 IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 ............ 151 IBM 3494 TotalStorage Virtual Tape Server Models B10 and B20 .............................. 151 SCSI I/O Adapters ......................................................................... 152 SCSI Adapter Cards ....................................................................... 153 Dual-Channel Ultra3-SCSI Adapter (#6203) ......................... 154 Universal Differential Ultra-SCSI Adapter (#6204) ............... 154 PCI Single-Ended Ultra-SCSI Adapter (#6206) ..................... 154 PCI 4-Channel Ultra3-SCSI RAID Adapter (#2498) ............. 155 Integrated SCSI Controllers ........................................................... 155 SSA Adapters ................................................................................. 156 Advanced SerialRAID Plus SSA Adapter (#6230) ................. 156 Advanced SSA Fibre-Optic Extender (7133 Feature 8851) .... 157 Communications Options .............................................................. 157 Communications Interfaces/Protocols—A Road Map ........... 157 Asynchronous Communications Adapters ............................. 162 8-Port Asynchronous Adapter EIA-232/RS-422, PCI Bus (#2943) ............................. 162 128-Port Asynchronous Controller, PCI Bus (#2944) .... 162 LAN Communications Adapters ........................................... 164 Ethernet Adapters .................................................................. 164 Gigabit SX Ethernet PCI Adapter (#2969) ..................... 164 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet PCI Adapter (#2975) ...... 164 IBM Universal 4-Port 10/100 Ethernet Adapter (#4961) .......................................... 165 10/100 Mbps Ethernet PCI Adapter II (#4962) .............. 166 IBM Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI-X Adapter (#5700) ......... 166 IBM 10/100/1000 Base-TX Ethernet PCI-X Adapter (#5701) ............................... 166 IBM 2-Port 10/100/1000 Base-TX Ethernet PCI-X Adapter (#5706) ............................... 166

Table of Contents

xiii

IBM 2-Port Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI-X Adapter (#5707) .............................................. 167 IBM Token-Ring PCI Adapter (#4959) ................................. 167 TURBOWAYS ATM Adapters ............................................... 168 WAN Communications Adapters .......................................... 168 Multiprotocol Communications Adapters.............................. 168 Other Communications Options.................................................... 169 S/390 ESCON Channel PCI Adapter .................................... 169 Digital Trunk Adapters .......................................................... 170 SP Switch and SP Switch2 Attachment Adapters ................... 170 Fibre Channel Adapters ......................................................... 170 Cryptographic Coprocessors .................................................. 171 Network Processors ............................................................... 172 Displays ......................................................................................... 173 Graphics Adapters ................................................................. 175 Two-Dimensional Graphics Accelerators ....................... 175 POWER GXT135P ................................................... 175 POWER GXT135P with Digital Support .................. 176 Three-Dimensional Graphics Accelerators ..................... 176 POWER GXT4500P ................................................. 176 POWER GXT6500P ................................................. 177 Graphics Performance .................................................... 178 Printers .......................................................................................... 180 Continuous Forms Printers .................................................... 180 IBM Network Printers ........................................................... 181 Other Options ............................................................................... 182 IBM 7316 Model TF2 Rack-mounted Flat Panel Console ..... 182 Exide Uninterruptible Power Systems.................................... 184 IBM Spaceball 3D Input Device ............................................ 184 Magellan XT 3D Input Device .............................................. 184 Three-Button Mouse .............................................................. 185 Keyboards .............................................................................. 185 Modems ................................................................................. 186

Chapter 3: Application Programs and Operating Systems

187

Types of Software—A Conceptual Model ...................................... 187 Application Programs ............................................................ 187 Operating Systems ................................................................. 189 Device Drivers ....................................................................... 191

xiv

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

pSeries Software Compatibility ...................................................... 192 Why Compatibility Is Important ........................................... 192 Inside pSeries Compatibility .................................................. 193 Application Programs ............................................................ 195 Industry-Specific Application Programs ......................... 197 Custom Application Programs ....................................... 198 Operating System .................................................................. 199 Introduction to Operating System Concepts .................. 199 Batch Versus Interactive Processing ........................... 200 What Is Multiuser? .................................................... 201 What Is Multitasking? ................................................ 201 What Is Multiprocessing? .......................................... 202 What Is Logical Partitioning? .................................... 203 AIX 5L—An Executive Overview .................................................. 204 A Closer Look at AIX 5L .............................................................. 209 User Interfaces/Services ......................................................... 209 Systems Management ............................................................. 213 Disk Management .................................................................. 216 Application Development ...................................................... 218 AIX 5L Development Tools ........................................... 218 Compilers .................................................................. 219 Libraries .................................................................... 219 Additional Tools ........................................................ 220 Distributed Computing .......................................................... 221 Communications Support ...................................................... 222 Internet Software ................................................................... 224 Web Browsers ................................................................ 225 Web Server Enablers ...................................................... 225 Development Tools ........................................................ 226 AIX Workload Manager ........................................................ 227 Performance Analysis Tools ................................................... 228 Networking Performance ............................................... 228 Linux Affinity ................................................................ 229 Other AIX Features ............................................................... 229 AIX 5L Bonus Pack, Expansion Pack, and Web Download Pack ........................................... 230 Open-System Standards ......................................................... 232 Security Enhancements .................................................. 232 Desktop User Interface ................................................... 233 File System ..................................................................... 233

Table of Contents

xv

Installation ..................................................................... 234 What About 64-Bit Capability? ............................................. 234 AIX 5L Summary .................................................................. 237 The Linux Operating System ......................................................... 237 Background ........................................................................... 238 Linux on pSeries .................................................................... 239 Linux Distributions for pSeries .............................................. 240 IBM Applications Software for Linux on pSeries .................. 241 Linux on pSeries Summary .................................................... 241

Chapter 4: pSeries Communications

242

Computer Communications—An Introduction .............................. 242 Distributed Computer Communications ................................ 243 pSeries Distributed Network .......................................... 245 pSeries and zSeries Distributed Network ....................... 246 Virtual Private Networks ............................................... 248 pSeries and LANs........................................................... 250 pSeries and the Ethernet LAN ........................................ 252 pSeries and the Token-Ring Network ............................ 255 ASCII Terminal Networks .............................................. 256 Clustering for High Availability ................................. 256 HACMP/XD (Extended Distance) ................................. 260

Chapter 5: pSeries and Your Environment

262

What Are My Computing Needs? ................................................. 263 Choosing the Software ........................................................... 264 Is a pSeries System the Right Choice? ............................................ 266 What About Personal Computers? ................................................ 266 What About iSeries Systems? ......................................................... 266 What About zSeries Systems? ........................................................ 267 When Should a pSeries System Be Considered? ............................. 269 Choosing pSeries Configurations ........................................... 269 Small Business—Bob’s Gearbox Company ..................... 270 Medium-sized Business—Johnson & Thornbush ........... 273 Large Business—Atole Enterprises ................................. 278 The Financial Decisions ................................................. 281

xvi

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Cost Justification ....................................................... 281 Lease or Buy? ............................................................ 285 User Education .............................................................................. 287 IBMLink Support ........................................................................... 288 Ergonomics .................................................................................... 289 Comfort for the Eyes ............................................................. 289 Workstation Comfort ............................................................ 290 What About Noise? ....................................................................... 291 Security .......................................................................................... 291 Loss Prevention ..................................................................... 291 Theft Prevention .................................................................... 292 Service.................................................................................... 292

Introduction

xvii

Introduction

What This Book Is This book is dedicated to IBM eServer pSeries™ servers, the UNIX® systems segment of the IBM eServer brand, which encompasses the complete range of IBM hardware architectures and operating systems. The IBM eServer pSeries family follows in the tradition of IBM RS/6000® systems. For simplicity in this book, we will use “pSeries” to include both pSeries and RS/6000 servers unless specific distinctions between the product families are necessary. Currently, only four RS/6000 entry server models are still available. Although some pSeries and RS/6000 systems can be configured as workstations, UNIX workstations are now included in the IBM IntelliStation® family and are not part of the pSeries family. The flow of this book is as follows: First, pSeries and currently available RS/6000 computers will be introduced. The features of these systems, including options and peripherals, will be reviewed in a way understandable to non-computer experts. Following a chapter on application and operating system software, the book covers some ways to apply pSeries systems to solve problems, improve productivity, create competitive advantages, and so on. Proper selection and use of pSeries products is impossible unless you understand how you can use these components to fill your needs. Specific hardware and software configurations for typical environments will be offered. Many important computer automation planning issues will also be discussed, such as financial justification, lease versus purchase, facilities considerations, and ergonomics.

What This Book Is Not Many computer books try to be all things to all people. They start by explaining checkbook balancing and end by covering the space shuttle’s

xvii

xviii

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

redundant flight computer complex. This book is not a general overview of computers. It is specific to IBM eServer pSeries computers (a subject more than broad enough for a single book). This book is not a technical reference manual (IBM will sell you that), nor is it intended to teach computer programming. It provides a good understanding of pSeries computers and how to use them in various environments. This book does not assume you are a computer professional. Although some technical discussions are necessary, these discussions have been kept as light and concise as possible while still conveying necessary and useful information.

How To Use This Book Chapter 1 first introduces the entire pSeries family and provides an overview of each model. The latter part of the chapter examines the elements (architecture, graphics, auxiliary storage, etc.) that make up pSeries computers. Chapter 2 surveys the many hardware options available for pSeries systems, including storage devices, communications adapters, and attached devices such as displays and printers. This information is provided as a reference to inform you about the types of options that are available and to help you select the proper options for your pSeries computer. It should not be used as a comprehensive catalog of features available for any specific model. You should contact IBM or refer to their on-line product information for that level of detail. The companion Web site (www.maxpress.com) available to you with this book has links to IBM Web sites for such information. Chapter 3 discusses operating systems and some basic types of industry-specific application programs. The question of “prewritten” versus “custom” application programs is addressed. The chapter continues with discussion of operating systems. First, basic operating system concepts such as “multiuser” and “interactive processing” are defined in nontechnical terms. The AIX 5L™ operating system and its optional extension products are described, and a description of pSeries support for the increasingly popular Linux operating system is given.

Introduction

xix

Chapter 4 shows how specific pSeries options and software products are used to participate in common computer communications environments. Chapter 5 covers issues related to the selection of pSeries hardware and software to meet the needs of both commercial and technical users. Hypothetical organizations are described and outfitted with the appropriate pSeries systems. Then important topics such as user training, maintenance, security, and facilities planning are discussed. To help you better understand the topics covered in this book, key terms and phrases are defined and given in boldface type when they are first introduced. These key terms are also listed in the index at the back of this book. If while reading you forget the definition of a key term or phrase defined elsewhere, the index will quickly point you to the page(s) where the term is discussed.

Your “Members Only” Web Site The pSeries world changes every day. That’s why there is a companion Web site associated with this book. On the site you will find the latest pSeries news, expanded information, and other pSeries-related resources. However, you have to be a member of the “pSeries Insiders Club” to gain access to this site. When you purchased this book, you automatically became a member (in fact, that’s the only way to join), so you now have full privileges of the “pSeries Insiders Club.” To get into the “members only” section of the companion Web site, go to the Maximum Press Web site (www.maxpress.com) and follow the links to the Exploring IBM eServer pSeries companion Web site. When you try to enter, you will be asked for a user ID and password. Type in the following: •

For your user ID, enter: pSeries12e

•

For your password, enter: crossover

You will then be granted full access to the “members only” area. Visit the site often and enjoy the updates and resources with our compliments—and thanks again for buying the book. We ask that you not share the user ID and password for this site with anyone else.

xx

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

A Glance Backward To appreciate the pSeries family and the AIX 5L operating system fully, it is helpful to be familiar with some basic history. The AIX 5L operating system is IBM’s version of the UNIX operating system, which was originally developed by AT&T Bell Labs in 1969. The original UNIX was not intended to be a commercial product but rather a tool for use by computer programmers within AT&T. In fact, at that time AT&T was not in the business of selling computers or operating systems. However, in 1975 AT&T began to license universities to use the UNIX operating system at no charge and soon the UNIX operating system had become widely used in the academic community. Students quickly took advantage of the freedom in the academic world to make their own improvements to the UNIX operating system, often resulting in new commands that although obvious to the creator seemed cryptic to other users. For example, the BIFF command used to pick up electronic mail stored in the computer system was added to the UNIX operating system. Why BIFF? Because the student who made the enhancement had a dog named Biff that was trained to go out and get the newspaper every morning. Although this freedom to make unstructured improvements to the UNIX operating system at will helped UNIX become more powerful, it also left holes in areas such as data security and reliability. In 1981, the University of California at Berkeley offered its own version of the UNIX operating system with many enhancements. Berkeley’s version of the UNIX operating system, known as Berkeley Software Distribution 4 (BSD 4), became a very popular operating system in its own right—so much so that most of the enhancements contained in the Berkeley version were incorporated by AT&T’s later versions of the UNIX operating system. Meanwhile, IBM was busy working on the “801 project,” which was started in 1975. Named after the building in which it was resident, the 801 project was an experiment to develop a minicomputer that bucked the existing trend toward complex computer programming instructions. Under the leadership of IBM scientist John Cocke, the 801 approach was to simplify the range of instructions used to perform tasks and optimize the computer to execute this limited range of instructions with extreme efficiency. Born of this approach is the name “Reduced Instruction Set Computing,” or RISC. In January 1986, IBM announced the first product to use the RISC approach, the IBM RT PC (for RISC Technology Personal Computer),

Introduction

xxi

shown in Figure I.1. At the same time, IBM introduced its own version of the UNIX operating system to run on the RT Personal Computer®, called the Advanced Interactive eXecutive (AIX)® operating system. Later, IBM released versions of the AIX operating system for the smaller IBM Personal System/2 computers and the larger S/370™ mainframe computers. In early 1986, IBM hardware and software engineers in Austin, Texas, took on the task of designing a new product family. It would represent IBM’s second-generation RISC technology, combining the RISC philosophy with more traditional concepts, the goal of which was to achieve balanced performance. The result of that effort was the RS/6000 family of products and AIX Version 3, both introduced on February 15, 1990. During the 1990s, the RS/6000 family of hardware and the AIX operating system were enhanced through a continuous stream of product announcements. In October 2000, the IBM eServer pSeries family was introduced. The announcements in 2001 of the AIX 5L operating system and the pSeries 690 server based on POWER4™ architecture are the most recent milestones in the development of IBM’s RISC and UNIX-

Figure I.1 IBM RT System. The system unit can be seen beside the desk, and the associated display and keyboard are on the desktop.

xxii

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

based systems. The remainder of this book will focus on the pSeries family and the latest version of the AIX operating system, AIX 5L. Although AIX 5L is and will continue to be the primary operating system for pSeries servers, provisions have been made in AIX 5L to accommodate applications written for Linux7, a rapidly emerging operating system development that arose in the 1990s. Although IBM is not a distributor of Linux, most pSeries servers can run the Linux operating system, with software and support available from third-party distributors. To accommodate users who prefer to run Linux, pSeries “Linux ready Express Configurations” are available without an AIX 5L license. Beginning in 1991, a university student in Finland, Linus Torvalds, developed an operating system based on UNIX called Linux. The current full-featured Linux Kernel Version 2.4 was released in January 2001. Although not certified as a UNIX operating system (as are IBM’s AIX 5L or Sun Microsystem’s Solaris), Linux is a low-cost alternative operating system that is growing in popularity and has been ported to many hardware configurations, including Intel-based PCs and some pSeries systems. Linux is developed under the GNU General Public License, and its source code is available to anyone free of charge. Several companies offer Linux distributions and associated support services. “GNU” is just an acronym meaning “GNU’s Not Unix.” The GNU Project, launched in 1984, is a voluntary organization dedicated to the sharing of free software. Not necessarily “free” in terms of price (a company may charge for distributing the software), but “free” in three senses—freedom to copy the source code and give it away to someone else, freedom to change the software by having full access to the source code, and freedom to distribute an improved version of the software.

The Who, What, Why, and How of the pSeries Before going any further into the details of the pSeries, it would be useful to take a look at who in the marketplace is using these UNIX systems, what they are doing with them, why they chose IBM, and how they picked the right model. First let’s look at who. In general, the UNIX marketplace can be divided into two camps. One is the high-performance computing (HPC) or “technical and scientific” community. These users run applications such as weather predic-

Introduction

xxiii

tion modeling, analyzing seismic data for the presence of oil, or designing the latest high-tech aircraft. Their primary concerns are floatingpoint performance, the ability to cluster many servers in parallel to process large amounts of data, and graphics features/performance. HPC customers typically are interested either in large rack-mounted servers with extensive scalability or in high-performance deskside models for individual technical personnel. IBM refers to a computer which is packaged in a small unit that sits upright on the floor beside a desk (similar to the personal computer in your home) as a “deskside” model. Deskside models that support three-dimensional (3D) graphics capability are called “workstations” and are used in areas such as aircraft and automotive design. As mentioned earlier, IBM’s UNIX workstations are now part of the IntelliStation family of products. The other primary camp within the UNIX marketplace is termed “commercial.” This group deals with banking, manufacturing, large database-oriented environments, and retail applications, to name a few. With the rapid growth in recent years of the Internet and e-commerce, commercial-sector requirements have expanded to include both core business applications and the infrastructure required in today’s on-line business world, such as Web serving, networking, and security. The primary concerns of this commercial group include database and transaction processing performance, and reliability and availability features for near-continuous operations, communications, and compatibility with existing systems and applications. Typically, commercial users select from the range of deskside and rack-mounted pSeries models, depending on the number of users, size of the enterprise, and data storage requirements. An increasingly important subset of the commercial market is composed of users such as Internet Service Providers (ISPs), Application Service Providers (ASPs), and telecommunications central offices. Such customers often operate large “server farms”—groups of servers linked together and usually mounted in racks in the same room. These server farms require high-performance processing, high availability, high-density rack-mount packaging (to maximize the use of floor space), and compliance with Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) standards for operation in rugged conditions. These definitions of “high-performance computing” and “commercial” are certainly not exact. Banks crunch lots of numbers, and national labs have large databases of information and support many users with Internet access. However, these categories (HPC and commercial)

xxiv

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

describe the general distribution of pSeries users and also may give an idea of where your application and requirements fit into this market. Having said who is using the pSeries, let’s talk about what they are doing. The pSeries is being employed to implement all of the latest information technologies—client/server, rightsizing, Web sites, data mining, application consolidation, and so on. The pSeries models are also employed in more traditional roles—as database servers in OLTP (OnLine Transaction Processing), accounting, human resources, inventory management, order entry, scientific computing, and so on. Every industry has found a use for UNIX systems and has included the pSeries in its information technology. Why choose UNIX at all? What about personal computers, or PCs? Although this book is about pSeries systems, it is important to understand how they differ from the PC family in order to make good buying decisions. In fact, because PCs can run the popular Linux operating system or versions of UNIX for Intel-based systems, many of the application programs available for pSeries systems can also be run on PCs. Key differentiators between pSeries (or many other UNIX servers, for that matter) and PCs are performance and the robustness of the hardware and operating system. pSeries systems combine high-performance integer and floating-point processing power with very high memory and data bandwidth and extensive scalability for storage and communications options. There are pSeries models suitable for the full range of application environments—both commercial workloads, such as large-scale database and transaction processing, and engineering and scientific applications. The kinds of business-critical applications run on pSeries servers require high levels of reliability and system availability. PCs have been designed more for low cost and performance for personal productivity applications, games, and the like. It should be noted that some Intelbased servers on the market have some of the system robustness features that are common on most UNIX servers, and the performance of some systems using the latest 64-bit Intel processors is excellent, so the boundary between UNIX servers and Intel-based systems is not always crystal clear. Another distinguishing characteristic of pSeries systems is the capacity for scaling of processor power, both within individual models and across the pSeries family. All the pSeries systems described in this book are symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) systems that allow configurations with various numbers of processors (depending on model, as

Introduction

xxv

described in Chapter 1). Many of the latest pSeries models also support logical partitioning, which allows processors, memory, and I/O devices to be assigned to independent logical partitions (LPARs), thus allowing the creation of virtual “servers within a server.” The binary compatibility (see Chapter 3) of AIX 5L allows the very same application software to run on a 1-way pSeries 610 system or on a 32-way pSeries 690 system. In addition, IBM cluster management software and high-performance interconnect technology support clusters of as many as 128 pSeries servers or logical partitions, each running an AIX 5L operating system image. The point is that the pSeries family offers a range of compatible solutions for situations from small businesses to large datacenter operations. An increasingly important requirement in today’s fast-paced business environment is the need for adding processing capability to a company’s computer system almost instantaneously, in order to meet rapidly changing or seasonal workloads. To help address such “on-demand” requirements, some pSeries servers offer Capacity Upgrade on Demand (CUoD), allowing processors and memory to be installed, but remain inactive until the user requires the additional system resources. The most important consideration in choosing a server is whether the required application is available on the platform and operating system of choice. Other key factors to be weighed in selecting a system are the technical skills of a company’s information technology professionals, the installation and support services available from the manufacturer or supplier, and the number of users to be supported. All these matters must be considered to determine which server and which operating system yield the lowest overall cost in equipment, software, and operating costs. The solution with the best-fitting application programs will normally provide the best results. Since PCs run operating systems such as the various Microsoft Windows offerings, they are generally preferred as end-user systems for popular word-processing, spreadsheet, and Internet browser applications. Given today’s business environment of people on the go, many users have laptop PCs and connect to centralized servers from home, hotel rooms, and airports—sometimes using wireless communications. In multiuser environments, many users—each with a PC—are connected (typically by a local area network, or LAN) to servers that provide shared data, applications, and services such as printing and access to public or private networks. In such environments, the typically higher performance of the pSeries family allows a single pSeries server to be

xxvi

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

shared by many more users than can share a PC, if used as a server. Also, multiuser UNIX systems are more mature than PC server systems simply because they have been around longer. This means that more “tried and true” business applications, systems management tools, and reliability features are available for UNIX server configurations than for PC server configurations. Hundreds of thousands of pSeries and RS/6000 systems have been sold. The UNIX server market is extremely competitive from a performance and price standpoint. If IBM announces a hot new machine, you can rest assured that other vendors will react by dropping their prices and/or announcing a new higher performing system as soon as they can—and vice versa.

Choices for Your Needs Now, how do you select the right pSeries hardware and software for your needs? It gets quite complex with the multitude of models, options, peripherals, and software products from which to choose. Every situation and application is unique. It is a good practice to consult trained specialists, such as a local UNIX server professional, an IBM representative, or an IBM Business Partner (independent companies who are trained and authorized to sell pSeries servers). Here are a few questions and concepts that you might keep in mind. There are some example configurations in Chapter 5 as well. •

Is there a critical component to the system? This could be an application, specialized adapter, or communications facility that might force your decision in some other areas. For example, some older systems may not support a new adapter card.

•

Is availability an issue? How long can the system be down, if ever? This will drive a number of decisions regarding the system(s), disk, communications, and software. High Availability Cluster Multiprocessing (HACMP), discussed in Chapter 4, can be a lifesaver in these situations.

•

Will this system have a single primary user or will it be a server for multiple users?

Introduction

xxvii

•

What capacity is required? You must determine what your low and high marks are for memory, storage, and adapters. This is a very difficult undertaking, but application providers and other similar customers can help.

•

What performance is required? Consider floating-point or integer (for database and traditional business applications)?

•

What future growth is anticipated? If your business is growing or you foresee the use of a particular application increasing in the near term, it may be better to invest in a system that can grow with you. If growth will not be needed, then you can likely save cost by purchasing a smaller machine fully configured.

•

Are your business workloads likely to change rapidly, requiring immediate upgrade of processing power in order to respond to customer demands adequately? If so, you should consider systems that offer on demand features such as processor and memory Capacity Upgrade on Demand.

•

Finally, what price is acceptable and what priority does price have? Price must be weighed against other factors. For example, if a LAN adapter fails in your brokerage system and you consequently lose $2,000 per minute while the system is being repaired, an extra $1,000 for dual LAN adapters is a small price to pay.

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

1

1 IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

T

his chapter begins with an overview of pSeries, then moves in for a closer look at the design details of specific models. As mentioned in the Introduction, “pSeries” will refer to both pSeries and the remaining available RS/6000 systems, except as required for historical accuracy or to describe individual computer models.

Meet the Family The IBM eServer pSeries family is IBM’s third generation of computers based on the Reduced Instruction Set Computing (RISC) architecture developed by IBM in the late 1970s. With this concept, a very simple set of programming instructions is used to perform all work within the computer system. Because the instructions are very simple, they can be executed at an extremely high speed, and they also lend themselves to a more efficient implementation of the program being executed. The RISC architecture was first introduced in the IBM RT Personal Computer, later renamed the IBM RT System. The RS/6000 family was the second generation of systems based on the RISC architecture, using the Performance Optimized With Enhanced RISC (POWER) architecture, and its PowerPC® (including the RS64 superscalar processor family, optimized

1

2

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

for commercial workloads), POWER2TM, and POWER3TM derivatives. The POWER architecture combines the concepts of the original RISC architecture with a sprinkling of more traditional concepts to create systems with optimum overall system performance. The pSeries family of servers, the third generation of RISC products, was introduced using the POWER3 and PowerPC architectures. The latest RISC processor generation—POWER4—was introduced in October 2001 on the pSeries 690 server, and this architecture has been followed with POWER4+TM technology on the most recent pSeries models. The pSeries family is designed to address the computing needs of both high-performance computing (HPC) users and those who run more general commercial applications. High-performance computing applications can be found in business, government, and academic environments in areas such as statistical analysis, geological analysis, molecular chemistry simulations, artificial intelligence, and life sciences. The engineering/scientific user may perform such tasks as designing mechanical devices on the computer screen (computer-aided design, or CAD), simulating physical stresses to test the strength of the design (computer-aided engineering, or CAE), and then automatically generating the programming necessary to manufacture the part with numerical control machine tools (computer-aided manufacturing, or CAM). Many HPC applications are best implemented on shared servers or clusters of servers, with each user having a PC as his or her workstation. If three-dimensional (3D) graphics capability is required for the application (as in the case of automotive or aircraft design), then an IBM IntelliStation POWER 275 or 265, the pSeries 630 Model 6E4, or one of the RS/6000 workstation models with a large display and specialized input devices, such as the IBM Spaceball, should be selected as that user’s personal workstation. Such workstations are usually networked to allow the user community to share programs, data, and peripheral equipment. Another type of environment addressed by pSeries computers is that of traditional commercial applications found in business, government, and academic organizations. In these environments, a single pSeries server or cluster of servers is shared by multiple users, each working at a personal computer (PC), which is connected to the server on a local area network (LAN). Applications in commercial environments cover a great range, from general accounting and order entry to the most advanced database management systems for supply chain management, data mining, and business-to-business transactions using the Internet. Sometimes

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

3

in the commercial environment there are also technical business users who, like engineering/scientific users, need their own pSeries system dedicated to demanding applications such as business statistical analysis, financial analysis, economic simulations, and securities trading. These users will usually be attached to a LAN, allowing them to share programs, data, and peripheral equipment with other users and to access the Internet. The pSeries family uses the AIX 5L operating system, IBM’s version of the UNIX operating system. In AIX 5L, IBM has combined the basic functions of the UNIX operating system with many enhancements, both those developed by IBM and those designed by other companies and academic institutions. AIX 5L adheres to the many industry standards that have been developed to make systems from various vendors more compatible and to facilitate information interchange between systems from different manufacturers. Because the AIX 5L operating system conforms to many industry standards, the pSeries family is considered an open system. This means that the AIX 5L operating system conforms to standards (programming interfaces, communications protocols, and so on) defined by independent standards bodies rather than using an IBM proprietary set of standards not generally adhered to by other computer manufacturers. The advantage of the open-system strategy comes when an independent software development company writes an application program conforming to these industry standards. Because many computer manufacturers offer open-system computers, the software development company can offer its application program on many different brands of computers. The advantages of open systems to computer users are that (1) after selecting the application program that best meets their needs, they have more flexibility as to which brand of open-system computer to buy, (2) after users have purchased an open-system computer, they can choose from the large body of open application programs to meet new needs as they emerge, and (3) users have the flexibility to purchase multiple opensystem computers of different brands and know that they will be able to interoperate over a communications network. The open-system concept is not without its difficulties, however. First, multiple organizations are simultaneously defining standards for the same open-system environment. This leads to conflicts and incompatibilities. Further, although open-system computer manufacturers conform to industry standards, they also offer proprietary extensions to help differentiate their open-system computers from those of others.

4

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

The more a software development firm exploits these proprietary extensions, the more it diverges from the spirit of the open-system concept. Even with these difficulties, the open-system approach provides the most widely compatible environment today and shows great promise for the future. In support of the open-system concept, IBM has also made a significant commitment to supporting Linux on all pSeries systems. IBM provides I/O device driver software to the Open Source community, thus enabling Linux distributors to support pSeries servers, and also works closely with Linux distributors to help test pSeries servers running the Linux operating system. At the time of writing this edition, most pSeries servers are supported on SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 8 (SLES 8) for iSeries™ and pSeries. In Japan and some other Asia Pacific countries, Turbolinux distributes its Turbolinux Linux Enterprise Server 8 (TLES 8), which supports the same pSeries servers as does SLES 8 from SuSE. The IBM eServer pSeries family of servers cover the range from entry servers all the way to high-end, datacenter-class systems previously associated only with mainframe computers. The categories are the following: Entry Servers •

pSeries 610 Models 6E1 and 6C1

•

pSeries 615 Models 6E3 and 6C3

•

pSeries 620 Models 6F0 and 6F1

•

pSeries 630 Models 6E4 and 6C4

•

pSeries 640

•

RS/6000 Models 150, 170, 270, and B50

Midrange Servers •

pSeries 650

•

pSeries 655

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

•

pSeries 660 Models 6H0 and 6H1

•

pSeries 660 Model 6M1

•

pSeries 670

5

High-end Servers •

pSeries 690

In addition, IBM UNIX server products include the IBM eServer Cluster 1600 (AIX 5L-based clusters of pSeries servers for parallel operation). Figures 1.1a and 1.1b show the pSeries family and the RS/6000 family at a glance. We’ll take a look at each of these models, but first here is a brief overview of IBM’s naming convention on these systems. The pSeries class (e.g., p690 or p615) distinguishes the servers by performance, system capacity, and physical packaging. In general, a larger pSeries class number indicates a more powerful system, but that is not necessarily the case when packaging characteristics are considered. For instance, the pSeries 640 is a rack-optimized, NEBS (Network Equipment Building System) Level-3-compliant server for use in server farm environments, but it does not offer the performance and expansion capacity of the pSeries 630. Likewise, within a pSeries class, model numbers are used to distinguish by performance and capacity, but also by package type. To summarize, greater pSeries class numbers and greater model numbers indicate more powerful systems, except when used to distinguish characteristics such as packaging (rack vs. deskside).

pSeries Systems Overview A significant change in the architecture of the IBM RS/6000 systems began in 1995 with movement toward a more open-systems design. This movement continues to evolve in the pSeries family and in the AIX 5L operating system as hardware and software technologies develop. At that time, IBM began introducing RS/6000s using the industry-standard Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) and in some cases the Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus structures rather than the

1 or 2 POWER4+ 1.2 GHz 1.5 MB L2 and 8 MB L3

431 1, 2, or 4 RS64 IV 600 MHz 2 MB L2 (1-way) or 4 MB L2 (2- and 4-way) or 1, 2, or 4 RS64IV 750 MHz (8 MB L2) (6F1 only) 6 RS64 IV 750 MHz (8 MB L2)

1, 2, or 4 POWER4+ 1.2 GHz or 1.45 GHz 1.5 MB L2 and 8 MB L3 per processor card

1-4 POWER3-II 375 MHz (4 MB L2) or 2 or 4 POWER3-II 375 MHz (8 MB L2) or 2 or 4 POWER3-II 450 MHz (8 MB L2)

2, 4, 6, or 8 POWER4+ 1.2 GHz 909 or 1.45 GHz 1.5 MB L2 and 8 MB L3 (1.2 GHz) or 32 MB L3 (1.45 GHz)

p615-6C3/6E3

p620-6F0/6F1

p630-6C4/6E4

p640-B80

p650

1221

426

1097

396

966

426

Entry rack-mount (6C3) and deskside (6E3) servers bring POWER4 architecture to small businesses and distributed environments

Low-cost rack-mount (6C1) and deskside (6E1) servers for small businesses and server farm or distributed environments

Key point of system

Rack-optimized server high-density, rugged server farm environments

Rack-mount (6C4) and deskside (6E4) servers with logical partitioning for both commercial and technical applications in small businesses

18.67 High-performance, compact rack-mount mid-range server with logical partitioning for commercial and technical applications

4.01

8.69

5.85/ Midrange commercial deskside server with 8.23 lots of expansion capacity and workgroup software pricing (6F0 only)

4.0

2.27

SPEC fp2000 rPerf

Figure 1.1a. The IBM eServer pSeries family at a glance (performance shown for fastest processor and largest SMP configuration). (continued on next page)

313

884

739

313

1 or 2 POWER3-II 333 MHz (4 MB L2) or 375MHz (4 MB L2) or 450 MHz (8 MB L2)

p610-6C1/6E1

SPEC int2000

Processor(s)

pSeries Model

6 Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

SPEC int2000

950

4, 8 or 16 POWER4+ 1.5 GHz 6 MB L2 and 128 MH L3 per multichip module (4, 8, or 16 POWER4 1.1 GHz available)

8, 16, 24, or 32 POWER4+ 1.5 GHz 1077 or 1.7 GHz 6 MB L2 and 128 MB L3 per multichip module (8, 16, 24, 32 POWER4 1.1 GHz or 1.3 GHz available)

p670

p690

83.43 Most powerful pSeries server with logical partitioning and outstanding transaction processing performance

46.79 Powerful mid-range server with logical partitioning and optimized for commercial applications

13.28 Higher performance midrange rack-mount server for commerical applications and rugged environments

5.85/ Midrange rack-mount server for commercial 8.23 applications and rugged environments, and with workgroup software pricing (6H0 only)

19.37 High-density, cluster-optimized midrange server with logical partitioning for massively parallel applications

Key point of system

Figure 1.1a. The IBM eServer pSeries family at a glance (performance shown for fastest processor and largest SMP configuration). (continued from previous page)

1598

1432

359

409

2 or 4 RS64 III 500 MHz (4 MB L2) or 2, 4, 6, 8 RS64 IV 750 MHz (8 MB L2)

p660-6M1

1398

SPEC fp2000 rPerf

396

4 POWER4+ 1.7 GHz or 8 1.5 GHz 941 6 MB L2 and 128 MH L3 per multichip module (4 POWER4 1.3 GHz and 8 1.1 GHz available)

Processor(s)

p660-6H0/6H1 1, 2, or 4 RS64 IV 600 MHz 2 MB 431 L2 (1-way) or 4 MB L2 (2- and 4-way) or 1, 2, or 4 RS64 IV 750 MHz (8 MB L2) (6H1 only) 6 RS64 IV 750 Mz (8 MB L2)

p655

pSeries Model

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview 7

PowerPC 604e 375 MHz (1 MB L2)

B50 n/a n/a

426

426

90.8*

SPEC fp2000

0.26

4.01

0.79

0.18*

rPerf

Low-cost compact package targeted for ISPs and ASPs

Midrange tower server for both commercial and technical computing, and SMP graphics workstation

Low-cost tower server and high-performance uniprocessor graphics workstation

Lowest cost entry server and workstation

Key point of system

Figure 1.1b. The IBM eServer pSeries family at a glance (performance shown for fastest processor and largest SMP configuration).

* Performance shown for 250 MHz processor

1-4 POWER3-II 375 MHz (4 MB L2) or 2 or 4 POWER3-II 375 MHz (8 MB L2) or 2 or 4 POWER3-II 450 MHz (8 MB L2)

270 313

POWER3-II 333 MHz (1 MB L2) or 333 400 MHz (4 MB L2) or 450 MHz (8 MB L2)

170

99.4*

SPEC int2000

PowerPC 604e 250 MHz (1 MB L2) or 375 MHz (1 MB L2)

Processor(s)

150

pSeries Model

8 Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

9

proprietary Micro Channel (MCA) bus. These PCI/ISA systems represented a major paradigm shift for the RS/6000 product line. Along with this change, IBM’s RS/6000 Division began a move from a line of specialized machines with custom-built components in fairly low volumes to a more generalized line of systems with common off-the-shelf components. There were advantages for both the user and IBM. IBM could design new systems and release them to the market more rapidly than before, and the use of fairly common, high-volume parts, including some used in the personal computer line (power supplies, cables, disks, memory, etc.) allowed prices to the user to continue to drop. Recent examples of continuing to implement this open systems paradigm include broad support for the Fibre Channel architecture and storage area networks (SANs), and support for applications requiring the Linux operating system. And, following the latest industry standard I/O architecture direction, recently announced pSeries servers and I/O expansion drawers support hot-plug PCI-X adapters. To help you understand major differences among the various models, the following paragraphs give a thumbnail sketch of the pSeries family and the RS/6000 models still available. Greater detail will be given in the next section. The pSeries 610 is designed especially for small to medium-sized businesses and is available in two models. The pSeries 610 Model 6C1 is a rack-drawer server, and the pSeries 610 Model 6E1 comes in a deskside configuration. Both models are 1- to 2-way symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) servers using 333 MHz, 375 MHz, or 450 MHz POWER3-II processors. Larger companies may select the p610 for situations where many small systems must be deployed in many separate locations, as in chains of retail stores. The pSeries 615, a 1- or 2-way SMP server, introduces POWER4+ technology to the low end of the pSeries family and is intended to replace the older p610 in the future. The pSeries 615 Model 6C3 is a rack-mount server, while the pSeries 615 Model 6E3 is a deskside unit. Both are powered by 1.2 GHz POWER4+ processors and provide extensive scalability for an entry system—up to eight disk drive bays and six PCI-X slots. Like the p610, this entry server is designed for small to medium-sized companies and for distributed systems in larger corporations. The pSeries 620, a midrange deskside server with up to six processors running at either 600 MHz or 750 MHz and lots of expansion capability, can satisfy the total computing requirements of many small or even medium-sized companies. There are two p620 models, differing solely in the fact that the pSeries 620 Model 6F0 can be expanded only

10

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

to four processors whereas the pSeries 620 Model 6F1 offers up to a 6-way SMP configuration. The reason for the distinction between Models 6F1 and 6F0 is that the maximum of four processors in the p620-6F0 qualifies it for workgroup pricing for popular software programs, such as Oracle and IBM DB2 databases, making the total system cost more attractive for many users. The rack-mount pSeries 630 Model 6C4 and deskside pSeries 630 Model E4 are 1-, 2- and 4-way SMP servers with either 1.2 GHz or 1.45 GHz POWER4+ processors. The 1- and 2-way configurations provide attractive entry points for small businesses, with room to grow in processing power, memory, and I/O capacity. The p630-6C4 rack system meets NEBS Level 3 standards, which means it is designed to withstand rugged conditions of temperature, vibration, and the like. This versatile entry system also offers the flexibility of logical partitioning (LPAR—the acronym LPAR is used in this book to refer either to “logical partitioning” as a technology or function or to a “logical partition”), which allows users to create up to four “virtual servers within a server.” The p630-6C4 is positioned as a replacement for the pSeries 640, and the p630-6E4 will replace the RS/6000 Model 270. The pSeries 640 is a rack-mountable server designed especially for high-density server farm environments in e-commerce and Telco applications. In addition, the 1- to 4-way POWER3-II microprocessors used in the p640 provide the floating-point power needed for many HPC applications. The pSeries 640 meets NEBS Level 3 standards, making it suitable for Telco and other harsh environments. The pSeries 650 is IBM’s most popular midrange server. This 2- to 8-way rack-mount system offers 1.2 GHz or 1.45 GHz POWER4+ processors, LPAR support, and the capacity for attaching up to eight IBM 7311-D10 or 7311-D20 I/O expansion drawers. The p650, positioned as the POWER4-based replacement for the p660-6M1, is an excellent choice for business processes such as enterprise resource planning (ERP), supply chain management (SCM), customer relationship management (CRM) and business intelligence (BI). The cluster-optimized pSeries 655 fills a special niche in the pSeries family. It is a high-density configuration, offering 4-way 1.7 GHz or 8-way 1.5 GHz processors in a compact unit that occupies 4 EIA units (4U) in half of a 24-inch rack. This allows up to 128 processors in a single 42U 24-inch frame, making the p655 an excellent choice for clustered solutions operating under the control of a single AIX 5L management server. With high packaging density and LPAR support, the p655

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

11

is an integral component of Cluster 1600 systems, which will be described later in this section. The pSeries 660 class of servers has three models—p660-6H0, p660-6H1, and p660-6M1—all of which have a rack-mountable CEC (Central Electronics Complex) drawer containing processors, memory, and I/O subsystem interface, plus one or more I/O drawers containing 14 PCI adapter slots, a service processor, media devices, and integrated I/O ports. The p660 midrange rack-mount systems are optimized to function as database and transaction processing servers. The pSeries 660 Models 6H0 and 6H1 are electronically equivalent to the p620-6F0 and p620-6F1 except for the rack-mount packaging. The p660-6M1, which offers up to eight RS64 IV processors running at 750 MHz, provides outstanding performance in industry-standard benchmarks for transaction processing, Web serving, and Java application processing. The pSeries 670 is a 4-, 8- and 16-way midrange server, positioned between the p650 and the p690. It features POWER4+ processor multichip modules (MCMs) running at 1.5 GHz, LPAR support, and up to 256 GB of memory, and can attach up to three IBM 7040-61D I/O Drawers, the same I/O expansion unit as used for the high-end p690. For the p670, positioned at the top of the pSeries midrange line, IBM offers a model conversion to the p690 for customers whose business growth requires such expansion. The flagship of the pSeries family is the pSeries 690, a datacenterclass UNIX server announced in October 2001. It was the first pSeries server to use the POWER4 processor, and now it offers up to 32-way SMP configurations of POWER4+ processors running at 1.5 GHz or 1.7 GHz, with half a terabyte (512 GB) of main memory capacity. The multichip packaging technology of the POWER4+ architecture enables configurations optimized for the technical and scientific markets. The p690 also introduced to the pSeries family logical partitioning, developed from IBM’s extensive mainframe systems experience. Logical partitioning allows a system administrator to allocate system resources (processors, memory, I/O devices) to specific applications, effectively creating several independent systems for each application or group of applications. Each logical partition runs its own instance of the operating system, either AIX 5L or Linux, so the LPAR capability allows users to run both AIX 5L and Linux applications simultaneously. LPAR, which is supported on most POWER4-based pSeries servers, is described in greater detail in “A Closer Look” later in this chapter.

12

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

IBM eServer Cluster 1600 is not a product per se, but a name under which all of IBM’s AIX-based clustering technologies (pSeries servers, interconnect options, and software products) may be ordered and managed. Cluster 1600 is the logical extension of the RS/6000 SPTM technologies, which allowed hundreds of processors to be combined in massively parallel systems, such as Deep Blue (the system that defeated chess master Garry Kasparov in 1997) and ASCI White (the world’s fastest supercomputer in 2000 at Lawrence Livermore National Lab). Initially, the servers in an RS/6000 SP system were specially designed and packaged SP nodes, based on the same PowerPC and POWER architectures as those used in RS/6000 SMP computers. Within the past few years, support emerged for attaching pSeries and RS/6000 servers as “nodes” in an SP system. The pSeries 655 is packaged similarly to the earlier SP nodes, making it an ideal choice for applications in which the maximum processor density (least “footprint”) is required. Cluster 1600 allows users to integrate pSeries servers and/or LPARs of those servers, existing SP nodes, and high-speed interconnect technologies in unified systems with a single point of control running IBM Parallel System Support Programs for AIX (PSSP) software. As has been mentioned, pSeries servers like the p620 and p660 replaced older RS/6000 models, offering similar performance points and packaging options but using later technologies. Other pSeries models—such as the p610, p640, and p690—were designed to meet the requirements of users in new market segments. Most recently, systems designed with the latest POWER4 and POWER4+ technologies, logical partitioning, the latest industry-standard I/O architectures, and support for both AIX 5L and Linux have established the unique “identity” of pSeries servers, as differentiated from the predecessor RS/6000 family. At this time, several RS/6000 systems are still available, addressing primarily workstation and low-cost server requirements. But it is anticipated that these products will be withdrawn from marketing in the near future. The RS/6000 Model 150 is a PowerPC 604e system available in either 250 MHz or 375 MHz speeds. It is also very well suited for use as a workgroup server. The RS/6000 Model B50 is a compact rack-mountable server using the same PowerPC 604e electronics as those used in the Model 150 at 375 MHz. At only 2U high, many B50s can be mounted in an industrystandard 19-inch rack. The B50 is targeted for Internet Service Provid-

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

13

ers (ISPs) and Application Service Providers (ASPs) for such applications as Web hosting, firewalls, and Web caching. The RS/6000 Model 170 was the first 64-bit uniprocessor workstation in the product line. Its POWER3-II microprocessor, employing IBM’s innovative copper design, runs at speeds of 333 MHz, 400 MHz, or 450 MHz. The Model 170 has outstanding floating-point performance, and when configured with a 3D graphics adapter (also called a “graphics accelerator”), it is an impressive graphics workstation and technical workload system at a very attractive price. As the least expensive 64-bit system available, it is a good choice for software development and testing, in addition to being a very cost-effective entry-level server for both technical and commercial workloads. The RS/6000 Model 270 is a 1- to 4-way SMP system using POWER3-II microprocessors running at 375 MHz or 450 MHz. Equipped with a 3D graphics adapter card, the Model 270 workstation delivers excellent 3D graphics performance. It is also a very cost-effective midrange server for both technical and commercial workloads.

pSeries Systems Detail In this section, we will discuss the details of the IBM eServer pSeries servers and the four IBM RS/6000 models still available. For readers who are interested in the pSeries systems offering the latest technology, the following systems are suggested as the primary focus for each category: Entry Servers •

pSeries 615 Models 6E3 and 6C3 (1- or 2-way SMP)

•

pSeries 630 Models 6E4 and 6C4 (up to 4-way SMP with LPAR)

Midrange Servers •

pSeries 650 (up to 8-way SMP with LPAR)

•

pSeries 655 (cluster optimized 4- and 8-way SMP with LPAR)

14

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

•

pSeries 670 (up to 16-way SMP with LPAR)

High-End Servers •

pSeries 690 (up to 32-way SMP with LPAR)

Entry pSeries and RS/6000 Servers Figure 1.2 summarizes the characteristics of the entry servers. These systems run AIX 5L v5.1 or v5.2, and selected models run AIX 4.3.3, although AIX 4.3.3 can no longer be ordered.

pSeries 610 Specifics The pSeries 610 (Figure 1.3) provides a new price/performance point in the pSeries server family between uniprocessor models and the previously available entry SMP models, which were 1- to 4-way systems. Although an up to 4-way system provides excellent performance and a lot of room for users to start small and grow, some additional cost is required in the electronics infrastructure to allow for that much expansion. On the other hand, uniprocessor models do not offer the range of performance needed for many small business or departmental applications. So the p610 strikes a middle ground with one or two POWER3II processors running at 333 MHz, 375 MHz, or 450 MHz (the same 64-bit, copper-based processors used in the popular p640 and the RS/6000 Models 170 and 270), along with five PCI slots, seven disk bays, and a maximum memory capacity of 8 GB. In addition, the p610 is available as a deskside server (p610-6E1) and as a 5U rack-drawer server (p610-6C1), both having the same electronics design and expansion capacity. The minimum configuration of the pSeries 610 includes the following: •

333 MHz POWER3-II processor with 4 MB of L2 cache

•

512 MB of SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) with ECC (Error Checking and Correcting)

•

18.2 GB Ultra3-SCSI disk drive

Rack (5U) POWER3-II

1-2 @ 333/375/450 MHz 4 MB/4 MB/ 8 MB

512 MB 8 GB

Package Type

Processor Type

Number of processors

L2 cache per processor, L3 cache per card, DCM, or MCM

Memory

7 3

Disk Media

Std. Max.

I/O Slots Disk bays Pwr/fans

Bays

Disk (GB)

Hot-Plug Support

1.77/1.92/ 2.27

N

N Y Y

18.2 GB 1.0 TB

7 3

5 PCI

512 MB 32 GB

4 MB/4 MB/ 8 MB

1-2 @ 333/375/450 MHz

POWER3-II

Deskside

pSeries 610 Model 6E1

4.0

N

Y Y Y

36.4 GB 1.17 TB

4.0

N

Y Y Y

36.4 GB 1.17 TB

8 3

6 PCI-X

6 PCI-X 8 3

1 GB 16 GB

8 MB

8 MB 1 GB 16 GB

1.5 MB

1-2 @ 1.2 MHz

POWER4+ RS64 IV

Deskside

pSeries 615 Model 6E3

1.5 MB

1-2 @ 1.2 MHz

POWER4+

Rack (4U)

pSeries 615 Model 6C3

Comparison matrix for entry systems. (continued on next page)

1.77/1.92/ 2.27

Relative rPerf Performance

Figure 1.2.

N

LPAR Support

N Y Y

18.2 GB 1.0 TB

5 PCI

I/O Slots

Std. Max.

pSeries 610 Model 6C1

Feature

4.57/5.85

N

N Y Y

18.2 GB 1.0 TB

14 3

10 PCI

512 MB 32 GB

2 or 4 MB @ 600 8 MB @750

1, 2, 4 @ 450/600 MHz

RS64 III/ RS64 IV

Deskside

pSeries 620 Model 6F0

4.57/8.23

N

N N N

18.2 GB 1.0 TB

14 3

10 PCI

512 MB 32 GB

2 or 4 MB @ 600 8 MB @750

1, 2, 4 @ 450 /600 MHz

RS64 III/

Deskside

pSeries 620 Model 6F1

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview 15

1 GB 32 GB 6 PCI-X

Memory

I/O Slots Disk bays Pwr/fans

Hot-Plug Support

Figure 1.2.

Relative Performance

8.05/8.69

Y Y Y Y

Y Y Y Y 8.05/8.69

18.2 GB 587.2 GB

18.2 GB 587.2 GB

4 2

1.5 MB

1, 2, 4 @ 1.2/1.45 GHz

POWER4+

Comparison matrix for entry systems. (continued from previous page)

rPerf

Std. Int. Max.

Disk (GB)

LPAR Support

Disk Media

Bays 4 2

6 PCI-X

1.5 MB

L2 cache per processor, L3 cache per card, DCM, or MCM

I/O Slots

1 GB 32 GB

1, 2, 4 @ 1.2/1.45 GHz

Number of processors

Std. Max.

POWER4+

Processor Type

Deskside

Rack (4U)

Package Type

pSeries 630 Model 6E4

pSeries 630 Model 6C4

Feature

3.59/4.01

N Y Y N

18.2 GB 293.6 GB

4 1

5 PCI

256 MB 16 GB

4 MB/8 MB

1-4 @ 375/450 MHz

POWER3-II

Rack (5U)

p640 Model B50

16 Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

Figure 1.3.

17

pSeries 610 Models 6E1 and 6C1.

•

CD-ROM drive

•

1.44 MB 3.5-inch diskette drive

•

Built-in service processor

•

Integrated I/O ports (do not require use of PCI slots)

•

Two 10/100 Mbps megabits per second) Ethernet

•

Two Ultra3-SCSI ports (internal and external)

•

One parallel port

•

Three serial ports (on the rack model p610-6C1, one serial port is accessible either from the front or the rear)

•

Keyboard

•

Mouse

18

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Processor speed or clock rate is just one factor in determining system-level performance, and the pSeries 610 design provides outstanding internal bandwidths to both memory and I/O devices for a system in this price class. As shown in Figure 1.4, the processor-to-memory bus is 128 bits wide, plus 8 ECC bits, which yields a maximum bandwidth of 1.44 GBps (gigabytes per second) with double-bit error detection and single-bit error correction. The I/O bus can operate at up to 528 MBps with parity checking. This speed and these internal error checking features provide large-system performance in an entry-level UNIX server. The p610 is expandable above the base configuration just outlined. Processor expandability includes either adding a second 333 MHz processor or opting for one or two of either the 375 MHz processors with 4 MB of Level 2 (L2) cache each or the powerful 450 MHz processors with 8 MB of L2 cache each. Memory can be added up to 8 GB in pairs of memory DIMMs (Dual In-line Memory Modules). Disk storage begins with a single 18.2 GB drive mounted in one of the internal bays and can grow to a whopping 291.2 GB (more than a quarter of a terabyte) using 36.4 GB drives. In addition to the significant number of I/O interfaces integrated into the system planar (see the base configuration detailed earlier), there are five PCI slots, three of which are 64-bit capable. An interesting characteristic of the pSeries 610 is the breadth of reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) features offered in an entry-priced system. These features may be especially important for small companies, which have limited information technology skills and resources to deal with system problems, and for retail stores or branchoffice businesses with systems scattered in remote locations where no computer specialist is available. The p610-6C1 and the p610-6E1 are the first pSeries servers to offer Light Path Diagnostics. With Light Path Diagnostics, if a component fails, first a front-mounted attention light is turned on. Then the user looks at the system indicator LED (LightEmitting-Diode) array to see which component is having a problem; this array is similar to those found on many office copiers to help locate paper jams. Finally, there are additional LEDs located near each component. Light Path Diagnostics makes it easy to locate the component to be replaced; it is particularly helpful if a technician is not on site and is working by telephone with local personnel to correct a problem. The service processor, provided as a standard component on the p610 and all other pSeries servers, enables RAS functions such as monitoring of power and temperature parameters, error log analysis and

Figure 1.4.

3rd serial port

IDE CDROM

ISA Bridge

10/100 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet

Memory Data Bus

Internal Ultra3-SCSI

External Ultra3-SCSI

SCSI Controller

16 Bytes @ 90.00 MHz w/ 450 MHz

16 Bytes @ 93.75 MHz w/ 375 MHz

16 Bytes @ 95.14 MHz w/ 333 MHz

16 Bytes @ 90.00 MHz w/ 450 MHz

2 PCI Slots 32 bit 33 MHz 5v

1 PCI Slot 64 bit 33 MHz 5v

PCI Bridge

8 MB L2 w/ 450 MHz

4 MB L2 w/ 333 MHz 4 MB L2 w/ 375 MHz

2 PCI Slots 64 bit 50 MHz 3.3v

PCI Bridge

225 MHz w/ 450 MHz

250 MHz w/ 375 MHz

166.5 MHz w/ 333 MHz

Data 6xx-MX Bus 66 MHz

POWER3-II 333 MHz, 375 MHz, or 450 MHz

Processor Card

6xx Data Bus

8 MB L2 w/ 450 MHz

4 MB L2 w/ 333 MHz 4 MB L2 w/ 375 MHz

16 Bytes @ 95.14 MHz w/ 333 MHz 16 Bytes @ 93.75 MHz w/ 375 MHz

225 MHz w/ 450 MHz

250 MHz w/ 375 MHz

166.5 MHz w/ 333 MHz

pSeries 610 Models 6C1 and 6E1 system design.

Super I/O

POWER3-II 333 MHz, 375 MHz, or 450 MHz

Processor Card

6xx Address Bus

Integrated Service Processor

System Planar

Addr/Cntl

Memory Address

512 MB - 8 GB

Memory

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview 19

20

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

alerts, auto dial-out in the event of predicted or actual failures, and automatic reboot after a variety of failures. The p610 has six hot-swappable front-accessible disk drive bays, which allow disks to be replaced while the system is still running. If the optional redundant third power supply is installed, the system will not go down if one power supply fails, and the hot-plug power supplies allow the failing one to be replaced while power is on. Similarly, if one of the four cooling fans fails, the remaining three fans operate at a higher speed to keep the system cool and the hot-plug fan units can be replaced while the system is running. Finally, like most pSeries systems, the p610 has a built-in service processor that performs such functions as error tracking and automatic reboot (if certain policy flags are set), and, if configured with a modem, can even automatically dial a preprogrammed telephone number (“call home”) in the event of system errors. In summary, the pSeries 610, with both rack-drawer and deskside packaging, is a powerful system that provides users with the potential for expansion when required by business growth and with many features to help keep the system running and make it easy to replace components if failures do occur.

pSeries 615 Specifics The pSeries 615, IBM’s most recent pSeries model, is an entry server offering 1-way and 2-way configurations of 1.2 GHz POWER4+ processors. Like the p610, which it will eventually replace in the pSeries lineup, the p615 is available in two models—the rack-mount pSeries 615 Model 6C3 and the deskside pSeries 615 Model 6E3 (Figure 1.5). However, the p615 offers higher performance and packs more expansion capacity into a more compact rack drawer (p615-6C3 is a 4U package, compared to the 5U p610-6C1) and a deskside p615-6E3 package similar in size to the p610-6E1. The p615 offers from 1 to 16 GB of memory, six hot-plug PCI-X slots, either four or eight hot-swappable disk drive bays, and three media bays. Both the deskside p615-6E3 and rack-mount p615-6C3 have the same electronics design and expansion capacity. Unlike other pSeries servers, the p615 is available only in what IBM calls “Express Configurations.” These are fixed configurations that must include all the specified components without substitutions, but to which other features may be added—such as additional memory, disk drives, or I/O adapters. The

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

Figure 1.5.

21

pSeries 615 Model 6C3 (rack drawer) and Model 6E3 (deskside).

smallest available p615 configuration includes the following hardware components: •

1-way 1.2 GHz POWER4+ system planar with 1.5 MB of L2 cache and 8 MB of L3 cache

•

1 GB of SDRAM memory with ECC

•

Four hot-swappable disk drive bays (one 4-pack)

•

36.4 GB 10K rpm Ultra3-SCSI disk drive

•

Slim-line DVD-ROM drive

•

Slim-line diskette drive

•

Built-in service processor

•

Integrated I/O ports (do not require use of PCI slots)

22

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

–

Ethernet 10/100 Mbps

–

Gigabit (10/100/1000 Mbps) Ethernet

–

Two Ultra3-SCSI ports (internal)

–

One parallel port

–

Three serial ports (one serial port is accessible either from the front or the rear)

–

Two HMCs (Hardware Management Consoles)

–

Keyboard

–

Mouse

If the user wishes to run AIX 5L v5.1 or v5.2, then an AIX 5L license and one year of IBM Software Maintenance for AIX (SWMA) is included with the Express Configuration. Users who intend to run only the Linux operating system must purchase Linux separately from a Linux distributor. The p615 Linux-ready Express Configurations include a diskette drive for loading diagnostics code for hardware service. The pSeries 615 system architecture is shown in Figure 1.6. The heart of the system is the Dual Chip Module (DCM) at the upper right of the diagram. It contains the 1.2 GHz POWER4+ processor chip, packaged together with the 8 MB L3 cache and main memory control unit. The 1-way p615 configurations use a processor chip with a single processor core, while the 2-way systems use processor chips with two cores (as depicted). Although the interface from the memory controller on the DCM is 16 bytes wide (two 8-byte bidirectional buses), the interface to the DDR (Double Data Rate) memory is 32 bytes wide. This is accomplished by buffering in the synchronous memory interface (SMI) chips and the fact that the DCM to SMI interface runs at double the clock rate of the SMI to memory interface. The point to be made is that the cost-effective design of the p615 does not sacrifice L3 cache to memory bandwidth because of a limited number of pins on the DCM. Note that there are eight memory DIMM slots, and memory features come in quads (i.e., four DIMMs). If only four DIMMs are needed for the required memory

Figure 1.6.

pSeries 615 Models 6C3 and 6E3 system design. Super I/O

ISA

HMC 2

HMC 1

Debug port (MFG only)

ISA/IDE controller

CSP and I/O card

DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM

DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM

Slim line diskette drive Media backplane

Slim line optical device RJ

RJ

Optional SCSI RAID Card

LVD

LVD

I2C

SMI

SMI

PCI-X Slot 6 (64b, L) PCI-X Slot 3 (32b, S) PCI-X Slot 2 (32b, S) Ethernet 10/100/1000 PCI-X Slot 4 (64b, L) PCI-X Slot 1 (64b, L)

Ethernet 10/100

PCI-X Slot 5 (64b, L)

PCI-X to PCI-X bridge #2

PCI-X to PCI-X bridge #1

66 MHz

JTAG

Main Store Cntl Unit

133 MHz

EPOW

JTAG

RIO-G Clock 62.5 MHz Osc

RIO-G Bus 2B each dir 1 GB/sec

GX Bus 48 each dir

8 MB DRAM

L3 Async Intfc Cache

Dual Chip Module

PCI-X PCI 8B Host Bridge

PCI-X 8B

PCI 4B 66 MHz

Flash 8/16 MB

PPC 403

SRAM 256/512 KB

SDRAM 32 MB

Fan Cntl & Status

JTAG

JTAG PGOOD

Primary CSP Interface

SCSI Ultra160 controller

Vital Product Data Concentrator

1655x

Mux

DASD

SCSI LVD Tape

Serial port 3

Serial port 2

Serial port 1 on Op Panel

Serial port 1

Parallel port

Kbd/Mouse

SMI Bus Double Data Rate 200/100 MHz Bi-dir

Port Double Data Rate 400/200 MHz Bi-dir

core

Remote I/O Bridge JTAG

Int Bus Clk 10.2 MHz Osc

Processor Interrupt

L3 Bus 8B each dir

L3 1.5MB L2 dir GX Controller

core

POWER4+

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview 23

24

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

capacity, they are placed in a balanced way, with two DIMMs interfacing to each SMI chip. The electronics complex of the p615 is contained in a compact, unified package. The GX bus provides a four-byte path in each direction for data and addresses to the I/O subsystem. Through the GX bus, the processor and memory are connected to the six hot-plug PCI-X slots, the various integrated controllers, the converged service processor (CSP), and backplanes for plugging in disk and media drives. The GX bus provides a bandwidth of 3.2 GBps, but the aggregate I/O bandwidth through the PCI-X slots is limited to 2 GBps. Since the POWER4+ processors are integrated onto the system planar, there is no upgrade from 1-way to 2-way systems, as there are in larger pSeries servers. However, with capacity to accommodate up to 16 GB of memory, almost 1.2 TB of disk storage (8 × 146.8 GB = 1.17 TB), three media drives, and six PCI or PCI-X I/O adapters, the p615 offers excellent expandability in a UNIX server. In addition, the pSeries 615 provides the same extensive set of RAS features as found in midrange and high-end pSeries servers to help ensure high availability. ECC memory with ChipkillTM and bit steering, hot-swappable disk drive bays, and hot-plug PCI-X slots have already been mentioned. The p615 is also designed with redundant hot-plug cooling fans and optionally with redundant hot-plug power supplies. The service processor is integral to the initial boot process and also monitors system operations continuously, checking for error conditions. If attached to a modem using optional Service Agent software, the service processor can notify service personnel in the event of system errors that require attention. With high-performance POWER4+ processors, lots of room to grow in either rack-drawer or deskside configurations, and RAS features that allow even non-technical users to take corrective actions if necessary, the p615 is designed to meet the total computing requirements of small businesses and the needs of larger corporations for distributed sites, such as stores or branch offices.

pSeries 620 Models 6F1 and 6F0 Specifics The pSeries 620 servers (Figure 1.7) provide significant capacity and processing power in a compact, floor-standing unit that can satisfy all the processing requirements of many small and medium-sized businesses.

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

Figure 1.7.

25

pSeries 620 Model 6F0 or 6F1.

The p620-6F0 and p620-6F1 are identical except that Model 6F0 is a 1-, 2- and 4-way SMP, and Model 6F1 also provides a 6-way option. The reason IBM offers two such similar deskside models is that some users need the maximum in expandability in a deskside package (Model 6F1) while others want to take advantage of “workgroup” database pricing (Model 6F0). Workgroup pricing is available in the United States and other countries from database vendors like Oracle and IBM on systems with a maximum of 4-way SMP capability. If a system can be expanded above 4-way (even if the customer is not using that capability), then higher enterprise database pricing methods apply. The following description covers both models. The base configurations of both p620-6F1 and p620-6F0 include the following:

26

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

•

1-way 600 MHz RS64 IV processor with 2 MB of L2 cache

•

512 MB of Chipkill memory with ECC

•

18.2 GB SCSI-2 disk drive

•

CD-ROM drive

•

1.44 MB 3.5-inch diskette drive

•

Built-in service processor

•

Integrated I/O ports (do not require use of PCI slots): –

10/100 Mbps Ethernet

–

SCSI-2 (internal) and Ultra2-SCSI (external) ports

–

One parallel

–

Four serial

–

Keyboard

–

Mouse

System expansion options include the following processor cards: •

2- and 4-way 600 MHz RS64 IV with 4 MB of L2 cache per processor

•

1-, 2- and 4-way 750 MHz RS64 IV with 8 MB of L2 cache per processor

•

(Model 6F1 only) 6-way 750 MHz RS64 IV with 8 MB of L2 cache per processor

Memory can be expanded to 32 MB (only to 8 MB in 1-way systems), and storage can be expanded to an impressive 1.0 TB, using both the 12 front-accessible, hot-swappable disk drive bays and the 2 non-

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

27

hot-swappable boot disk bays. Either SCSI or SSA (Serial System Architecture) backplanes are available for the 12 hot-swappable bays. To meet requirements for communications, storage, or other I/O adapters, the p620 models provide 10 hot-plug PCI slots. IBM offers several standard, easy-to-order configurations called p620 Express Configurations. Both the pSeries 620 Model 6F1 and the Model 6F0 offer sufficient scalability in processing power, memory, storage capacity, and I/O attachment capability to handle Web hosting and database applications, such as Supply Chain Management, Enterprise Resource Planning, and Customer Relationship Management. The system architecture of Models 6F1 and 6F0 is shown in Figures 1.8a and 1.8b. In the p620, processor(s) with L1 and L2 caches, memory, and the memory controller are packaged in a unit called a processor book. This “book” is the physical unit that is exchanged to upgrade from one processor type to another or to replace a failing processor. The system board for the 1-way processor options (Figure 1.8b) is a simpler, cost-reduced design that includes some memory DIMM slots on the system board and allows for a maximum memory capacity of only 8 GB. The system board for the 2-, 4-, and 6-way (Model 6F1 only) options is more complex and allows for the full 32 GB maximum memory capacity on one or two memory riser cards. As shown in Figure 1.8a, the 6-way configuration of p620-6F1 consists of two cards, a 4-way and a 2-way card. However, this detail does not really matter to the user because the book is the unit actually installed in the system. The p620 derives its performance not only from fast processors, but also from wide, high-speed buses from processor to memory and to the remote I/O (RIO) subsystem. The interface from processors to the memory controller is the 16-byte-wide PowerPC 6XX bus. The interfaces from memory controller to memory DIMMs (labeled SMI bus) are each 8 bytes wide, but memory DIMMs are installed in pairs, so the bandwidth of the total path from processor to memory controller to memory is well matched. For 2-, 4-, and 6-way systems using the RS64 IV processors, the theoretical maximum processor port bandwidth is greater than 2.1 GBps. Each remote I/O port can operate at 1 GBps (500 MBps bidirectional). However, since the second RIO port is used internally as a failover path in the event of failures, the theoretical maximum system I/O bandwidth is also 1 GBps (500 MBps bidirectional). Three PCI bridges drive the 10 PCI slots and integrated Ethernet and SCSI controllers, while an ISA bridge is used for other devices (service processor, diskette, serial and parallel ports, keyboard, mouse).

28

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

PCI

64-Bit

PCI

64-Bit

PCI

64-Bit SCSI 64-Bit

Bus 7,8 Bus 5,6 Bus 3,4

PCI Bridge

64-Bit 64-Bit PCI 1 PCI 2

Bus 7,8

PCI Bridge

Bus 1,2

Bus 5,6 Bus 3,4 Bus 1,2 Bus 7,8

Connectors UPS CPM

CSP

Native I/O Connectors

ISA Bridge Super I/O DUART

Memory Card 1 SMI

SMI

SMI

DRAM

Flash

Controller

SMI

Bus 2

PCI

64-Bit

PCI

64-Bit

5V

PCI

64-Bit

5V

PCI

64-Bit

5V

PCI

64-Bit

5V

PCI

64-Bit

PCI

32-Bit Not Connected 32-Bit

Ethernet

I/O Controller RIO Port 1

SMI Bus 0,1,2,3

4 MB Cache Memory Controller

SMI

Bus 3,4

Bus 1

RIO Port 0 SMI

SMI

PCI Bridge

403

Memory Card 2 SMI

Bus 5,6

64-Bit

6XX Bus 0

2 Way Proc.

6XX Bus 1

SMI Bus 4,5,6,7

Proc.

4 MB Cache 2-Way Mother Board

4 MB Cache

4 MB Cache

4 MB Cache

Proc.

Proc.

2 Way

2 Way

Proc.

Proc.

Proc.

4 MB Cache

4 MB Cache

4 MB Cache

4-Way Processor Card

OR

Proc. 2 Way

2-Way Processor Card

Figure 1.8a. pSeries 620 Model 6F1 2-, 4-, and 6-way system design (also applies to p620-6F0 2- and 4-way).

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

RIO Port 0

29

RIO Port 1

2 MB Cache

SMI

SMI

SMI Bus 6,7

Memory Controller

6XX Bus 0

Proc. 1 Way

1-Way Mother Board SMI Bus 0,1,2,3

Memory Card 1

SMI

Figure 1.8b.

SMI

SMI

SMI

pSeries 620 Models 6F0 and 6F1 1-way system design.

This design for high performance would really be wasted if equal attention had not been paid to the reliability, availability, and serviceability features of these powerful models. Even though users for the p620-6F1 and p620-6F0 may be moderate-sized businesses, their applications are just as mission-critical as those of very large companies. The pSeries 620 offers a wide range of capabilities that help ensure almost uninterrupted operations.

30

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

It has already been mentioned that there are 12 hot-swappable disk bays and 10 hot-plug PCI slots to allow failing parts to be replaced while the system continues to run (with the exception, of course, that applications using a failing disk or PCI adapter would have to be stopped and restarted when replacement of the failing part has been made). The p620 also provides hot-plug power supplies and cooling fans, with an optional third power supply available for redundancy. When the third power supply is ordered, two additional fans are installed as well so that the cooling becomes redundant and concurrently maintainable. The p620 runs on standard 115-volt or 220-volt AC power. A significant RAS function included in the p620 is Dynamic Processor Deallocation, which monitors recovered processor errors and predicts when a processor is getting close to a failure. If the threshold is reached for one of the processors, the processor is dynamically deconfigured from the system and the system continues to run with one fewer processor. A notification is sent that this has taken place, and service can be performed at a convenient time. The obvious value here is that no failure actually occurred before the likely bad processor was taken out of service. A feature available in the pSeries 620 is Chipkill memory, originally developed for the S/390® mainframe systems. Chipkill technology detects multibit errors and corrects most of them transparently to the user. By comparison, ECC memory—although an important feature and one used in all pSeries systems—can correct only single-bit errors. With Chipkill memory, if a critical failure threshold is exceeded, the affected memory is taken off-line and a service action is initiated to be completed when the user desires. According to IBM studies, systems without Chipkill technology are as much as 100 times more likely to have an outage due to memory failure. In summary, the pSeries 620 Model 6F1 and 6F0 servers have the performance, expandability, and high availability required for the mission-critical applications of medium-sized enterprises.

pSeries 630 Specifics The popular pSeries 630 was the first entry pSeries server to offer the POWER4 architecture. This 1-, 2- and 4-way SMP server is available as a compact 4U rack drawer Model 6C4 and a deskside Model 6E4 (Figure 1.9). Although introduced with POWER4 processors at 1.0 GHz, it

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

Figure 1.9.

31

pSeries 630 Model 6C4 (rack drawer) and Model 6E4 (deskside).

now offers 1.2 GHz and 1.45 GHz POWER4+ processors, logical partitioning, and up to 32 GB of memory capacity—all of which add up to excellent 4-way performance and growth capacity. The p630 is positioned as the leading pSeries entry server. It addresses applications for which the 1- and 2-way capability of the p615 is not sufficient, and it is the POWER4+ replacement for the older 1- to 4-way POWER3-II and RS64 IV servers—p620-6F0, p640, and RS/6000 Model 270. The base configurations of both p630-6C4 and p630-6E4 include the following: •

1-way 1.2 GHz POWER4+ processor with 8 MB of L3 cache

•

1 GB of Chipkill memory with ECC

•

18.2 GB Ultra3-SCSI disk drive

•

CD-ROM drive

•

Built-in service processor

32

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

•

Integrated I/O ports (do not require use of PCI slots): –

Two 10/100 Mbps Ethernet

–

Two Ultra3-SCSI ports (internal and external)

–

Two HMC

–

Two RIO-2 (Model 6C4 only)

–

One parallel

–

Three serial

–

Keyboard

–

Mouse

Both p630 models are expandable to four 1.2 GHz or 1.45 GHz processors, 32 GB of memory, four hot-swappable disk drive bays, two media bays, and six hot-plug PCI-X slots. In addition, the rack-mount p630-6C4 offers DC power, NEBS Level 3 compliance for harsh environments, and further expansion with up to two IBM 7311-D20 I/O Drawers attached with RIO-2 adapters running at a 1 GHz clock rate. Each 7311-D20 drawer provides 12 hot-swappable disk drive bays and seven hot-plug PCI-X I/O adapter slots. So, a fully configured p630-6C4 with two I/O drawers can handle 20 I/O adapters and over 4 TB of disk storage. As shown in the p630 system diagram (Figure 1.10), there are two processor cards, each of which may have one or two processors packaged on a single chip. The processor cards communicate with each other and with memory over a Fabric Bus that provides a bandwidth of 11.6 GBps. The GX bus provides an almost 4 GBps interface to the I/O subsystem (PCI-X slots, internal controllers, service processor, and RIO-2 ports for attaching a 7311-D20 I/O drawer). An important feature of the p630, particularly for the entry UNIX server market, is LPAR support. LPAR is a flexible and powerful configuration option for system administrators who need to configure multiple “virtual servers” to meet their computing requirements, as opposed to simply running applications on a 4-way SMP server. Each LPAR re-

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

Fabric Bus

L3 Cache 8 MB

GX Controller

Fabric Bus

4 x 1 byte

4 x 1 byte

PCI-X to PCI-X Bridge

PCI-X to PCI-X Bridge PCI-X slot

PCI-X slot

PCI-X 64-bit

PCI-X 64-bit

SE SCSI for Media

GX Controller GX Bus 2 x 4 byte

PCI-X Host Bridge

10/100 Ethernet

Shared L2 Cache 1.5 MB

Fabric Bus 2 x 8 byte

System Board

PCI-X slot

L1 cache L1 cache I I D D 1.45 GHz 1.45 GHz CPU CPU L3 Dir

1.5 MB

Processor Card 2

Shared L2 Cache

L3 Dir

L3 Cache 8 MB

Processor

Memory DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM SMI SMI Memory Controller

PCI 64-bit

PCI-X slot

Figure 1.10.

PCI-X 64-bit

Dual ULTRA3 SCSI

I/O Drawer

Connection External Ultra3 SCSI

SES Internal Ultra3 SCSI Disk Backplane

ISA Bridge

PCI-X to PCI-X Bridge PCI-X PCI-X slot slot

RIO Bus

Remote I/O Bridge

SCSI

Processor L1 cache L1 cache I I D D 1.45 GHz 1.45 GHz CPU CPU

Processor Card 1

Memory DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM SMI SMI Memory Controller

33

10/100 Ethernet Operator S1F Panel

Service Processor

Disk bays IDE CD-ROM Media bays

Diskette

S1R S2 S3 HSC1 HSC2

PAR

KBD Mouse

pSeries 630 Models 6C4 and 6E4 system design.

quires at least one processor, 256 MB of memory (expandable in 256 MB increments), access to one disk drive for boot support, and Ethernet access to a Hardware Management Console (HMC). Given these requirements and the design of the p630 electronics complex, it is possible to define up to three partitions on a deskside p630-6E4 and up to four LPARs on a p630-6C4 with a 7311-D20 I/O drawer attached. All four internal disks must be assigned to the same LPAR, so each LPAR beyond the first requires attachment to an external disk, whether in a 7311-D20 drawer or in a separate storage subsystem. LPAR operation is controlled from an IBM 7315-C02 HMC, which may be shared with other pSeries servers running LPAR. LPAR is described in greater detail in “A Closer Look” later in this chapter.

34

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

In addition to the expandability of the p630 server itself and the ability to configure it into logical partitions, each running an independent copy of the operating system, the rack-mount p630-6C4 is supported, along with other pSeries servers, in massively parallel Cluster 1600 systems. Up to 32 Model 6C4 SMP servers can be clustered. Or, p630 LPARs can be managed in a Cluster 1600 system, which can support a total of 128 operating system images, whether servers or LPARs. The power and configuration flexibility of the p630 are supported by the same broad range of RAS capabilities as found in high-end pSeries servers. Functions such as First Failure Data Capture, predictive failure analysis, ECC protection on memory and caches, Chipkill memory correction, Dynamic Processor Deallocation, PCI slot deallocation, and hotplug components—to name only a few—provide very high availability and make the p630 easy to service when necessary. The p630 is supported by AIX 5L v5.1 and v5.2 and by SuSE SLES 8. IBM offers p630 Express Configurations for both AIX 5L and Linux ready Express Configurations. These are fixed configurations that must include all the specified components without substitutions, but to which other features may be added—such as additional memory, disk drives, or I/O adapters. The Linux ready Express Configurations do not include an AIX 5L license or IBM Software Maintenance for AIX; customers must purchase Linux and the associated support from a Linux distributor. To sum up, the p630 is an extremely versatile system. Standing alone, it provides the high performance, flexible configuration and physical packaging choices, and extensive growth of I/O and storage required by small and mid-size businesses. When used in clusters, the p630-6C4 or LPARs of the p630-6C4 can function as a powerful, compact processing node for applications designed to take advantage of parallel computation.

pSeries 640 Specifics The pSeries 640 (Figure 1.11) is a compact (5U) rack-mountable server designed to meet the requirements of customers who operate server farms of many small servers mounted in 19-inch-wide computer equipment racks, including those users whose operations include rugged environmental conditions (e.g., temperature extremes, high humidity, possible vibrations). Target markets are e-commerce, Internet Service Providers,

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

Figure 1.11.

35

pSeries 640 Model B80.

Application Service Providers, telecommunications providers, and scientific computing users. The electronics architecture of the p640 is the same as that of the RS/6000 Model 270, in that it is a 1- to 4-way SMP server using POWER3-II processors running at either 375 MHz or 450 MHz. The processor options are the following: •

1- or 2-way 375 MHz POWER3-II with 4 MB of L2 cache per processor

•

2-way 375 MHz POWER3-II with 8 MB of L2 cache per processor

•

2-way 450 MHz POWER3-II with 8 MB of L2 cache per processor

Using the 375 MHz processor options with 4 MB of L2 cache, one can configure a pSeries 640 as a 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-way system. Using either of the options with 8 MB of L2 cache, only 2- or 4-way configurations are possible. Processor upgrades to add a second processor card or to move from a less powerful to a higher performance processor(s) are available. Upgrades require simply removing the old card(s) and plugging in the new one(s).

36

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

The electronics of the p640 are essentially identical to that of the Model 270, but there are significant differences in other features of the design that optimize it for the intended market segment. The base configuration of the p640 includes the following: •

1-way 375 MHz POWER3-II processor with 4 MB of L2 cache

•

256 MB of SDRAM with ECC

•

18.2 GB Ultra2-SCSI disk drive

•

Built-in service processor

•

Integrated I/O ports (do not require use of PCI slots) –

10/100 Mbps Ethernet (with two ports)

–

Ultra2-SCSI (internal) and Ultra2-SCSI (external) ports

–

One parallel

–

Three serial

–

Keyboard

–

Mouse

Although there is no diskette or CD-ROM drive in the base configuration, there is one media bay that can accept an optional CD-ROM, DVD-RAM, or tape drive. In the server farm environments for which the p640 is designed, system management, including software installation, is usually done over a LAN. For the convenience of systems administrators, one of the three serial ports is accessible from the front, so that a hand-held device like the IBM Workpad® or a Palm device can be quickly and easily connected to any p640 in the server farm. With software available at no charge from IBM, the p640 (or other pSeries servers, for that matter) can be monitored and controlled remotely using a hand-held wireless device, such as those just named. All the system status indicators are located on both front and rear, including a program-

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

37

mable alarm beacon light to help systems administrators locate a failing system in a server farm environment. The p640 has four front-accessible hot-swappable disk drive bays, for a maximum storage capacity of 293.6 GB. Other features for high availability are redundant hot-plug power supplies and cooling fans. The pSeries 640 meets the stringent environmental conditions of NEBS Level 3 standards, which means that it can operate at temperatures higher than those found in computer room or office environments and can withstand severe vibrations and air quality conditions. In addition to operating on either 110 or 220 volts AC, the p640 offers optional 48-volt DC power, a feature required by many telecommunications providers. Like the Model 270, pSeries 640 systems with two or more processors offer Dynamic Processor Deallocation, the IBM feature involving both the hardware design and the AIX 5L operating system and resulting in higher system availability, even if one processor should fail. The p640 runs AIX 5L Version 5.1 or later and AIX Version 4.3.3. Many users in the markets for which the p640 is designed are moving to the Linux operating system. Although IBM itself does not distribute or support Linux, IBM is working closely with the Open Source community to enable third parties to distribute Linux for IBM servers. At this time, Linux distributions for the p640 are available from Red Hat and SuSE.

RS/6000 Model 150 Specifics The Model 150 is positioned as a 32-bit entry-level server. It employs the PowerPC 604e microprocessor driven at either 250 MHz or 375 MHz, both with 1 MB of L2 cache, allowing users to choose either the absolutely lowest cost IBM UNIX computer or a still attractively priced but somewhat more powerful entry system. With five PCI slots, memory capacity of 1 GB, and up to 54.6 GB of disk storage, the Model 150 has sufficient expansion room for many small business applications. A minimal configuration for the Model 150 includes an 18.2 GB Ultra-SCSI hard drive, a CD-ROM drive, a diskette drive, and 128 MB of ECC SDRAM memory. Built into the system is a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet controller and an Ultra-SCSI controller. Also standard are two serial ports and a parallel port, as well as ports for a keyboard, mouse,

38

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

and tablet. So the 150 offers plenty of connectivity choices without requiring use of a PCI slot or the cost of purchasing additional adapters. The Model 150 can run either AIX v4.3.3 or AIX 5L.

RS/6000 Model 170 Specifics The RS/6000 Model 170 is a powerful 64-bit uniprocessor system, offering a great range of price and performance for both server and workstation applications. This system is slightly larger than the Model 150, providing one more PCI slot and one more disk drive bay, as well as offering a second integrated Ultra2-SCSI port for attachment of external devices. More important, its range of performance options is quite broad, with POWER3-II copper-based microprocessors running at 333 MHz (with 1 MB of L2 cache), 400 MHz (4 MB of L2 cache), or 450 MHz (8 MB of L2 cache). An upgrade to a more powerful processor is a simple matter of changing the processor card. These processors are among the most powerful offered anywhere. Floatingpoint performance in particular is more than four times greater on the 450 MHz version of this system, compared to the 250 MHz processor on Model 150 (see Figure 1.1b). Beyond just the much faster processor, the 170 employs a faster memory bus matched to the speed of the processor. The bus speeds are 95 MHz and 100 MHz for the 333 MHz and 400 MHz versions respectively. A minimal configuration of this model will have a 333 MHz processor with 256 MB of RAM, an 18.2 GB Ultra-SCSI disk drive, a CD-ROM drive, and a diskette drive. The motherboard has an integrated 10/100 Mbps. Ethernet controller, internal Ultra-SCSI and external Ultra2-SCSI ports, a parallel port, two serial ports, and stereo audio. For input a keyboard, mouse, and tablet port are also provided. For additional I/O and communication capability, the Model 170 has four 32-bit and two 64-bit PCI adapter slots. Three disk bays and one additional media bay (beyond those used by the diskette drive and CD-ROM drive) are available, bringing internal disk capacity to 293.6 GB. Memory is expandable to 2 GB. A service processor to help assure system availability is standard. The Model 170 supports all of the latest graphics adapters, from the entry GXT135P for entry 2D work to advanced 3D graphics accelerators such as the GXT4500P and GXT6500P.

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

39

RS/6000 Model 270 Specifics The RS/6000 Model 270 is a 1- to 4-way SMP system with four 64-bit POWER3-II processor options that allow users to configure it with great flexibility for use either as a deskside server or as a workstation, depending on the application requirements. The Model 270 uses the same basic electronics design as that found in the pSeries 640. It has two processor card slots into which one or two of the following processor cards may be installed. •

1- or 2-way 375 MHz POWER3-II with 4 MB of L2 cache per processor

•

2-way 375 MHz POWER3-II with 8 MB of L2 cache per processor

•

2-way 450 MHz POWER3-II with 8 MB of L2 cache per processor

Using the 375 MHz processor options with 4 MB of L2 cache, one can configure a Model 270 as a 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-way system. Using either of the options with 8 MB of L2 cache, only 2- or 4-way configurations are possible. As in all pSeries and RS/6000 systems, when multiple processor options are available, all processor cards in a system must be of the same type. Processor upgrades to add a second processor card or to move from a less powerful to a higher performance processor(s) are available. The upgrades require simply removing the old card(s) and plugging in the new one(s). They are priced based on return of the old cards to IBM. The Model 270 is a deskside system packed with the features sought for a powerful workstation or an entry-level to midrange server. It is a full 64-bit platform, capable of running either 64-bit or 32-bit AIX applications. Of particular note for technical computing and workstation applications is the high floating-point performance of the POWER3-II processors. An entry-level Model 270 configuration includes the following: •

1-way 375 MHz POWER3-II processor with 4 MB of L2 cache

•

256 MB of SDRAM with ECC

•

18.2 GB Ultra2-SCSI disk drive

40

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

•

CD-ROM drive

•

1.44 MB 3.5-inch diskette drive

•

Built-in service processor

•

Integrated I/O ports (do not require use of PCI slots) –

10/100 Mbps Ethernet

–

Ultra-SCSI (internal) and Ultra2-SCSI (external)

–

One parallel

–

Two serial

–

Keyboard

–

Mouse

–

Stereo audio (often required for workstation applications)

Two disk bays are included in the enclosure, as are three media bays, initially populated with a CD-ROM drive and a 1.44 MB 3.5-inch diskette drive. Internal disk capacity is 220.2 GB, using three 73.4 GB drives (one media bay can accept a disk drive). The Model 270 provides five PCI slots, two 64-bit slots, and three 32-bit slots. Minimal memory of 256 MB is expandable to 16 GB. The Model 270 has slots for two memory cards, each of which can contain up to 16 DIMMs. The DIMMs must be installed in pairs, and the memory features available from IBM come in pairs. So, for example, using 16 of the feature with two 512 MB DIMMs, one would have 32 DIMMs and could populate a Model 270 to its maximum memory capacity of 16 GB. The Model 270 contains several advanced reliability and fault-tolerance features in addition to ECC memory. A service processor is standard, providing a means to diagnose, check status, and sense operational conditions of a remote system, even when the main processor is inoperable. The system runs a BIST (Built-In Self-Test) and a POST (PowerOn Self-Test), which check the processor(s), memory, L2 cache, and

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

41

other hardware. Non-critical errors and errors on resources that can be logically removed are logged while still allowing the system to boot. Temperature is monitored, and the fan speed is increased if needed to maintain proper cooling. DC voltages are also monitored to provide warning and orderly system shutdown if they vary outside of operational specifications. The Model 270 is designed to allow on-line diagnostics, or the ability to investigate malfunctions without interrupting end-user operation. It also has an auto-restart option that, if enabled, will allow the system to automatically reboot following an unrecoverable software error, a software hang, or a hardware failure. Since it is an up to 4-way SMP system, the Model 270 also offers Dynamic Processor Deallocation, an IBM innovation involving both the hardware design and the AIX 5L operating system. With Dynamic Processor Deallocation, the processors are constantly monitored for errors. If the error rate reaches a threshold that indicates a likely failure, workload for the potentially failing processor is automatically reassigned to the remaining processors and the bad processor is taken off-line. Even though system performance will be slightly lower with one less processor, this feature helps avoid a possible system outage and allows the failing processor to be serviced at a planned future time. This capability is active only in systems with two or more processors. In addition to its performance and scalability as a server, the RS/6000 Model 270 provides the I/O support (3D graphics and stereo audio) required in a workstation for applications that need high-performance 3D graphics presentation. Since the graPHIGS API in AIX 5L has been specifically designed to exploit SMP capabilities, applications like CATIA will experience very good scaling with the multiple processors available in the Model 270. But since some graphics benchmarks do not take advantage of an SMP system design, users may find that the uniprocessor Model 170 (which offers the same powerful 450 MHz POWER3-II processor with 8 MB of L2 cache) may be the most cost-effective RS/6000 workstation choice for their applications. The GXT135P, GXT4500P, and high-end GXT6500P graphics accelerators are all available for the Model 270. With its performance, SMP configuration, and advanced graphics, the RS/6000 Model 270 is well positioned both as an entry-level deskside server for commercial or technical applications and as a high-end MCAD workstation.

42

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

RS/6000 Model B50 Specifics The last server in the entry category is the RS/6000 Model B50, a compact rack-mounted server that satisfies requirements for front-end Internet applications for high-density, small-footprint, and low-cost implementations of applications for e-business opportunities. It is targeted principally for applications such as Web hosting, firewalls, directory services, e-commerce, caching, and messaging. Internet Service Providers and Application Service Providers are likely to be interested in this model, which is based on the same technology as the RS/6000 Model 150, but in a rack drawer. Like the Model 150, the B50 is a 32-bit system using the 375 MHz PowerPC 604e microprocessor with 1 MB of L2 cache. The system configuration includes a minimum of 128 MB of memory expandable to 1 GB, a diskette drive, a CD-ROM drive, an integrated Ultra-SCSI controller and 10/100 Ethernet. Two disk bays and two 32-bit PCI slots are available as well as an external Ultra-SCSI port, two serial ports, a parallel port, and keyboard and mouse ports. The Model B50 system supports AIX 4.3.3 or AIX 5L. The Model B50 drawer is only 2U, or 3.5 inches, in height. Up to twenty B50 servers can be installed in a 19-inch IBM Model T42 rack. This space-saving design delivers more servers per square foot than ever before. The pricing is extremely aggressive, with a list price of less than $3,600 per fully featured unit.

Midrange pSeries Servers IBM offers six midrange servers—pSeries 650, pSeries 655, pSeries 660 Models 6H0 and 6H1, pSeries 660 Model 6M1, and pSeries 670.

pSeries 650 Specifics The pSeries 650, shown in Figure 1.12 with an IBM 7311-D10 I/O Expansion Drawer, is a very high-performance 2- to 8-way SMP server in a compact rack-drawer package. The p650 was the first pSeries server to offer POWER4+ processors, running at 1.2 GHz or 1.45 GHz. Its design is ideal for such applications as enterprise resource planning,

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

Figure 1.12.

43

pSeries 650 with IBM 7311-D10 I/O drawer.

supply chain management, customer relationship management and business intelligence. For medium-sized businesses, the p650 can handle both the application software and the underlying database. In larger system environments, the p650 may be used as a second-tier application server in a three-tier solution—workstations (tier one) attached via LAN or Internet, application server (tier two), and high-end database server such as the pSeries 690 (tier three). A base p650 configuration includes the following: •

2-way 1.2 GHz POWER4+ processor with 8 MB of L3 cache

•

2 GB of Chipkill memory with ECC

•

36.4 GB Ultra3-SCSI disk drive

•

DVD-ROM or CD-ROM drive

•

Built-in service processor

•

Integrated I/O ports (do not require use of PCI slots): –

10/100 Mbps Ethernet

44

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

–

Two Ultra3-SCSI

–

Two RIO-2

–

Two HMC

–

One parallel

–

Four serial

–

Keyboard

–

Mouse

For more processing power, the p650 offers 1.45 GHz processor cards with 32 MB of L3 cache. The compact 8U rack drawer package provides expandability up to four 2-way processor cards, as much as 64 GB of memory, four hot-swappable disk bays that can accommodate drives as large as 146.8 GB, two media bays, and seven hot-plug PCI-X adapter slots. As shown in Figure 1.13, the p650 can be configured with one to four 2-way POWER4+ processor cards. All processors must be of the same speed, either 1.2 GHz or 1.45 GHz. Packaged on each processor card is L3 cache, which stages data and instructions between the processor chips and main memory. On 1.45 GHz processors, the L3 cache is 32 MB (as depicted), while on 1.2 GHz processors it is 8 MB. Memory DIMMs are distributed in a balanced fashion across the processor “books” (IBM’s name for the physical unit containing processor cards and memory DIMMs). These books protect the components from damage in handling and help manage air flow for cooling. Each processor book has eight DIMM slots, and memory must be installed in quads (four DIMMs). Since the largest available memory DIMM is 2 GB (4 × 1024 MB), the maximum memory capacity of a 2-way system is 16 GB, of a 4-way system is 32 GB, and so on up to 64 GB for an 8-way p650. The interface to the I/O subsystem is through the RIO-2 hubs. For the first processor card, the RIO-2 hub connects both to the internal I/O subsystem (PCI-X slots, integrated controllers, service processor) and up to two RIO-2 ports for an I/O drawer loop. Figure 1.13 shows the two hubs—the first one is required with a minimum p650 configuration and controls the internal I/O devices. The second through fourth

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM

SLOT 1

POWER4+ 2-WAY

32 MB L3*

RIO PORTS

RIO HUB

32 MB L3*

SLOT 2

*32 MB L3 for 1.45 GHz CPU card

POWER4+ 2-WAY

Service Proc.

Fabric Bus

SCSI Ultra3

Rack Indicator

PCI to ISA Bridge

PCI-X to PCI-X Bridge

ETH

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10/100 PCI-X SLOTS

Figure 1.13.

SLOT 4

GX SLOT 2

RIO to PCI-X Bridge PCI-X to PCI-X Bridge

32 MB L3*

SLOT 3

POWER4+ 2-WAY GX Bus

DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM

Memory Controller

Disk Disk Disk Disk

RIO HUB

DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM

Memory Controller

POWER4+ 2-WAY

GX SLOT 1 RIO PORTS

DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM

Memory Controller

Memory Controller 32 MB L3*

DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM

45

Media Media

97317 Super I/O Kbd Mse 2Ser

2 HSC Duart

Op Panel

2Ser

Diskette

pSeries 650 system design.

RIO-2 hubs interface only to I/O drawers. The p650 supports both the IBM 7311-D10 and 7311-D20 I/O Drawers in up to four RIO-I/O loops. RIO-2 loops operate at a 1 GHz clock rate and, since they are bidirectional, can support a peak bandwidth of 2 GBps. If two or more I/O drawers are connected in series in a RIO-2 loop, the system will transmit data from each RIO-2 port to the nearest I/O drawer—increasing the peak bandwidth to 4 GBps per loop. Both the 7311-D10 and 7311-D20 I/O drawers are 4U 19-inch rackmount units. However, the 7311-D10 provides six I/O slots and no disk bays in a half-drawer package, so two 7311-D10 drawers will fit sideby-side in a rack. On the other hand, the 7311-D20 is a full-width drawer with 7 I/O slots and 12 optional disk drive bays. If additional storage is needed, the 7311-D20 is the best choice. If only I/O adapter slots are needed, then the 7311-D10 is the appropriate answer. The bottom line is that a fully configured p650 provides a peak I/O bandwidth of 16 GBps and can accommodate up to 63 I/O adapters and 14.6 TB of storage—a lot of capacity.

46

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

The pSeries 650 supports up to eight logical partitions, each running an independent copy of the operating system. And both the p650 server running as an SMP server and LPARs of the p650 are supported in Cluster 1600 systems. For LPAR and for clustering, attachment to an HMC is required. LPAR is described in greater detail in “A Closer Look” later in this chapter, and a description of Cluster 1600 systems is given following this section. The p650 incorporates the full range of autonomic computing or RAS functions found on the high-end pSeries 690. These include standard hot-plug power supplies and cooling fans, hot-swappable disk drives, and hot-plug PCI-X slots. There are many self-healing capabilities, such as Chipkill and ECC on main memory, ECC on L2 and L3 caches, PCI-X bus parity error recovery, First Failure Data Capture, Dynamic Processor Deallocation, deallocation of PCI buses and slots, and concurrent run-time diagnostics. The built-in service processor is used for power on/off control, monitoring system and AIX 5L status, and if enabled, can be used to automatically dial out to notify service personnel of a problem needing attention. For users who need to be able to activate additional processors and memory very quickly in order to meet unexpected workload or regular spikes in workload (such as seasonal sales, quarter end or annual financial reports, and the like), the p650 offers a full range of the pSeries “on demand” features—Capacity Upgrade on Demand (CUoD) for processors, CUoD for memory, On/Off Capacity on Demand (CoD) and Trial CoD. These functions are explained in the p690 description later in this chapter. The specific on demand features offered on the p650 are the following: •

2-way 1.45 GHz POWER4+ processor card with no processors active

•

Permanent activation of two CUoD processors

•

On/Off activation and deactivation of two CUoD processors

•

8 GB of memory with 0 GB active

•

16 GB of memory with 0 GB active

•

Permanent activation of 4 GB of memory

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

•

47

Trial CoD

The p650 is supported by AIX 5L v5.1 and v5.2 and by SuSE Linux Enterprise 8 for iSeries and pSeries. As in the case of the pSeries 630, IBM offers p650 Express Configurations for both AIX 5L and Linux ready Express Configurations. These fixed configurations must include all the specified components without substitutions, but they may be supplemented with other features, such as additional memory, disk drives, or I/O adapters. The p650 Linux ready Express Configurations do not include an AIX 5L license or IBM Software Maintenance for AIX; customers must purchase Linux and the associated support from a Linux distributor. With up to 8-way 1.45 GHz POWER4+ processors, 64 GB of memory, the ability to attach eight I/O expansion drawers, LPAR, on demand capabilities, and the ability to run both UNIX and Linux operating systems, the pSeries 650 is an extremely powerful and flexible midrange UNIX server.

pSeries 655 Specifics The pSeries 655 is unique among pSeries servers because it is packaged in an ultra-dense 4U half-drawer unit for a 24-inch “frame,” similar to the 24-inch racks used for the p690 and p670 systems (Figure 1.14). A half-drawer means that two servers fit side-by-side in an IBM 7040W42 frame. For readers familiar with the IBM RS/6000 SP system (no longer available), the p655 package is equivalent to a “thin node.” With 4-way 1.7 GHz and 8-way 1.5 GHz POWER4+ and 4-way 1.3 GHz and 8-way 1.1 GHz POWER4 processors packaged in a multichip module with 128 MB of L3 cache, the p655 is designed for high-performance computing applications. Each p655 server can have up to 32 GB of memory, with 64 GB available for selected configurations by special request. With 8-way MCMs, a single 42U-high frame can accommodate 16 p655s (128 processors), each with 128 MB of L3 cache and 32 GB of memory—clearly a high-performance system design. The p655 I/O design is also optimized for use in parallel Cluster 1600 systems. In order to achieve maximum “footprint” density of processing power, the internal storage and I/O adapter slot capacity is limited, compared to other pSeries systems. There are two hot-swappable disk drive bays, no media bays, and three hot-plug PCI-X slots. Rather than

48

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Figure 1.14.

pSeries 655.

having individual power supplies for each p655 server, there is an 8U bulk power supply subsystem, with optional battery backup for higher availability. But up to five 7040-61D I/O Drawers can be mounted in the frame along with p655 servers. Each 4U I/O drawer provides 16 hot-swappable disk bays and 20 PCI-X slots, so there is ample storage and I/O adapter capacity at the system level. Alternatively, the p655 servers can be attached to separate storage subsystems such as the IBM 7133-D40 Serial Disk System or the IBM 2104-DU3 Expandable Storage Plus mounted in adjoining 19-inch racks. A minimum p655 server consists of the following: •

4-way 1.1 GHz POWER4 MCM with 128 MB L3 cache

•

4 GB of memory

•

Two 18.2 GB Ultra3-SCSI disk drives

•

Integrated ports

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

•

Two Ultra3-SCSI

•

Two 10/100 Ethernet

•

Two HMC

49

The p655 uses a single MCM with four POWER4 or POWER4+ chips (see Figure 1.20). The 4-way HPC MCMs (either 1.3 GHz POWER4 or 1.7 GHz POWER4+) use four chips with a single processor core, while the 8-way MCMs (either 1.1 GHz POWER4 or 1.5 GHz POWER4+) use four chips with two processor cores, as depicted in Figure 1.20. Each MCM, whether 4-way or 8-way, has 128 MB of L3 cache. The 4-way MCMs are called HPC because the processor speed is higher and because the L2/L3 caches are shared by half as many processors, thus minimizing the number of times the processor must wait for data or instructions to be accessed from main memory. Like all pSeries servers, the p655 offers a complete range of RAS capabilities, including the following: •

Chipkill ECC memory with bit steering to greatly lower the likelihood of memory failures

•

First Failure Data Capture

•

Dynamic Processor Deallocation

•

Deallocation of PCI-X buses

•

Hot-plug disks and I/O adapters

•

Built-in service processor

•

Battery backup power (optional)

•

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems (optional)

In addition, up to 32 p655 servers can be clustered using IBM High Availability Cluster Multiprocessing (HACMP), a software product that helps provide near continuous availability by monitoring operations and

50

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

initiating “failovers” to transfer operations and/or data access from a system with a failing component to other systems. The p655 can run any of three operating systems—AIX 5L v5.1, AIX 5L v5.2, or Linux (SuSE SLES 8). Up to four LPARs can be defined on the p655, each running a copy of one of these operating systems. (Note: In order for Linux to run in a p655 LPAR, at least one other LPAR must run AIX 5L). If AIX 5L v5.2 is running in the LPAR, then resources can be assigned to that partition dynamically. If running AIX 5L v5.1 or Linux, then only static LPAR is supported. Further detail on LPAR and the terminology used is found later in this chapter. As many as 64 pSeries 655 servers running as a “full system partition” (i.e., as an SMP server without LPAR) are supported in Cluster 1600 systems. p655 LPARs are also supported, up to the Cluster 1600 maximum of 128 operating system images. Connection to the Cluster 1600 can be made with 10/100 Mbps or Gigabit Ethernet, or, for maximum performance, through the SP Switch2 using the SP Switch2 PCI-X adapter.

pSeries 660 Models 6H1, 6H0, and 6M1 Specifics The pSeries 660 Models 6H0 and 6H1 are identical except that the Model 6H0 is a 1-, 2-, and 4-way SMP, and the Model 6H1 also provides a 6-way option. The pSeries 660 Model 6M1 is a 2-, 4-, 6-, and 8way system with more expansion capacity than Models 6H1 and 6H0. All three models consist of a CEC drawer and one or more I/O drawers, and they all run AIX 5L and AIX v4.3.3. The reason IBM offers the similar rack Models 6H0 and 6H1 is the same as that given earlier for the p620-6F0 and p620-6F1. That is, some users need the maximum in performance growth (Model 6H1) while others want to take advantage of workgroup database pricing (Model 6H0). Workgroup pricing is available (in the United States and other countries) from database vendors such as Oracle and IBM on systems with a maximum of 4-way SMP capability. If a system can be expanded above 4-way (even if the customer is not using that capability), then higher enterprise database pricing applies. From a performance standpoint, pSeries 660 Models 6H1 and 6H0 are the equivalents of the deskside Models 6F1 and 6F0, containing the same essential internal components—such as the processors, memory, service processor, and outstanding RAS features. As rack-mountable

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

51

systems, however, their physical architecture is quite different from that of the corresponding p620 models. IBM also offers standard, easy-toorder configurations called p660-6H0 and p660-6H1 Express Configurations, which are analogous to the p620 Express Configurations. The processor options for p660-6H1 and p660-6H0 are the same as in the p620-6F1 and p620-6F0: •

1-way 600 MHz RS64 IV with 2 MB of L2 cache

•

2- and 4-way 600 MHz RS64 IV with 4 MB of L2 cache per processor

•

1-, 2-, and 4-way 750 MHz RS64 IV with 8 MB of L2 cache per processor

•

(Model 6H1 only) 6-way 750 MHz RS64 IV with 8 MB of L2 cache per processor

Therefore, the same electronics architecture and memory bandwidth as those discussed for the pSeries 620 (Figures 1.8a and 1.8b) apply to Models 6H1 and 6H0, which offer the same maximum memory of 32 GB (8 GB maximum on 1-way systems) as do Models 6F1 and 6F0. Memory on all p660 servers uses IBM’s unique Chipkill technology, which corrects many double-bit errors and, in the event of a high error rate, takes the offending section of memory off-line and logs a service action message for the system administrator to schedule when convenient. Beyond the processor and memory architecture, the physical packaging and I/O capability of the p660 servers differ from those of the p620 tower servers. These rack-mountable servers consist of a 5U CEC drawer (Figure 1.15) with processors, memory, and the surrounding system logic, plus one or two I/O drawers, also 5U high. One primary I/O drawer (Figure 1.16) is required, so a base system is 10U (17.5 inches) high. Another way to look at it is that one can package up to three Model 6H1 or 6H0 systems in the 36U-high Model T00 rack for maximum density of systems on available floor space. If a second I/O drawer is needed or other devices, such as storage subsystems, are required, then perhaps only one or two p660-6H1 or p660-6H0 servers will occupy a rack. Models 6H1 and 6H0 require a primary I/O drawer and may optionally use a second I/O drawer for further expansion. The interface

52

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Figure 1.15.

pSeries 660 Model 6H0 or 6H1 processor drawer.

Figure 1.16.

pSeries 660 I/O drawer, used in Models 6H0, 6H1, and 6M1.

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

53

from the processor complex (CEC drawer) to the I/O drawer is composed of the two RIO (remote I/O) ports (see Figures 1.8a and 1.8b), connected in a loop. Each RIO port has an aggregate bandwidth of 1 GBps (500 MBps bidirectional). With one I/O drawer, the overall bandwidth is 1 GBps (just as for the p620 models), but with two I/O drawers, transmissions to each drawer are sent from the CEC by the direct path to each drawer and the overall bandwidth is doubled, to 2 GBps. In the event of a failure in one of the RIO ports, all traffic is routed on the working port. Although the bandwidth falls back to 1 GBps, the system continues to run. The primary I/O drawer features two integrated SCSI controllers (SCSI-2 F/W [fast/wide] internal and Ultra2-SCSI external), an Ethernet 10/100 controller, four serial ports and one parallel port, and keyboard and mouse ports. In addition, the I/O drawer includes 14 hot-plug PCI slots (four 32-bit and ten 64-bit), which allow for addition or removal of adapter cards while the system is running, and three media bays. Two of the media bays are filled by default with a CD-ROM drive and a diskette drive. The third is available and is used most often for a tape drive. As with the CEC, a redundancy option is available for the hotplug power supplies and cooling fans in the I/O drawer. This I/O drawer is also used on the pSeries 660 Model 6M1. Since the I/O drawers do not provide disk drive bays, it is anticipated that disk storage will be in separate disk drawers, such as the IBM 2104 Expandable Storage Plus (up to Ultra3-SCSI capable) or the IBM 7133 Serial Disk System (SSA). See Chapter 2 for more about storage options. The primary I/O drawer of the Models 6H1 and 6H0 can optionally be configured to accept two boot disks for a maximum disk capacity of 72.8 GB. With these boot disks, it is possible to have a mirrored copy of the operating system built into the p660-6H1 or p660-6H0 system with no dependency on an external storage drawer. The optional internal boot disks are attached to the internal SCSI-2 controller of the primary I/O drawer, and implementation of this option makes two of the PCI slots in the primary I/O drawer unavailable. The pSeries 660 Models 6H1 and 6H0 are powered by 220-volt AC power, or alternatively, for the special needs of the telecommunications industry, by 48 volts DC. Also, for telecommunications central office or other environments with harsh operating conditions, these systems are designed for NEBS Level 3 compliance. With their highly reliable and scalable design and performance (roughly twice that of the pSeries 640), the p660-6H1 and p660-6H0

54

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

servers are targeted at the key commercial processing segments of e-business: enterprise resource planning, supply chain management, and business intelligence. They are often used as application servers in a three-tiered system design—database application on one system, application server on the second (the p660 servers, in this example), and end-user workstations as the third layer.

pSeries 660 Model 6M1 Specifics The pSeries 660 Model 6M1 is a very powerful and scalable member of the 64-bit family of SMP enterprise servers. Positioned above the Models 6H1 and 6H0, the p660-6M1 provides the power, capacity, and expandability needed for mission-critical networked applications. The Model 6M1 provides excellent midrange performance for transaction processing (TPC-C), Web serving (SPECweb99), and server-side Java application processing (SPECjbb2000). The p660-6M1 derives its power from two, four, six, or eight RS64 IV microprocessors running at 750 MHz, each with 8 MB of L2 cache. Also available for p660-6M1 entry-level configurations are two and four RS64 III 500 MHz processors with 4 MB of L2 cache each. The unique IBM copper and SOI technology used in the RS64 IV chips produces faster and more reliable processors, improving speed and reducing the heat generated. The processors are packaged onto cards that hold two or four processors. The Model 6M1 can accept two processor cards. Like the Models 6H1 and 6H0, the Model 6M1 is packaged as a rack-mounted CEC drawer that is cable attached to rack-mounted I/O drawers. The CEC and I/O drawers offer redundant power and redundant cooling, both of which are hot-pluggable for concurrent maintenance. The CEC drawer contains the system processors, up to 64 GB of memory, and supporting system logic. The primary I/O drawer, shown previously with the Models 6H1 and 6H0 (Figure 1.16), features the following: •

Fourteen available hot-plug PCI slots (four 32-bit, ten 64-bit)

•

CD-ROM drive and diskette drive

•

One additional media bay

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

55

•

Integrated SCSI-2 F/W internal and Ultra2-SCSI external controllers

•

10/100 Ethernet

•

Four serial ports and one parallel port

•

Keyboard and mouse ports

•

An optional boot disk bay for two disks, which restricts the number of available PCI slots to 12

In addition to the required primary I/O drawer, up to three secondary I/O drawers can be added to provide a total of 56 PCI slots and eight media bays. All drawers are mounted in a standard IBM rack, for example, the 36U Model T00 or the 42U Model T42. Additional space in the rack may be used for various storage and communications subsystems. The reliability and availability features discussed in the sections on the pSeries 620 Models 6F1 and 6F0 and the pSeries 660 Models 6H1 and 6H0 apply to the pSeries 660 Model 6M1 as well, including the Dynamic Processor Deallocation capability and the Chipkill memory technology. Performance and scalability are the major factors that distinguish the Model 6M1 from the other p660 models and p620 servers. Based on relative performance (rPerf), commercial applications can experience as much as 60% better performance on an 8-way Model 6M1 compared to a 6-way Model 6F1 or Model 6H1. “rPerf” is an IBM metric used to compare performance among pSeries systems; it is explained in “Performance Overview” later in this chapter. Much of this performance gain can be attributed to the high-bandwidth design of the Model 6M1, which allows large concurrent flows of data within the system itself. The system schematic in Figure 1.17 shows that there are two independent memory buses (with bandwidth of 4.8 GBps each) and four 6XX buses to each pair of processors (at 2.4 GBps bandwidth each). With the total aggregate memory and processor bandwidth being 19.2 GBps (calculated as 2 × 4.8 GBps plus 4 × 2.4 GBps), there can be an enormous amount of data flowing internally between processors, memory, and I/O. The aggregate I/O bandwidth with four I/O drawers is 4 GBps. With these large data rates, processors have shorter wait times to get the information needed to continue carrying out their computations.

56

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

RIO 0, 1, 2, 3 Memory Card 1

Memory Card 2

I/O Hub Card

6XX

I/O Hub Chip

Memory Bus Memory Bus 6XX Bus 4 Data Controller

Data Controller

6XX Bus 0

Address Controller

6XX Bus 1

Abitrator Controller

Data Controller

Data Controller

6XX Bus 2

6XX Bus 3

8 MB Cache

8 MB Cache

8 MB Cache

8 MB Cache

Proc.

Proc.

Proc.

Proc.

2 Way

2 Way

Proc.

Proc.

8 MB Cache

8 MB Cache

2 Way Proc.

6XX 6XX Bus 0 Bus 1

8 MB Cache

4-Way Processor Card

Figure 1.17.

2 Way 6XX 6XX Bus 0 Bus 1

Proc. 8 MB Cache

4-Way Processor Card

pSeries 660 Model 6M1 system design.

The industry-standard PCI subsystem supports both 32-bit and 64-bit PCI adapters. Greater application throughput is achieved via independent PCI buses for each of the 14 PCI slots in the I/O drawer. The independent buses for each slot also enhance reliability by isolating adapters from other adapters in the drawer. This and the hot-plug nature of these adapters allows for the removal and replacement of failed adapters without any impact on other areas in the drawer.

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

57

For customers who must provide for rapidly increasing workloads, the Model 6M1 offers Capacity Upgrade on Demand. This feature allows the customer to begin with a minimum 4-way 750 MHz system and, for a fee, install a second 4-way processor option with two or all four of the processors initially disabled. When the need for additional processing power arises, an AIX 5L command is used to activate these inactive processors in increments of two. The AIX 5L Workload Manager (a standard feature of the AIX 5L operating system) is used to allocate resources to the newly activated processors. After activation, the customer will be invoiced for full payment of the processors then in use. Although p660-6M1 CUoD offers an on demand solution for activating processors quickly when required, the process just described is less flexible and responsive than the methods used for the latest on demand offerings on p650, p670, and p690 systems. The p660-6M1 CUoD process has been superseded by the process described in “pSeries 690 Specifics” later in this chapter. Like the other pSeries 660 models, the p660-6M1 is NEBS Level 3 compliant, offering special features such as 48-volt DC power for telecommunications central office operations. The Model 6M1 delivers the performance, expandability, and reliability required for e-business, enterprise resource planning, business intelligence, and other database serving applications. For value and convenience of ordering, IBM offers several standard p660-6M1 Express Configurations.

pSeries 670 Specifics The pSeries 670 is a 4-, 8- and 16-way server offering 1.5 GHz POWER4+ and 1.1 GHz POWER processors. The electronics design and packaging of the p670 are identical to those of the high-end p690. As a server targeted for the upper end of midrange businesses, the p670 is more limited than the p690 in terms of processor speeds, memory capacity and scalability, and I/O expandability. In all other respects, it is equivalent. The p670 uses MCM packaging, offering the following processor options: •

4-, 8-, and 16-way 1.1 GHz POWER4

•

4-, 8-, and 16-way 1.5 GHz POWER4+

58

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

The 4-way and 8-way configurations use one MCM, and 16-way systems have two MCMs. Each MCM includes 128 MB of L3 cache. Main memory begins at 4 GB and can be increased to 256 GB. The p670 is packaged in a single 24-inch-wide 42U rack (Figure 1.18) which accommodates the p670 system unit, from one to three IBM 7040-61D I/O Drawers, a media drawer, and a 350-volt bulk power subsystem. In a minimum p670 configuration, the I/O drawer and media drawer include the following: •

Two 18.2 GB Ultra-SCSI disk drives

•

Eight hot-swappable disk bays (two occupied by the base disk drives), expandable to 16 in a single I/O drawer

•

Five media bays

•

One planar with 10 hot-plug PCI-X slots (an optional second planar allows 20 slots in a single I/O drawer)

Figure 1.18.

pSeries 670.

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

•

59

Integrated controllers: –

Two Ultra3-SCSI

–

Two serial

–

Two for attaching Hardware Management Console

The p670 has the full set of RAS features as described for the p690, which provide the almost continuous availability required for mission-critical business applications. Most failures can be predicted and corrective actions taken (as by deallocating processors, PCI buses, or caches) so that operations continue and service actions may be done on a scheduled basis. Even replacement of disk drives, I/O adapters, and power supplies or cooling fans can be done while the p670 continues to run. The p670 also supports dynamic LPAR and the full range of on demand capabilities as described in the p690 description later in this chapter. Capacity Upgrade on Demand for processors, CUoD for memory, On/Off Capacity on Demand and Trial CoD are features that allow processors and memory to be installed in the p670 but remain in a standby mode until needed. These are priced at only a portion of the price of an equivalent fully activated processor or memory feature, with the balance being made up as resources are activated. This gives users a way to respond rapidly to changing workloads without having to invest the total system price up front. These functions are explained more fully in the p690 description later in this chapter. The p670 is supported by AIX 5L v5.1 and v5.2, as well as by Linux (SuSE SLES 8). With LPAR capability, each partition can run its own instance of one of these operating systems. Not all system capabilities are supported by Linux, including dynamic LPAR and CUoD for memory. In summary, the p670 provides a midrange solution with the latest pSeries technology and significant expandability for businesses whose requirements exceed the capacity of an 8-way 650, but who do not currently need or cannot economically justify the enterprise-class p690 server. However, for situations in which a company outgrows the p670 and needs more processing power and more I/O expansion, IBM offers a model conversion from a 16-way p670 to a 16-way or larger p690. A model conversion provides upgrades of the system unit, processor MCMs, and memory, resulting in a p690 system having the same serial number

60

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

as the original p670. “Serial number protection” is important to users who must maintain the same asset for depreciation and tax reasons. Other components—I/O expansion drawers, disk and media drives, I/O adapters, and memory—are carried forward to the new system.

High-end pSeries Servers IBM offers only one UNIX and Linux server classified as high-end—the pSeries 690.

pSeries 690 Specifics With the announcement in October 2001 of the high-end pSeries 690, IBM introduced a new class of pSeries server capable of datacenter operations previously associated with mainframe computers. The p690, flagship of the IBM eServer pSeries family of UNIX servers, offers configurations optimized for commercial applications as well as options designed for large-scale HPC or “scientific and technical computing” environments. The pSeries 690 is supported by AIX 5L v5.1 and v5.2, as well as by Linux (SuSE SLES 8). In May 2003, the p690 was completely refreshed with the fastest POWER4+ processors, high-speed memory, additional on demand features, and I/O subsystem improvements. It continues to offer the greatest performance of any pSeries server. At the time of this edition, the p690 is the fastest transaction processing system on the market (see Figure 1.23). The pSeries 690 introduced several technological advances to the pSeries family, which are now offered across the pSeries family in the focus servers listed at the beginning of this section: •

POWER4 processor architecture (the latest high-speed processors are called POWER4+) –

Available in p615, p630, p650, p655, p670, and p690

–

Multichip module (MCM) packaging used in p655, p670, and p690

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

– •

•

•

61

p615, p630, and p650 use the same processor chips, with packaging optimized for entry and midrange servers

Logical partitioning—allowing users to allocate system resources (processors, memory, I/O) on logical (not physical) boundaries, creating many independent computers, each running its own instance of an operating system –

Dynamic LPAR with AIX 5L v5.2

–

Static LPAR with AIX 5L v5.1 and Linux

–

Available on p630, p650, p655, p670, and p690

On demand capabilities (available on p650, p670, and p690) –

Processor Capacity Upgrade on Demand

–

Memory Capacity Upgrade on Demand

–

On/Off Capacity on Demand

–

Trial Capacity on Demand

Advanced RAS features

pSeries 690 Overview The p690 is an 8- to 32-way SMP server using POWER4+ processors running at either 1.5 GHz or 1.7 GHz and POWER4 processors running at either 1.1 GHz or 1.3 GHz. The 24-inch-wide system rack (Figure 1.19) holds the processor drawer, an integrated power system, and up to four I/O racks. With a second rack, up to eight I/O drawers can be supported. If the system configuration requires additional rack-mounted devices, such as SCSI and SSA storage units or tape drives, they are mounted in standard 19-inch-wide IBM 7014-T00 or 7014-T42 racks. With the expandability in the p690 I/O drawers and the addition of other subsystems as required, the scalability of the p690 is virtually unlimited.

62

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Figure 1.19.

pSeries 690.

The processor options available are: •

8-, 16-, 24-, and 32-way 1.5 GHz and 1.7 GHz POWER4+ (8-way MCMs)

•

8-, 16-, 24-, and 32-way 1.1 GHz and 1.3 GHz POWER4 (8-way MCMs)

•

HPC 8- and 16-way 1.3 GHz POWER4 (4-way MCMs)

A word is in order here about the processor option nomenclature. Four POWER4/POWER4+ chips (Figure 1.20), each having either one or two processor cores, are mounted on a multichip module. In addition to the processor cores, each chip contains Level 2 cache, intercon-

Figure 1.20.

GX Bus (n:1)

MCM-MCM (2:1)

Chip-Chip Fabric (2:1)

32B 8B 32B

32B 32B

L3 Directory

Fabric Controller

L2 Cache

8B 32B

8B

32B

8B

SP Controller

16B

16B

8B

16B

16B

16B

Error Detect And Logging

POR Sequencer

8B

8B Core2 NC Unit

32B

32B

L3 Controller Mem Controller

L2 Cache

32B

Processor Core 1 IFetch Store Loads

CIU Switch

32B 32B

8B

L2 Cache

GX Controller

8B 32B

Core1 NC Unit

8B

8B

32B

POWER4 chip logical view.

4B

4B

8B

16B

16B

16B

8B

Perf Monitor

BIST Engines

Trace & Debug

Processor Core 1 IFetch Store Loads

L3/Mem Bus (3:1)

MCM-MCM (2:1)

Chip-Chip Fabric (2:1)

JTAG

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview 63

64

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

nect logic to other MCMs, Level 3 cache, memory, I/O, and logic for such things as self-test, error detection, and service processor interface. If the MCM contains POWER4 or POWER4+ chips with two processor cores, then there are eight processors per MCM. These are called 8-way MCMs. If, on the other hand, the MCM contains POWER4/ POWER4+ chips with a single processor core, it is a 4-way MCM. Although the original p690 offered a 4-way HPC option, the only 4-way MCMs offered with POWER4+ processors are on the p655 (4-way 1.7 GHz) and p670 (4-way 1.5 GHz). Although 4-way MCMs offer only half as many processors, their performance for selected HPC applications is increased because the L2/L3 caches and memory interface are shared by fewer processors. (Note: The POWER4 processor architecture is described in more detail later in this chapter.) The base pSeries 690 configuration offers one 8-way MCM at any of the four speeds supported (1.1, 1.3, 1.5, or 1.7 GHz), 8 GB of memory, one I/O drawer, and the media drawer. Also required is an IBM 7315-C02 Hardware Management Console—a PC-based workstation that runs special applications with a graphical interface to configure and manage the p690, and to help with problem determination and resolution. The I/O drawer and media drawer include the following: •

Two 18.2 GB Ultra-SCSI disk drives

•

Sixteen hot-swappable disk bays (two occupied by the base disk drives)

•

Five media bays

•

Twenty hot-plug PCI-X slots

•

Integrated controllers: –

Two Ultra3-SCSI

–

Two serial

–

Two HMC

The processing power of the system may be expanded to 16, 24, or 32 processors of the desired speed. Memory can be expanded to half a

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

65

terabyte (512 GB), and with 8 I/O drawers, there are 128 hot-swappable disk bays which can accommodate more than 18.7 TB of storage (128 × 146.8 GB = 18.79 TB), 5 media bays (only one media drawer per system), and 160 PCI-X slots. Based on a SPECint2000 benchmark of 1113 and a SPECfp2000 benchmark of 1699, the 1.7 GHz POWER4+ processor is among the fastest processors on the market. As shown in Figure 1.23, the p690 has achieved a TPC result of 763,898 transactions/minute, making it the fastest transaction processor on the market. Based on IBM’s relative performance estimate, the p690 is about 80% faster than the p670 and almost 4.5 times faster than the p650. (These comments based on publicly available performance results as of June 30, 2003.) Like all pSeries servers, the design of the memory and I/O subsystems is well balanced with the processing power of the system. Peak L3 cache to main memory bandwidth exceeds 200 GBps, and total I/O bandwidth on the RIO ports to eight I/O drawers is 44 GBps. Logical Partitioning The pSeries 690 offers dynamic logical partitioning of system resources— processors, memory, and I/O slots (and the attached devices). The systems administrator can assign these resources in any combination, unconstrained by physical packaging boundaries, to form virtual systems within the p690. The design of the p690 LPAR capability is based on the experience IBM brings from its mainframe-class systems, which have offered logical partitioning capability for about 25 years. The p690 allows up to 32 LPARs to be formed, with each partition running its own copy of the operating system—AIX 5L v5.1, AIX 5L v5.2, or Linux. The system protects each partition from software errors in other partitions, and the hardware is designed with isolation to prevent propagation of most hardware failures. Resource allocation to LPARs requires careful planning by systems administrators. The smallest units of resources that can be allocated are one processor, 256 MB of memory (expandable in units of 256 MB), and one I/O adapter slot. Each partition must have its own boot device and associated adapter and Ethernet attachment to the IBM 7315-C02 Hardware Management Console. Special consideration must be given to handling devices that may be needed at times by multiple partitions (e.g., CD-ROM or tape). Media devices should be attached to an adapter or integrated controller that can be reassigned among LPARs as required for installing software or backup operations.

66

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

For flexibility to handle varying workloads, the AIX 5L operating system provides AIX 5L Workload Manager, which allows dynamic resource allocations within a partition, based on such factors as number of users, application names, and the like. AIX 5L v5.2 supports “dynamic” LPAR. This means that resources (processors, memory, I/O slots) can be assigned or removed from an LPAR running AIX 5L v5.2 without rebooting that partition. AIX 5L v5.1 and Linux support “static” LPAR, meaning that a partition must be rebooted in order to modify the resources assigned to it. Why is logical partitioning needed? It allows customers to select a single system and allocate it to many applications (application consolidation) according to their workload requirements. This helps reduce total cost of ownership—lowering the costs of physical space and systems management, and making more efficient use of all the power available in the hardware system. Other benefits include: (1) isolating applications from one another so that software failures in one application don’t cause the entire system to go down, (2) establishing development and production partitions as new software is being implemented and tested, and (3) allowing different versions of the operating system to run in each partition. On Demand Capabilities In May 2003, the pSeries family introduced a set of what IBM calls “on demand” capabilities. The functions described in this section are offered on pSeries 690, pSeries 670, and pSeries 650 servers. Although the functions of these features operate in the same way on all three systems, specific capacity details vary among the supported systems. Processor Capacity Upgrade on Demand Processor CUoD was actually introduced on the p680 and p660-6M1 servers. But the activation process used on those systems, which used the RS64 IV processor architecture, has been replaced by the more flexible and responsive process now available on POWER4-based systems. Processor CUoD allows processors to be installed but remain inactive until workload demands require activation of those processors. The CUoD processor features are the following: •

pSeries 690—8-way MCM (1.1, 1.3, 1.5, or 1.7 GHz) with 4-way active

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

67

•

pSeries 670—8-way MCM (1.1 or 1.5 GHz) with 4-way active

•

pSeries 650—2-way processor card (1.45 GHz) with no active processors

On the p690, the minimum system configuration of active processors is 12-way with 1.1 or 1.3 GHz MCMs. In other words, there must be one fully active 8-way MCM installed before the first CUoD MCM can be added. With the latest 1.5 or 1.7 GHz POWER4+ technology, the minimum configuration allowed is 8-way active. Two CUoD MCMs, each with four active and four standby processors can be installed. Third and fourth MCMs (either CUoD or fully active) can be added. The p670 has only two MCM positions. The minimum system configuration of active processors with 1.1 GHz processors is 12-way (one fully active 8-way MCM and one CUoD MCM with four active processors). With the 1.5 GHz POWER4+ processors, both MCMs may be CUoD options, thus allowing an 8-way active and 8-way standby configuration—just like on the p690. Since all processor cards on the p650 are 2-way, the minimum on demand configuration is two cards with two active and two standby 1.45 GHz processors. Two more 2-way processor cards (CUoD or active) can be added. Note that CUoD is not available on the p650 with 1.2 GHz processors. A table summarizing the minimum configurations with CUoD processors is shown in Figure 1.21. Standby processors are activated in pairs by purchasing the activation feature number for the system and processor speed involved. When an order is placed for the processor activation feature and the customer has provided the necessary system information (done electronically via the Internet), IBM provides an encrypted key, or activation code, within one business day. The key is posted to a Web site for immediate access and is confirmed by a hard copy sent by mail. Depending on their business processes for authorizing purchases and their anticipated workload needs, some companies may choose to order one or more activation features in advance and have the encryption key(s) on hand for immediate use. Once activated, the system is considered to have two more processors than before, and certain software and maintenance charges from IBM or third-party suppliers may apply. Processor CUoD offers a side benefit in the area of RAS for servers or LPARs in which AIX 5L v5.2 is running. If the system firmware detects a processor which is likely to fail and takes it offline with Dynamic

68

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

System

pSeries 690 pSeries 670 pSeries 650

Processor Speed

MCM or Processor Card Position

1.1/1.3 GHz 1.5/1.7 GHz 1.1 GHz 1.5 GHz 1.45 GHz

1 8/8 4/8 8/8 4/8 2/2

2 4/8 4/8 4/8 4/8 0/2

3 Optional Optional N/A N/A Optional

4 Optional Optional N/A N/A Optional

8/8 – All eight processors active 4/8 – Four active and four standby processors 2/2 – Two active processors 0/2 – Two standby processors Optional – May be fully active or CUoD MCM/processor card

Figure 1.21. Minimum Processor Capacity Upgrade on Demand configurations.

Processor Deallocation, a standby CUoD processor will be activated temporarily until the defective processor is replaced. And, partitions running AIX 5L v5.1 or Linux may benefit from the availability of a standby processor in the event of failure of an active processor—although not while operations continue running. When the partition (or the entire system) is rebooted, a standby processor will be activated in place of the failed processor. This “hot sparing” capability is available at no charge if a CUoD processor option is installed and an inactive processor is still available. Memory Capacity Upgrade on Demand The p690 also offers memory CUoD, an innovation that works with AIX 5L v5.2 (not AIX 5L v5.1 or Linux) to allow standby memory to be dynamically activated in 4 GB increments. Memory CUoD is available on p670 and p650 systems, as well. The memory CUoD options are the following: •

pSeries 690—16 GB with 8 GB active and 32 GB with 16 GB active

•

pSeries 670—16 GB with 8 GB active and 32 GB with 16 GB active

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

•

69

pSeries 650—4 GB with 0 GB active and 8 GB with 0 GB active

Memory CUoD is available independent of whether processor CUoD is used on the system. The activation process is the same as for activating CUoD processors. That is, the appropriate 4 GB activation feature is ordered, and IBM provides an encrypted key (activation code), which the user applies when more memory is needed. On/Off Capacity on Demand On p690, p670, and p650 systems with CUoD processors installed, another type of processor activation is available—on/off or temporary CoD. This capability does not apply to memory CUoD, but only to processors. Rather than purchasing a permanent activation feature for a pair of processors, as described in “Processor Capacity Upgrade on Demand,” an On/Off CoD feature provides a way to activate processors for infrequent workload increases. For instance, a business may have infrequent seasonal workload peaks or may need extra processing power for a short time to test a new application. On/Off CoD works like a prepaid phone card. Each feature entitles the customer to 60 processor days of usage, measured for each 24-hour period during which a processor is activated. Processors are still activated in pairs. If more than two standby CUoD processors are available, multiple pairs of processors can be activated using a single On/Off CoD activation feature. Like the activation features for processor and memory CUoD, the user is sent an encrypted key that is used to activate one or more pairs of processors. A processor usage day is charged beginning when the pair of processors is turned on and then at each 24-hour period of continuous usage thereafter. The minimum usage time measured is one day. For example, if a pair of processors is turned on at eight o’clock in the morning and then turned off at five o’clock in the afternoon, two processor days are charged. Or, if four processors are activated at eight o’clock one morning and are deactivated at noon the next day (28 hours later), eight processor days are charged (four processors times two days). On/Off CoD is a valuable tool for some businesses, but it is not for everyone. Companies who are seeking to minimize their investment while preparing to handle rapidly growing workloads will probably find their requirements to be adequately met with processor and memory CUoD. On/Off CoD is designed as a buffer against unexpected or very infrequent spikes in workload.

70

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Trial Capacity on Demand The last innovative “on demand” function available on p690, p670, and p650 systems is Trial CoD. Trial CoD is a no-charge function provided to customers who purchase either processor or memory CUoD features. It allows them a one-time opportunity to activate all or part of their standby resources (processors or memory) for a period of 30 consecutive days. One use of Trial CoD might be for a company to activate standby resources in order to evaluate the effect on system operations. Another situation could be when immediate activation of resources to meet rapidly increasing workload demands is needed, but it will take a few days to process a purchase order for a permanent CUoD activation feature. If both processor and memory CUoD features are installed, the trial opportunities for processors and memory may be executed independently. There is no need to get an activation code or key from IBM for Trial CoD. System firmware allows one trial when processor or memory CUoD is installed for the first time. In the case of processor CUoD, a new trial opportunity is enabled when a permanent CUoD activation feature is installed. For memory CUoD, the trial opportunity is one time per system. Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability (RAS) In addition to the POWER4 processor architecture and logical partitioning, the third major innovation in the pSeries 690 design is the extent of the RAS capabilities provided. The p690 offers all the advanced self-managing features available in other pSeries servers—hot-swappable disk drives, hot-plug PCI slots, Chipkill memory, bit-steering memory redundancy, Dynamic Processor Deallocation, persistent memory deallocation, redundant hot-plug power and cooling, and a built-in service processor. In addition, it offers: •

Deallocation of memory, L2 and L3 caches, and PCI buses

•

Optional redundant battery backup units

•

“Blind-swap” PCI slots (allowing adapters to be hot-plugged without moving the I/O drawer to a service position)

•

PCI bus parity error recovery

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

•

71

Design of internal storage architecture to reduce single points of failure

The design of the p690 hardware and firmware, combined with the self-management capabilities of the AIX 5L operating system, provides First Failure Data Capture, error logging, uncorrectable error handling, dynamic error recovery, and predictive failure analysis on processors, caches, memory, I/O, and disk drives. The pSeries 690 design for high availability is important for datacenter operations, where the probability of unplanned system outages must be minimized. For even higher availability solutions, the pSeries 690 can be clustered using HACMP software. For the HPC computations and for multiterabyte database applications, up to 32 pSeries 690 servers and/or 16 p690 LPARs can be clustered and managed from a single point of control using IBM Parallel System Support Programs (PSSP) for AIX or IBM Cluster Systems Management (CSM) for AIX 5L. When running PSSP, the p690 can be clustered with other pSeries servers and LPARs using the latest highspeed switch technology, SP Switch2. With either PSSP or CSM as the cluster control software, Ethernet attachment (10/100 Mbps or gigabit) is supported. IBM eServer Cluster 1600 The IBM eServer Cluster 1600 was announced in November 2001 to bring together into a single system identified by one serial number all the elements of UNIX clusters, including existing RS/6000 SP nodes, although SP nodes are no longer available for purchase. Long a leader in UNIX cluster technology, IBM now offers its cluster management software products—IBM Parallel System Support Programs for AIX, IBM Cluster Systems Management for AIX 5L, and the General Parallel File System (GPFS)—and its SP Switch2 high-speed interconnect technology as building blocks for configuring large UNIX clusters using the latest pSeries servers. Even though the hardware packaging of these servers (except for the pSeries 655) differs from the form factor of the older RS/6000 SP nodes, the architecture based on a single point of control using PSSP is unchanged. The SP Switch2, available in a standalone frame, provides a high-speed, low-latency, point-to-point connection to make distributed applications more efficient. The supported interconnection options for Cluster 1600 are the following: •

Ethernet LAN (gigabit or 10/100 Mbps)

72

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

•

SP Switch2 (requires PSSP)

•

SP Switch (requires PSSP, supported only on p670 and p690)

Systems that employ multiple main processors working in parallel can achieve extremely high levels of performance and are called highly parallel or massively parallel systems (depending on the number of main processors used in the system). A common industry term is Massively Parallel Processing (MPP). This may sound very much like the SMP systems that we discussed earlier, but a Cluster 1600 system is quite different. Each pSeries server (or LPAR thereof) within the cluster is an independent SMP server in its own right, having its own operating system, disk, memory, and adapters. The Cluster 1600 allows up to 128 operating system images to be managed as a single computing resource. Each operating system image (sometimes called a logical “node”) is controlling multiple processors (depending on the size of the server or LPAR), so the cluster can consist of hundreds of processors. An additional piece of hardware called the Control Workstation (CWS) is required for a Cluster 1600 configuration. The CWS can be one of several deskside or rack-mounted systems. Deskside CWS options are the pSeries 610 Model 6E1, the pSeries 620 Model 6F1, or the RS/6000 Model 170. The pSeries 610 Model 6C1 and the pSeries 660 Model 6H1 are the rack-mounted choices. The CWS manages all the servers and is the repository for the Single System Image (SSI). The SSI gives a single interface to the users and systems administrators of the cluster. This is typically the most daunting challenge to putting tens or hundreds of processors together on a single task—making it look like just one system when it is in fact many systems and hundreds of processors. The SSI provides a single copy of the AIX 5L operating system, which is then proliferated to each logical node. UNIX clusters are popular in large-scale numeric computing environments such as research centers and universities. These organizations apply parallel processing to such applications as computational fluid dynamics, gene sequencing, environmental modeling, and petroleum reservoir simulation. In the commercial arena, Cluster 1600 systems are often used with parallel database software such as Oracle Versions 7 and 8 and IBM’s DB/2 Universal Database (UDB) for processing large databases. A third application area for clusters is called server or LAN consolidation. Instead of having servers geographically distributed throughout an enterprise at locations where system admin-

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

73

istrators might not be available, a cluster allows a common pool of administrative personnel to manage all the servers, sharing backup devices, printers, and storage. Clustered systems are complex computing environments, and each installation must be carefully designed to meet the user’s requirements. Cluster 1600 provides the software and hardware infrastructure needed to implement a practically unlimited range of system configurations. And, since the latest pSeries servers and technologies (e.g., logical partitioning) are supported in the Cluster 1600, the cluster can grow and take advantage of the innovations introduced in the pSeries line over a long period of time. Performance Overview One important aspect of a computer system is the speed at which the computer can perform work, known as the performance of the computer. The greater the performance, the more work the computer can do. Many things—such as the processor, cache memories, main memory, disk storage, and program efficiency—affect the performance of a computer system. It is difficult and often misleading to predict overall performance by looking at selected specifications of the individual components that make up the system. Things such as disk drive rotational velocity, seek times, and processor clock speeds are important, but they do not give the whole picture. A better way to compare the overall performance of different computers is to perform benchmark testing. This testing involves running the same set of programs on each computer system being compared and then measuring how each system behaves under the workload. Many elements of the system come into play through this benchmark testing, and the overall performance of selected systems can be meaningfully compared. The best programs to use for a benchmark test are the application programs that are actually going to be run on the system. The widely varying characteristics of application programs can have a significant effect on overall system performance. Therefore, running the actual application programs on each computer being evaluated will give the most realistic comparison. In many cases this is not practical, so computer manufacturers and others in the industry typically perform benchmark testing using industry-standard programs specially designed to quantify and document the performance characteristics of various computers.

74

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

IBM has conducted benchmark testing to document the performance of the various pSeries models. This testing was done by loading the computers with specially written programs, each designed to exercise the pSeries systems as they would be used in various environments. It should be understood that to perform benchmark testing, the test group must make assumptions about the kind of work being done and the behavior of the users and programs. For this reason, the performance measurements in this benchmark may vary significantly from what one finds if one’s specific environment does not replicate the assumptions made in the testing. However, because all assumptions are the same for all computers included in the benchmark testing, one can get a good feeling for the relative performance of the systems. Because pSeries systems are designed for use in both commercial and technical environments, we will examine benchmark test results for both categories. Figure 1.22 shows the SPECint2000 and SPECfp2000 ratings for selected pSeries models. These numbers represent the composite result of benchmark testing (with the fastest processor available for each model) using a series of application programs from different disciplines. It is important to note that these particular benchmarks demonstrate only the power of the processor and not the power of the total system. So, for example, the SPECint2000 result of 935 shown for the p650 is the same whether the configuration of the p650 is 2-way or 8-way. For SPECint2000, the test involves 12 programs ranging from text compression to software development. This group of programs makes up the Systems Performance Evaluation Cooperative (SPEC) Suite SPECint2000 set of benchmarks and is designed to test the main processor’s ability to perform integer arithmetic (whole numbers such as 1, 67, 9987). Those intending to use a pSeries system for applications such as database access, accounting, and software development should consider the SPECint2000 rating because that benchmark was specifically designed to document the processor’s ability to perform the types of calculations that dominate these applications. In the case of SPECfp2000, the benchmark is the composite result of testing using a series of 14 highly mathematical application programs ranging from quantum chemistry to weather prediction. This group of programs makes up the Systems Performance Evaluation Cooperative Suite SPECfp2000 set of benchmarks and is designed to test the computer’s ability to perform numerically intensive and floating-point (fractional numbers such as 0.5, 56.888989, and 3.141) mathematics. Those intending to use pSeries systems for HPC applications such as

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

2000

75

SPECint2000 SPECfp2000

1699

1678 1520

1500 1295 1158 1000

910

1113

1103

1018 935

981

822

500

0 p615 (1.2 GHz) p650 (1.45 GHz) p670 (1.5 GHz) p630 (1.45 GHz) p655 (1.7 GHz) p690 (1.7 GHz)

Figure 1.22. SPECint2000 and SPECfp2000 ratings for selected pSeries systems. Data shown is for the fastest processor available on each model and is based on tests conforming to SPEC benchmark standards. Results may vary significantly. (Data valid as of May 27, 2003.)

weather prediction or seismic analysis will be especially interested in the SPECfp2000 rating because that benchmark was specifically designed to test the processor’s ability to perform the types of calculations that dominate these applications. Referring again to Figure 1.22, we observe that, in general, greater processor speed means higher SPECint2000 and SPECfp2000 results. This occurs because, as stated earlier, these particular benchmarks are designed to measure the performance of a single processor, and a faster processor within the same architecture will have higher performance.

76

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

But we also see that even for pSeries servers that use the same POWER4+ processor speed, the benchmark results are not exactly equal. For example, compare the 1.45 GHz p630 and p650 or the 1.7 GHz p655 and p690. These variations may be due to system design differences or compiler variations. Since the SPECint2000 and SPECfp2000 benchmark programs do not provide meaningful data for comparing SMP systems, the performance council developed a benchmark called SPECrate. For SPECrate_ int2000 and SPECrate_fp2000, several copies of a given benchmark may be executed. This method is particularly suitable for multiprocessor systems. The results, called SPECrate, express how many jobs of a particular type can be executed in a given time. SPECrate_int2000 is a geometric average of the 12 SPEC rates from SPEC integer tests (SPECint2000). SPECrate_fp2000 is the geometric average of the 14 SPEC rates from the SPEC floating-point tests (SPECfp2000). Because of the different units, the values of SPECint2000 and SPECfp2000 and SPECrate_int2000 and SPECrate_fp2000 cannot be compared directly. Let’s summarize to this point. The SPEC council currently supports the 2000 version of its suite. It contains both floating-point and integer workloads. These workloads, when run on an SMP system, must be calculated differently, yielding “rate” measurements. In 1995, the SPEC council implemented yet another variation of its benchmark called the SPECbase. Again, there are both floating-point and integer versions, along with rate versions for SMP systems. Remember that the SPEC benchmarks are actually a collection of programs. These programs get compiled on the pSeries system and are then executed. Here’s where the SPECbase differs from the other SPEC benchmarks. SPECbase allows only a limited set of compiler options when IBM, or any other vendor, compiles the programs that make up the benchmark. For example, no preprocessors are allowed that might scan the source code looking for particular types of loops. Therefore, SPECbase tends to remove any advantages that a vendor might have in its compiler technology. This gives the user a bit more of an apples-toapples hardware yardstick to use when comparing hardware from different vendors. In summary, SPEC started with SPECint and SPECfp. SPEC then added the “rate” designation for SMP systems. Finally, the “base” indicates the use of only a limited set of compiler directives. All of this yields eight different performance measurements that are available for the comparison of pSeries systems among themselves and with competitive systems.

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

77

In most commercial environments, one finds application programs such as order entry, accounts payable, accounts receivable, and so on. In these environments, pSeries systems are usually shared by more than one user in a local area network configuration involving PC workstations. Commercial applications typically move large amounts of information between disk storage and main memory. To evaluate the relative performance of the various pSeries models and other selected computers, the Transaction Processing Performance Council has several benchmarks that can be used. The primary benchmark for comparing on-line transaction processing performance is called TPC-C. It measures such factors as interactive response time and system throughput, which will affect user productivity and the overall workload that the system can handle. The TPC-C unit of measure is expressed as transactions per minute (tpmC). TPC-C is intended to simulate a “real-world” order entry environment, with a mix of read-only and update-intensive transactions. It relies on a relational database and uses client/server configurations. Figure 1.23 shows the tpmC ratings for a few pSeries servers. It is a requirement of the council that the $/tpmC be shown with the performance result. A vendor can’t just advertise some huge tpmC result without also telling how much that power costs. The $/tpmC metric is the audited price/performance of a system’s five-year cost of ownership, which includes hardware, software, and maintenance divided by the throughput, tpmC. Both tpmC and $/tpmC may be freely compared with published TPC-C metrics of other systems, both IBM and nonIBM. Since benchmark versions do change occasionally, one must be careful to compare only within the same version of a given benchmark. The current TPC-C benchmark is Version 5; comparisons between systems using different TPC-C versions are not valid. All of the results in Figure 1.23 are Version 5 of the TPC-C. Referring to Figure 1.23, it is clear how quickly technology is improving and how rapidly prices of UNIX servers are coming down. A 32-way p690 with 1.7 GHz POWER4+ processors (the most powerful transaction processing system on the market at the time of this edition) can handle more than 13 times as many transactions as the older 6-way p660-6H1, with a tpmC benchmark of 57,346. But the price per tpmC is about 70% less. This significant advance occurred in about two years and is indicative of the rate of technological development and the impact of market forces. It is generally accepted that the TPC-C benchmark is a very good representation of typical UNIX database environments. Unfortunately,

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

900

30

tpmC

28.47

$/tpmC

800

763898 25

23.45

700 600

20 17.75

500 427760

15

400 300

8.31

Dollars

Thousands

78

10

200 100 0

5

105025 57346

0 p660-6H1

p660-6M1

p690 (1.3 GHz)

p690 (1.7 GHz)

Figure 1.23. Audited TPC-C Version 5 benchmark results for selected pSeries servers. (Data valid as of May 10, 2003.)

the TPC-C is difficult and costly for a vendor to run and have audited by the council. Therefore, IBM and other vendors publish tpmC results of only a few systems, generally the large SMP servers. TPC-C rules do not permit publishing estimates of tpmC performance. Many other benchmarks are used to evaluate system performance. In today’s Internet age, two important and frequently used benchmarks managed by the SPEC organization are SPECweb99, which measures a system’s performance when used as a Web server, and SPECjbb2000, a benchmark for evaluating a server’s ability to run Java-based applications. Java is a popular programming language used in many e-business applications. Also, the TPC organization has transaction-oriented benchmarks other than TPC-C. TPC-H is a decision support benchmark, indicative of the performance of very large (often multiterabyte) database systems to ad hoc decision support queries. TPC-W is a transactional

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

79

Web benchmark that simulates on-line business transaction environments. In addition, there are benchmarks performed by major software vendors. Typically, these vendors do not allow comparisons among competitive systems using their benchmark results, because they want to sell their products to users of many hardware vendors’ systems. To help compare the commercial performance of pSeries systems, IBM has devised its own metric, dubbed rPerf (for “relative performance”), which is an indicator of commercial throughput for pSeries and RS/6000 servers derived from an IBM-defined workload used in its analytical model. Figures 1.1a and 1.1b show the rPerf numbers for pSeries and RS/6000 servers, respectively. The pSeries 640 1-way server using the 375 MHz POWER3-II processor and 4 MB of L2 cache is the reference system and has an rPerf value of 1.0. The p640 was selected as the reference system because it was the entry-level system for the pSeries servers and offered a 1-way 375 MHz POWER3-II processor option. The rPerf value should be used only to compare relative performance among pSeries servers. This ratio does not equate to any official TPC-C workload or results and should not be compared with competitive systems.

A Closer Look Many elements together provide the functions and performance of pSeries computers. Not only must each element be highly efficient, but each must be able to “keep up” with all other elements that make up the computer system. It doesn’t matter how fast a processor is if, for example, the I/O subsystem is the “bottleneck” that limits the overall speed at which the computer can perform work. A high-speed Fibre Channel adapter will be handicapped if the expansion slot in which it resides is unable to keep up with information flow rates. pSeries designers use computer modeling and other tools to simulate various design approaches with the goal of achieving computer systems with balanced performance. The remainder of this chapter will provide a closer look at some of the elements of the design of pSeries systems: •

Processor architecture

•

Logical partitioning

80

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

•

Memory and memory management

•

Graphics

•

Auxiliary storage

•

Expansion slots

•

Standard ports

•

Enhanced keyboard

•

Mechanical packaging

pSeries Hardware Architecture The internal organization of the hardware elements composing a pSeries system is known as the system’s hardware architecture. The architecture of pSeries computers contributes a great deal to the performance offered by these systems. The architectures of pSeries servers are enhanced versions of the Reduced Instruction Set Computing architecture originally developed by IBM in the 1970s. As the name RISC implies, the instruction set or total number of programming instructions that can be executed within the computer is reduced compared with more traditional Complex Instruction Set Computing (CISC). Because the instructions in RISC systems are very simple, they can be executed using high-speed computer hardware within the computer system in a very short period of time (for example, one clock cycle). Further, the simple instruction set of a RISC computer typically can be carefully employed to perform even complex functions in a more efficient manner. This original RISC architecture was first used in the earlier IBM RT system, which had limited success. The RS/6000 family employed IBM’s second-generation RISC architecture, called the Performance Optimized With Enhanced RISC architecture. This architecture used a blend of the original RISC architecture and some traditional CISC concepts with an emphasis on doing multiple operations at the same time. The new PowerPC architecture, developed jointly by IBM, Apple, and Motorola,

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

81

is a highly compatible derivative of the POWER architecture. Currently, the pSeries family uses the POWER3, the PowerPC, and the POWER4 architectures (discussed later in this chapter). Earlier systems in the RS/6000 family were based on the POWER architecture and implemented either with the POWER2 multichip main processor design or the more powerful POWER2 single-chip design, called the POWER2 Super Chip (P2SC). To understand the POWER architecture, it is necessary to look at two key pieces of pSeries systems—the main processor and the main memory system, which, along with other circuits, make up the central processing unit (CPU). The smallest piece of information the main processor and main memory can use is called a bit. These bits are grouped into bytes (8 bits), half-words (16 bits), words (32 bits), and double words (64 bits) to form the computer’s representation of numbers, letters of the alphabet, instructions in a program, and so on. With this basic knowledge, let’s take a closer look at the system’s main processor and main memory.

The Processor The processor is the heart of a computer system because it is the control center for information flow inside the computer. It is the main processor that does the data manipulation or “thinking” necessary to perform tasks for the user. The speed of the circuits making up the main processor, along with its architecture, determines the overall processing speeds achievable by the computer system. Many different (though compatible) RISC processor designs have been used in the RS/6000 and pSeries families. The following section gives an overview of the original implementation and describes some of the enhancements that have been made over the years as new generations of RISC processor technology were developed. Finally, there is a more detailed description of the latest IBM RISC processors—POWER4 and POWER4+. Original Implementation Although the original implementation has been out of production for a long time, the concepts used in its architecture apply to all of the implementations that followed.

82

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

There are five basic elements in the original RS/6000 processor architecture, each made up of thousands of circuits packaged in several specially designed chips: 1. Instruction cache/branch processor 2. Fixed-point processor 3. Floating-point processor 4. Data cache 5. I/O unit Figure 1.24 is a block diagram showing how these elements are organized to make up the original RS/6000 hardware architecture. To see how this architecture can do multiple operations at the same time, let’s quickly trace the flow of information through the system. It all starts when the user executes a command to start a program, which causes the instructions of that program to be retrieved from disk storage and loaded into main memory (shown at the bottom of the diagram). After the program is loaded into main memory, the processor requests the very first instruction (4 bytes) in the program. In compliance with the request, the first instruction is retrieved from the main memory along with the next several instructions (a total of 64 sequential bytes) and loaded into the Instruction Cache Unit (ICU). The instruction cache is a group of very high-speed memory circuits contained in the ICU chip. It is used as a temporary holding area (8 KB in size) for programming instructions that are likely to be next in line to be executed. When the processor requests the next instruction, it first looks in the ICU. Most of the time, the next instruction needed will already have been loaded into the ICU, eliminating the delay associated with getting the instruction from slower main memory. This is called a cache hit. Because the instruction cache can respond much more quickly than the system’s main memory, the system’s performance is dramatically improved with every cache hit. If the needed instruction is not already loaded into the ICU (called a cache miss), another 64 bytes starting with the needed instruction are automatically loaded from the main memory into the ICU. In the case of a cache miss, loading the ICU takes longer than simply getting the needed instruction from main memory

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

83

Instruction Cache Unit (ICU) Instruction Cache Branch Processor

Floating-Point Processor

Fixed-Point Processor

Main Processor Programmed I/O Path I/O Unit

Data Cache *Data Cache (32 KB) (32 KB)

System I/O Micro Channel Slots

Serial Optical Channels

64 bits

*64 bits

DMA Path Main Memory Card

Main Memory

*The second 32 KB data cache and the second 64-bit data path are only provided on the larger RS/6000 Models.

Figure 1.24. RS/6000 POWER architecture original multichip implementation.

(that is, a cache miss results in a penalty to RS/6000 system performance), so it is a game of statistics. Because most computer programs will experience many more cache hits than misses during normal operation, the cache technique usually increases overall system performance significantly. So far, then, we have gotten the first few programming instructions loaded into the 8 KB of instruction cache memory located in the ICU.

84

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Next, the branch processor component of the ICU examines each programming instruction in turn and independently executes any condition register or branch instructions. Condition register instructions manipulate the contents of working storage locations (condition registers) within the main processor that store information about the results of calculations performed earlier in the program. Branch instructions are a commonly used type of programming instruction that direct the flow of the program, usually taking different paths depending on the contents of the condition register. Branch instructions that are executed completely within the ICU (while other operations are happening in the other processor elements) are said to occur in zero system clock cycles. These branches are therefore said to be zero-cycle branches. While the branch processor intercepts and executes branch and condition register instructions, the remaining instructions are fed to and executed by the fixed-point processor and the floating-point processor. The fixed-point processor performs mathematical and logical operations with things that don’t have decimal points, such as whole numbers (for example, the integers 1, 5, and 6) and numeric representations of text (such as ASCII codes). These fixed-point instructions are common in almost any computing environment. The floating-point processor performs mathematical and logical operations (IEEE 754-1985) with things that have a decimal point (that is, real numbers such as 53.254376, 4.6, and 3.1313). These floating-point instructions are common in engineering/scientific applications and others requiring sophisticated computer graphics. For those who aren’t counting, that makes four independent operations going on inside the system at the same time: 1. A branch instruction 2. A condition register instruction 3. A fixed-point instruction 4. A floating-point instruction In fact, if the floating-point instruction happens to be the multiplyadd (A × B + C) or the multiply-subtract (A × B – C) instruction, these can be counted as two floating-point operations, making a total of five operations being performed at once. This architecture is therefore said to be a superscalar implementation.

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

85

The instruction cache and processing units in the processor allow a system to execute a great many programming instructions in a very small amount of time. However, it’s not enough to make a processor architecture that offers high performance, users must also be able to efficiently move the data on which the programming instructions are to operate between the processor and main memory. This is where the data cache unit comes in. The data cache unit operates much like the instruction cache unit, only the data cache unit provides a temporary holding area for data needed during program execution rather than programming instructions. When a program instruction requires data on which to operate, the data cache unit is first checked to see if the needed data has already been loaded. If the data cache unit contains the needed data (a cache hit), it can very quickly provide the needed information and dramatically boost system performance. If the data cache unit does not have the requested data, a cache miss occurs, which negatively impacts system performance. In the event of a cache miss, the needed data plus the next few words of data are automatically loaded from the slower main memory to the data cache unit. In this way, the data cache unit continuously accumulates the data most likely to be needed during upcoming calculations, increasing the likelihood of cache hits. As with the ICU, the more cache hits there are, the better the system performance. Statistically speaking, the larger the data cache, the higher the percentage of cache hits and thus the higher the overall system performance. At the time this processor was in use, the base models of the RS/6000 family had a data cache 32 KB in size, whereas the larger models had a 64 KB data cache, accounting in part for their higher performance. Those models with the 64 KB data cache were also designed to move twice as much information between main memory and the data cache. That is, the models with the 64 KB data cache provide a more efficient path (for example, a 128-bit-wide data path vs. a 64-bit-wide data path on models with the 32 KB data cache) between main memory and the data cache, which also serves to boost system performance. All pSeries and RS/6000 models use a scheme called set associativity to reduce the number of instruction and cache misses by allowing for more efficient sharing of the data cache among multiple programs running simultaneously. Finally, the I/O Unit element of the processor manages data transfers between all input/output devices and the rest of the system. These include things such as the disks, communications adapters, and other devices such as tape drives. Often, the information will flow directly between the I/O device and main memory, called Direct Memory Access

86

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

(DMA). Other times, the program may directly control the information between the main processor and the I/O device, called programmed I/O. The activities of the five processor elements are coordinated by an electronic signal called the system clock. The system clock is the heartbeat of the computer system, stepping the main processor through each step in the execution of a program. It is the time reference of the main processor and sets the pace for all main processor activity. The speed at which the system clock runs is called the system clock rate and is measured in millions or trillions of clock steps per second, or megahertz or gigahertz. For example, the RS/6000 Model 595 ran at 135 MHz and the Model 397 ran at 160 MHz. Today’s POWER4+ processor runs at speeds up to 1.7 gigahertz (GHz). The principles just described for the original POWER architecture are still in use, although as we shall see, the POWER4 architecture is much more complex. PowerPC RS64 Microprocessors Several stages of development followed the original RS/6000 multichip RISC processor. These included the RISC Single Chip (RSC) implementation and three PowerPC implementations. The PowerPC 601, 603, and 604/604e resulted from an alliance formed by IBM, Motorola, and Apple. The PowerPC designs introduced support for multiprocessing, power management features, and enhancements in pipelining. Next came the PowerPC RS64 microprocessor (Figure 1.25), which was the RS/6000’s first 64-bit processor. The RS64 was optimized for performance of commercial application OLTP (on-line transaction processing), which places a heavy demand on accessing large working data sets efficiently from memory. As a result, its design focused on large cache sizes and data paths having high bandwidth and low latency rather than on floating-point processing, as would be needed in a microprocessor designed primarily for scientific applications. The RS64 processor had separate 4-way associative 64 KB caches for instructions and data. Also, it had an L2 cache controller and a dedicated 16-byte interface to a private external 2-way set-associative 4 MB L2 cache, with a separate 16-byte system bus interface. The RS64 processor core was designed to optimize branch processing, and as part of the branch preprocessor function included a 4K entry branch history table and an integrated four-entry-link stack. The RS64 had four execution units and could sustain a decode and execution rate of three instructions per cycle. All the arrays in the RS64 had redundancy and

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

87

Instruction Dispatch and Branching

PreDecode Integer GPR Unit

MMU 64 KB Data Cache

LOAD/ STORE UNIT

Float Unit

FP Reg File

MMU 64 KB Instr. Cache

Bus Interface Unit

L2 Interface

Address

Data

System Bus

Figure 1.25. PowerPC RS64 microprocessor is the first 64-bit implementation.

ECC for greater system availability. Like all PowerPC chips (except the 603), the RS64 was SMP enabled. It consumed about 25 watts of power at a clock rate of 125 MHz. Following the RS64, a family of superscalar processors called RS64 II, RS64 III, and RS64 IV have continued to be optimized for commercial workloads that place heavy demands on system memory in the form of very large working sets and latency-sensitive serial dependencies. They have very large cache sizes and data paths having high bandwidth and low latency. The RS64 IV continues to be used in the pSeries 620 and pSeries 660 servers with operating frequencies of 500 MHz to 750 MHz. These chips are manufactured with IBM’s silicon-on-insulator technology, which reduces the capacitance along the silicon and conductor bound-

88

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

aries, which in turn lowers signal to noise ratios and allows faster operation with less heat dissipation. Less heat means that less power is being consumed and that reliability is improved. The RS64 IV technology uses a 1.8-volt power supply. POWER2 and POWER3 Microprocessors The POWER2, IBM’s initial superscalar implementation of the POWER architecture, was implemented initially in eight semicustom chips and later in a single-chip design. The POWER2 differed from the original RISC implementation in several key respects (Figure 1.24). First, the instruction cache was enlarged from 8 KB to 32 KB. Second, the POWER2 implementation had dual fixed-point and dual floating-point units rather than single fixed-point and single floating-point units. This design allowed the POWER2 implementation to execute up to two floating-point instructions and two fixed-point instructions in one cycle— double the capability of the original implementation—and brought the total operations per cycle up to eight. Other differences were a larger data cache (128 KB or 256 KB, depending on the model), some new instructions (for example, floatingpoint Sort and Convert to Integer) to improve efficiency for commonly needed operations, and higher system clock rates enabled by technology and design improvements. IBM’s POWER3 microprocessors integrated the high-bandwidth and floating-point capabilities of its POWER2 architecture predecessor into a fully scalable 64-bit PowerPC SMP implementation. With excellent floating-point and integer performance, POWER3-based systems are particularly targeted at the HPC, high-end analysis, graphics, commercial workstation, and entry-level server markets. To satisfy computation-intensive requirements, the POWER3 design contains a highly superscalar core that comprises eight execution units, fed by a high-bandwidth memory interface supporting four floating-point operations per cycle. The POWER3 processor provides an instruction cache of 32 KB and a data cache of 64 KB. All caches are nonblocking. The instruction cache supports two outstanding misses, and the data cache supports up to four misses. Designed for high bandwidth, the POWER3 processor was implemented with a separate, independent 16-byte memory bus and a 32-byte L2 bus, each with separate address, data, and control lines, achieving 6.4 GBps throughput to the L2 at 200 MHz. The POWER3 processor implements sequential instruction and data access

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

89

detection algorithms in hardware, which permits the prefetch of cache lines to closer levels of the memory hierarchy. This reduces the negative performance impact of increasing memory latencies, particularly on technical workloads. Containing 15 million transistors, the POWER3 processor design is shown in Figure 1.26. The POWER3-II design has 23 million transistors and uses IBM’s cutting-edge copper CMOS 7S 0.22-micron technology. POWER3-II microprocessors running at up to 450 MHz are currently in use in several pSeries and RS/6000 servers. POWER4 and POWER4+ Microprocessors IBM’s POWER4 microprocessors, running at clock rates of 1.1 GHz and 1.3 GHz (more than one billion cycles per second), were introduced on the pSeries 690. Using the same architecture, coupled with enhanced chip fabrication technology, POWER4+ processors running at clock rates from 1.2 to 1.7 GHz are now available on all the focus pSeries servers—p615, p630, p650, p655, p670, and p690. POWER4+ processor chips, which contain more than 180 million transistors, are manufactured with IBM’s 0.13 micron fabrication process, whereas the 0.18 micron process was used for POWER4 chips. The energy-saving copper and SOI chip technology is used in both POWER4 and POWER4+ processors. The combination of smaller chip size and copper SOI technology make it possible for the higher processor speeds available with POWER4+ processors. The same architecture is used for both the original POWER4 and the latest POWER4+ processors. The POWER4 processor architecture is the result of a long development cycle guided by several goals: optimization for SMP designs and for total system performance (memory and I/O interfaces), ability to extend to very high frequency, RAS considerations, and binary compatibility with 32-bit and 64-bit PowerPC applications. The POWER4 chip (Figure 1.20, shown previously) has two processors, each with an L1 data and instruction cache, and sharing a unified L2 cache structure through a crossbar switch (CIU). Each of the three independent L2 cache controllers can provide 32 bytes (256 bits) from L2 to either the data cache or the instruction cache in one of the processors per cycle. The Fabric Controller is the hub of the chip, providing the high-bandwidth paths required to meet the objectives of a balanced design for memory and I/O access, and for optimized SMP performance. There are four interfaces:

FPU2

FPU1

Fixed Point Unit FXU 2

Fixed Point Unit FXU 1

Figure 1.26.

LD/ST Unit LS 2

LD/ST Unit LS 1

Memory Management Data Cache DU

FXU 3

Fixed Point Unit

The POWER3 microprocessor design.

6XX Bus

Bus Interface Unit: L2 Control, Clock

L2 Cache

BIU

Memory Management Unit Instruction Cache IU

BRU/LCR

Branch/ Dispatch

Floating Point Unit

Floating Point Unit

90 Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

91

•

L3 cache and main memory (L3/memory bus)

•

Other POWER4 chips on the same MCM (chip-chip fabric)

•

Other MCMs (MCM-MCM)

•

I/O subsystem or native switch attach for clusters (GX controller)

The chip also contains logic for power-on sequencing, self-test, performance monitoring, interfacing to the service processor (JTAG), error detection, and the like. The two POWER4 cores on the chip appear to the software as simply a 2-way SMP. Hence, the phrase “SMP on a chip” has sometimes been used to describe the POWER4 architecture. The details of the POWER4 core are shown in Figure 1.27. The technical name for this architecture is “speculative superscalar out-oforder” design. That mouthful means that the POWER4 processor is designed with multiple execution units (for floating-point, fixed-point, load/store, branch) and look-ahead logic to maximize the utilization of every clock cycle so that the processor is never idle, waiting for data, instructions, or computation results. The “speculative” part means there is very complex logic that predicts whether branches in a string of instructions will be taken or not and takes action accordingly (calculating addresses, fetching information, etc.). This logic helps to maximize program execution speed because the system does not have to wait and see the results of some calculation on which the conditional branch may depend before fetching the branch-to information. The “out-of-order” description means that the POWER4 processor will, when possible, execute instructions before all the preceding instructions in a sequence have been performed in order to keep all eight execution units busy. Again, this logic is extremely complex, since dependencies between instructions (data, condition codes, etc.) must be considered. Some groups of instructions must be executed serially, and the POWER4 design allows for those situations. The POWER4 execution pipeline, shown in Figure 1.28, indicates the multiple cycles from instruction fetch (IF) and decoding to the mapping (MP) units, where dependencies are determined, to the issue queues (ISS), and then through execution (EX), write-back (WB), and transfer (Xfer) to completion (CP). At any given time, more than 200 instructions may be in progress in the POWER4 processor. A detailed explanation of the POWER4 design is beyond the scope of this book, but IBM makes available on its

92

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

IFAR I-cache

BR Scan Instr Q

BR Predict

Decode, Crack & Group Formation

GCT

BR/CR Issue Q

BR Exec Unit

CR Exec Unit

FX/LD 2 Issue Q

FX/LD 1 Issue Q

FX1 Exec Unit

LD1 Exec Unit

LD2 Exec Unit

StQ

D-cache

Figure 1.27.

POWER4 core diagram.

FX2 Exec Unit

FP Issue Q

FP1 Exec Unit

FP2 Exec Unit

IC

D0

BP

Figure 1.28.

D1

D3

Xfer

Instruction Crack & Group Formation

D2

GD

POWER4 instruction execution pipeline.

Interrupts & Flushes

IF

Instruction Fetch

Branch Redirects

ISS

ISS

MP MP

ISS

ISS

MP

MP

RF

RF

RF

RF

BR

FP

FX

Fmt

LD/ST DC

F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6

EX

EA

EX

Out-of-Order Processing

WB

WB

WB

WB

Xfer

Xfer

Xfer

Xfer CP

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview 93

94

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Web site technical white papers that explain the POWER4 architecture in great detail. Each POWER4 processor core has 64 KB of L1 instruction cache and 32 KB of L1 data cache, and shares the approximately 1.5 MB of L2 cache. Off-chip is L3 cache, ranging from 8 MB to 32 MB of L3 cache for each POWER4 chip, depending on the pSeries model. Since MCMs used in p655, p670, and p690 servers have four processor chips, they have 128 MB of L3 cache. L3 caches on the processor cards for other models range from 8 MB to 32 MB. Between the L3 cache and main memory is a memory controller for interfacing to memory cards or memory DIMMs. The memory interface provides ECC to correct single-bit and detect double-bit errors, as well as memory scrubbing to correct soft errors. As will be explained later, memory on all the POWER4-based pSeries servers uses the Chipkill memory design to reduce even further the likelihood of system outage due to memory errors. The POWER4 I/O structure is shown in Figure 1.29. Using the GX bus, the POWER4 chip attaches to a remote I/O (RIO) controller, which is the interface to the I/O drawers and any internal PCI-X slots (depending on pSeries model). In the I/O drawers and/or on the system planar for internal slots are bridge chips which drive the PCI-X buses for the I/O slots and integrated devices. The POWER4 architecture provides a well-balanced system design that will be able to extend to higher frequencies as technology develops.

Logical Partitioning Logical partitioning technology, introduced to the pSeries family on the p690 and supported only on systems using the POWER4 architecture, is also available on p630, p650, p655, and p670 systems. The only POWER4-based system that does not support LPAR is the 1- and 2-way p615, which is too small a server to take advantage of the benefits of logical partitioning. LPAR allows the system administrator to assign processors, memory, and I/O slots (and the attached devices) to create, in effect, several independent systems or “virtual servers” running on a single server. Each partition can run different operating systems—AIX 5L v5.1, AIX 5L v5.2, or Linux. The allocation of processors, memory, and I/O is flexible and does not have to conform to physical boundaries, such as how

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

95

GX Bus 4B @ 3:1 Remote I/O Bus 1B @ 500 MHz

POWER4 C

C L2

IOCC PCI Host Bridge (PHB) Chip

Remote I/O (RIO) Bridge Chip

L3 Ctl/Dir PCI 32b/64b @ 33/66 MHz

L3

Memory

Figure 1.29.

PCI-PCI Bridge Chip

PCI-PCI Bridge Chip

PCI

PCI

I/O logical view in POWER4 systems.

many processors are on a multichip module or which PCI bus the I/O slots are on. For LPARs in which AIX 5L v5.2 is running, resources can be assigned or removed without having to reboot that partition or the system (“dynamic LPAR”). LPARs running AIX 5L v5.1 or Linux support only “static LPAR,” meaning that the partition must be rebooted in order to reassign resources. Logical partitioning offers the user many advantages. For example, an application or set of applications can be run in a specific logical partition, guaranteeing the availability of the assigned resources for that workload. Since different applications can run in each LPAR, one possible scenario is to have a production LPAR running the tested software version of an application, while in another LPAR there is a test system running a new version of the application. Another example is to run regional workloads in different LPARs, each with its correct date and

96

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

time setting for the users in the region being supported. All of these usage scenarios provide cost effectiveness advantages in systems management and physical space, since a single system is being used where previously the only alternative solution was to run multiple smaller systems. There are other advantages of a more technical nature. Since an LPAR is running its own copy of the operating system and is isolated from other LPARs, a software failure in one LPAR affects only that “virtual server” and allows applications running in other LPARs to continue unaffected. Or, if a particular software application does not scale well in order to take advantage of a large SMP server, such as a 16-way p670 or 32-way p690, then multiple copies of the application can be run in separate partitions. The system administrator controls the configuration and operation of LPARs from an IBM 7315-C01 Hardware Management Console, which is a dedicated workstation that provides the necessary interface for configuring and operating the LPARs, including activation and deactivation of Capacity Upgrade on Demand capabilities. LPAR involves the POWER4 processor architecture, the system firmware (microcode), and the operating system. The key element is the “hypervisor” function, a very complex control layer implemented in the system firmware and supported by POWER4 and POWER4+ processors. A detailed discussion of the hypervisor is beyond the scope of this book. The hypervisor controls memory and I/O device management, including system interrupts and DMA (Direct Memory Access) addresses. It also manages the interfaces to the HMC and to protected facilities and memory locations. There are few differences in the operating system when running in an LPAR, and LPAR is transparent to the application software running in a partition. The application software needs to be certified only to the relevant operating system image (AIX 5L, v5.1 or v5.2, or Linux). The system administrator determines whether the operating system in any particular LPAR is allowed to update system firmware, since firmware changes affect the entire pSeries server. Each LPAR requires at least one processor, 256 MB of memory (expandable in increments of 256 MB), access to a boot disk, and access to the HMC. So, in general, at least two I/O slots per LPAR are required, and these must be controlled by separate PCI bridge chips in order to allow each LPAR to be controlled independently. It is advisable to have media devices, such as a CD-ROM or tape drive, assigned to their own SCSI adapters so that they can be moved among LPARs as required for installing software or backing up data.

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

97

Total system memory requirements for an LPAR system will include the memory needed for the software to be run in each LPAR (in 256 MB increments) and the additional memory required per system when running in LPAR mode. The hypervisor itself requires 256 MB. Translation Control Entries for mapping I/O addresses require 256 MB (for up to four I/O drawers) or 512 MB (if more than four I/O drawers are attached). Finally, page tables associated with each LPAR require a variable amount of memory. With the exception of the 256 MB required for the hypervisor, these memory requirements for control tables also exist when the system is running as a full system partition (SMP mode). So they are not additional overhead associated uniquely with LPAR. A pSeries server with LPAR, particularly larger models like p650, p670, or p690, must be carefully planned. IBM provides several white papers to assist with planning for LPAR on the pSeries Web site. For a link to the IBM information, see the companion Web site (www.maxpress.com) for this book. Resources (processors, memory, I/O slots) are not moved directly between LPARs. They first reside in a pool of unassigned resources, from which the system administrator can assign them to LPARs as required. If the target LPAR is running AIX 5L v5.2, resources can be added or removed dynamically. When using processor or memory Capacity Upgrade on Demand features on the p650, p670, and p690, newly activated resources go into the unassigned pool, from which the administrator can then assign them to LPARs either dynamically (AIX 5L v5.2 only) or statically (AIX 5L v5.1 or Linux). Main Memory The main memory, the set of electronic chips that provide a “workspace” for the main processor, is also a very important part of a computer. It holds the information (program instructions and data) being used by the main processor. The main memory is called RAM because it can store and retrieve information independent of the sequential order in which the information was originally stored. The smallest RS/6000 system available, the Model 150, comes standard with 128 MB (about 128 million bytes) of main memory, and the least amount of standard memory on pSeries servers is the 256 MB on the p640. The largest system, the p690, has 8 GB (about 8 billion bytes) standard, and can support up to 512 GB of main memory—half a terabyte. When you have this much main memory in a system, schemes

98

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

to detect and correct memory defects become necessary to protect the integrity of the information stored in the computer system’s main memory. The pSeries uses several techniques to protect the integrity of its main memory. The ECC technique used in the pSeries family can detect single-bit and double-bit errors and correct single-bit errors. This is done by appending seven additional bits (called ECC bits) onto every word (32 bits) in main memory. The seven ECC bits are automatically generated by the ECC circuitry based on the value of the associated word and then are stored in main memory alongside that word. New ECC bits are calculated and stored every time a word is written to main memory. Later, when that word is read back from main memory, the value stored in the corresponding ECC bits is checked to make sure that the word didn’t somehow get corrupted through some type of main memory failure. The most common type of failure is to have a single bit in the word accidentally get changed to the wrong value. In this case, the ECC circuitry can use the value stored in the ECC bits to correct the error on the fly and allow normal operations to continue undisturbed. On rare occasions, a main memory failure will cause two bits in a single word to be changed. In this case, the ECC circuitry can only detect and report the error. In addition to monitoring all read/write activity in main memory, the ECC circuitry periodically scans all of main memory to ensure the integrity of the information, a process called memory scrubbing or bit scrubbing. The pSeries main memory also employs other techniques to ensure the integrity of the system: bit scattering, memory bus parity, and bit steering. Bit scattering means that memory chips used to make up the main memory system are organized in a way that minimizes the impact of a single chip failure. Memory bus parity refers to an extra bit appended to the parallel group of wires (called a bus) used to transfer information to and from main memory. This extra bit, called a parity bit, is used to detect any errors that may occur as the information is transferred along the memory bus. In fact, parity bits are used on chip-to-chip data buses and throughout most internal chip data paths. Finally, bit steering is a concept in which extra memory bits designed into the main memory system can be used to replace failing bits, in many cases without disrupting normal operation. The extra bit is “steered” onto the memory bus in place of the failing bit. All of these things help protect the integrity of the information in a pSeries system and allow it to recover from errors without disturbing users.

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

99

The most recent pSeries memory innovation is Chipkill memory (Figure 1.30), used in every pSeries server except the p640. Chipkill, which supplements ECC, bit steering, and bit scrubbing, was originally developed by IBM for the S/390 mainframe computer family. Chipkill allows the system to continue running even in the presence of complete chip failure (i.e., multibit failures). Whereas bit steering redirects failing bits of memory, the Chipkill design scatters all four bits of chip into four separate ECC words. Thus, even if the entire chip fails, the four ECC algorithms recover the data of those four bits. When a threshold is reached, a service action notice is automatically sent and the system can continue to run until a scheduled repair action can be taken. IBM estimates that systems with Chipkill design are 100 times less likely to have a system outage due to a main memory failure than systems without this design. In any computer system, a great deal of information is moving in and out of main memory. For this reason, the design of the main memory can significantly affect overall system performance. There are two major reasons why so much time is spent moving information in and out of the main memory. First, the programming instructions of the active program(s) reside in the main memory. Therefore, every instruction in the program must at some point be retrieved from the main memory. Second, the main memory holds and accepts data used in the program(s) being executed. If the overall information flow to and from main memory (assisted by the instruction cache unit and the data cache unit) cannot keep pace with the main processor, the main processor will be delayed and system performance will suffer. For this reason, the main memory must be designed to keep up with the speeds achievable by the main processor. The design of the pSeries processor and its main memory are balanced through the use of separate data and instruction caches and the wide path between main memory and the caches, as discussed earlier. To further balance the system, the path or “bus” between the caches and main memory (which can exceed 200 GBps in the p690) is independent from the I/O bus used for input/output activity such as disk information transfers. This prevents interference between main memory activity and input/output activity, which can decrease the overall performance of the system. Finally, pSeries main memory design uses a technique called interleaving. This is a way of spreading what would normally be sequential memory references (a chunk of 64 bytes, for example) to different

X

Chipkill

X

Failing memory bit steered to spare memory chip

Figure 1.30.

IBM Chipkill memory schematic.

If all bits are used up on the spare memory chips, and the threshold is reached, the Service Processor will be invoked to request deferred maintenance at a time acceptable with the customer.

Bit-steering allows memory lines from a spare memory chip to be dynamically reassigned to a memory module with a faulty line to keep the system running.

Bit-scattering allows normal single bit ECC error processing, thereby keeping the system running with a Chipkill failure.

Spare memory chip

Dynamically reassign memory I/O via bit-steering if error threshold is reached on same bit.

Scatter memory chip bits across four separate ECC words for Chipkill recovery

Memory scrubbing for soft single-bit errors that are corrected in the background while memory is idle, to help prevent multiple-bit errors.

100 Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

101

memory cards so that two or more memory controllers are used in an alternating fashion. Spreading the memory accesses through different paths reduces contention and the data transfer rate of instructions, and effectively increases data transfer to the processor. Some pSeries systems allow two words (64 bits) of data to be read from a memory card in a single system clock cycle (2-way interleaving). The more powerful pSeries models allow four words (128 bits) to be read in each cycle (4-way interleaving). Memory Management The way in which a computer system uses available main memory and disk storage, called the computer’s memory management scheme, is basic to the capabilities of the computer. Understanding the basics of this memory management will give insight into one of the features of pSeries systems. Figure 1.31 shows conceptually the levels of memory between the processor and disk storage in POWER4-based pSeries systems. Older systems using POWER3-II and RS64 IV processors do not have Level 3 cache. We have not tried to show in Figure 1.31 the relative number of CPU cycles of latency among the various caches because the movement of data to the caches is very complex and the speeds of both memory and disk drives are changing very rapidly. Suffice it to say that the objective of all caching schemes is to ensure that the processor is almost never waiting for either instructions or data to execute at its maximum rate. The caches and main memory are contained inside the system’s CEC. Disk storage may be internal to the server, in an I/O expansion drawer, or in a separate storage subsystem.

L1 Data Cache CPU Registers

L1 Instr. Cache

L2 Cache

L3 Cache

Main Memory

Disk

Figure 1.31. Conceptual view of the pSeries main memory and disk storage with Levels 1, 2, and 3 caches.

102

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

When the pSeries system is first turned on, information vital to an orderly startup and smooth operation is automatically copied from disk storage to the main memory. Once normal system operation is established, users can begin to do their work. During the course of this work, the user will start various computer programs. As each program is started, it is copied from disk storage to the main memory and then executed. Based on the work being done by the user, the computer programs manipulate various sets of data that are also loaded from the disk storage to main memory as needed. It doesn’t take long to realize that the main memory in a computer can quickly become filled up with programs and data as the system is called upon to do more and more work. In earlier days of computing, the main memory size limited the amount of work a computer could manage at any one time. This limitation capped the size of programs, the number of programs that could be run concurrently, the number of users who could share the system, and so on. In today’s environment, a technique called virtual memory alleviates the need to squeeze all active programs and data into main memory. In computers that support virtual memory, the computer basically fakes out the computer programs, making the computer system appear to have much more main memory than it actually has. The largest of today’s pSeries systems can have 512 GB of main memory, an amount that only a few years ago would have seemed impossible. Sixty-four bit pSeries systems allow 1 trillion TB of virtual memory to be addressed. Virtual memory allows more programs, data, and users to be simultaneously active on the system than could be supported in real main memory without virtual memory. That is, it allows you to make the most out of whatever size main memory you actually have. Here’s how virtual memory works. Say a user tells the computer to start a word-processing program. The computer would first attempt to load the needed portion of the word-processing program into main memory. If no space is left in main memory, some space will be made available by overwriting an inactive portion of some program or by “swapping out” some inactive data to a temporary space in disk storage. The needed portion of the word-processing program can then be loaded into the available space and the user can begin typing. If the program that was overwritten or the data that was swapped out is needed again, it will be reloaded from disk storage to some other available main memory area. So a virtual memory computer system is constantly

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

103

swapping programs and information between main memory and disk storage (robbing Peter to pay Paul and then vice versa). Virtual memory allows the maximum size program or combination of all programs and data to be limited only by the combined amount of main memory and disk storage rather than by the amount of main memory alone. The advantage of having this virtual memory hocus pocus built into the pSeries hardware and AIX 5L operating system is that neither the programmers nor the users of any pSeries system need be concerned with main memory size. To them the system seems to have as much main memory as they need, and they are never made aware that information is constantly being swapped from main memory to disk storage and back again. The computer hardware and AIX 5L operating system efficiently manage this swapping (also called paging) automatically. Virtual memory is a powerful system feature, but it comes at a price. The paging between disk storage and main memory is processing overhead that can reduce the overall system performance. A little paging will not appreciably hurt performance, but the more paging there is, the more system performance will be reduced. When the paging performed by a virtual memory system gets excessive, the system is said to be thrashing, or spending too much time paging information between disk storage and main memory. Thrashing can be reduced by increasing the amount of main memory in the pSeries system through the installation of memory expansion options described in Chapter 2. Increasing the size of the main memory system will provide more room for programs and data, reducing the amount of virtual memory paging. The virtual memory concept is implemented in most of today’s computer systems to some degree. pSeries systems implement their virtual memory scheme through a concept called single-level storage. This means that in pSeries systems, no distinction is made between disk storage and main memory. All storage appears to be one homogeneous sea of main memory that is accessed in exactly the same way. This consistency provides for a simple and efficient virtual memory implementation that is the same for programs, data, temporary holding areas, and so on. Other virtual memory implementations must create and manage separate address spaces, and they often treat programs differently than they do data, for example. The simplicity of the single-level storage design results in a consistent and more complete virtual memory system than that of most other implementations.

104

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Symmetric Multiprocessor Implementation The design of pSeries symmetric multiprocessor systems combines functions of both the processor and the AIX 5L operating system, along with complex logic for accessing memory and I/O buses. The basic design of any SMP system (Figure 1.32) involves multiple processors (CPUs) accessing a common, shared set of resources (for example, memory, fixed disk, communication adapters, and operating system). The processors communicate with each other and main memory via a bus. Each processor in the system will be performing separate jobs or running different programs at any one point in time (for example, database access, terminal interaction, or network communication). Figure 1.32 gives you a look inside a symmetric multiprocessing system at a single point in time with several applications running on the system. It is important to say “single point in time” because, in a true multitasking environment, in the next few ticks of the system clock, these applications have an equal chance to be rescheduled on the same or other CPUs in the complex. The applications will also be swapped out when they have exhausted their time-slice to let other programs run.

CPU 1

CPU 2

CPU 3

CPU N

App1a

App1b

App2

AppN

Cache

Cache

Cache

Cache

Bus Main Memory “X”

Figure 1.32.

I/O Disk Printers Adapters ...

Basic design of a typical N-way symmetric multiprocessor.

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

105

A single application program can be designed and tuned to an SMP architecture such that it will subdivide and run on multiple processors in the SMP system at the same time (App1a and App1b in Figure 1.32). However, this takes special design and coding on the part of the programmers, so today, more often than not, programs will be left to run much as they do on a uniprocessor (App2 and AppN), not that this is bad (indeed, SMP systems allow many of these independent applications to run at the same time, each scheduled to a single CPU). However, in this example, App1 should be able to achieve greater overall throughput than if it had been limited to a single processor. Often this throughput is well worth the coding effort for database developers. If you are purchasing a database, however, the development and tuning work has already been done for you. Often, database users will be able to bring forward all of their investment in queries, screens, reports, and so on. They may only require a minor modification or recompilation when moving from the uniprocessor version of the database to the SMP version. As one might expect, this architecture, in which processors are running independent (App2 and AppN) or coordinated (App1a and App1b) tasks, can lead to some natural bottlenecks in performance as programs contend with each other for vital resources such as memory or disk storage. Additional complexities develop as processors start to cache data. Let’s go back to our example in which variable X, stored in main memory, has been modified by App1a and is still resident in the cache of CPU1. Now App1b needs to read variable X. CPU1 and CPU2 now must talk to each other and main memory to be sure to get the correct value of variable X into the cache on each processor. This coordination of current versus stale data between processors is known as cache coherency and is a prerequisite for a chip design to be considered for use in an SMP system. All the processors used in pSeries systems are cache coherent.

Storage Various kinds of storage devices are commonly used in all computers, providing a relatively inexpensive way to store data and programs. Devices with removable media (e.g., CD-ROMs, diskettes, tapes) also make it possible to interchange information between systems. The information stored on these devices can be easily modified or kept unchanged over long periods of time as an archive. Because storage is nonvolatile,

106

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

the stored information remains intact whether the computer is turned on or off. The pSeries systems use four types of storage: diskettes, disk drives, magnetic tape, and optical disks. Let’s look more closely at each of these types of storage. Diskette Storage Diskettes, a portable magnetic storage medium with relatively low capacity and slow performance, are familiar to most readers because they have been used on PCs for years. Although still used in most pSeries systems, diskette drives will probably be phased out over the next few years as new storage technologies such as writable CD-ROMs and DVD-RAMs become more pervasive and as more and more systems are connected via the Internet. The diskette consists of a flexible disk with a magnetic surface permanently enclosed in a square protective outer jacket and is manually inserted into the diskette unit, which spins the circular disk inside the jacket. The read/write head inside the diskette unit makes contact with the spinning disk much as a record player’s needle contacts a record. As the disk spins, the head magnetically reads and writes information on the disk’s surface. Most pSeries systems still offer 3.5-inch diskette drives, but the availability of much higher capacity technologies such as DVD-RAM and writable CD-ROM is beginning to render the diskette obsolete in the server environment. Diskettes allow exchange of information between pSeries systems and PCs because pSeries systems can read or write diskettes (either 720 KB, 1.44 MB, or 2.88 MB) in a format compatible with PC systems running either the DOS or Windows operating systems. Disk Storage All pSeries systems use disk storage—the high-capacity, high-speed magnetic storage devices commonly used in all types of computers from notebook-sized computers to the largest supercomputer systems. Sometimes you will hear the terminology “hard disk” (an old term used to differentiate disk storage from “floppy” diskettes) or “DASD” (IBM parlance for Direct Access Storage Device). We will use the terms “disk” or “disk drive.” The primary function of disk storage is to hold information that must be readily available to the computer system. It contains programs and data, and provides a temporary holding area used by pSeries sys-

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

107

tems. Information in disk storage must be loaded into main memory before the computer system can use it. pSeries systems are available with many different disk configurations. The largest system, the p690, can have about 18.7 TB of disk storage in its I/O drawers—not to mention the possibility of attaching external storage devices for even greater capacity. Disk storage subsystems, which are attached by a cable to a storage adapter in the pSeries server, can significantly expand the disk storage capacity of a pSeries system beyond the maximum internal configuration. Some of these external storage devices will be discussed in Chapter 2. Disk subsystem performance is important to the overall performance of a computer in most applications. This is especially true in virtual storage or LAN server environments in which there is heavy transfer of information between the disk storage and main memory. The performance of a disk refers to the rate at which information can be located and transferred between the disk drive and the disk controller circuitry. As with traditional record albums, information on disk is stored in concentric rings on the disk platter surface. Each ring is called a track. To read information from a disk, the actuator first must move the read/write head to the proper track. The time it takes (on the average) for the actuator to move the read/write head over the proper track (or “seek the track”) is called the average seek time—usually expressed in milliseconds (1/1000 sec). Once the read/write head is located over the right track, it must wait until the disk rotation brings the right part of the track under the head. The time it takes for this to happen (on the average) is called the average latency of the drive, also expressed in milliseconds. Finally, after the proper track and proper part of the track are positioned under the read/write head, the information is transferred between the disk controller circuitry and the disk one bit at a time in a continuous stream as the disk surface passes underneath the read/write head. The speed at which this is done is called the data transfer rate and is expressed in millions of bytes per second (MBps). The shorter the access time and latency, the better. The higher the data transfer rate, the better. All of these factors (and more) determine how the disk subsystem will contribute to or hinder overall system performance. Chapter 2 provides the specifications for the disk drives available for pSeries systems. Each disk drive affects transfers to and from pSeries systems through control circuitry located either on the system board or on an adapter card in one of the PCI slots. Most internal and many external disk drives

108

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

used with pSeries systems attach to Small Computer System Interface I/O controller circuitry. SCSI Disk Storage SCSI (pronounced “scuzzy”) is an industry-standard way of connecting devices (disks, tape, CD-ROM drives, etc.) to computer systems. The SCSI controller circuitry (often more than one controller) resides on the system board in all pSeries systems or on the I/O drawer backplane. Depending on the system configuration and application requirements, SCSI storage devices are often attached via a SCSI adapter card plugged into a PCI or PCI-X slot. In either case, the SCSI controller circuitry is built around a microprocessor specially programmed to implement the SCSI protocol. Figure 1.33 shows how devices are attached to the SCSI I/O controller. Each SCSI-compatible device is attached to a shared cable or bus in a daisy-chained fashion. Up to 15 SCSI devices can share a single current SCSI bus. The original SCSI buses support up to eight devices. In addition to the SCSI I/O controller, these devices can be a single disk unit, a single tape unit, or a controller with up to eight other devices attached. To improve system performance, however, it is better to place pSeries System Unit

SCSI I/O Controller (SCSI Device #0) Microprocessor

Microprocessor

Microprocessor PCI Slot

Disk Drive

Disk Unit (SCSI Device #N)

Figure 1.33. cable scheme.

Tape Drive

Disk Drive

(SCSI Device #2) (SCSI Device #1)

Devices are attached to the SCSI controller via a daisy-chained

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

109

no more than four to six disk drives on any single SCSI I/O controller. Further, tape backup operations can be accomplished more quickly if the tape backup device and the disk unit being backed up do not share the same SCSI I/O controller. When a controlling device, called an initiator (e.g., the SCSI I/O controller), wants to perform an information transfer with another device (e.g., a disk unit), called a target, the initiator arbitrates for control of the SCSI bus. Once the initiator has control of the bus, it issues one of the commands defined in the SCSI standard protocol. While the target device processes the command, the SCSI bus is available for any other SCSI command traffic. When the target device is ready, it gains control of the bus and supplies the requested information along with a completion status indicator to the original initiator. One of the primary differences between SCSI and earlier disk interfaces is that each SCSI device must have local processing capability to participate in the SCSI command protocol. That is, each SCSI device attached to the bus is responsible for doing much of its own processing (e.g., error checking, error correction, and retry of failed operations). Earlier disk interface standards put the responsibility for managing the various devices in a centralized I/O controller rather than distributing the responsibility among the various connecting devices. The advantage of the SCSI approach is that work (e.g., error correction and error retries) is distributed over the processing capabilities of all SCSI devices, which off-load the main computer system and put the work where it can be done most efficiently. Also, activities such as the read-ahead function used in pSeries systems can be implemented completely in the disk unit itself, making it transparent to the pSeries system and the SCSI I/O controller. (“Read-ahead” means that the SCSI disk unit loads extra information read from the disk platter to a buffer area in anticipation of the next request from the SCSI I/O controller.) When the next request comes, if the needed information is already available in the buffer area, it can be sent to the SCSI I/O controller immediately, eliminating the mechanical delays associated with disk drive seek time, latency, and so on. The result is highly efficient transfer of information between the SCSI I/O controller and the disk units. Although we have used the term “SCSI” in this discussion, the reader will have noticed terms like “Ultra-SCSI” and “Ultra3-SCSI” used in descriptions of pSeries systems. Multiple versions of SCSI are used with pSeries systems. The maximum instantaneous transfer rate over the SCSI bus is 4 MBps, whereas SCSI-2 runs at 10 or 20 MBps. Ultra-SCSI transfers at 40 MBps, while Ultra2- and Ultra3-SCSI transfer data at 80 and

110

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

160 MBps, respectively. Because new SCSI implementations are supersets of earlier SCSI versions, command compatibility is preserved and a SCSI device can be controlled by a higher speed SCSI controller, but SCSI bus performance will be constrained by slower devices. The SCSI standards provide three alternative, but incompatible, electrical SCSI bus interface configurations: single-ended, differential, and a new, lower power version of differential called low-voltage differential, or LVD. High-performance disk units and efficient SCSI interface implementations can provide high information transfer rates between the disk units and the SCSI controller. However, the information being transferred must also flow between the pSeries system and the SCSI controller. Efficient transfer between the pSeries and the SCSI controller is just as important as disk seek times and SCSI bus transfer rates. Finally, main memory in pSeries systems acts much like a giant disk cache because of the implementation of single-level storage (discussed earlier in this chapter). In the spirit of the pSeries system’s instruction and data caches, a disk cache is a temporary holding area that contains information likely to be requested next by the active program. When the requested information is in the disk cache, delays associated with a traditional I/O access are eliminated, dramatically improving system performance. Single-level storage reduces the need for a disk cache on the SCSI I/O controller, reducing costs and further eliminating I/O access delays associated with such a disk cache. Chapter 2 will describe the optional SCSI adapters and I/O devices used with pSeries systems. Serial Storage Architecture Disk Storage In July 1995, IBM announced its second generation of serial disks. The architecture was dubbed simply enough Serial Storage Architecture (SSA). Serial Storage Architecture has cost and power requirements that are similar to those of SCSI, but does not require SCSI’s discrete terminators or address switches. It supports up to 96 devices per adapter, whereas SCSI supports only 15, and allows 25 meters between devices on the loop. This gives much more flexibility than the 25-meter total bus length supported by SCSI. Further, fiber-optic extenders support device to device distances up to 10 km. The pSeries attaches to disk subsystems supporting SSA, such as the 7133 disk drawer or deskside. Serial Storage Architecture has reliability and flexibility advantages over earlier topologies because it supports strings, loops, and bridged

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

111

topologies. Loops, in which the ends of the cables can be attached either to the same host adapter or to different host adapters, are the most popular topology today. The signals on the loop rotate in both directions. Figure 1.34 illustrates a typical loop configuration using only two of the ports of a four-port SSA adapter. The loop addresses four hotswappable disk drives (though we could have many more), and its ends are attached to the single adapter. Now let’s try some hypothetical situations to test out SSA’s reliability. Say we lose cable A between the adapter and disk 1; cable B can still address all four drives. Another example could be a failure of drive 2 and the severing of the cables from each side of drive 2 (note that cable severing will not necessarily occur in the event of disk failure because of the bypass electronics). In this case, because signals travel in both directions, availability of drive 1 is maintained through cable A while availability of drives 3 and 4 is maintained through cable B. This is obviously a fairly simple example. System designs can be very complex, with multiple adapters and systems providing a storage system with no single point of failure and high performance as well. For those ready for a challenge, check out Figure 1.35. This illustrates a high-availability, 4-way SSA disk configuration with two loops each containing 16 disk drives. The two loops are depicted by light and dark lines. Imagine the availability and throughput that this configuration provides when all four adapters are in separate pSeries servers. IBM has not built SSA in a vacuum. The architecture has been approved as an industry standard by the ANSI X3T10.1 committee. Serial Storage Architecture is an important high-performance disk technology used with pSeries servers, although its maximum bandwidth of 160 MBps per loop is now matched by Ultra3-SCSI performance. “A” 20 MB/sec Read

20 MB/sec Write

1

Figure 1.34.

2

“B”

SSA Adapter

up to 127 devices

A single SSA loop configuration.

20 MB/sec Read

3

20 MB/sec Write

4

112

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

SSA 4-Port Adapters

Figure 1.35.

SSA Disk Drives

A complex, high-availability, 4-way SSA disk configuration.

However, SSA still has the advantage of very low overhead (typically 6%) and little degradation as additional devices are added, and SSA adapters can support two independent loops with 48 disks on each loop, or 96 disks per adapter. Up to eight pSeries servers can share the same loop, with scalable performance for each system. Throughputs of 600 MBps and 60,000 I/O operations per second have been measured in multihost, dual-loop configurations. Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop and Storage Area Networks In the early 1990s, IBM helped pioneer a networking technology called Fibre Channel Standard (FCS), which was used to connect systems together using optical fibers. These connections allowed high bandwidth (up to 100 Mbps) and long distances (to 10 km) between hosts and other processors or storage systems. Costs were high, however, and FCS saw limited acceptance. To lower costs and broaden the appeal of Fibre Channel, a subset of the technology, known as FC-AL, or Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop, was

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

113

defined to address more modest environments. Two or more devices are connected together using optical fibers (or copper cables, in certain environments) in a closed loop. Data moves around the loop in a single direction, and, much like a shared bus, only one activity occurs on the loop at a single point in time. To transfer data, the initiating device must get control of the loop through arbitration, much like SCSI. FC-AL sends bursts of data at 100 MBps in one direction around the loop. In response to competition from SSA, the FC-AL community added a second, redundant loop to the FC-AL definition. This second loop attaches to the same devices as the first loop and, along with additional switching circuitry, eliminates the single point of failure that is inherent in a single loop. Also, performance improvements can often be achieved with a second loop. However, because of the shared, arbitrated nature of FC-AL, questions remain about its ability to scale and perform as well as SSA in large, complex configurations. FC-AL disks are not used in pSeries servers. A Fibre Channel adapter capable of up to 2 Gbps operation is available for the pSeries. It is used to make connections from host systems to external storage subsystems. As Fibre Channel continues to evolve over the next few years, it will allow multiple systems and multiple vendors to attach hardware to increasingly complex Fibre Channel networks and infrastructure known as fabric. Just as SCSI had to evolve until it became a truly robust, multivendor architecture, Fibre Channel networks are going through similar “growing pains.” Tremendous benefits can be achieved when complex processor and storage systems can be interconnected, managed, and operated in a robust fashion in SANs. This is the direction being followed as user requirements for continuous access to well-managed, protected storage continue to expand. Tape Storage The next type of storage we will cover is magnetic tape, or simply tape. One primary use of tape storage is to keep a backup copy of the information stored on the computer’s disks. In the event of a disk failure, the backup tape can be used to restore the lost information to a new disk unit. The low cost and high recording densities inherent in tape also make it ideal for archiving information to which immediate access is no longer needed. Tape can also be used for distributing programs or transferring information from one computer system to another.

114

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Tape consists of a long flexible strip coated with magnetic material rolled on a reel and placed into a cartridge. In addition to industrystandard half-inch tape reels, there are multiple types of cartridges used with pSeries systems: the 3-inch tape cartridge, the 4-mm tape cartridge, the 8-mm tape cartridge, VXA tape, digital linear tape (DLT), Ultrium tape, and 2-inch Magstar tape. Some of these tape technologies are available for installation in the internal media bays of pSeries systems, while others are available only as external tape units. In each case, a tape unit reads and writes information on the tape much as a cassette recorder records and plays music on audio cassette tapes. The tape unit runs the tape across the read/write head, which is in contact with the tape surface. Electrical impulses in the read/write head are used to transfer information to and from the tape surface. Chapter 2 will explore some of the tape units used with pSeries systems. Optical Storage The final type of storage device we will discuss is optical storage. Optical storage uses laser light and a reflective disk to store information. There are two basic types of optical storage used with pSeries systems: CD-ROM disk drives and rewritable optical disk drives. Let’s briefly look at each type. CD-ROM disk drives use the same technique to store information as audio CDs do. Rather than using magnetics, as with disks, diskettes, and tape, CD-ROM systems use optical techniques to achieve their much higher recording density. A single disk used in pSeries CD-ROM drives can hold about 600 MB of information. That’s enough storage to hold over 300,000 sheets of computer output (or a stack over 90 feet high). The optical disks used with pSeries systems are read only. That is, users can view the information but can’t change it. The information is prerecorded on the disk using specialized equipment and then distributed to users. The primary use of CD-ROM storage is to distribute large amounts of information in a convenient package. For example, the entire library of pSeries and AIX 5L user manuals is stored on a single CD-ROM disk. Not only is this a much easier way to distribute and store manuals, but the electronic method of looking up information in these electronic manuals is much more convenient. Other potential uses for CD-ROM include distribution of program libraries, financial reports, operations manuals, phone directories, or any large (and relatively stable) database.

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

115

The extremely high storage capacity of CD-ROMs can be attributed to the technique used to store the information. When the CD-ROM is first recorded, a laser beam is used to burn tiny patterns on the reflective surface of an optical disk according to industry standards. Later, by bouncing the low-power laser beam in the CD-ROM drive off the optical disk’s surface, a series of mirrors and sensors can read back the information burned into the disk. Although the optical technology lends itself quite well to the information distribution applications mentioned earlier, their limited speed (compared with disks) and inability to record information preclude using CD-ROM disks as normal disk storage. Most pSeries and RS/6000 systems have internal CD-ROM drives. For systems that do not have an internal CD-ROM drive, an external unit (7210 External CD-ROM) is available. These devices will be covered in Chapter 2. Also available on many pSeries systems are DVD-ROM drives, which can read both CD-ROM formatted disks and DVD-ROM disks, including double-sided disks. On some systems, the user has a choice of either CDROM or DVD-ROM as the installation media device. Rewritable optical disk drives use a similar laser-based technique to store information. However, whereas CD-ROM drives can only read information, rewritable optical disk drives can both read and write information on an optical disk. The pSeries options at this time are a 4.7 GB DVD-RAM drive, which can be mounted internally in a media bay, and the 3995 C-Series Optical Library Dataserver, an external device. Rewritable optical disks can be used for information or program distribution just as are CD-ROMs. Although rewritable optical disks are inherently slower than magnetic disk drives, there are specialized applications, such as large databases of images that were originally created by hand and scanned into storage (as opposed to being in digital form), in which they may be used for working data. Expansion Slots The PCI is a local bus that was designed as an intermediate or mezzanine bus. You can think of a mezzanine bus as a major expressway that handles a large volume of high-speed traffic. Once you exit the expressway, things slow down, but you are close to your final destination. The PCI bus is the primary backbone of the I/O subsystem. Aside from the memory subsystem, the microprocessor talks to nearly everything else through the PCI bus. The middleman between the processor and the PCI slots is called a PCI bridge. You may have noticed PCI

116

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

bridge chips in the logic diagrams of several of the pSeries servers earlier in this chapter. pSeries systems are designed with multiple and separate buses for improved I/O throughput. These separate buses can communicate to I/O devices in parallel, thus increasing the rate of information sent to and from the processors. The PCI bus is multiplexed, which means that some pins are used for more than one purpose, depending on the operation being performed or the step of a particular operation. This is a bit more difficult to design, but it results in many fewer pins on each component, meaning that the components are less costly to produce. The PCI bus was also designed from the start to have many autoconfiguration features. This allows new devices to be added without setting jumper switches or having conflicts between adapters. Because of its high performance and emergence in the PC industry, PCI proves to be a solid and cost-effective solution for the pSeries product line. The most recent pSeries servers, including p615, p630, p650, p655, p670, and p690, provide the faster PCI-X I/O slots. PCI-X is an extension to the PCI architecture, doubling the transfer speed from 66 MHz to 133 MHz, thus enabling peak data transfer rates of more than a gigabyte per second. PCI-X slots are backward compatible with older 3.3-volt or universal (i.e., 3.3-volt or 5.0-volt) adapters. Also, all these latest pSeries servers offer hot-plug PCI-X support, a RAS capability that allows an adapter that is not in use by an application to be removed while the system is powered up. In addition, the p650 and the 7311-D10 (on p650) and 7040-61D (p655, p670, p690) I/O drawers provide “blind-swap” hot-plug PCI-X slots. Blindswap technology provides a cartridge that allows the adapter to be installed or removed without moving the system or drawer to a service position. Standard Ports We have already seen that pSeries systems come standard with one or more Ultra-SCSI (or faster) ports. Other ports provided are for serial, parallel, Ethernet 10/100 Mbps or gigabit Ethernet, keyboard, mouse, and HMC interfaces. Ports are the control electronics and connectors accessible from outside the pSeries covers that provide a means of attaching external devices (such as storage, LANs, and printers) to the system without using one or more of the PCI slots. This saves money (no extra adapter is needed for these common interfaces) and preserves

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

117

the PCI slot capacity for users to configure for their particular system environments. Serial ports transfer bytes (one bit at a time) using the asynchronous communications protocol at a rate of up to 38.4 Kbps. They can be used to connect devices such as printers, plotters, external modems, and ASCII terminals. The parallel port uses a 25-pin D-shell connector and transfers bytes of information one byte at a time, or eight bits in “parallel.” This port is an implementation of a widely used industry standard for attaching a printer. Ethernet ports provide industry-standard LAN attachment, and the HMC ports are used when the Hardware Management Console is required for clustering or LPAR. The keyboard and mouse ports provide for the attachment of the Enhanced Keyboard and the three-button mouse. Graphics Images presented on a computer’s display are used to present information to the user. pSeries servers support two-dimensional graphics, which is adequate for graphical user interfaces (GUIs) and for Internet access. As has been stated earlier, many users of pSeries systems will actually be working at a PC attached by LAN to the server. Even for 2D graphics, the quality of images can directly affect the user’s productivity, effectiveness, and enjoyment during a work session. Graphics image quality becomes even more important to workstation users in computer-aided design applications that depend on 3D graphics capability. Let’s take a closer look at 3D graphics, remembering that this discussion applies only to the pSeries 630, the pSeries 640, and the RS/6000 Models 150, 170, and 270. Two hardware elements work together to generate computer graphics: the display (sometimes referred to as a “monitor”) and the graphics adapter (often called a “graphics accelerator”). Most readers are familiar with displays used on their PCs and know generally that they come in different sizes and can display images with different degrees of resolution. They know, too, that the larger the display and the higher its resolution capability, the more expensive it is likely to be. The ability to display graphics at high performance (for rapidly moving images) and with a large range of colors depends even more on the graphics adapter. Graphics adapters are circuit boards that convert the bits and bytes inside the computer system to the electrical signals that are used by the display to create the image you see. The images

118

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

generated by the graphics adapters are made up of patterns of many individual dots on the display, called PELs or pixels, that blend together to form the desired image. This technique is depicted in Figure 1.36. Each individual PEL on the display screen can be independently turned on or off by writing the appropriate bit pattern to its associated location within a special-purpose memory area on the graphics adapter called the frame buffer. The number of PELs represented in the frame buffer determines the number of PELs that make up the image (or resolution of the image) seen on the surface of the computer’s display. The more PELs represented in the frame buffer, the higher the resolution of the image (assuming the display can also support that resolution). The latest 3D graphics accelerators support resolutions up to 2048 by 1536 PELs. The number of bits associated with a single PEL determines how many different colors or how much brightness it can have. The graphics adapters for pSeries and RS/6000 systems support up to 24 bits per PEL

Figure 1.36. (APA) image.

Mechanics of a computer-generated All-Points-Addressable

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

119

(over 16.7 million different colors). A large number of colors can be used for shading to help create the illusion of depth. The more colors that are available, the more realistic the image appears. Using up to 16.7 million colors in a single image is called true color and results in extremely lifelike images. A frame buffer of a given size can be used to represent different numbers of PELs (that is, different resolutions) with different numbers of bits per PEL (that is, different numbers of maximum colors) under the control of the graphics software. Some graphics accelerators have two full-frame buffers. This allows one frame buffer to be displayed undisturbed while the second is updated by the application program. When it is time to display the updated image, the second frame buffer is displayed, allowing the first frame buffer to be updated, and so on. The result of this dual-frame-buffer technique is a smoother transition from one image to another. Because screens are not being displayed at the same time as they are being updated, no transitional clutter is displayed, improving overall image quality. This is especially useful for applications that employ animation. Some other bits associated with each PEL should be mentioned here. The overlay frame is a separate part of the frame buffer used to more quickly overwrite portions of the display screen. If the overlay frame is empty, the image in the normal part of the graphics memory will be displayed in its entirety. If an image (such as some text or a pop-up window) is written to the overlay frame, it takes precedence over what is in the normal part of the frame buffer and is displayed on the screen. Once the overlay frame is reset, the original image is restored automatically. This allows an application program to quickly overwrite sections of the display screen and then restore the original image without having to re-create it. Multiple overlay frames means that each PEL has multiple bits in the overlay frame, which allows the image to be overwritten using more colors. The 3D graphics adapters used with pSeries and RS/6000 workstations are specially designed to generate and manipulate three-dimensional images. In 3D adapters, the area in graphics memory used in the generation of three-dimensional graphics is called the Z-buffer. Although not actually part of the frame buffer itself, the Z-buffer is a specialpurpose memory area that is used for hidden-line and hidden-surface removal. As you rotate a solid pyramid, for example, some of the lines and surfaces that make up the pyramid will begin to fall behind the pyramid itself (Figure 1.37). With the hidden-line and hidden-surface

120

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Line is moving behind pyramid

Direction of rotation

(a)

(b)

Figure 1.37. Example of hidden-line removal. (a) Three edges of the pyramid are visible. (b) As the pyramid rotates clockwise, one of the edges disappears behind the pyramid. The hidden-line removal function of the graphics circuitry automatically removes the hidden portion.

removal function afforded by the Z-buffer, these lines and surfaces automatically disappear as they fall behind the pyramid and reappear on the other side as the rotation continues. The Z-buffer keeps track of what PELs are in front of what other PELs so that only the top PELs appear on the screen at any instant in time. Finally, mask bits are primarily used by the device drivers to improve performance when managing the logistics of creating images. These mask bits simply prevent areas of the frame buffer from being displayed. Alternately, they can be used to modify the colors displayed. When a 3D object is generated, moved, or otherwise manipulated on the display screen, many complex (floating-point) calculations must be performed. The speed at which these calculations can be performed determines how quickly and smoothly the object appearing on the screen can be rotated, moved, enlarged, reduced, and so on. Performance limitations in this area can paralyze a computer system and make it ill suited for graphics-intensive applications such as computer-aided design and publishing. To speed up such graphics calculations and reduce the workload of the main processor, 3D accelerators have on-board spe-

IBM ~ pSeries—An Overview

121

cialized microprocessors. The 3D graphics adapters or accelerators available for these UNIX workstations are the POWER GXT4500P and POWER GXT6500P. The Quiet Touch Keyboard The pSeries systems use the IBM Quiet Touch Keyboard shown in Figure 1.38. This keyboard has the same layout as the keyboard used by IBM’s ASCII displays, the PC family, and the InfoWindow family of displays used with other IBM computer systems. This means that once familiar with this layout, the user will not have to adapt to different keyboard layouts when using other IBM computer equipment. This same keyboard is available in different languages to fill the needs of many different users around the world. The keyboard cable plugs into the keyboard port provided on pSeries systems. Small retractable legs on the bottom of the keyboard can be extended to change the angle of the keyboard if desired.

Mechanical Packaging The overall physical size of the pSeries systems is kept to a minimum, consistent with the size necessary to accommodate greater expansion options. As with other common electronic devices (e.g., cell phones,

Figure 1.38.

The IBM Quiet Touch Keyboard used with pSeries systems.

122

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

hand-held computers, audio system, television sets), there have been very rapid advances in circuit integration and electronic packaging technologies. The use of Very Large Scale Integration (VLSI) and doublesided Surface Mount Technology (SMT) has reduced the overall size of the systems. VLSI is an electronic fabrication technology that allows literally thousands of electronic circuits to be packaged on a single electronic chip. The type of VLSI circuitry used in pSeries computers is less than 3-micron CMOS. (CMOS stands for Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor, which is a type of VLSI circuitry.) CMOS is fairly high-speed circuitry with low power requirements, which reduces overall system power supply and cooling requirements. The advances in circuit density for both logic and memory chips have been supported by innovations in chip packaging and connector technologies. Another significant factor has been the reduction in size (and increase in capacity) of storage devices such as disk drives, diskettes, and tape drives. Several different types of mechanical enclosures are used to house the various elements of pSeries systems. There are floor-standing enclosures, called deskside systems, that allow for quite a bit of expansion in main memory, disk storage, I/O adapters, and peripheral devices, but can be positioned beside a desk in an office environment. Many pSeries systems use another enclosure that complies with industry standards. This structure is a 19-inch rack that can house various drawers, such as the CEC drawer with the system electronics, the I/O drawers with PCI slots and disk drive bays, and drawers for other attached devices. Multiple drawers are installed in one or more racks to build a complete system. Drawer heights are measured in EIA units, which amount to 1.75 inches each. Currently available racks are the Model T00 (36 EIA units) and the Model T42 (42 units). The p655, p670, and p690 systems are designed for 24-inch-wide racks to accommodate the expandability of those servers in a single frame. All pSeries systems are now available only in black, using contemporary industrial design. Availability of features in the traditional off-white color is being phased out. The reasons for this change are to eliminate the cost of releasing the very same functional item in two colors and to reduce inventory costs by maintaining stocks of only one part.

Options and Peripherals

123

2 Options and Peripherals

IBM eServer pSeries systems can be found in diverse environments rang-

ing from research laboratories to retail stores to insurance companies. The activities these various users perform vary widely, and so do their computing needs. pSeries systems can be customized to many environments by selecting the appropriate optional equipment. This chapter describes many adapters and peripheral devices that are commonly used with pSeries systems. Adapters, or feature cards, are circuit boards that are installed in the PCI or PCI-X I/O slots of pSeries systems to provide some additional capacity or function for the system. These feature cards include storage adapters, LAN adapters, graphics accelerators, and cryptographic coprocessors. Peripherals are devices that are installed in or attach to pSeries systems to perform some specialized function. Disk drives, tape drives, printers, and plotters fall into this category. It is helpful to understand IBM terminology for these options. Peripheral devices have specific product numbers associated with them (e.g., the 2104-DU3 Expandable Storage Plus storage subsystem or the 4247 Serial Matrix Printer). Optional features installed in pSeries systems are identified by feature numbers (e.g., the Dual-channel Ultra3SCSI Adapter is feature #6203, and the pSeries 615 1 GB Memory

123

124

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Expansion feature is #4446). Either product numbers or feature numbers are provided for many of the options covered in this chapter.

Memory Expansion Options Nothing seems to grow faster than the computer user’s appetite for main memory. Several different options allow the user to expand the main memory in pSeries computers. However, owing to technical differences inside the systems, main memory expansion options are not interchangeable among all pSeries models. Main memory systems of all currently available pSeries and RS/6000 systems use the Error Checking and Correction (ECC) method to detect and often automatically correct memory problems, as discussed in Chapter 1. The latest POWER4+ servers— p615, p630, p650, p655, p670, and p690—also implement Chipkill memory, decreasing even further the likelihood of a system outage due to memory failure. The following discussion of memory features covers the currently available pSeries and RS/6000 systems.

RS/6000 Models 150 and B50 Memory Expansion The Models 150 and B50 will accommodate up to four ECC 10-ns SDRAM 168-pin DIMMs. The minimum memory configuration is 128 MB, and the default for this is a single 128 MB DIMM. The DIMMs are available in three sizes: 64 MB (#4149), available only on Model 150, 128 MB (#4150), and 256 MB (#4169). It is not necessary to install these DIMMs in pairs. The maximum memory of 1,024 MB (1 GB) can be achieved with four of the 256 MB DIMMs (#4169).

RS/6000 Model 170 Memory Expansion The Model 170 will accommodate up to four ECC 10-ns 200-pin SDRAM DIMMs, which must be installed in pairs. The minimum memory configuration is 256 MB, consisting of two 128 MB DIMMs. The DIMM pairs are available in three sizes: 256 MB (2 × 128 MB) (#4110), 512 MB (#4120), and 1,024 MB (#4121). The maximum

Options and Peripherals

125

memory is 2 GB, which is achieved with the installation of two of feature #4121 (four DIMMs).

pSeries 610 Models 6C1 and 6E1 Memory Expansion The p610-6C1 and p610-6E1 use 200-pin 10-ns SDRAM DIMMs, which must be installed in pairs. There is one 16-position (8 DIMM pairs) memory card. The minimum memory configuration is 512 MB, consisting of two 256 MB DIMMs. DIMM pairs are available in two sizes: 512 MB (2 × 256 MB, #4120) and 1,024 MB (2 × 512 MB, #4121). The maximum memory is 8 GB, which is achieved with the installation of eight of feature #4121 (16 DIMMs). Note that features #4120 and #4121 are also used in the p640-B80 and in RS/6000 Models 170 and 270.

pSeries 615 Models 6C3 and 6E3 Memory Expansion The p615-6C3 and p615-6E3 use 200-pin 8-ns DDR (Double Data Rate) SDRAM DIMMs, which must be installed in quads in the eight DIMM slots on the system planar. The p615 supports Chipkill memory. Each memory feature is a quad, so the maximum is two features. The minimum memory configuration is 1 GB, consisting of four 256 MB DIMMs. DIMM quads are available in four sizes: 1 GB (4 × 256 MB, #4446), 2 GB (4 × 512 MB, #4447), 4 GB (4 × 1,024 MB, #4448), and 8 GB (4 × 2,048 MB, #4449). The maximum memory is 16 GB, which is achieved with the installation of two of feature #4449 (eight DIMMs).

pSeries 630 Models 6C4 and 6E4 Memory Expansion The p630-6C4 and p630-6E4 use 208-pin 8-ns DDR SDRAM DIMMs, which are installed in quads in the eight DIMM slots on each processor card. The p630 supports Chipkill memory. Each memory feature is a quad, so the maximum per processor card is two features. The minimum memory configuration is 1 GB, consisting of four 256 MB DIMMs. DIMM quads are available in four sizes: 1 GB (4 × 256 MB, #4451), 2 GB (4 × 512 MB, #4452), 4 GB (4 × 1,024 MB, #4453), and 8 GB (4 × 2,048 MB, #4454). The maximum memory for systems with one processor card (1- or 2-way p630s) is 16 GB, which is achieved

126

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

with the installation of two of feature #4454 (8 DIMMs), while a 2- or 4-way p630 with two processor cards can accommodate four of feature #4454 (16 DIMMs) for a maximum memory capacity of 32 GB.

pSeries 640 Model B80 and RS/6000 Model 270 Memory Expansion The p640 and the Model 270 use pairs of 200-pin 10-ns SDRAM DIMMs. Memory is installed on one or two memory expansion cards (#4098), at least one of which is required. Each of these memory cards has 16 slots for the DIMMs. There are three memory features: 256 MB (two 128 MB DIMMs, feature #4110), 512 MB (two 256 MB DIMMs, feature #4120), and 1,024 MB (two 512 MB DIMMs, feature #4121). These features can be installed in any combination on up to two cards. The minimum configuration for the p640-B80 and the Model 270 is 256 MB (one 256 MB memory feature), and the maximum configuration is 16 GB, or two memory cards, each populated with eight 1,024 MB features.

pSeries 620 Models 6F0/6F1 and pSeries 660 Models 6H0/6H1 Memory Expansion There is an interesting and somewhat complicated twist to memory expansion on the p620-6F0/6F1 and p660-6H0/6H1 systems. To save cost on an entry-level machine, the 1-way processor package (called a “book”) contains eight DIMM slots on the processor board and a single 16position memory board (see Figure 1.8b). The eight DIMM slots on the processor board can be populated in pairs, to a maximum of 8 GB. If more memory capacity is required, then the currently installed DIMMs must be moved to the memory board and the next increment be made as a quad. If the memory board is used, then the DIMM slots on the processor board may not be populated. All DIMMs in each pair or quad must be the same capacity. The maximum memory on a 1-way system is 16 GB, using 1,024 MB DIMMs, and the minimum capacity is 256 MB. For 2-, 4-, and 6-way systems, memory is installed on either one or two 16-position memory boards, allowing a maximum memory of 32 GB. Since DIMMs must be installed on the memory boards in quads,

Options and Peripherals

127

the minimum memory capacity for 2-, 4-, and 6-way systems is 512 MB. The first memory board must be full before a second board can be ordered. All DIMMs in each quad must be the same capacity. The memory features come as pairs of ECC 10-ns 200-pin SDRAM DIMMs and are as follows: 256 MB of memory (2 × 128 MB DIMMs, feature #4110), 512 MB of memory (2 × 256 MB DIMMs, feature #4119), 1,024 MB of memory (2 × 512 MB DIMMs, feature #4100), and 2,048 MB of memory (2 × 1,024 MB DIMMs, feature #4137). Maximum memory is achieved using the 2,048 MB feature #4137 16 times (32 DIMMs) for 32 GB total. Memory features for the p620 and p660-6H0/6H1, except feature #4110, support Chipkill memory technology.

pSeries 650 Memory Expansion The p650 uses 208-pin 8-ns DDR SDRAM DIMMs, which are installed in quads in the eight DIMM slots on each processor card. The p650 supports Chipkill memory. Each memory feature is a quad, so the maximum per processor card is two features. The minimum memory configuration is 2 GB, consisting of four 512 MB DIMMs. DIMM quads are available in three sizes: 2 GB (4 × 512 MB, #4452), 4 GB (4 × 1,024 MB, #4453), and 8 GB (4 × 2,048 MB, #4454). The maximum memory for systems with one processor card (2-way p650s) is 16 GB, which is achieved with the installation of two of feature #4454 (8 DIMMs), while 2-, 4-, and 8-way p650s can accommodate 32 GB, 48 GB, and 64 GB, respectively, using two of feature #4454 on each processor card. Note that these memory features are also used on the p630 system.

pSeries 655 Memory Expansion The p655 uses memory cards that plug into four memory slots on the system planar. Memory feature sizes of 4 GB (#4456) and 8 GB (#4457) are available with both POWER4 and POWER4+ MCMs, and a 16 GB memory feature (#4458) is available with POWER4+ MCMs only. The maximum standard memory capacity available is 32 GB, using four 8 GB memory cards (feature #4457) on 1.1 GHz and 1.3 GHz POWER4 systems or two 16 GB cards (feature #4458) on 1.5 GHz and 1.7 GHz POWER4+ systems. By special request, up to four of the

128

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

16 GB memory cards can be supported on selected p655 systems with POWER4+ processors.

pSeries 660 Model 6M1 Memory Expansion Memory for the p660-6M1 is installed as one or two memory boards, each with 32 DIMM slots. The feature number for this board is #4073. The machine must be populated with at least 2,048 MB (2 GB) of memory with a maximum of 64 GB, 32 GB on each of two boards. The memory modules are ECC 10-ns 200-pin SDRAM DIMMs. Memory is installed in groups of eight DIMMs (octals). All DIMMs in a particular octal must be of the same capacity, but different octals can have different capacity DIMMs. A minimum of eight memory DIMMs then must be installed on each memory board. p660-6M1 memory is accessed via two related but distinct ports. Balancing memory across two memory boards allows memory accesses in a coordinated parallel fashion and can be utilized to obtain optimal performance. Configurations containing a single memory board will function properly, but the memory will only be accessed through one port and will not make use of the full memory bus bandwidth. Plans for future upgrades should be taken into account to obtain optimal performance without limiting future memory expansion—in other words, it is preferable to install fewer of the larger DIMMs rather than more of the smaller ones. Memory features for the p660-6M1, except features #4110 and #4133, support Chipkill memory technology. The memory DIMM features are as follows: •

1,024 MB memory (8 × 128 MB DIMMs) (#4133)

•

2,048 MB memory (8 × 256 MB DIMMs) (#4134)

•

4,096 MB memory (8 × 512 MB DIMMs) (#4135)

•

8,192 MB memory (8 × 1,024 MB DIMMs) (#4136)

For model conversions from p660-6H1 only, the following features may be ordered only in sufficient quantity to complete the required octal when combined with like-capacity memory DIMMs being migrated:

Options and Peripherals

•

256 MB memory (2 × 128 MB DIMMs) (#4110)

•

512 MB memory (2 × 256 MB DIMMs) (#4119)

•

1,024 MB memory (2 × 512 MB DIMMs) (#4100)

•

2,048 MB memory (2 × 1,024 MB DIMMs) (#4137)

129

pSeries 670 and pSeries 690 Memory Expansion The pSeries 670 and the pSeries 690 use the same memory packaging technique, although the p690 supports some features that are not available on the p670. Both systems use Chipkill memory for high memory reliability. Minimum memory capacity on a p670 is 4 GB and on the p690 is 8 GB. The p670 maximum is 256 GB, and the p690 maximum is 512 GB. The p670 and p690 are complex systems, and the rules for populating memory are more involved than for other pSeries servers. We will first list the number of memory slots available for each system configuration and then make a few remarks about memory balancing. As described in Chapter 1, the pSeries 690 can have one to four MCMs (MultiChip Modules). Each MCM location has two memory slots, so there is a maximum of eight memory slots per system. The physical packaging requires that four of these slots use “inward-facing” memory cards, and four use “outward-facing” memory cards. Hence, there are two feature numbers for each memory card used in the p690: •

4 GB memory card, inward facing (#4196)

•

4 GB memory card, outward facing (#4197)

•

4 GB memory card, 567 MHz, inward facing (#4480) (POWER4+ only)

•

4 GB memory card, 567 MHz, outward facing (#4481) (POWER4+ only)

•

8 GB memory card, inward facing (#4181)

•

8 GB memory card, outward facing (#4182)

130

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

•

8 GB memory card, 567 MHz, inward facing (#4482) (POWER4+ only)

•

8 GB memory card, 567 MHz, outward facing (#4483) (POWER4+ only)

•

16 GB memory card, 567 MHz, inward facing (#4484)

•

16 GB memory card, 567 MHz, outward facing (#4485)

•

32 GB memory, 567 MHz, inward facing (#4486)

•

32 GB memory, 567 MHz, outward facing (#4487)

•

64 GB memory, 567 MHz, inward facing (#4488)

•

64 GB memory, 567 MHz, outward facing (#4489)

Note that both high-speed (567 MHz) and older (500 MHz) memory cards are available in the capacities of 4 GB and 8 GB. Memories of both speed can coexist in a system, but all memory will run at the lower 500 MHz rate. 567 MHz memory must be used with 1.7 GHz POWER4+ MCMs. If the lower speed memory is used, it will seriously degrade the performance of that processor technology. The pSeries 670 has only two MCM locations, each with two memory slots, so it has only four memory slots per system. The p670 requires only the inward-facing memory features. The memory feature numbers for the p670 are as follows: •

4 GB memory card, inward facing (#4196)

•

8 GB memory card, inward facing (#4181)

•

16 GB memory card, 567 MHz, inward facing (#4484)

•

32 GB memory, 567 MHz, inward facing (#4486)

•

64 GB memory, 567 MHz, inward facing (#4488)

Memory must be installed in identical pairs, and memory card sizes should be balanced as closely as possibly (identical is best) across all

Options and Peripherals

131

populated MCM locations. The reasons are that each memory slot is used by certain processors on each MCM and that the p670 and p690 use memory in a round-robin fashion across the four memory controllers on an MCM, referred to as “memory interleaving.” If memory were not installed in pairs, then all the memory traffic would be routed through only half the control circuitry available on the MCM, thus reducing the available bandwidth from processors through L3 cache to memory and affecting system-level performance. IBM provides detailed memory configuration rules in its on-line sales manual. Of course, servers of the power and complexity of the pSeries 670 and the pSeries 690 require careful planning by competent technical personnel to ensure that the configuration, including the memory subsystem, is designed optimally for the intended applications workloads. A good reference available on the IBM Web site is a white paper entitled “IBM eServer pSeries 690, Configuring for Performance.” In addition to configuring memory for optimum performance, this paper also discusses how best to configure the I/O subsystem. The companion Web site (www.maxpress.com) for this book has a link to IBM information such as this paper.

Storage Options You were introduced to various types of storage devices in Chapter 1. The following types of storage devices for pSeries systems are described in this section: •

Diskettes

•

Internal disk drives

•

External disk systems

•

RAID systems

•

SANs (Storage Area Networks)

•

Optical disks

•

Tape drives

132

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Diskette Storage Diskettes provide a convenient way to transfer small amounts of information (up to 1.44 MB) between computer systems or to make backup copies of small data files. A 3.5-inch 1.44 MB diskette drive is standard on many pSeries systems. However, diskettes are declining in popularity, especially in the server market, where CD-ROM and DVD-ROM drives are standard, and where many systems are managed and software is installed over a LAN or the Internet.

Internal Disk Drives All the focus pSeries systems and most other pSeries and RS/6000 servers come standard with some amount of magnetic disk storage. The only exceptions are the pSeries 660 Models 6H0, 6H1, and 6M1, which are designed to use external storage subsystems such as the IBM 2104 Expandable Storage Plus (Ultra3-SCSI) or IBM 7133 Serial Disk System (SSA). However, even those servers offer optional internal boot disk capability. Chapter 1 provides information on the standard disk configurations and specifications. Figure 2.1 shows some of the internal disk options used with pSeries systems. The reason multiple feature numbers are used for ordering some drives is that the physical packaging (disk carrier) of that drive may vary depending on the pSeries server in which it is supported or there may be some small technical differences among the disk technologies used. You might also refer back to Chapter 1 for the differences between SCSI types. Disk technology, in terms of both capacity and rotational speed, is changing rapidly. The smallest drive now offered on many pSeries systems is 36.4 GB, and 15,000 rpm drives are starting to replace the 10,000 rpm drives. It is anticipated that 18.2 GB disk drives will be withdrawn from marketing in 2003.

External Disk Systems External disk systems are units that contain multiple drives and attach to pSeries systems through a storage adapter, providing significant additional storage expansion capacity in compact rack drawer or tower packages. Both SCSI and SSA external units are available. These systems

Options and Peripherals

Formatted Capacity (GB)

Feature Numbers

36.4 36.4 36.4

3162 3169 3119 3128 3129 3264 3273 3277 3280 3118 3163 3265 3274 3278 3281 3275 3276

36.4 36.4 73.4

73.4 73.4 146.8

Figure 2.1. drawers).

133

Avg. Seek Latency (msec)

Avg. Time (msec)

Rotational Speed (rpm)

Attachment Data Rate (MBps)

Interface

5.0 5.0

3.0 3.0

10,000 10,000

80 80

SSA Ultra2 SCSI

6.02 4.82

2.99 2.99

10,000 10,000

160 160

Ultra3 SCSI Ultra3 SCSI

3.7

2.0

15,000

160

Ultra3 SCSI

5.38 4.82

3.0 2.99

10,000 10,000

160 160

Ultra3 SCSI Ultra3 SCSI

3.7

2.0

15,000

160

Ultra3 SCSI

4.94

2.99

10,000

160

Ultra3 SCSI

Disk drives available for pSeries systems (including I/O expansion

provide high-density rack storage solutions, as differentiated from the storage systems discussed under “Storage Area Networks” later in this chapter, which provide integrated storage control functionality like RAID. 2104 SCSI Expandable Storage Plus The IBM 2104 Expandable Storage Plus (EXP Plus) provides flexible, scalable, and low-cost external SCSI disk storage for pSeries servers. The EXP Plus is available in two types of packages—the Model TU3 is a standalone deskside tower; the Model DU3 is designed to be mounted in a 19-inch rack and offers optional 48-volt DC power for telecommunications customers. Each can hold up to 14 Ultra3-SCSI (160 MBps) 10K rpm drives of 18.2 GB, 36.4 GB, 73.4 GB, or 146.8 GB, allowing a maximum capacity of 2.055 TB. The 2104 also supports 36.4 GB and 73.4 GB 15K rpm drives. Drives can be hot-plugged while the unit is operating. Redundant power is available as an option for each model.

134

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

The EXP Plus can attach to pSeries servers by using a variety of SCSI adapters: SCSI-2 Fast and Wide, Ultra-SCSI, Ultra2-SCSI, and Ultra3-SCSI. For the highest performance and availability, the enclosures can be combined with the IBM PCI 4-channel Ultra3-SCSI RAID adapter (#2498), enabling Ultra3-SCSI 160 MBps performance and multiple RAID options. The EXP Plus can be enhanced to attach to a second pSeries server by adding an additional, optional SCSI port. Distances up to 20 meters are supported between disk enclosures and pSeries servers using Ultra3-SCSI adapters. High Availability Cluster Multiprocessing (HACMP) is supported for the EXP Plus enclosure when used with appropriate adapters in HACMP-supported configurations. 7133 TotalStorage® Serial Disk System The IBM 7133 TotalStorage Serial Disk System employs IBM’s Serial Storage Architecture, which was discussed in Chapter 1. The 7133 comes in both rack-mounted (Model D40) and deskside tower (Model T40) configurations. The models are functionally similar and can be populated with up to 16 autodocking, user-replaceable, SSA disk drive modules. The available 10K rpm disk drive modules are 18.2 GB, 36.4 GB, 72.8 GB, and 145.6 GB. Also available are 15K rpm disks in capacities of 36.4 GB and 72.8 GB. Maximum storage capacity per 7133 system is 2.3 TB (up to 14 TB per host adapter). These SSA systems provide redundant power and cooling units that are autodocking (like the drives) and user replaceable. In addition to their capacity and reliability, these systems provide outstanding performance. The 7133 subsystem can attach to pSeries computers via multiple 4-port adapters including the Advanced Serial RAID Adapter (#6230). The SSA Fast-Write Cache card (#6235) can be added to the Advanced adapter for even greater performance in single- or dual-host environments. A single 4-port adapter can support up to 96 drives, which would be housed in six 7133 units (each unit accommodates 16 drives). Up to 16 adapters may be used within a single pSeries server, so it is possible to configure very large SSA RAID arrays. The 7133 can have independent connections to different pSeries servers. This capability, along with the mirroring support in AIX, makes high-availability pSeries configurations possible. That is, with proper application programming and by properly configuring pSeries systems, 7133 systems, and AIX, a system can be configured that can continue to

Options and Peripherals

135

function in the face of a single component failure. With the optional Advanced SSA Optical Extender, 7133 systems separated by up to 10 km can be used for remote data mirroring, providing protection of data from physical disasters such as fire or hurricane. Overall, the 7133 provides excellent reliability, performance, price/performance, capacity, and ease of use. It should be considered in any environment where moderate to large amounts of high-performance disks are required. The 7133’s high number of I/O operations per second per adapter also make it ideal for transaction processing environments in which a large number of requests are made for small blocks of data. 7204 External Disk Drive Figure 2.2 shows an IBM 7204 External Disk Drive, which can be used with all models using either a single-ended Ultra-SCSI, Ultra2-SCSI Differential, or Ultra2-SCSI LVD (low voltage differential) or LVD/DE adapter. Unlike the external disk systems previously described, the 7204 provides a single 18.2 GB or 36.4 GB disk drive attached to a SCSI I/O controller via a cable. For environments with stringent data security requirements, the 7204 unit can be detached from the pSeries system and from its electrical socket nightly to allow storage in a vault. The drives are shock-mounted to help prevent damage as they are moved about.

Figure 2.2.

7204 External Disk Drive.

136

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

7212 Model 102 TotalStorage Storage Device Enclosure For situations in which the number of media bays available in the pSeries server is limited, or when it is desirable to consolidate the media devices into a single location, the 7212-102 Storage Device Enclosure provides two media bays in a 1U rack drawer that mounts in a 19-inch rack. It is supported on all pSeries systems and currently available RS/6000 systems, with the exception of the pSeries 655, 670, and 690, which use 24-inch-wide racks. There is a media drawer available for the p670 and p690, which is designed for a 24-inch-wide rack. The 7212-102 can accommodate any two of the following storage devices: •

Digital Data Storage 4-mm (DDS-4) tape drive

•

40H CD-ROM drive

•

These devices are the same technologies as those described later in this section for the 4-mm tape, CD-ROM, and DVD-RAM drives available as features to be installed internally in a pSeries system. See those sections for further technical information.

RAID Technology RAID technology is used in many systems, especially those with large amounts of disk storage, to help improve reliability and data integrity. The acronym RAID originally stood for Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive Disks, since the technology was developed to provide improved data integrity for systems using inexpensive disk drives designed for the personal computer (PC) market, but now many people say that RAID stands for Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks, since the disks used in modern RAID arrays are state-of-the-art devices—not just the least expensive disks available. Whichever definition of the acronym you use, the important point is that RAID technology allows data to be written and stored on two or more drives so that, in the event of a disk failure, data integrity can be maintained. Three different RAID types are popular. These types are designated by numbers: RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 5 (Figure 2.3). Other RAID types are occasionally used, but we’ll focus on these. In RAID 0, data gets written to sequential sets of disks in a technique called striping. By

Options and Peripherals

RAID 0: Striping

137

Data 1

A File Data 2

Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4

Data 3

Data 4

RAID 5: Striping with Distributed Parity Data 1 Data 4 Data 7

A File Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Data 8 Data 9

Data 2 Data 5 Parity (7–9) Data 3 Parity (4–6) Data 8 Parity (1–3) Data 6 Data 9

RAID 1: Mirroring A File Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4

Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4

Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4

Figure 2.3.

Examples of RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 5 configurations.

138

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

doing this, more read/write disk heads can be active on a single data file at any one time. However, should a drive fail, that data would be lost. RAID 5 also stripes data, but it maintains parity data as well. In RAID 5, data that might be lost because of a disk failure can be rebuilt by using the parity data. RAID 5 will obviously cost more because of the extra disk space required, but it provides a better balance between performance and data protection/availability. RAID 1, often called mirroring, provides the best performance and data protection in AIX environments. Two or three separate copies of all data are kept on separate disk drives. In the event of a disk drive failure, AIX uses another copy of the data from a surviving disk. Although performance is higher than RAID 5, RAID 1 also requires the use of more disks. Options also exist to combine multiple RAID functions such as data striping with mirroring (RAID 0+1) using hardware and/or software. RAID 10, which combines striping (RAID 0) and mirroring (RAID 1), offers some performance advantages over mirroring by itself, but not all RAID controllers provide the RAID 10 mode of operation. AIX provides software implementations of striping or mirroring using host CPU processing power. Hardware RAID adapters and external controller-based systems off-load the CPU processing and implement the RAID function in their own microprocessors. There are two ways to provide external storage with RAID capability in pSeries systems. One method is to attach the 2104 Expandable Storage Plus and the 7133 Serial Disk System described in the previous section using a RAID controller, such as the PCI Ultra2-SCSI and Ultra3-SCSI RAID adapters or the SSA multi-initiator/RAID adapter. The electronics to control the RAID functions are on the adapter, not in the external disk system. The other alternative is to attach an external disk system that incorporates RAID technology within the unit itself and is attached to the pSeries system by a non-RAID adapter. Several disk systems with integrated RAID capability are available from IBM.

Storage Area Networks Networks of host servers and high-capacity, high-performance storage systems are known as storage area networks, or SANs. SANs provide users of large systems with the capability of sharing, managing, and protecting vital business information in widely dispersed locations. The design of a SAN system is complex and requires careful evaluation of many factors, including such things as the applications and amount of

Options and Peripherals

139

data traffic to the storage server, the type and location of host systems to be attached, data integrity and system availability requirements, and communications costs. A wide variety of IBM storage servers designed for use in SANs, coupled with other building blocks such as Tivoli Storage Manager software, Fibre Channel switches, and storage gateway products, allow pSeries servers to be used in high-performance, scalable SAN environments. A key technology for SAN connectivity is a serial communication protocol called Fibre Channel Standard (FCS) and a lower cost implementation called Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL). Fibre Channel-based products were first offered for IBM UNIX servers in 1999, and the breadth of offerings has grown rapidly over the past four years. In addition to the storage servers themselves, other SAN building blocks include Fibre Channel adapters, wiring hubs, switches, and network management software. SANs are a complex and evolving technology, and a wide variety of SAN products are available from various suppliers. The key is to have an “open” system solution, meaning that heterogeneous systems and operating systems can operate together and share—if not a particular file—at least the storage subsystems and connecting network. IBM’s SAN architecture integrates many technologies—including server operating systems, Fibre Channel adapters, hubs and switches, storage subsystems with RAID controllers, and tape, optical, and SAN management software—to provide reliable, scalable, and versatile storage solutions. SANs can vary in scope and, therefore, in the definition of openness. SANs may involve multiple servers using the same operating system and located in a single building or campus. Or, they could include servers dispersed over extended distances and requiring interoperability with servers from multiple vendors. A discussion of this topic is beyond the scope of this book, but the reader will find a link to the IBM Web site on SAN storage on the “Members Only” Web site at www.maxpress.com. There are many storage subsystem and SAN products available from IBM. We will describe a few of the key storage servers designed for either the SAN environment or for attachment to a single pSeries server. IBM 3552 TotalStorage FAStT Fibre Channel Storage Servers The FAStT family of storage servers offers a wide range of solutions, beginning with the entry level FAStT200, going through the midrange FAStT500 and FAStT600, and on to the very expandable FAStT700

140

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

and FAStT900 systems. The differences among the systems are maximum storage capacity, attachment speed, redundancy of RAID controllers, and the ability to partition storage. We will describe a few of the choices. Figure 2.4 shows a typical FAStT rack enclosure, and Figure 2.5 is a table comparing the FAStT systems. The 3552 TotalStorage FAStT200 Storage Server (Figure 2.6) is a low-cost, Fibre Channel-attached storage system, offering 10 hotswappable disk drives per 3U rack drawer, expandable to 60 drives using five EXP500 disk expansion enclosures or 66 drives with four EXP700 expansion enclosures. Using the 146.8 GB disks, the FAStT200 provides up to 9.6 TB of storage with integrated RAID 0, 1, 3, 5, and 10 capability. Both single- and dual-controller models are available. The 3552 TotalStorage FAStT500 Storage Server (3552-1RU) is a midrange Fibre Channel RAID disk system consisting of a 4U rackmount controller drawer and up to 16 3U EXP700 disk expansion enclosures, each with 14 hot-swappable disk drive bays. Its dual active RAID controllers support RAID levels 0, 1, 3, 5, and 10. It provides

Figure 2.4.

IBM TotalStorage FAStT Fibre Channel Storage Server.

Options and Peripherals

Specifications

FAStT200

RAID Controllers RAID Levels Maximum cache size Fibre Channel host interface speed Number of host ports Maximum number of disks Maximum disk capacity (with expansion units) Disk I/O operations/sec Reads Writes Performance (MB/sec) Reads Writes Base/maximum partitions

FAStT500

141

FAStT600

FAStT700

FAStT900

Single Dual or dual 0,1,3,5,10 0,1,3,5,10 256 MB 1 GB

Dual

Dual

Dual

1 GBps 2 66

1 GBps 8 224

2 GBps 4 42

2 GBps 8 224

2 GBps 8 224

9.6 TB

32.8 TB

6.1 TB

32.8 TB

32.8 TB

4,600 1,300

20,000 5,018

17,500 4,100

38,000 8,500

53,200 10,900

170 106

380 239

392 292

390 240

790 600

8/16

16/64

4/64

64/64

8/64

0,1,3,5,10 0,1,3,5,10 0,1,3,5,10 512 MB 2 GB 2 GB

Figure 2.5.

IBM FAStT Fibre Channel Storage Servers.

Figure 2.6.

IBM TotalStorage FAStT200 Storage Server.

142

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

up to 1 GB of write-back cache with battery backup to help ensure data integrity. The FAStT500 offers these FC-AL disks: 15K rpm (18.2 GB, 36.4 GB, and 73.4 GB) or 10K rpm (36.4 GB, 73.4 GB, and 146.8 GB). The FAStT500 with sixteen EXP700 expansion enclosures has a capacity of more than 32 TB of RAID storage. The EXP500 expansion enclosure is also supported. Designed for high-availability configurations, the FAStT500 includes two hot-swappable controller units, redundant hot-plug power and cooling, and standard battery backup. Multiple minihubs on both the host and drive sides allow various ways to connect both remote servers and the drives. Remote servers can be attached using Fibre Channel switches, and the drives can be configured in redundant loops. Both long-wave and short-wave fiber-optic connections allow distances of up to 10 km (6.2 miles) to the host or switch. The high-end FAStT900 Storage Server (1742-90U) supports 2 Gbps fibre channel attachment and provides 772 MBps of disk throughput. The dual RAID controllers support all RAID levels, and 2 GB of battery-backed mirrored write cache is standard. The FAStT900 offers up to 32.8 TB of storage and supports advanced functions such as dynamic volume expansion, 64 storage partitions, and replication functions such as FlashCopy7 and Remote Mirroring. Its capacity, performance, availability features, and advanced functions make it ideal for multiplatform SAN environments. IBM 2105 TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server The Enterprise Storage Server (ESS), shown in Figure 2.7, is the flagship of the IBM SAN storage family. With capacity for up to 384 disks, it provides as much as 55.9 TB of high-performance, RAID 5 and RAID 10 protected shared storage and is an ideal storage consolidation solution for multiple concurrently attached servers, such as pSeries servers and SP nodes. In addition, mainframes, non-IBM UNIX servers, and Intel-based servers can be used with an ESS server. The ESS system provides exceptional levels of performance and reliability. The ESS can be partitioned among simultaneously attached AIX, iSeries, mainframe, Intel-based and other UNIX servers, enabling users to easily manage and share storage resources. Host interfaces include Ultra-SCSI, Fibre Channel, ESCON, and FICON. ESS is designed for 24 × 7 operation, with no single point of failure. Its extensive fault-

Options and Peripherals

Figure 2.7.

143

The IBM 2105 Enterprise, also known as “Shark.”

tolerant design features include redundant power, cooling, adapters, buses, and processor complexes. Using IBM TotalStorage Expert, a network-enabled integrated storage management tool, systems administrators can analyze and manage ESS storage and related tape library resources among the attached servers as requirements change. This Webbased software allows users to monitor and manage the ESS from anywhere in the world using company-secured network and intranet connections.

144

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Optical Disk Storage Optical disk drives use laser beams and reflective disks to record and read information. Two general types of optical disk storage are used with pSeries systems: internal devices such as CD-ROM drives and optical libraries, which are used in applications to eliminate storage of massive amounts of paper or microfiche records. CD-ROM drives use the same technique to read information as audio compact discs do and can be used for many different information distribution applications. They are limited to reading information prestored on the CD-ROM disk and cannot change that information. Rewritable optical disk drives can read and write information on optical disks. Internal Optical Drives The internal CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, and DVD-RAM drives are designed to be installed inside the pSeries system in half-high 5.25-inch media bays. On most pSeries models, a CD-ROM drive is standard. For the p650, either a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM may be selected, while on the p615 all media devices are optional. CD-ROM disks store 650 MB of information and attach to a SCSI I/O controller inside the pSeries system. An audio output jack is provided on the bezel of the CD-ROM drive. The 48× (max) CD-ROM (#2633) provides a data transfer rate of 7,200 KBps, but older systems had slower CD-ROM models, such as 16× (2,400 KBps) or 32× (4,800 KBps). Most pSeries servers offer the 16×/48× IDE DVD-ROM drive (#2634). On the p650, a 16×/48× SCSI DVD-ROM drive (#2635) with the same specifications is offered. This device can read 650 MB CD-ROM disks at 7,200 KBps, as well as 4.7 GB and double-sided 9.4 GB DVD-ROM disks at rates of over 22 MBps. It can also read Type II DVD-RAM disks. Although this very versatile device is compatible with most DVD disks, it does not support DVD video. The new p615 uses an 8×/24× IDE Slimline DVD-ROM drive (#2640) with the same compatibility characteristics, but which has a slightly slower interface. Also available on pSeries servers is an internal DVD-RAM drive (#2623). This is a multifunction device capable of reading and writing 4.7 GB and 9.4 GB DVD-RAM disks and of reading both CD-ROM and CD-recordable disks. It is a 1× DVD write device (1,350 KBps) and a 2× DVD read device (2,705 KBps). It provides 24× performance (3,600 KBps) as a CD-ROM device. The DVD-RAM goes in a media bay of

Options and Peripherals

145

the pSeries system and is attached to a SCSI-2-capable port. The DVD-RAM drive may be used for boot/install from CD-ROM disks and for backup/restore using DVD-RAM disks. In the past, tape devices were the only media option for doing backup and restore. But the DVD-RAM provides the ability to boot/install and to backup/restore using a single media device. 7210 External DVD-RAM Drive The 7210 Model 025 External DVD-RAM Drive is a self-contained package designed to sit beside a pSeries system. It provides an externally attachable method (SCSI-2) of adding DVD-RAM capability to pSeries systems. Its characteristics are generally the same as those listed above for the internal DVD-RAM device. This external device is more likely to be useful on older RS/6000 systems, which do not offer the internal DVD-RAM option available on pSeries servers. 3995 Optical Library Dataservers The 3995 Optical Library Dataservers are rewritable optical libraries that attach directly to pSeries systems, providing on-line access to vast amounts of information at a lower cost than magnetic disks. Documents, forms, and records currently in paper form can be scanned into an electronic format and stored in an optical library such as the 3995, along with data traditionally stored on microfiche or microfilm. This on-line data can be retrieved, displayed, and printed, and it can be stored on optical disk cartridges for long-term (500 years for WORM) data archival needs. Multiple users can access the same data simultaneously, and optical storage can be the intermediary medium between disk and tape in hierarchical storage management applications. Various models of 3995 Optical Library Dataservers offer a range of performance and capacity. The multifunction optical drives used in the 3995 can concurrently support a number of different optical disk formats (Permanent Write-Once-Read-Many [WORM], Continuous Composite WORM, and rewritable cartridges) and capacities. The unformatted data storage capacity of Model C62, for example, is 270 GB (52 cartridge slots at 5.2 GB per cartridge). Each drive within a 3995 requires a separate SCSI address and supports a SCSI-2 interface in both singleended and differential-ended modes.

146

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Internal Tape Storage Computer systems are woven deeply into today’s business, academic, and scientific communities, and usually become the core of day-to-day operations. The information stored on the computer is a valuable asset and therefore must be protected. Magnetic tape storage provides a costeffective and efficient means of backing up the information on the disk drives of computer systems. Included among the internal tape storage options that can be used with pSeries systems are the following. 20/40 GB 4-mm Internal Tape Drive (#6158, #6185) The 20/40 GB 4-mm Internal Tape Drive is a 5.25-inch half-high tape drive that provides high capacity for save/restore and achieve functions. This tape drive uses IBM 4-mm data cartridges and is compression capable, providing a capacity of up to 40 GB (with 2× compression)—a significant increase in capacity over the previous 12/24 GB 4-mm internal tape drives (when using DDS-4 media). It provides a data transfer rate of 3 MBps in native mode and 6 MBps with typical compression across a SCSI-2 interface. It provides compatibility across the following modes: 4 GB mode (read/write), 8 GB compression (read/write), 12 GB mode (read/write), 24 GB compression (read/write), 20 GB mode (read/write), and 40 GB compression (read/write). 80/160 GB 8-mm Internal Tape Drive with VXA Technology (#6120, #6169) The 80/160 GB Internal Tape Drive with VXA technology uses VXA tape data cartridges and is anticipated ultimately to replace 4-mm tape technology, since the capacity is four times greater and data rates are twice as high. However, at the moment, pSeries supports both 4-mm and VXA tape. This tape drive uses a helical scan with a rotating read/write head. Its data rate is 6 MBps in native mode and 12 MBps in compression mode. 60/150 GB 16-bit 8-mm Internal Tape Drive (#6134) The 60/150 GB 16-bit 8-mm Internal Tape Drive (#6134) is a 5.25-inch device that can be installed inside a broad range of pSeries systems. This tape drive uses IBM 8-mm data cartridges and is compression capable,

Options and Peripherals

147

providing a capacity of up to 150 GB, a 375% increase over the previous 20/40 GB 8-mm tape technology. Data rates range from 12 MBps in native mode and 30 MBps with compression. It attaches via a SCSI-2 wide port on the pSeries system. The 6134 also provides backward compatibility with many earlier generation 8-mm tape cartridges.

External Tape Options For smaller systems, external tape drives are often the easiest way to back up or install the system. For larger systems with hundreds of gigabytes of data, a single tape drive is simply not sufficient either in capacity or speed to fill the bill. For these systems, larger tape libraries that can automatically load many tape cartridges into multiple tape drives provide an excellent solution. 4-mm Tape Options The 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT) employs an advanced helical scan recording technology. In helical scan recording, tape passes over the tape drive’s recording head at an angle, creating thousands of densely packed diagonal tracks. The 4-mm technology fills the gap between 8-mm and 3-inch tape. 7206 External 4-mm Tape Drive Model 220 The 7206 External 4-mm Tape Drive is an external device that can be used with all pSeries models. It is a self-contained device designed to rest beside a system. It is attached to the pSeries via a cable to a SCSI port and gets its power from a standard electrical socket. The 7206-220 is primarily used for disk backup, data archiving, and information distribution. It provides 20 GB cartridge capacity, expandable to a compressed capacity to 40 GB using DDS-4 and either Ultra-SCSI or low-voltage differential (LVD) interfaces. 7206 External Tape Drive Model VX2 The 7206-VX2 is an external tape drive offering the emerging VXA tape technology mentioned above for the internal tape drive (#6120). It uses VXA tape cartridges and offers 80 GB native and 160 GB com-

148

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

pressed capacity. Data rates for native and compressed modes are 6 MBps and 12 MBps, respectively. 7332 4-mm Tape Autoloader The IBM 7332 4-mm DDS-3 Tape Autoloader Models 220 and 110 provide outstanding tape storage capacity for save and restore operations using the DDS-4 and DDS-3 formats, respectively. The Model 220 uses 20 GB cartridges in a six-cartridge magazine to store up to 240 GB of data with compression or 120 GB without compression. The 7332 Model 110 uses 12 GB cartridges to obtain 48 GB of storage capacity with the four-cartridge magazine. With 2× compression, the Model 110 autoloader can contain up to 96 GB with the four-cartridge magazine. Compression values are data and application dependent, so actual results may vary. The 7332 can read and write tape cartridges in either compressed or uncompressed format and support data transfer rates of 1.1 MBps to 6 MBps, depending on the model. Its magazine indexing time (the time to unload one cartridge and load another) is less than nine seconds. For backing up amounts of data greater than 240 GB, one of the high-performance TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Library systems should be considered. 7207 Model 122 External 3-Inch Cartridge Tape Drive The 3-inch technology has been widely adopted throughout the PC and workstation communities, with a number of accepted standards for Quarter-Inch Serpentine (QIC) recording formats. This “serpentine format” gets its name from the fact that the tape passes through a single head assembly until one track has been written to the end of the tape. The head then “snakes” down to the next track, and the drive reverses the tape. This approach makes for a relatively simple design and contributes to the superior reliability of 3-inch tape devices over 4-mm or 8-mm tape drives. The 7207-122 provides up to 4 GB (8 GB typically with compression) of data storage per cartridge and a sustained data transfer rate of 380 KBps (760 KBps with compression). For compatibility, the Model 122 can read and write tapes in multiple QIC formats. The Model 122 attaches to a host’s adapter via a SCSI-2 SE fast/wide cable to the Model 122’s 68-pin connector.

Options and Peripherals

149

7208 Model 345 External 8-mm Tape Drive The 7208-345 External 8-mm Tape Drive is a 5.25-inch device that can be used with all pSeries models. Of course, many pSeries servers offer an internal 8-mm tape option (#6156). The 7208 is a standalone device designed to be placed beside a pSeries system and attached to the pSeries systems through a SCSI port. It can be used for data interchange with other systems and for data backup. The Model 345 uses a cartridge capable of natively holding up to 60 GB of information. In addition, the Model 345 supports a data-compression function that allows up to 150 GB of data to be stored on a single cartridge. It supports a maximum information transfer rate of 12 MBps in normal mode and 30 MBps when data compression is being used.

DLT Options 7205 Model 440 Digital Linear Tape Drive The 7205-440 employs DLT8000 drive technology and is designed for users who have large amounts of data to back up and/or limited time for system backup. It is read/write compatible with previous DLT tape technologies. Each cartridge can hold up to 40 GB of data (80 GB compressed) and provides an Ultra2-SCSI LVD data rate of 6 MBps (12 MBps compressed). 7205 Model 550 Digital Linear Tape Drive The 7205-550 also employs DLT8000 drive technology, but offers four times the capacity of the 7205-440 at a data rate up to 16 MBps using an Ultra2-SCSI LVD interface. It is read/write compatible with previous DLT tape technologies. Each cartridge can hold up to 160 GB of data (320 GB compressed). IBM TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Libraries The latest family of LTO (Linear Tape—Open) products offered by IBM is the TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Library family, which use Ultrium 2 tape drives. LTO tape is a new technology, considered to be an excellent alternative to DLT, 8-mm, 4-mm, or 1/4-inch tape drives for streaming

150

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

data applications such as backup. The LTO specification was jointly developed by IBM, Hewlett-Packard, and Seagate. The products described below use the Ultrium 2 data cartridges with capacities of 200 GB or 400 GB compressed, but they can read and write the previous generation Ultrium cartridges. IBM’s TotalStorage LTO Ultrium products are supported by leading storage management software suppliers, such as Tivoli, Legato Systems, and VERITAS Software. IBM TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Library 3582 The Ultrium Tape Library 3582 is an entry-level LTO Ultrium tape automation offering, designed for small to medium-sized companies. It features one or two LTO Ultrium 2 tape drives and 23 cartridge slots plus an I/O cartridge slot. It has a barcode scanner for verifying and inventorying cartridges. With high-capacity Ultrium 2 cartridges, the maximum storage capacity of the 3582 is 4.8 TB native and 9.6 TB compressed, with data transfer rates of 35 MBps native and 70 MBps compressed. It can either be mounted in a 19-inch rack or used in a standalone configuration. The 3582 offers one or two host attachments— either Ultra3-SCSI or 2 Gbps Fibre Channel. It supports a wide range of IBM and non-IBM systems, including simultaneous attachment of heterogeneous servers. IBM TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Library 3583 The Ultrium Tape Library 3583 is scalable from one to six Ultrium 2 tape drives and comes in three models with capacities for 18 cartridges (3583-L18), 36 cartridges (3583-L36), and 72 cartridges (3583-L72). The Model L72 also offers a 12-cartridge I/O station. Like the 3592, the 3583 uses Ultrium 2 data cartridges, has a barcode scanner, offers Ultra3-SCSI and 2 Gbps Fibre Channel host attachment, and supports data transfer rates up to 70 MBps. Maximum capacities range from 7.2 TB (3583-L18) to 28.8 TB (3583-L72). IBM TotalStorage UltraScalable Tape Library 3584 The UltraScalable Tape Library 3584 is a datacenter-class tape automation system designed for use in high-end environments, such as pSeries 690 installations. Since it supports heterogeneous servers and operating systems, a pSeries server could be just one of several systems

Options and Peripherals

151

sharing the 3584 tape library. It can scale up to six library frames with 12 Ultrium 2 tape drives per frame. The 3584 can handle up to 496 TB (992 TB compressed) of archival information and, with all 72 tape drives operating, can transfer data at an aggregate rate of up to 19.4 TB per hour. It uses both Ultra3-SCSI and 2 Gbps Fibre Channel attachment, and offers many design features to ensure high availability.

IBM TotalStorage 2-inch Tape Libraries IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Although the newer LTO Ultrium tape technology offers many advantages for pSeries systems, IBM continues to offer 2-inch tape automation systems. IBM introduced this technology in its mainframe products in the 1980s, and it has become a mainstay for many businesses. The TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 (formerly known as the 3590 Magstar Tape Subsystem) shown in Figure 2.8 provides high levels of performance and capacity. It uses a 16-track serpentine longitudinal recording technique along with improved compaction technology. It uses a 10-cartridge Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF), with each cartridge providing capacity for 40 GB of uncompressed data. This can be tripled with compression, for a total capacity of 1.2 TB in the Model E11, and can be mounted in a pSeries rack. The Model E1A is used within a 3494-B10/B20 Tape Library (discussed next) for even greater tape capacity. The 3590 has an uncompressed data transfer rate of 14 MBps, making it the fastest tape drive available for pSeries systems. The 3590 can be simultaneously attached to multiple systems, including iSeries, pSeries, HP, NT, SGI, Cray, and Sun systems via a SCSI-2 differential fast/wide interface. IBM 3494 TotalStorage Virtual Tape Server Models B10 and B20 The TotalStorage 3494 Virtual Tape Servers (formerly called 3494 Tape Library Dataservers) are scalable automated 2-inch tape libraries designed to automate tape operations such as save/restore, migration of data between direct access storage devices and tape, and other mass data applications. These VTS model servers enhance tape backup performance by creating up to 64 virtual tape drives in a tape volume cache, which is a RAID-5 protected disk array. The virtual volume is then writ-

152

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Figure 2.8.

IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590.

ten as a logical volume to an attached TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590, and a copy of the virtual volume remains in cache in the 3494 VTS for fast data access if needed. The 3404-B10 provides four to six tape drives and 648 GB (1,296 GB compressed) of tape volume cache. Model B20 can accommodate six to 12 drives and 2,592 GB (5,184 GB compressed) of tape volume cache. These products are supported on many operating systems, including AIX 5L.

SCSI I/O Adapters Small Computer System Interface adapters (called controllers when integrated into the system planar) were introduced in Chapter 1. Figure 2.9 summarizes the SCSI capabilities available for the pSeries. These adapters manage the data flow between the computer system and other

Options and Peripherals

153

Feature Code

Bus Type(s)

Maximum Data Rate (MB/sec)

RAID Support

Dual Channel Ultra3 SCSI

6203

LVD & SE

160

N

Internal & External

Universal Differential Ultra SCSI

6204

Diff.

40

N

External

Single-Ended Ultra SCIS

6206

SE

40

N

External

4-Channel Ultra3 SCSI RAID

2498

LVD

160

Y

Internal & External

IBM SCSI Adapter

Figure 2.9.

Connection

SCSI adapter summary.

devices (e.g., auxiliary storage devices). These controllers are specialized processors that do most of their work independent of the main processor. Most pSeries systems have SCSI capability built into the system planar. Adapters, however, are installed in a PCI slot inside the computer and attach via cable to the auxiliary storage. The adapter uses one address.

SCSI Adapter Cards The following adapters are available for pSeries servers to attach the SCSI devices discussed earlier in this chapter. There are many older PCI SCSI adapters that may be supported but are no longer available. However, these latest adapters can support all types of SCSI devices. The SCSI bus protocol functions so that even if an adapter is capable of Ultra3-SCSI speed (160 MBps), it can still support older, lower speed devices. However, if a lower speed device is attached on the bus, then the performance of all devices attached to that bus cannot be any faster than the slowest device. There are available for pSeries servers a variety of cable options to allow attaching SE and differential devices to these adapters.

154

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Dual-Channel Ultra3-SCSI Adapter (#6203) This adapter provides two Ultra3-SCSI (160 MBps) buses, each of which can be either internal and external. It occupies one 64-bit PCI bus slot and, being a 64-bit adapter, provides excellent throughput for highperformance applications. The adapter negotiates with each device on each channel to run at its maximum speed. External devices default to 20 MBps (to ensure bus signal quality), but can be Ultra3-SCSI speed if the external device supports that rate. The two SCSI buses are independent, so they could run at different speeds, depending on the attached devices. To fully utilize the power of this adapter, devices must support Ultra3-SCSI LVD attachment. As for all SCSI installations, cabling limitations may reduce the number of possible devices below the supported maximum of 15. The adapter conforms to Ultra3-SCSI documentation and uses a mini-68-pin Very High Density Cable Interconnect (VHDCI) connector.

Universal Differential Ultra-SCSI Adapter (#6204) This adapter provides one SCSI-2 (20 MBps) or Fast-20 Ultra (40 MBps) bus that supports both internal and external devices. It occupies one 32-bit PCI bus slot. It is a “universal” PCI adapter, which means that it can operate in either 3.3-volt or 5.0-volt PCI slots. This capability allows it to be used in all pSeries servers—including the newer ones, which have only 3.3-volt PCI slots, and the older ones, which offer 5.0-volt PCI slots. The adapter negotiates with each device on the bus to run at either 20 MBps or 40 MBps. External devices default to 20 MBps (to ensure bus signal quality) but can be operated at Fast-20 Ultra speeds if the external device supports those speeds. Cabling limitations may reduce the number of possible devices below the supported maximum of 15. The adapter conforms to SCSI-2 and Fast-20 Ultra documentation (X3T9.2/90-048), and uses a shielded 68-pin connector.

PCI Single-Ended Ultra-SCSI Adapter (#6206) This PCI Single-Ended Ultra-SCSI Adapter is a good solution for large block data transfers (greater than 64K bytes) to multiple disks, since it can transfer data at rates up to 40 MBps. It supports 15 internal devices

Options and Peripherals

155

and 15 external devices. However, if single-ended devices are attached to the external port of this adapter, then both ports will automatically be run at 20 MBps to preserve signal quality on the external bus. The adapter conforms to SCSI-2 and Fast-20 Ultra documentation (X3T9.2/90-048), and uses a shielded 68-pin connector.

PCI 4-Channel Ultra3-SCSI RAID Adapter (#2498) The PCI 4-Channel Ultra3-SCSI RAID Adapter (#2498) is a non-bootable high-performance Ultra3-SCSI RAID Adapter providing RAID 0 (data striping), 1 (mirroring), and 5 (striping with parity protection) capabilities that can address up to 60 Ultra3-SCSI disk drives on four independent SCSI buses. This adapter has two internal and four external independent Ultra3-SCSI buses. Two of the external ports are shared with the internal ports, so those ports may be used either for internal attachment or for external attachment, but not for both. If this adapter is attached to the internal backplane of the pSeries server, its performance will be limited by the maximum speed supported on that backplane. To increase the data writing performance, a 128 MB fast-write cache that utilizes nonvolatile RAM is provided as a standard, resident part of the adapter. During the unlikely event of a PCI 4-Channel Ultra3-SCSI RAID Adapter failure, a replacement adapter can be installed and the fast-write cache can be removed from the failing adapter and installed in the new adapter to maintain data integrity. The 128 MB fast-write cache can provide a significant improvement in data throughput and response time during certain write sequence operations when compared to adapters without a fast-write cache.

Integrated SCSI Controllers Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) controllers are integrated onto the planars of all the currently available pSeries and RS/6000 systems. Since these controllers do not consume an adapter slot, they provide significant value in terms of both function and PCI slot utilization. Based generally on the time at which the pSeries system was announced, both the number of integrated controllers and their SCSI function will vary.

156

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

For example, the new pSeries 615 Models 6C3 and 6E3 offer dual Ultra3-SCSI controllers for attaching internal devices. The older pSeries 660 Model 6M1 offers one Ultra-SCSI controller for internal devices (runs at SCSI-2 F/W speed of 20 MBps due to internal backplane limitations) and one Ultra2-SCSI external controller (80 MBps). And the still older RS/6000 Model 150 offers only one Ultra-SCSI controller (40 MBps) for attaching internal devices. This significant level of SCSI attachment capability integrated into the base system electronics is, like the increases in processor power and memory density, another example of the impact of the very rapid advances in large-scale integration of logic circuitry on the value of pSeries servers.

SSA Adapters Like SCSI adapters, there have been several earlier Serial System Architecture (SSA) adapters for RS/6000 and pSeries servers, some of which are supported on current pSeries models. However, the only available adapter for attaching SSA disk drives to pSeries servers is the Advanced SerialRAID Plus SSA Adapter (#6230), which offers the most current level of SSA attachment capability.

Advanced SerialRAID Plus SSA Adapter (#6230) This SSA RAID adapter supports up to two loops of 48 devices (a total of 96 disks), with an instantaneous data transfer rate of 160 MBps per loop. The adapter can be configured for several modes of operation. In 8-way or eight-initiator non-RAID mode, up to eight adapters can operate on the same loops of disks, thus allowing multiple server hosts to share loops of SSA disks. The adapter also allows 2-way or two-initiator RAID 1 (mirroring), RAID 0+1 (striping with mirroring), and RAID 5 (striping with distributed parity) modes, as well as single-initiator RAID 0 operation. So this adapter provides the necessary functionality for shared data access and for system failover in high-availability configurations. The adapter supports hot spares in RAID 5 and RAID 0+1 modes, as well as system boot from a non-RAID SSA disk. The 6230 Advanced SerialRAID Plus Adapter accepts both a 32 MB Fast-Write Cache Option Card (#6235) and a 128 MB Fast-Write Cache Option Card (#6231). These fast-write caches improve write performance

Options and Peripherals

157

in RAID 5, RAID 0+1, and non-RAID modes; this option is particularly important in RAID 5 mode. The larger cache (#6231) is required to provide full 32 MB fast-write capacity when in dual-initiator mode.

Advanced SSA Fibre-Optic Extender (7133 Feature 8851) This is a particularly interesting way to distribute SSA disks in a campus environment and consists of a pair of short cables with a standard SSA connector at one end and a dual-bayonet ST connector at the other. It includes the circuitry to convert the electrical SSA signals to optical signals. Two multimode optical fibers (not included) are required to replace a single copper cable. The 8851 SSA Fibre-Optic Extender is designed for situations in which SSA disks need to be more than 25 meters, but not more than 10 km, apart. For the 7133 Serial Disk System Models D40 and T40, SSA160 (160 MBps instantaneous) data transfer is supported up to 10 km away, depending on the type of fiber-optic cable installed. For other SSA subsystem configurations the limitations are 2.4 km maximum distance and SSA80 (80 MBps) data transfer rate.

Communications Options This section will provide a quick communications tutorial and then an overview of communications options available for pSeries systems. These options are either feature cards installed in an adapter slot or external controllers attached to the pSeries system. With these communications options, pSeries systems can be attached to external devices or in a variety of network environments using local area network (LAN) or wide area network (WAN) technologies. Chapter 4 describes how these options can be used to allow pSeries systems to participate in various communications configurations.

Communications Interfaces/Protocols—A Road Map One of the easiest areas in which to get confused in today’s computer environment is communications. This section will serve as a quick communications tutorial providing you with the background necessary to

158

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

understand the differences among the various communications options covered in this chapter. A communications line can be thought of as a telephone wire or wireless link between two or more computer systems across long distances, or as a cable between a computer and peripheral devices in the same room, such as an ASCII terminal or a printer. By using multiple types of communications lines, information and host system access can be provided to users in many locations. To be attached to a communications line, the pSeries system must first have the proper electrical interface. The term “interface” refers collectively to the connector, electrical voltage levels, connector pin functions, and so on that are provided for the attachment to a communications line. We will discuss options that use the EIA-232D, EIA422A, MIL-STD 188-114, CCITT X.21, CCITT V.35, Ethernet, and Token-Ring interfaces. For our purposes, it is not necessary to understand exactly what all these cryptic names mean. Simply know that different types of interfaces are necessary to support different types of communications. In addition to the different interfaces, you must also know about communications protocols to be conversant in computer communications. Just as there are different rules of grammar and punctuation in English, French, and other languages, there are different rules for various types of computer communications. In computer communications, a set of rules is called a communications protocol. The protocols of most interest for our purposes are the async, bisync, SDLC, X.25, CSMA/CD (IEEE 802.3), and Token-Ring (IEEE 802.5). Each of these different protocols has the same basic goal of moving information from one place to another efficiently and reliably. Each protocol has advantages and disadvantages, and the proper choice depends on system requirements in the areas of transmission speed, cost, and compatibility with the other devices in the network. At all times, however, all devices using a given communications line must be using the same protocol. The async protocol (short for asynchronous) is a low-speed, lowcost communications method once very commonly used, but now used mainly for legacy devices such as ASCII terminals and hand-held devices such as barcode scanners or personal organizers. But the async protocol is a good place to start in understanding the fundamentals of communications protocols. With async, individual bytes of information are transmitted (one bit at a time) with no fixed relationship between bytes. Figure 2.10 shows one way a byte might be packaged before it is

Options and Peripherals

159

Asynchronous Communications Data Organization 7 bits of user data (e.g., ASCII code)

Start bit

Parity bit

Stop bit

Figure 2.10. Example data format used in ASCII asynchronous communications.

sent over an async communications line. The start bit tells the receiving end that information is coming down the line. The user’s data follows the start bit. The parity bit is used by the receiving end to check for transmission errors in the user’s data. Finally, the stop bit signifies the end of the transmission of the character. This is just one example of how information might be transmitted over an async line. Since the async protocol has been used for many years, some types of equipment use slightly different data organizations. The specific organization used must be established at both ends of the communications link before communications can begin. Next is the bisync protocol (short for Binary Synchronous Communications, or BSC). The “synchronous” means that a special character preceding the information synchronizes the receiver with the incoming information. This synchronization allows many bytes of information to be sent as a single block, in contrast to the asynchronous protocol, in which transmission occurs one byte at a time. The ability to send blocks of characters makes bisync more efficient than the asynchronous protocol. Bisync is an older communications protocol used by various kinds of equipment and different types of computers, including IBM’s System 360 and 370 mainframes. As a result of its past popularity, many of today’s systems still use bisync. The Synchronous Data Link Control protocol is basically an updated version of bisync. As with bisync, SDLC is a synchronous communications protocol. However, SDLC is a more flexible protocol that is part of IBM’s Systems Network Architecture (SNA), which is a set of communications standards published by IBM that was used for many years as a road map to ensure that compatible communications are provided for in current and future computer systems and software. SNA

160

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

has mostly been replaced by today’s Internet Protocol (IP)-based communications. The X.25 protocol is an industry standard used in the packetswitched networks available to the public. Whereas more traditional communications networks are based on analog (or voice-type) communications signals, packet-switched networks use digital (or computerlike) communications signals. Because computer information is naturally in digital form, packet-switched networks are better able to carry computer information and can move the information more quickly. The X.25 protocol used on packet-switched networks splits the information (using the SDLC protocols as a packaging format, for example) into small groups of digital data called packets. Each packet is then sent through the most economical and available route to its destination elsewhere in the network. Because each packet is routed in the most efficient way, overall information flow is improved over conventional techniques. X.25 is fully supported in IBM’s Systems Network Architecture (SNA) and Internet Protocol. The Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect protocol is a protocol used on some Ethernet LANs to move information around the network in an orderly fashion. Its name is a mouthful, but really it’s quite a simple protocol. In fact, we follow this protocol in our everyday telephone conversations. There, too, only one person can speak at a time, or neither is clearly understood. One party waits for the other to finish before beginning to speak. The phone line thus carries only one party’s voice at a time, so the message is clear. This protocol handles the times when two nodes start transmissions simultaneously the same way two people do when both begin talking at the same time during a telephone call. Both stop talking and begin again a few seconds later, hoping that this time one begins sooner than the other. Similarly, with the CSMA/CD protocol, if two (or more) nodes begin transmitting at the same time, the messages “collide” on the network. If such a collision occurs, all nodes stop transmitting and begin again after a pause of random length. Almost all Ethernet LANs today are connected through a network of hubs and switches, rather than on an Ethernet bus, as was originally the concept. The CSMA/CD protocol is still used to negotiate among the nodes connected to a hub. But at the next level in the LAN hierarchy, the Ethernet switch handles the contention among all the nodes without using the CSMA/CD protocol. The Token-Ring network is another type of local area network. The Token-Ring protocol passes packets of information around the ring from

Options and Peripherals

161

node to node in a continuous circle. These packets are called message frames. A unique frame, called a token frame, controls access to the ring. When a node receives a frame, it checks to see if it is a message or a token frame. If it is a message frame, the node examines the destination address (see Figure 2.11) to see if the message is intended for that

PC

zSeries pSeries

pSeries

Message Frame

pSeries Token Frame Control info

Destination address

Source MESSAGE address

Trailer symbol

Token info

Trailer symbol

Figure 2.11. The token-ring network uses a messsage frame to move information around the network in an orderly fashion.

162

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

node. If the message is not intended for that node, the message frame is passed on unchanged to the next node in the ring. If the frame received by a node is a token frame, the node knows that the network is idle and that it may send a message frame if it has information to transfer. After it sends a message frame, the node then sends a token frame to indicate that the ring is again inactive and ready to carry information. With this understanding of interfaces and protocols, let’s look at the specific communications options available for pSeries systems.

Asynchronous Communications Adapters 8-Port Asynchronous Adapter EIA-232/RS-422, PCI Bus (#2943) The 8-Port Async Adapter allows for the attachment of up to eight asynchronous (async) devices, such as ASCII terminals and ASCII printers. All eight ports are software programmable to support EIA-232E or RS422A protocols at 230 KBps. Async devices can be attached via an EIA232E cable up to 200 feet (61 meters) long, and the RS-422A interface supports cables up to 4,000 feet (1,200 meters) long. Some larger systems, such as the pSeries 660 Model 6M1, support up to 32 async adapters, so it is possible to configure support for more than 250 terminals. 128-Port Asynchronous Controller, PCI Bus (#2944) A more efficient way to connect large numbers of async terminals is with the 128-Port Asynchronous Controller (#2944). This subsystem provides attachment for a high concentration of asynchronous lines (up to 128) from a single bus slot, giving the ability to serve a large number of users of EIA-232 or RS-422 devices such as terminals, printers, and modems. Two 2.4 Mbps (megabits per second) synchronous channels link the adapter to a maximum of eight 16-Port Remote Async Nodes (RANs). Up to four RANs can be linked to each synchronous channel. The most recently announced RANs provide 16 EIA-232 (#8137) or 16 RS-422 (#8138) ports, yielding a total of 128 ports in a maximum configuration. Existing RANs with feature numbers #8130, #8134, or #8136 can also be used with this adapter. If these RANs are connected to the synchronous channel, the data rate drops down to 1.2 Mbps. For the best results, keep the previous and new RANs on separate synchronous channels.

Options and Peripherals

163

Figure 2.12 shows how these elements work together. First, the 128Port Async Adapter is installed in a pSeries PCI slot. It is then attached to one to eight Remote Async Node 16-Port Concentrator boxes, providing up to 128 async ports for ASCII terminals and printers. The concentrator boxes communicate with the 128-Port Controller using a synchronous protocol. This allows the concentrator boxes to be attached to the pSeries system either locally or over a communications link (e.g., a leased telephone line) using synchronous modems.

ASCII terminal

ASCII terminal

ASCII printer

EIA-232 D cable

RJ-45 to DB-25 Converter Cable

ASCII terminal

To ASCII terminals

To ASCII terminals

16-Port Concentrator

16-Port Concentrator ASCII printer

16-Port Concentrator EIA-232 D cable 128-Port Async Controller

Leased phone line Synchronous Synchronous Modem Modem

pSeries System

16-Port Concentrator

Remote location 16-Port Concentrator

ASCII terminal ASCII printer

Figure 2.12.

128-Port Async Controller.

...

164

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

LAN Communications Adapters All pSeries systems can participate in Ethernet and Token-Ring local area networks. Although a Token-Ring adapter is still available, TokenRing LAN is being phased out in favor of the industry-standard Ethernet technology. In fact, all the pSeries and RS/6000 servers, except the p670 and p690 servers, have at least one integrated Ethernet controller. The new p615 has an integrated Gigabit Ethernet controller and one 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port.

Ethernet Adapters All of these adapters allow a pSeries system to connect to an Ethernet Version 2 or IEEE 802.3 LAN. Ethernet networks initially transferred information at a rate of at least 10 Mbps using the CSMA/CD protocol discussed earlier. This speed has increased to 100 Mbps and to gigabit (1,000 Mbps) capability in recent years. Two types of connection are now common—Category 5 (CAT-5) unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) and fiber. Older cards supported thick (50-ohm) or thin (RG-58A/U) coaxial cable, but now a faster Ethernet standard has emerged that allows rates of 100 Mbps and 1,000 Mbps using Category 5 cabling. Figure 2.13 summarizes the Ethernet adapters available for pSeries systems. Gigabit SX Ethernet PCI Adapter (#2969) The IBM Gigabit SX Ethernet PCI Adapter (#2969) provides a 1 Gbps full-duplex Ethernet connection using a 1000 Base-SX fiber connection to an Ethernet switch. This adapter provides full 64-bit operation and requires a 64-bit PCI slot in the host pSeries server. The adapter is supported by both AIX 5L, v5.1 and v5.2, and AIX v4.3. When used with AIX 5L, this adapter offers a function called “large send” in which the resegmentation of TCP transmissions is off-loaded to the adapter, thus enhancing throughput and reducing processing load on the host server. 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet PCI Adapter (#2975) The IBM 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet PCI Adapter (#2975) provides a full-duplex Ethernet connection up to 100 meters long at speeds up to 1 Gbps using CAT-5 UTP cabling. For optimum performance, this adapter should be located in a 64-bit PCI slot. Like the Gigabit SX

Options and Peripherals

165

Feature Code

Speed (MBps)

10/100 Ethernet PCI Adapter II

4962

10/100

10BaseT or 100Base-TX (UTP)

Universal 4-port 10/100 MBps Ethernet

4961

10/100

10BaseT or 100Base-TX (UTP)

Gigabit Ethernet SX

2969

1,000

1000Base-SX (Fiber)

10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet

2975

10/100/1,000

10/100/1000BaseTX (UTP)

Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI-X Adapter

5700

1,000

1000Base-SX (Fiber)

10/100/1000Base-TX PCI-X

5701

10/100/1,000

10/100/1000BaseTX (UTP)

2-Port 10/100/1000 Base-TX Ethernet PCI-X

5706

10/100/1,000

(2) 10/100/1000 Base-TX (UTP)

2-Port Gigabit Ethernet PCI-X

5707

1,000

(2) 1000 Base-SX (Fiber)

Ethernet Adapter

Figure 2.13.

Connection

pSeries Ethernet adapters.

Ethernet Adapter (#2969), it supports the “large send” function when running AIX 5L. Another important capability of this adapter is that it supports the AIX Network Install Manager (NIM), so systems managers can install software over the Ethernet—an important consideration in the operation of multiple server environments. IBM Universal 4-Port 10/100 Ethernet Adapter (#4961) The IBM Universal 4-Port 10/100 Ethernet Adapter (#4961) is designed for situations where a limited number of PCI slots exist and maximum port density to multiple Ethernet attachments is required. It is a 64-bit, 33 MHz PCI adapter that can operate in either 3.3-volt or 5.0-volt PCI

166

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

slots. Each port has its own RJ-45 connector to Category 3 (CAT-3), for 10 Mbps operation, or Category 5 (CAT-5), for 100 Mbps operation, UTP cable. It supports network boot and AIX Network Install Manager. If the number of available PCI slots is not a limitation and for situations where maximum throughput is required, the single-port Ethernet adapters (features #2968 or #4962) are the preferred solution. 10/100 Mbps Ethernet PCI Adapter II (#4962) The 10/100 Mbps Ethernet PCI Adapter II (#4962) is a small-formfactor, high-performance, low-power Ethernet adapter. Like the older #2968, it supports 10 Base-T attachment using either CAT-3 or CAT-5 unshielded twisted pair and 100 Base-TX using CAT-5 UTP. This adapter also supports network boot and AIX Network Install Manager. IBM Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI-X Adapter (#5700) The Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI-X Adapter (#5700) provides a full-duplex 1 Gbps Ethernet connection with the new, smaller LC-type connector to standard shortwave multimode fiber-optic cable. Depending on the cable, the adapter can support distances up to 550 meters. It supports NIM for boot capability. For optimum performance, this adapter should be placed in a PCI-X slot. It is supported on AIX 5L v5.1 and v5.2. IBM 10/100/1000 Base-TX Ethernet PCI-X Adapter (#5701) The 10/100/100 Base-TX Ethernet PCI-X Adapter (#5701) is the counterpart of #5700 for UTP interfaces at up to 1 Gbps, rather than fiber. The UTP cable distance supported is up to 100 meters. This adapter also supports NIM and requires AIX 5L v5.1 or v5.2. For optimum performance, it should be placed in a PCI-X slot. IBM 2-Port 10/100/1000 Base-TX Ethernet PCI-X Adapter (#5706) The 2-Port 10/100/1000 Base-TX Ethernet PCI-X Adapter (#5706) provides two full-duplex UTP connections at 10, 100, or 1,000 Mbps. Using 4-pair CAT-5 UTP cable, it can be attached to other devices or an Ethernet switch at distances up to 100 meters. The adapter incorporates a function called “large send” or “TCP segmentation,” which means that it

Options and Peripherals

167

offloads from the AIX 5L operating system the TCP segmentation operation on outgoing traffic (transmit side). It also has “checksum offload,” meaning that the adapter handles the TCP/UDP checksum operation, rather than requiring the system processor to handle that workload. The 2-port adapter supports NIM and requires AIX 5L v5.1 or v5.2. For optimum performance, this adapter should be placed in a PCI-X slot. IBM 2-Port Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI-X Adapter (#5707) The 2-Port Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI-X Adapter (#5707), like its counterpart #5706, provides two full-duplex 1 Gbps Ethernet connections, but in this case using the LC-type connector to standard shortwave multimode fiber-optic cable. Depending on the cable, the adapter can support distances up to 550 meters. This adapter also provides the “large send” and “checksum offload” functions described above. It supports NIM and requires AIX 5L v5.1 or v5.2. For optimum performance, this adapter should be placed in a PCI-X slot.

IBM Token-Ring PCI Adapter (#4959) The IBM Token-Ring PCI Adapter (#4959) is a high-performance, 32bit bus master adapter. Featuring an enhanced system interface for higher throughput and lower system utilization, coupled with RJ-45 and DB9 connectors, this adapter is well equipped to handle the LAN environment requirements of today’s servers and high-end workstations running I/O-intensive applications on the network. It supports network boot capability. Additional features and support include the following: •

Operation at either 16 Mbps or 4 Mbps over unshielded twistedpair or shielded twisted-pair (STP) via the RJ-45 and the 9-pin D-shell connectors.

•

Automatic ring speed detection. To simplify installation and reduce network downtime, the adapter automatically determines the ring speed and mode of an operating network and configures itself accordingly.

•

External status light-emitting diodes (LEDs), providing visual indication of adapter and ring status without disrupting operation.

168

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

•

Full-duplex LAN operation for simultaneously transmitting and receiving data.

TURBOWAYS ATM Adapters The TURBOWAYS ATM Adapter and the TURBOWAYS ATM LAN Emulation function that is shipped with it provide the pSeries with direct access to high-bandwidth and high-speed Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) LANs. Local area network emulation provides the capability to run IP or non-IP protocols. The TURBOWAYS adapters are intelligent adapters capable of supporting applications requiring greater bandwidth than is available with current LAN technology. They support dedicated full-duplex attachment to 155 MBps and 622 MBps ATM networks, and some adapters provide function such as TCP checksum to minimize processing load on the host pSeries server. Three ATM adapters are available. The MMF (multimode fiber) adapters attach with dualSC-type, multimode fiber MMF cables, while the UTP adapters connect to CAT-5 UTP. The adapters are the following: •

Turboways 622 MBps PCI MMF ATM Adapter (#2946)

•

IBM 64-bit/66 MHz PCI ATM 155 UTP Adapter (#4953)

•

IBM 64-bit/66 MHz PCI ATM 155 MMF Adapter (#4957)

WAN Communications Adapters All pSeries systems can participate in a variety of wide area networks. Unlike LANs, WANs allow computers to communicate with other computers and remote devices over global distances. For more about WANs, see Chapter 4.

Multiprotocol Communications Adapters There are two adapters that allow pSeries systems to simultaneously participate in up to four different communications networks. These adapters work in conjunction with software provided with AIX to attach using multiple communications protocols (bisync, SDLC, X.25)

Options and Peripherals

169

and various physical connections. Cable options are available for configuring the system for the particular network in which the pSeries server is attached. These multiprotocol adapters are part of the AIX Realtime Interface Coprocessors (ARTIC) family of adapters designed to remove the burden of communications traffic from the pSeries server by handling the detailed processing associated with communications links and nonstandard device interfaces. The IBM ARTIC960Hx 4-Port Multiprotocol PCI Adapter (#2947) provides four ports of EIA-232, EIA-530, RS-449, X.21, or V.35. Each port can support speeds of up to 2 Mbps. Using the appropriate software support provided with AIX, this adapter provides SDLC, bisync, or X.25 packet-switched communications capability. The adapter requires one full-length 32-bit PCI slot. The 2-port Multiprotocol PCI Adapter (#2962) provides high-speed connections between standalone systems on a WAN, connected via external communications equipment such as Channel Service Units (CSUs), Data Service Units (DSUs), and synchronous modems. Using the appropriate cable, the 2-Port Multiprotocol PCI Adapter connects to X.25 packet-switched networks compatible with X.21 DCE (Distributed Computing Environment) Cable (X.21, #2954), with V.24 DCE (2-Port Cable, V.24/EIA-232, #2951), with V.35 DCE (2-Port Cable, V.35, #2952), and with V.36 DCE (2-Port Cable, V.36/EIA-449, #2953).

Other Communications Options In this section, we will cover several communications options for pSeries systems that don’t neatly fit into the other categories.

S/390 ESCON Channel PCI Adapter The S/390 ESCON Channel PCI Adapter (#2751) allows a pSeries system to be attached to IBM’s larger System/390 (such as an ES/9000) computer systems via an Enterprise Systems CONnection (ESCON) channel. These channels are fiber-optic links introduced with the System/390 architecture. When a pSeries system is attached to a System/390 computer via an ESCON channel, information can be exchanged between the two systems at up to 17 MBps. This communications link can allow a pSeries system to provide a gateway between the computers in a

170

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

LAN and the System/390 computer. The System/390 computer can be running the VM/ESA, MVS/ESA, or AIX/ESA operating systems.

Digital Trunk Adapters The IBM ARTIC960RxD Quad Digital Trunk PCI Adapter (#6310) provides voice processing for up to 4 T1 or E1 digital trunk lines. This translates into 96 T1 voice channels or 120 E1 voice channels in a single slot of a pSeries server. Using touch-tone telephone keypad buttons, the IBM Voice Response for AIX Version 2.2 LPP (Licensed Program Product) provides the interactive voice response function. There are several cable options to be used with this adapter, depending on the physical trunk connections of the installation.

SP Switch and SP Switch2 Attachment Adapters The IBM RS/6000 SP System Attachment Adapter (#8396) allows selected pSeries and RS/6000 servers to be integrated into a Cluster 1600 system through the SP Switch interconnect. Support for attaching via the SP Switch is available for pSeries 660, pSeries 670, and pSeries 690 servers, as well as for several pSeries and RS/6000 servers that are no longer available. High-speed communication between the attached server and the SP nodes is enabled over the SP switch. Demand for this feature has been seen frequently from SP customers who require a single large SMP database server for their several internal SP-node application servers. The SP Switch2 Attachment Adapter (#8397) provides attachment to Cluster 1600 systems at even higher performance and lower latency than the SP Switch technology, and this adapter is supported on current pSeries servers. Even though the RS/6000 SP system and SP nodes have now been withdrawn from marketing, the SP Switch2 is available in a frame by itself, effectively creating a high-speed switch fabric through which pSeries servers using this adapter can be clustered.

Fibre Channel Adapters As mentioned earlier in this chapter, Fibre Channel connectivity is a key element in the SAN strategy. The TotalStorage FAStT family of storage

Options and Peripherals

171

servers all use FC attachment. pSeries servers offer Fibre Channel adapters that operate at speeds up to 2 Gbps for either PCI or PCI-X slots. The 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel Adapter for the 64-bit PCI Bus (#6228) is, as the name suggests, a full 64-bit adapter capable of supporting Fibre Channel connections at up to 2 Gbps. Depending on the cabling and the attached devices, the adapter will autonegotiate for the higher data rate—either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps. Distances from the adapter to the attached device or switch of up to 500 meters running at 1 Gbps and up to 300 meters when running at 2 Gbps are supported. As for the Gigabit Fibre Channel Adapter (#6227), use of an IBM Fibre Channel Storage Hub extends those distances to 10 km at either speed. To attach a device with an SC-type fibre connector, the LC-SC Fibre Channel Conversion Cable (#2456) is required. The 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel PCI-X Adapter (#6239) also autonegotiates for either the 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps data rate and supports the same fibre channel cabling options as #6228. This adapter is supported by AIX 5L v5.1 or v5.2, and it should be placed in a PCI-X slot in order to operate at optimum performance.

Cryptographic Coprocessors The pSeries servers offer several adapters that provide data encryption capability meeting industry standards for data security. These adapters are called coprocessors because they handle much of the processing required by complex data encryption algorithms, off-loading that workload from the server and providing enhanced throughput and security. They are used for secure Internet transactions, such as secure data exchange, electronic signature verification, and bulk data encryption and verification. The IBM e-business Cryptographic Accelerator (#4960) provides PCI Secure Socket Layer (SSL) hardware acceleration for secure Web transactions. Public-key cryptographic operations use the SSL handshake protocol to provide secure Web transactions, and this adapter is a hardware solution that provides data encryption over the PCI bus to the pSeries server, thus off-loading this computation-intensive workload from the server into which it is installed and improving overall cryptographic performance. The PCI Cryptographic Coprocessor (FIPS-4) (#4963) is a secondgeneration cryptographic coprocessor that provides high-performance

172

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

secure Internet transactions. The adapter is enclosed in a tamper-proof enclosure that meets the FIPS 140-1 Level 4 standard. Its functions include support for 56-bit and 40-bit Data Encryption Standard (DES), message authentication and financial PIN processing, and secure data storage and retrieval. In addition to its functional capabilities, this adapter offers several physical security features. The following events will cause an adapter shutdown and zeroing of secure data: •

Shipping or storage temperature less than 15° or greater than 95°

•

Dead battery

•

Supply voltage greater than 3.3 volts/12 volts maximum

•

Mesh sensor opens or shorts detection

•

X-ray exposure

Due to the restrictive nature of shipping requirements for this adapter, the IBM Cryptographic Coprocessor (FIPS-4) (#4963) is fieldinstallable only.

Network Processors As the many brands of personal computers and UNIX-based workstations proliferated, so did different types of networks (e.g., Token-Ring, Ethernet, and SNA) used to interconnect the various computer systems. Some of the protocols are Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), Xerox Internet Services Transport (XNS), Internet Packet Exchange (IPX), and Digital Equipment Corporation Network (DECnet). All these communications environments were developed to satisfy specific applications and network requirements, and also with the best intentions of providing interfaces that would allow future growth. Nonetheless, the result has been that many incompatible networks of computers have found their way into many enterprises. This necessitated the development of products called routers and bridges that allow different networks to communicate freely with one another.

Options and Peripherals

173

Although bridges and routers use different approaches, both devices are used to connect two or more independent (and often dissimilar) communications networks together so that the users on one network can communicate with the users on the other. Network processors provide bridging and routing functions that allow you to directly link two local LANs together (similar or dissimilar), link a LAN and a WAN, or link two LANs together over a WAN. Network processors are commercially available from a number of sources. The rapid development of the Internet and the pervasiveness of e-business have made it more urgent than ever—in fact, almost mandatory—that computer suppliers provide complete hardware and software solutions that adhere to industry standards and allow businesses to integrate heterogeneous computer systems and to communicate with their customers, suppliers, and employees. These communications interfaces include high-speed Internet, industry-standard fast (gigabit) Ethernet LANs, wireless LANs, and IP telephony call processing. Fundamental to all this is TCP/IP communications and Web-enabled user interfaces. Recently, IBM and Cisco Systems announced an alliance to integrate IBM’s system products and services with Cisco’s leadership networking products for the Internet. pSeries systems and the AIX 5L operating system, historically designed to “open-system” standards, are well positioned to play a key role in this alliance. They provide the industry-standard communications hardware and software capabilities needed to allow integration with third-party networking products, such as those from Cisco, to form high-performance, scalable e-business solutions.

Displays Displays used with pSeries systems are essentially the same as those used on PCs. They are placed on a desktop near the server and are attached to the pSeries system by a cable to a graphics adapter in one of the PCI slots. Graphics adapter options will be discussed in the next section. The color displays used with pSeries systems provide high-resolution, full-color images. The IBM displays currently available, with their maximum viewable screen size when measured diagonally and maximum flicker-free resolution, are listed next.

174

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

•

P260/P275 Color Monitor (19.8 inches/503 mm) (21-inch) Maximum resolution: 1600 × 1200 at 85 Hz

•

L200p Flat Panel Monitor (20.1 inch/510 mm) Maximum resolution: 1600 × 1200 at 75 Hz analog and 60 Hz digital

•

T541 15-inch TFT Color Monitor (15.0 inches/381 mm) Maximum resolution: 1024 × 768 at 75 Hz analog and 60 Hz digital

The P260/P275 display (#3628) (don’t confuse this “P-series” display terminology with the pSeries family of UNIX servers) features a Trinitron flat CRT and has easy-to-use digital controls. It is available only in stealth black. The P260/275 provides a front operator panel with controls such as the on/off switch, brightness, mode selection, and centering. A tilt/swivel stand is standard and allows the user to position the display for comfortable viewing. An antiglare coating helps reduce any reflections on the face of the display. IBM’s displays are designed to meet energy and ergonomic guidelines. In particular, these displays do the following: •

Incorporate a power management function that reduces energy consumption and increases product life.

•

Meet the Environmental Protection Agency’s requirements for the “Energy Star” program.

•

Emit virtually no static electricity—meeting stringent Nordic MPR-II emission standards.

•

Meet International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ergonomics recommendations and Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Class B requirements.

The L200p Flat Panel Monitor (#3636) is a thin-film technology (TFT) display using liquid crystal display (LCD) technology with a PEL pitch of 0.255 mm for a maximum resolution of 1600 × 1200. For applications in which high-definition 3D imaging is required, this display is

Options and Peripherals

175

supported by the POWER GXT4500P and POWER GXT6500P 3D graphics accelerators using the digital interface. The L200p can also be used with the POWER GXT135P 2D accelerator #2848 (analog) or #2849 (digital). The L200p Flat Panel Monitor is available only in stealth black. The T541H (#3637) is also a TFT LCD display, but in a smaller size and with lower resolution than the L200p. The T541H offers a 15.0-inch diagonal viewing area with PEL pitch of 0.297 mm and a maximum resolution of 1,024 × 768 at 75 Hz to the analog interface or at 60 Hz with the digital interface. It is supported only by the POWER GXT135P 2D graphics accelerator (#2848 or #2849) and cannot be used for 3D graphics.

Graphics Adapters To support these displays, a pSeries or RS/6000 system must be equipped with a graphics adapter (IBM terminology is “accelerator”), which translates the information stored in the system into the electronic signals necessary to create images on the displays. Those unfamiliar with computer-generated graphics terminology may want to refer to the section titled “Graphics” in Chapter 1 before reading about the graphics accelerator options. For several reasons, pSeries systems except for p630 and p640 support only 2D graphics accelerators. First, most systems are multiuser servers, in which case only the systems administrator needs a native graphics interface and display for use as the system console. In addition, many pSeries servers are managed in server farms and are controlled over a LAN from a PC without a console. Finally, even those pSeries systems that are used by one person often run applications that require only 2D support, such as scientific and technical computing, complex financial analysis, or software development. All pSeries servers use GXT135P graphics accelerator. Two-Dimensional Graphics Accelerators POWER GXT135P The GXT135P graphics accelerator (#2848) is a versatile, low-cost 2D graphics option for pSeries systems. It can be configured to operate in

176

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

either 8-bit or 24-bit modes. Its 24-bit true color images provide 16.7 million colors, and it supports display resolution up to 1600 H 1200 on multisync monitors or TFT displays. It satisfies the ISO 9241 standard of visual quality, refreshing the screen at 60 Hz to 85 Hz for all resolutions. The GXT135P (#2848) is supported on AIX 5L v5.1 and v5.2, as well as on AIX 4.3.3. POWER GXT135P with Digital Support The GXT135P with Digital Support (#2849) is essentially the same as #2848, with the additions of providing both an analog and digital interface and supporting an analog resolution up to 2048 × 1536. It is the latest generation of low-cost 2D graphics options for pSeries systems. Maximum resolution at the digital interface is 1600 × 1200. This adapter also satisfies the ISO 9241 standard of visual quality. The GXT135P with Digital Support runs on AIX 5L v5.1 and v5.2, as well as on AIX 4.3.3. However, the digital interface is supported only by AIX 5L v5.1 and v5.2. Three-Dimensional Graphics Accelerators Although 2D graphics support is adequate for the applications run on pSeries servers, workstations used for applications such as automotive and aircraft design require high-performance three-dimensional graphics accelerators. The following 3D graphics adapters support the application programming interfaces (APIs) that are used by application developers for three-dimensional graphics: OpenGL and graPHIGS. Each API tends to be used in its own specialized set of applications. Since all of them support both OpenGL and graPHIGS, selecting the right graphics adapter depends on what performance the application requires. In other words, the traditional price/performance criteria should be used in selecting a 3D graphics adapter. The more expensive (and better performing) adapters implement more graphics features within the adapter hardware, whereas the lower-priced adapters will leave more of the graphics processing to the host system’s processor. POWER GXT4500P The POWER GXT4500P 3D Graphics Accelerator is a single-card adapter supported on pSeries 630, pSeries 640, and RS/6000 Models

Options and Peripherals

177

150, 170, and 270. Except for the Model 150, all these are 64-bit systems, which can take full advantage of the graphics performance of the GXT4500P accelerator. The hardware features of the GXT4500P include a 128 MB unified frame buffer with 24-bit double-buffered color, a 24-bit Z-buffer, a 4/8-bit overlay buffer, an 8-bit alpha buffer, 8-bit stencil buffer, four clipping planes, and eight windows ID bits, up to 110 MB of texture memory, four hardware color maps, and native support for OpenGL and graPHIGS 3D APIs. The adapter is optimized for PHIGS, OpenGL, 2D, and video environments. Its rasterizer design draws lines, characters, and smooth shaded polygons, and it has advanced texture mapping for high image quality. The GXT4500P supports resolution up to 2048 × 1536 at a 60 Hz refresh rate and can be used with monitors that comply with the ISO 9241 Part 3 standard and allow up to 16.7 million simultaneous colors. In addition, the GXT4500P provides digital monitor support and can be used with the L200p and T541H Flat Panel Color Monitors. The GXT4500P is designed for users with applications that require 3D graphics and also need cost-effective 2D support. The GXT4500P accelerator requires AIX 4.3.3 or AIX 5L v5.1 or v5.2. POWER GXT6500P The POWER GXT6500P 3D Graphics Accelerator is IBM’s current highest performance graphics adapter. When used in a 64-bit PCI or PCI-X slot, the GXT6500P provides extremely high performance, even for the largest MCAD models. Like the GXT4500P, it has a 128 MB unified frame buffer and supports resolution up to 2048 × 1536. Its rasterizer design draws lines, characters, and smooth shaded polygons, and it has advanced texture mapping for high image quality. Like the GXT4500P, this accelerator provides digital monitor support and can be used with the L200p and T541H Flat Panel Color Monitors, as well as with the ISO 9241-compliant P260/P275 CRT monitor. The GXT6500P derives its power from the IBM-designed geometry processing chip used in its design. This hard-wired logic (not a generic CPU or digital signal processor requiring microcode) implements the OpenGL and graPHIGS APIs used by 3D graphics software natively on the adapter card, giving the maximum in performance. Offloading the graphics processing to the hardware on the GXT6500P minimizes load on the system and therefore helps provide the best overall system performance.

178

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

The GXT6500P is intended for users with applications that require high-performance 3D graphics. It also provides very acceptable 2D graphics performance, but a less costly adapter like the POWER GXT4500P is a better price/performance choice if maximum 3D capability is not needed. The GXT6500P accelerator requires AIX 4.3.3 or AIX 5L v5.1 or v5.2. It is supported on the pSeries 630, pSeries 640, and RS/6000 Models 170 and 270. Graphics Performance Creating and manipulating 3D images requires a significant amount of computation. Every time an image is reduced, enlarged, rotated, or moved, thousands or even millions of complex floating-point calculations must be done. Three-dimensional graphics accelerators designed to provide these functions so that the image appears to change immediately and smoothly require special hardware and extra memory. IBM and other vendors use benchmark programs that are specially written to measure the speed with which an adapter and the system in which it is installed can create and manipulate images. It is important to understand that the graphics performance a user enjoys while using the system is determined by many different elements of the system, including the graphics adapter, the behavior or design of the operating system and application programs being used, the overall system performance, and more. Even though the only way to measure actual performance is to run the application programs that will be used in practice, benchmark results give a valid relative comparison among different system configurations. Figure 2.14 shows the PLBsurf93, PLBwire93, and ProCDRS-03 benchmark results for the 3D graphics accelerators available for RS/6000 workstations. There are many more benchmark metrics than these, but the chart illustrates some important points. PLBsurf93 is a measure of graphics accelerator performance in creating 3D geometry (surfaces, spheres, etc.) from high-level software commands (issued via graPHIGS). PLBwire93 measures wireframe manipulations, as opposed to solids with surfaces. ProCDRS-03 is a geometric mean of ten wireframe and shaded model tests of Parametric Technology Corporation’s CDRS industrial design software. The graphics accelerators and the RS/6000 model with processor speed are listed along the left of the graph. Note here that performance benefits are to be gained by the faster microprocessors and that, because of the multithreaded nature of AIX when

Options and Peripherals

502.2 150 (375) 4500P

179

PLBsurf93 PLBwire93 ProCDRS-03 x 10

248.8 63.94 1270

170 (450) 4500P

811.6 199.7 1837

170 (450) 6500P

1263 367.9 1787

270 (450, 2-way) 4500P

1358 201.4 2173

270 (450, 2-way) 6500P

1399 367.8 0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

Figure 2.14. Relative performance comparison of selected configurations of 3D graphics accelerators in RS/6000 workstations, based on the PLBsurf93, PLBwire93, and ProCDRS-03 benchmark results published in the IBM UNIX Workstation Facts and Features report dated March 27, 2003.

dealing with the PHIGS API, a 2-way Model 270 provides higher performance than the 1-way. Benchmarks do not represent overall application and system performance because on-screen graphics performance does not measure the overall application execution time required to access data from storage, process it (which does involve graphics performance), and store the results back again. In choosing among the available 3D graphics accelera-

180

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

tors, the pertinent questions are whether the application involves only the manipulations required for, say, 3D mechanical design, or whether the ultimate in shading, lighting, and texture features is required. In general, the GXT6500P and GXT6000P accelerators should be used in the most complex environments, such as automotive and aircraft design and some life sciences applications.

Printers pSeries systems support many types of printers, and an exhaustive coverage of this topic is beyond the scope of this book. We will limit our discussion here to some representative IBM printers. Since the serial and parallel ports on pSeries systems are compatible with industry standards, printers from many other vendors will work with pSeries systems. IBM offers an extensive range of printers, from high-end advanced function systems printers to low-cost models suitable for individual workstations or small workgroups. We will list a few of the printers that are suitable for medium-size to large workgroups, including printers suitable for applications that require printing continuous multipart forms and those that can be shared by multiple users of a system. We will not describe low-end printers that are typically used with individual workstations or PCs.

Continuous Forms Printers The IBM 4247 Multi-Form Printer and the IBM 6400 Printer are dotmatrix impact printers. The dot-matrix technology forms characters, symbols, and graphics through the arrangement of discrete dots on the paper. The dots are formed by print wires or pins striking a ribbon and transferring ink to the paper just as old-fashioned typewriters do, but at much higher speeds. Although the dot-matrix technology is relatively old and is less desirable than laser or inkjet printers for most applications, these heavy-duty, continuous-form, line-matrix printers can handle a wide variety of business documents, including multipart forms. The maximum print speed of the 4247 is 800 characters per second (cps) in data processing mode and 1,000 cps in fast draft mode. Near letter quality can be printed at 200 cps. The 4247 allows simulta-

Options and Peripherals

181

neous loading of two different continuous forms types, as well as having cut sheet capability standard. Continuous forms can have as many as eight parts. A 1-, 2-, or 3-bin automatic sheet feeding device is optional. Connection to the pSeries is by either serial or parallel port. The IBM 6400 printer family offers print speeds of 500, 1,000, 1,500, or 2,000 lines per minute (lpm), depending on the printer model. Although the 6400 printer family is designed to minimize the noise level, high-speed impact printers necessarily create more noise than laser or inkjet printers. For business environments where very high volumes of multipart forms are being printed and higher noise levels are acceptable, some 6400 models are available in cabinets designed for easy forms access with less noise insulation. There are also continuous forms printers that print with the laser or electrophotographic (EP) process like that used in office copiers. The 4370 IBM Infoprint 62, for example, can print 62 pages per minute (ppm) of 8.5-inch-wide forms with graphics at resolutions of either 240 or 300 dots per inch (dpi). The Infoprint 62 is particularly useful in manufacturing and distribution applications in which high-speed label printing with barcodes is required.

IBM Network Printers IBM network printers are tabletop letter-quality printers, designed to be shared by workgroups via LAN attachment. Since they print on individual sheets of paper (cut sheets), they cannot produce continuous forms. The IBM Infoprint 1000 family of workgroup or network printers offers a range of prices, capacities, features, and software support for a broad range of workgroup printing requirements. Infoprint 1000 printers provide resolutions up to 1200 × 1200 PELs per square inch, yielding excellent print quality. Attachment options range from Ethernet and Token-Ring to parallel, serial, or USB, with network support for all major operating system environments. Figure 2.15 shows the IBM Infoprint 1140, which prints 40 ppm and has two paper drawers with capacities of about 1,000 and 4,000 pages. It can print up to 200,000 pages per month and can have up to 384 MB of memory. This level of capacity and throughput can obviously handle the printing requirements of a substantial workgroup and a broad range of applications. The Infoprint family has models ranging from the Infoprint 1116 (16 ppm and 15,000 pages per month) all the

182

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Figure 2.15.

IBM Infoprint 1140 Network Printer.

way to the Infoprint 1145 (45 ppm and 250,000 pages per month). All can handle envelopes and transparencies, and there are output finishing options for stapling and hole-punching. The Infoprint 1000 family offers the ImageQuick card, which allows direct printing of PDF documents and image printing from the Web.

Other Options Before leaving the chapter, we will cover a few other options for pSeries systems.

IBM 7316 Model TF2 Rack-mounted Flat Panel Console To provide a very space-efficient systems management console for rackmounted pSeries servers and server farms, the IBM 7316-TF2 Rackmounted Flat Panel Console is available. This unit, shown in Figure 2.16, consists of a TFT flat-panel color monitor, a rack keyboard tray,

Options and Peripherals

Figure 2.16.

183

IBM 7316 Model TF2 Rack-mounted Flat Panel Console.

and a rack-mount kit. Also available is the IBM Space Saver 2 Keyboard, which mounts in the 7316-TF2’s rack keyboard tray. When closed, the whole unit requires only 1U (1.75 inches) of rack space. The slim, lightweight design provides flexibility in situations where space constraints are critical. The TFT monitor offers bright, clear images on a 15-inch viewable screen at up to 1024 × 768 resolution. The viewable area is 304.1 mm × 228.1 mm. The Space Saver 2 keyboard is available in U.S. English, German, Italian, Spanish, U.K. English, and 15 other languages. An important feature that allows the 7316-TF2 Flat Panel Console to be used to control several pSeries servers in a server farm is the VGA Switch (2 × 8) for Machine Type 7316 (feature #4200). This switch allows attachment of either one or two consoles to one to eight systems. If used in a tiered arrangement with multiple VGA switches, up to 64 total systems can be controlled from the one or two consoles. The VGA Switch (#4200) supports up to 1600 × 1200 resolution, and each attached pSeries server must have a GXT135P graphics adapter. One VGA Switch (#4200), which is 1U or 1.75 inches high, can be mounted in the 7316-TF1 rack mounting tray. Additional VGA Switches (#4200) may be mounted horizontally in the rack or vertically in the side of the rack. To minimize cable clutter, there are composite CPU to VGA Switch Attachment Cables in lengths of 7, 12, and 20 feet. These cables provide in a single sheath cables for display, keyboard, and mouse.

184

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Exide Uninterruptible Power Systems IBM now offers a number of different Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPSs) under the IBM Machine Type 9910+01 for pSeries systems. These on-line UPSs provide high-quality power conditioning and battery backup. Using double conversion technology, the UPS continuously creates clean power to protect the pSeries hardware and data, offering complete protection and isolation from all types of power problems such as power surges, high-voltage spikes, switching transients, power sags, electrical line noise, frequency variations, brownouts, and blackouts. Some of the newer models feature advanced diagnostics and an informative LED display, as well as audible alarms. With user-replaceable, hot-swappable batteries, both the cost of hardware ownership and downtime are significantly reduced. Several different models with different Volt/Ampere (VA) capacities ranging from 500 to 6,000 VA are offered by IBM. These UPSs are covered under warranty by their original manufacturer.

IBM Spaceball 3D Input Device No, this is not a Mel Brooks spoof movie, but a real live input device for the serious engineer using an RS/6000 workstation and on pSeries 615 and pSeries 630 deskside models. The IBM Spaceball 3D Input Device (#8422) puts complete, intuitive 3D manipulation in the end user’s hands. With six degrees of freedom, versus two with a mouse or trackball, the Spaceball eliminates awkward commands and helps minimize steps that tend to slow productivity and halt the creative process. The user is able to view a computer-generated model from any angle using natural fingertip pressure on the Spaceball to push, pull, and twist it, as if the 3D image were grasped in the user’s hand. The six degrees of freedom are enabled by simultaneous translations and rotations about the X, Y, and Z axes. The Spaceball has handy lighted programmable function keys and is supported by the SpaceWare 9.0 AIX driver.

Magellan XT 3D Input Device The Magellan XT 3D Input Device (#8423) offers another high-level precise 3D input device for RS/6000 workstations and deskside models

Options and Peripherals

185

of p615 and p630. The Magellan device unifies the features of a conventional 2D mouse with interactive motion control for 3D graphics objects. Like the Spaceball (#8422), it provides one-hand motion control in six degrees of freedom, and it offers 11 programmable function keys. These keys can be used to customize sensitivity and motion controls, or they can be assigned to specialized application tasks.

Three-Button Mouse The Three-Button Mouse (#6041 and #8741) is an input device that can be used with all pSeries systems. The user slides the mouse on a desktop to control cursor movement, draw lines, define points, and so on. The three buttons provided on the mouse are typically used to select a menu item or take some other action after the cursor is positioned on the screen. The mouse augments the keyboard as a means of interacting with pSeries systems. It attaches to the standard mouse port. Also available is #8841, which provides a stealth black three-button mouse with a cable for attachment to a keyboard. This mouse is used in conjunction with USB keyboards (see below) and does not attach to the standard mouse port of pSeries systems.

Keyboards Unless a pSeries server is controlled over a network or by a Hardware Management Console, a keyboard is required. The IBM Enhanced Keyboard used for several years has 101 keys and the same layout as that used by other IBM products (including the IBM PCs and many different types of terminals). This means that once familiar with this layout, a user will not have to adapt to different keyboard layouts when using other IBM computer equipment. The Quiet Touch Keyboard (Figure 2.17) is available for use when a keyboard is needed. The key tops are engraved with characters in many different languages. The feature number for a specific keyboard depends on the language (U.S. English, U.K. English, French, German, Japanese, Spanish, and many more) and color (pearl white or black) selected. The keyboard cable plugs into the keyboard port on the pSeries system. Small retractable legs on the bottom of the keyboard can be extended to change the angle of the keyboard if desired.

186

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Figure 2.17.

The IBM Quiet Touch Keyboard used with pSeries systems.

USB keyboards for all language groups are also available for pSeries systems, primarily for use with servers that support logical partitioning (LPAR). When it is necessary to configure more than one LPAR of a server with keyboard, mouse, and display, USB keyboards and the threebutton mouse (#8841) are required. Since pSeries systems do not provide integrated USB ports (such as are common on personal computers today), a USB Keyboard/Mouse Attachment Card (#2737) must be installed in a PCI slot assigned to the appropriate LPAR. This PCI adapter provides the controller and USB port for one keyboard and a mouse, which plugs into the keyboard. A 2-meter USB keyboard attachment cable is used to connect the keyboard to the attachment card (#2737).

Modems A modem (“modem” stands for “modulator-demodulator”) is a device for modulating or translating digital computer signals into analog telephone line signals for transmission, and vice versa (demodulating) for receiving signals from other systems. IBM does not sell modems, but many industry-standard modems are available. With dial-up telephone lines, 56 KBps modems are commonly used. The modems most often used with pSeries systems are high-speed devices for use on leased telephone circuits.

Application Programs and Operating Systems

187

3 Application Programs and Operating Systems

Types of Software—A Conceptual Model The term “software” is analogous to the term “publication.” Newspapers are a category of publication. Annual reports, novels, and Who’s Who directories are some other categories of publications. These different categories fill very different needs. The same situation exists with software. There are three basic categories, or software layers—the application program layer, the operating system layer, and the device driver layer, as shown in Figure 3.1. Each software layer performs a completely different job, but all three work closely together to perform useful work for the user.

Application Programs The top software layer in the model is the application program layer (highlighted in Figure 3.2). The programs in this layer “apply” pSeries systems to a specific task (computer-aided design, word processing, ac187

188

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

User's View

Application Program(s) Operating System

Main Memory

Device Drivers

Hardware

System Hardware

Figure 3.1. Conceptual software model of the pSeries system’s basic software structure. The three layers of the software model work together to perform useful work for the user.

User's View

Application Program(s) Operating System

Main Memory

Device Drivers

Hardware

System Hardware

Figure 3.2. The application program software layer of the software model. It is the application program that defines the particular task the computer is performing for the user.

Application Programs and Operating Systems

189

counting, etc.) and thus are called “application” programs. They actually perform the task for which the user purchased the computer while the other two layers play important support roles. A single pSeries system might run one application program at a time, or it might run many application programs simultaneously. The arrows in the figure indicate how users conceptually “see” the computer system. The user usually interacts with the application program layer and (less frequently) the operating system layer. By working closely with the other software layers, the application program processes the various keystrokes made by the user and responds by displaying information on the computer’s display or some other output device. As we will see later in the chapter, many programs written for other computers that run UNIX operating systems (i.e., open systems) can be migrated to the pSeries and the AIX 5L operating system by the software developer. This allows pSeries users to capitalize on many application programs originally developed for other open systems. There is an application program to help users with just about anything they wish to do. Some examples of common functions that application programs provide include e-business (Web serving, e-mail, secure on-line shopping, customer support, etc.), accounting, statistical analysis, database, banking, telecommunications, and computer-aided design. The application software layer is most familiar to the user because it provides a business function and is the layer with which he or she interfaces. However, the operating system and device driver layers are equally vital, since they provide the framework or “infrastructure” that controls the hardware (pSeries system and attached I/O devices) and allows multiple independent applications to execute. The interactions between the application and operating system layers, as well as those between the operating system and device driver layers, are very complex. Although it is important for programmers and systems administrators to understand these layers in detail, it is sufficient for most readers to think of the operating system and device drivers as a single entity that supports application software on one side and system hardware on the other. The next two sections give a high-level description of the specific roles of the operating system and device driver layers.

Operating Systems The operating system (highlighted in Figure 3.3) must manage the hardware resources of the computer system and perform tasks under the con-

190

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

User's View

Application Program(s) Operating System

Main Memory

Device Drivers

Hardware

System Hardware

Figure 3.3. The operating system software layer of the software model. The operating system provides the environment in which the application programs run.

trol of application program(s) and keyboard/mouse commands issued by the user. The application program can rely on the operating system to perform many of the detailed housekeeping tasks associated with the internal workings of the computer. Thus, the operating system is said to provide the environment in which application programs execute. The operating system layer also accepts commands directly from the user; for instance, it can copy files, change a user’s password, and so on. The base operating system used by pSeries systems is AIX 5L. AIX 5L provides an environment that can run one application program at a time or many application programs simultaneously. There are also many extensions to the AIX 5L operating system, such as the graphics program OpenGL, that allow the user to customize the operating system environment. Because of the modular nature of AIX 5L these extensions plug right into and essentially become a part of the operating system. Some customers and third-party software vendors may write kernel extensions for use with their applications, but those extensions are not tested and supported by IBM, whereas the extensions provided by IBM are supported along with AIX 5L. Although not distributed by IBM, the Linux operating system is supported on pSeries servers. At the time of this writing, Linux distribu-

Application Programs and Operating Systems

191

tions from SuSE are supported on most pSeries servers, including LPARs. Distributions from Red Hat and Turbo Linux are available for selected pSeries and RS/6000 systems. This chapter includes a section on Linux support for pSeries servers. For links to additional information about Linux, see the companion Web site for this book (www.maxpress.com).

Device Drivers The third and final layer of software in our software model is the device driver layer (highlighted in Figure 3.4). “Device driver” is a fancy term for a set of highly specialized programs, usually written by the manufacturer of computer hardware. These specialized programs reside in pSeries main memory or in memory provided right on the adapters they control. Unlike application programs or operating systems, device drivers are only used by other programs. That is, device drivers never interact directly with the users and exist only to help application programs and the operating system perform their tasks. They interact directly with computer hardware elements under the control of the operating system

User's View

Application Program(s) Operating System

Main Memory

Device Drivers

Hardware

System Hardware

Figure 3.4. The device driver software layer of the software model. Device drivers directly control the hardware elements of pSeries systems and shield application programs and operating systems from hardware details.

192

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

or application program layers. Device drivers also help shield application programs from the hardware specifics of computers, allowing for evolutionary product improvements without sacrificing application program compatibility. Each hardware feature (device or adapter card) requires a device driver program. The device drivers for pSeries features (discussed in Chapter 2) are included with AIX 5L.

pSeries Software Compatibility Computer systems that run the UNIX operating system have been in existence for many years. As a result, a wide variety of application programs have been developed for UNIX. The flexibility afforded by virtue of this large and diverse software base allowed computers running the UNIX operating system to fill many different needs. Of course, this sea of available application programs did not exist when the original UNIX operating system was first announced. It took the independent efforts of a great many people over many years to develop the large number of application programs (called an application program software base) that exist today.

Why Compatibility Is Important In order to capitalize on that software base, application software compatibility was a primary objective in the design of the AIX 5L operating system. That is, most application programs written for UNIX operating systems can easily be migrated to the pSeries system and the AIX 5L operating system by the software developer. It is important to understand that of the three software layers in our software model, compatibility with programs in the application programs layer is most important. Why? First of all, application programs typically represent the lion’s share of a user’s software investment. Further, being forced to abandon an application program because of incompatibilities may also make users throw away whatever data and training or experience they have accumulated with the application program—both of which can be substantial. Some users have developed custom application programs at considerable cost in development time and money. Incompatibility at the application program level would ren-

Application Programs and Operating Systems

193

der these programs virtually useless. Last, and perhaps most important, application layer compatibility allows pSeries system users to choose from the thousands of application programs that were originally developed for the UNIX operating system. What about the operating system and device driver layers? The ability to run earlier UNIX operating system software is not important for several reasons. Operating systems typically represent only a small fraction of the user’s software investment; they can be upgraded easily without changing the user’s view of the computer system. Further, a new operating system is usually necessary to allow users to have access to new features of the computer system not considered by the programmers of the old operating system. Of course, one of the primary purposes of the device driver layer is to allow the computer hardware to change without affecting compatibility with the operating system and application programs. This is done by changing the way a device driver interacts with the hardware without changing the way the device driver interacts with the operating system or application programs. The user is supplied with new device drivers to support new pSeries hardware.

Inside pSeries Compatibility To understand pSeries compatibility, you must understand a little about how application programs are written. First, a programmer writes an application program’s instructions or code using a programming language (e.g., C++, FORTRAN, etc.). A programming language is basically a library of computer instructions (easily understood by programmers) from which a programmer may choose to write programs. The list of programming language instructions that make up an application program is called the program’s source code. In order to run the application program on a computer, the source-code instructions must be converted into instructions a computer can understand. This conversion process is called compiling the program. When the source code is compiled, the result is called object code and can be directly executed by the computer hardware. The most important thing to understand about pSeries compatibility is that any model of the pSeries family is object-code-compatible with all other pSeries models and earlier RS/6000 systems. That is, you can take the object code for an application program compiled on an

194

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

RS/6000 Model 150, load it on a properly configured pSeries 630, and run the program with no changes. A word of caution is necessary at this point. Object-code compatibility as just described is true for 32-bit applications (i.e., applications written for systems that used 32-bit microprocessors). All current pSeries and RS/6000 computers, except RS/6000 Models B50 and 150, use 64bit architectures, and they can run AIX 5L applications written for earlier 32-bit systems. However, the reverse is not true. Applications written to take advantage of 64-bit architectures cannot be run on older systems that do not have 64-bit capability. This situation is called “upward compatibility,” since it enables users to carry forward their investment in applications on earlier systems to run on the latest, more powerful computers. Since AIX 5L is compliant with UNIX 98 standards, most other application programs written for UNIX operating systems, including earlier versions of AIX, and for Linux, will be highly source-code-compatible with pSeries systems. This means that a programmer must make only a few minor changes in the application program source code, load the source code written for the UNIX operating system on a pSeries system, and then recompile the source code using the appropriate pSeries compilers. The new object code generated can then be executed on the pSeries system. This process is called “porting.” In addition to UNIX source-code compatibility, AIX 5L provides “interoperability” functions that facilitate systems management in mixed environments of pSeries systems and UNIX servers from other suppliers. These functions include UNIX System V.4 commands, hence the term “SVR4 affinity.” SVR4 affinity tools make AIX 5L a bit more familiar to information technology (IT) personnel who have experience with UNIX operating systems other than AIX 5L. For applications written for Linux, AIX 5L provides interfaces and software libraries to make it as easy as possible to port those applications to run on pSeries systems. These “Linux affinity” tools will be described later in the chapter. As described in Chapter 1, native Linux distributions are available for most pSeries systems, and Linux can run in one or more logical partitions on p630, p650, p655, p670, and p690 servers. The syntax or grammar of source code for various languages is defined by independent standards bodies. This compliance to industry standards is what makes an “open system” open and is the essential element in pSeries software compatibility.

Application Programs and Operating Systems

195

Application Programs The previous discussion covered the three basic software layers in pSeries systems that cooperate to perform useful work for the user. Now we turn our attention to the top layer of our software model—application programs (see Figure 3.2, shown previously). It is the application program that actually “applies” the pSeries system’s computational power to a particular task. Some companies choose from available application programs designed, written, and sold by various software suppliers. These are called prewritten application programs. Other businesses design and write their own custom application programs or use a combination of prewritten and custom application programs. Although some basic types of application programs will be discussed, this chapter is by no means a comprehensive guide to application programs. Application programs range from simple programs that concentrate on a very specific task to powerful and very complex groups of programs—designed to work together. They perform a myriad of functions as diverse as the environments in which you find computers today. Every person who uses a personal computer (PC) is familiar with prewritten application programs—word processors, spreadsheets, databases, graphics presentation packages, and Web browsers. These are known as crossindustry application programs because they provide basic tools that are used by people in every type of enterprise to communicate with one another and to manage information. pSeries systems are targeted to the server marketplace and are seldom used as individual workstations. Users of pSeries systems typically run these common personal productivity applications on a PC attached to the server on a local area network (LAN). Just as word-processor and graphics presentation programs are important tools for individuals to use on a personal computer for documenting ideas and information and for communicating with others, there are many applications available for use on pSeries servers. Some applications, such as databases, are useful in almost every type of business. Database applications store information in a structured way and allow access in a variety of formats or “views,” depending on the needs of the user. For readers who are not familiar with databases, the following simple illustration will help explain how they work. To deal with large amounts of information efficiently, it is necessary to organize the information in a uniform manner. For example, the information in a telephone book is organized into an alphabetical list of names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

196

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Database programs organize information into files, records, and fields. Don’t be intimidated by the words. This is exactly how the information in a phone book is structured. Figure 3.5 shows an example telephone book listing and the corresponding computer database structure. The phone book itself is analogous to a file or set of information, also called a database. The information about one person in the phone book would be analogous to a record. The records contain the information for a given entry, and each record contains the same information about its respective entry. In this case, a record would contain the name, address, and phone number of the person. Each of these three items would be analogous to a field within a record. For example, the address part of a phone book entry would be called the address field. Manually looking up information in a phone book quickly becomes fatiguing. The same is true for manually manipulating any large body of information. Once the information is entered into a database application program, however, it can be retrieved quickly and easily. Databases can contain information about a store’s inventory, a library’s books, personnel records, medical records, or virtually any other type of information. Organizations such as banks, airlines, and insurance companies commonly use extremely large databases shared by many users. Database application programs provide programming languages with which users can customize their database environments and develop the interfaces or views needed by various departments within a company or by their customers.

(a) Information organized in a telephone book Telephone book (Name)

(Address)

(Phone #)

Packar J. C. 1012 SE 45th St----654-8499 Packer O. R. 244 W 13th St------878-2443 Pagano B. R. 667 NW 83rd St----655-0097

(b) Information organized by a database application program Computer "database" file "Name" field

"Address" field

Record #1 Packar J. C. 1012 SE 45th St Record #2 Packer O. R. 244 W 13th St Record #3 Pagano B. R. 667 NW 83rd St

"Phone number" field 654-8499 878-2443 655-0097

Figure 3.5. (a) The information structure used in a telephone book. (b) The same information organized into a database structure. To efficiently manipulate large amounts of information, it is necessary to first organize the information into a consistent format. The organization used by database application programs is not unlike that used in a telephone book.

Application Programs and Operating Systems

197

pSeries systems provide the disk storage capacity, the communications interfaces, and the processing performance required to implement large databases and to support many users making queries of those databases. Products such as IBM DB2® Universal Database (UDB) and Oracle 9i Database are often used in conjunction with other applications to provide complete industry-specific solutions. Since the database software is used between the end-user application program and the AIX 5L operating system, databases are sometimes called “middleware” products. Middleware products are those which work with the operating system to compose the infrastructure needed for a particular application environment. Industry-Specific Application Programs Most companies will need specialized software designed for their particular industry or environment. These “industry-specific” application programs are written to address the needs of a well-defined environment. A research lab office has different application program needs than a dental practice. Such prewritten industry-specific application programs allow pSeries systems to be used effectively in highly specialized business, professional, and scientific environments. There are applications designed for market sectors like banking, manufacturing and distribution, insurance telecommunications, Internet Service Providers (ISPs), retail, government and the public sector, healthcare, scientific research, petrochemicals, and research organizations—to name only a few. Many software vendors offer modular software products, based on a single underlying software design, that can be tailored to the needs of various industries or types of users. This approach allows, for example, both a manufacturer and a healthcare provider to manage products or services and customer relationships using essentially the same software product—but with user interfaces and specific functions suitable for their unique business environment. Users select only the software modules needed, which helps them control costs. Since the underlying software design is used across all the industry-specific solutions, all customers benefit from improved software quality and stability. It would be impractical to list in this book all the business areas in which pSeries servers are used—and almost impossible to identify all the software suppliers who offer products for each category. Readers who are interested in that level of detail can refer to the companion Web site for this book (www.maxpress.com) for links to applications

198

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

software for pSeries systems. Some of the key applications areas in which pSeries servers are used include enterprise resource planning (ERP), supply chain management (SCM), customer relationship management (CRM), banking, retail, science and technology, e-business/e-commerce, and business intelligence (BI). There is a lot of overlap among these categories, since nearly every business or enterprise has some of the same computing requirements. For example, almost all organizations have customers or clients to support, and many have supplier interactions to manage. Today, almost every organization must manage Web-based interfaces for customers and employees. Finally, many different kinds of customers need realtime data to measure levels of service, orders and deliveries, and inventory levels. Custom Application Programs Although cross-industry and industry-specific application programs fit many needs, other users require software designed to perform unusual and specific tasks or to conform with existing procedures. In these cases, it is often better to develop custom application programs written to exact specifications. Custom application programs may be written by programmers within the company or by an outside consulting firm. In either case, the basic development steps are first to write a software specification that describes what the program will do. Then a preliminary version of the program is written that demonstrates the function that eventually will be in the final program. This preliminary version is evaluated by the user, and the specification is altered to reflect any needed changes. Then the final program is written and installed at the user’s location. Typically, training will be provided by the developer and any problems ironed out. Once the user accepts the program, the software then has to be supported. That is, users will need a place to go when they have questions not addressed by the manuals. Support also includes making necessary changes to the application program as the user’s needs change over time. This kind of ongoing support is critical to the success of any computer automation project. Custom application program development is expensive and timeconsuming, compared to the prewritten application program approach. But some companies may find that this additional expense and time can be recovered by the increased productivity and competitive advantage

Application Programs and Operating Systems

199

that result from custom applications that precisely fit their needs. For customers who choose the custom software approach, pSeries systems and the programming tools available for the AIX 5L operating system provide a very productive software development environment.

Operating System Few areas in information processing create more confusion and apprehension than the operating system layer of our software model, shown in Figure 3.3. The following discussion will help remove some of the mystery associated with the Advanced Interactive eXecutive (AIX) operating system used with all pSeries and RS/6000 systems. The reader will become familiar with basic operating system terms such as “interactive processing” and “multiuser,” and then move in for a closer look at the AIX 5L operating system. The description of AIX in this chapter applies to AIX 5L for POWER Version 5 Release 1 (AIX 5L v5.1) and Release 2 (AIX 5L v5.2). AIX Version 4 Release 3 (AIX 4.3) has been withdrawn from marketing and service will be discontinued December 31, 2003. Users of existing pSeries servers can upgrade to AIX 5L, and only AIX 5L is available with new systems. All earlier AIX versions and releases have been withdrawn as newer versions have been announced. In general, IBM supports two levels of AIX at any time, the latest level (version N) and the prior level (version N-1), which at this time are AIX 5L v5.2 and v5.1. Introduction to Operating System Concepts The operating system provides the necessary interface that allows the user and application programs to interact with pSeries systems. The user can interact directly with the operating system’s user interface to manage files on a disk, start application programs, print files, and so on. The operating system also performs tasks directly under the control of application programs without any user assistance. The application program initiates tasks by directly interacting with the operating system through the application program interface (API). This is simply a set of operating system commands that can be issued directly by the application program. The API simplifies the job of the application programmer, who need not get involved with the details of hardware interaction. Further, when an application program uses the API, it is shielded from changes in

200

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

the computer hardware as new computers are developed. That is, the operating system (and device drivers) can be changed to support new computer hardware while preserving the API unchanged and allowing application programs to run unchanged on the new computer. To understand the job of the operating system, it is necessary to understand a few basic concepts: •

Batch versus interactive processing

•

Multiuser

•

Multitasking

•

Multiprocessing

Batch Versus Interactive Processing There are two basic types of work a computer can perform: batch processing and interactive processing. To understand the difference between these two concepts, let’s use an analogy and examine the difference between communications through the postal service and through the telephone. If you wish to ask a distant friend some questions, you can either write a letter or phone. With the first option you gather all of your thoughts, put them on paper, and then submit the letter to a mailbox. A few days later (assuming your friend is responsive) you go to your mailbox and get the responses to your questions in the form of a document. This is analogous to batch processing with a computer in that you submit a request for the computer to answer some question(s) or perform some task(s). Some time later (from minutes to days), you can go to the printer and get the computer’s responses in the form of a report. In the early days of computing, batch processing was the only alternative for computer interaction. Today, batch processing still has its place, but interactive processing is the norm. Moving back to our analogy, sometimes you can’t simply write down your list of questions in a letter because some of the questions you have will depend on the answer to one or more initial questions. In this case, you either have to send several letters back and forth between yourself and your friend or call your friend on the phone. Having a conversation with your friend over the phone is analogous to interactive processing

Application Programs and Operating Systems

201

on a computer. With interactive processing, you have a dialogue with the computer system from a PC. You enter questions or requests for activity, and the computer immediately responds. So interactive processing gives the user an immediate response, which is required and expected in most applications (e.g., airline reservations or a retail checkout line). Some applications use a combination of batch and interactive processing. For example, a payroll clerk might enter information from time cards in a dialogue style (interactive processing). Once all time cards are entered and verified to be correct, the clerk then issues a command that tells the computer to print all checks (a batch job). The clerk would later get the checks from the printer. AIX, like other operating systems, supports both batch and interactive processing. What Is Multiuser? A computer system is said to be a multiuser system if two or more users can share the system at the same time. With a multiuser computer system, from two to many hundreds of computer terminals are attached to a single computer. Each terminal provides its user with a “window” into the computer system and allows the user to perform tasks independent of all other users. Although the single computer system is being used simultaneously by many users, each user is unaware of the activities of the other users and seems to have his or her own computer system. However, a user may see the computer slow down (increase response time) as more and more users sign on to the computer and start doing work. A multiuser computer system has several advantages over singleuser systems. Because the computer system hardware and programs can be simultaneously shared by many users, no one has to stand in line waiting for a turn on the computer. Everyone (assuming there are enough terminals attached) has access to the computer whenever it is needed to do a job. Other advantages offered by a multiuser system are in the areas of security, accounting, backup/recovery, and so on. The pSeries running the AIX 5L operating system can act as either a single-user or a multiuser computer system. What Is Multitasking? Many people confuse multitasking with the term “multiuser” just discussed. As was just noted, “multiuser” refers to the capability to share a

202

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

single computer system between two or more users simultaneously. “Multitasking,” also called “multiapplication,” refers to the ability to simultaneously run two or more independent application programs for a single user. The opposite of multitasking is single tasking, which means that the computer user must finish using one application program before another can be started. The AIX operating system used with pSeries systems supports a full multitasking environment. Multitasking is helpful in many environments. The office, for example, is one environment in which workers are often interrupted in the middle of one task to perform another. The multitasking capability of operating systems fits naturally into this interrupt-driven environment by allowing users to easily switch back and forth between several simultaneously active application programs as the interruptions occur. Another advantage afforded by multitasking is the ability to have the computer system perform batch-processing tasks while one is working with some other application program. This type of batch processing is called background processing. With background processing, a programmer can start a compile (batch processing) and then immediately go to work on some other program. An engineer can start a finite element analysis of a mechanical design (batch processing) and then immediately begin working on another design project. Without the backgroundprocessing capability provided through multitasking, the user would have to wait for the batch processing to complete before going on to any other tasks. What Is Multiprocessing? Whereas “multiuser” refers to the ability for many users to share the resources of a system concurrently and “multitasking” means that the system can run many different applications simultaneously, the term “multiprocessing” refers to the ability of an operating system to support many processors, all of which share system resources such as memory and input/output devices. A multiprocessor-capable operating system, such as AIX, allocates work to the available processor(s), thus increasing the performance of the system above what would be possible if there were only one processor available. The user does not have to worry about which specific processor is running his or her application. In this book we have described many pSeries models as symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) systems, and you should have noticed that the larger the system (i.e., the more processors), the higher the performance.

Application Programs and Operating Systems

203

The word “symmetric” simply means that all the processors share memory and I/O devices equally. In an SMP system, it is possible for one application to “hog” all the system resources. To overcome that exposure, AIX Workload Manager is an important software tool that allows the systems administrator to allocate a certain amount of processing power for specific applications, thus ensuring a base level of processing power for each major application. So, if the system is very busy, an application will always get at least a predetermined level of processing power. And, if the system is less heavily loaded, that application may run even faster, since the operating system can allocate more processing power to it. What Is Logical Partitioning? As explained in the section on logical partitioning in “A Closer Look” in Chapter 1, logical partitioning is really a capability of the pSeries hardware, namely the POWER4 and POWER4+ processors and the system firmware or microcode. LPAR allows the pSeries system to be partitioned into multiple “virtual servers within a server,” each having at least one or maybe several processors assigned to it and each LPAR running its own copy of the operating system. The allocation of processors, memory, and I/O is flexible and does not have to conform to physical boundaries, such as how many processors are on a multichip module (MCM ) or which PCI bus the I/O slots are on. The number of LPARs depends on the size of the pSeries server. A p690 can have 32 LPARs, while a p670 can have up to 16, a p650 up to eight, and the p655 and p630 up to four LPARs. Although not an operating system function, LPAR is supported and enhanced by the operating system in several ways. On pSeries servers, each partition can run any of three different operating systems—AIX 5L v5.1, AIX 5L v5.2, or Linux. The functions available in each “virtual server” depend on the operating system. Each LPAR running AIX 5L v5.1 or v5.2 will have the support of all the autonomic computing and systems management capabilities of AIX 5L. But since Linux does not currently support all the functions available in AIX 5L, LPARs running Linux will be limited to the functions provided by that operating system. Two examples of such functional differences are dynamic deallocation of processors and PCI buses (which help increase system availability) and AIX Workload Manager (which allows the administrator to assign resources to various application workloads). For LPARs

204

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

running AIX 5L, these capabilities work just as they do on a pSeries SMP server without LPAR, but LPARs running Linux will lack those functions. On the other hand, the reason for running Linux in some LPARs is to have compatibility with the Linux applications the user requires and, presumably, those applications will run just fine without the AIX 5L capabilities. AIX 5L v5.2 enhances LPAR with the ability to dynamically add or remove processors, memory, or adapters to a partition without rebooting the LPAR or the system. In order to reassign resources to LPARs running AIX 5L v5.1 or Linux, the partition must be restarted (static LPAR). Also, the dynamic LPAR capability provided by AIX 5L v5.2 works with processor and memory CUoD (Capacity Upgrade on Demand) to allow newly activated processors or memory to be assigned immediately to the appropriate LPARs and to allow dynamic processor sparing. Logical partitioning offers the user many advantages. For example, an application or set of applications can be run in a specific logical partition, guaranteeing the availability of the assigned resources for that workload. Since different applications can run in each LPAR, one possible scenario is to have a production LPAR running the tested software version of an application, while in another LPAR there is a test system running a new version of the application. Another example is to run regional workloads in different LPARs, each with its correct date and time setting for the users in the region being supported. All of these usage scenarios provide cost-effectiveness advantages in systems management and physical space, since a single system is being used where previously the only alternative solution was to run multiple smaller systems.

AIX 5L—An Executive Overview The UNIX operating system was originally developed by AT&T’s Bell Labs in 1969. Over the years, it has continually been enhanced by various independent organizations (both academic and business), often in a nonstructured way. These independent efforts have resulted in a very powerful, somewhat cryptic, often awkward, and usually flexible operating system. The UNIX operating system became popular for several reasons. First, AT&T licensed the operating system to many different computer manufacturers, which offered the UNIX operating system for their computers rather than choosing to write their own operating sys-

Application Programs and Operating Systems

205

tems. Second, the UNIX operating system is prevalent in colleges and universities. As students learned the UNIX operating system in these academic environments, it was only natural that they would seek out such systems after entering the nonacademic world. Finally, the C programming language fostered by the UNIX operating system is a highly popular one, offering very flexible and powerful programming structures. The UNIX operating system has evolved to be the basis for the opensystem marketplace, in which compatibility with industry standards is the hallmark. Compatibility means that programs written for one brand of “open system” can easily be migrated to another brand. The opensystem concept is good for application program developers because they can easily offer their products on many different brands of computers. This is good for users because they have a multitude of software from which to choose no matter which brand of open system they buy. IBM took the basic UNIX operating system and incorporated many enhancements developed by other organizations (e.g., the University of California at Berkeley), added many enhancements of its own, and came out with its version, called the Advanced Interactive eXecutive. This opensystem approach was a departure from IBM’s proprietary systems such as the OS/400 operating system for AS/400 systems or the MVS operating system for IBM’s S/370 and S/390 mainframes. pSeries computers running the AIX operating system are IBM’s third generation of UNIX computer platforms. (The IBM RT System was the first, and RS/6000 systems were the second generation.) Figure 3.6 shows a timeline of the evolution of AIX from its inception to the current version, AIX 5L v5.2. The chart lists the key functional enhancements of each version and indicates what was happening in the overall computing industry at the time. AIX 5L incorporates all the developments of previous versions that are still applicable in today’s e-business world. Some functions have been dropped over the years, as the evolution of the computer industry made them obsolete. As shown in Figure 3.6, the introduction of AIX 5L in April 2001 marked several key new capabilities for IBM’s UNIX operating system. AIX 5L v5.1 provides a 64-bit operating system kernel and device drivers. It supports up to 32-way SMP servers like the pSeries 690, logical partitioning, up to 256 GB of memory, and Linux affinity tools. The second version, AIX 5L v5.2, offers the JFS2 file system, which allows file and file-system sizes of 16 TB and supports dynamic LPAR, dynamic processor and memory Capacity Upgrade on Demand, dynamic processor sparing with CUoD, and up to 512 GB of memory.

Maturity: - Stability - Quality

Establishment in the market UNIX credibility Open systems stds

Figure 3.6.

Distributed Client-Server

Higher levels of scalability: - 24-way SMP - 96 GB memory 32/64-bit API spt UNIX98 Branding Networking/Security: - TCP/IP V6 - IPsec Web Sys Mgt AIX Workload Mgr Java JDT/JIT

AIX V4.3

1997

Network Centric Computing

AIX V4.2 High-end scalability - 8-way SMP - >2 GB memory Standards: - UNIX95 brand RAS Enhancements NFS V3

AIX V4.1

1996

Scalability: - POWERPC spt - 4-way SMP - Client/Server pkg New Standards compliance Simplicity: - Graphical, fast installation - Common Desktop Environment HACMP Clustering

1994

e-Business Computing

AIX 5L V5.2 - Dynamic LPAR - Dynamic processor and memory CUoD - Dynamic processor sparing - JFS2 file size and file system support increased to 16 TB - 512 GB memory - 16 MB large page support

AIX 5L V5.1

2001+

Higher levels of scalability: - POWER4 Support - Itanium Support - 32-way SMP - 256 GB memory - 64-bit kernel/drivers - Logical Partitioning Advanced RAS Networking enhancements Web Sys Mgt Java 2 Version1.3 Linux App Support

1999

Timeline showing the evolution of AIX and the key features introduced with each version.

Open Systems

AIX V3.2.5

1992

AIX V2 & V3

1986-1990

206 Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Application Programs and Operating Systems

207

The AIX 5L operating system is a multitasking, multiuser, multiprocessor operating system adhering to industry standards. Figure 3.7 is a diagram showing the various functional elements that compose the operating system. This diagram is similar to the software structure described earlier in the chapter (see Figure 3.1, shown previously). User programs are still on the top, and system hardware is at the bottom. The distinction between “dynamic” and “static” components in the operating system kernel means that the dynamic components can be installed selectively, as requirements change or as technologies develop, without affecting the underlying static components of AIX 5L. AIX 5L and its extensions perform all housekeeping tasks for pSeries systems and interact with users to do such things as starting application programs, changing passwords, erasing files, and so on. The commanddriven user interface common to UNIX operating systems requires the user to type in somewhat cryptic UNIX commands and is generally used

Libraries

User programs

User Mode

System Call Interface

Security Dynamic Kernel

Static Kernel

Other

VMM

File Systems

LVM

Process Mgt

Dynamic Kernel

Interrupt Processing

Device Drivers

Hardware

Figure 3.7.

AIX 5L structure.

Networking

IPC

208

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

only by programming professionals. AIX 5L provides more user-friendly interfaces, including the Web-based System Manager, the AIXwindows7 graphical user interface (GUI), and the Systems Management Interface Tool (SMIT). These tools, along with on-line documentation, facilitate system administration and make the AIX 5L operating system easy to use. The AIX operating system maintains a high level of compatibility with industry standards to provide source-code compatibility with many application programs written for other open systems. Traditional UNIX operating system application development tools (such as the Source Code Control System, or SCCS, subroutine libraries, and the Make command) are addressed, as well as some newer tools (e.g., object-oriented programming and computer-aided software engineering products). The communications functions in AIX 5L handle everything from traditional UNIX operating system communications (e.g., asynchronous ASCII protocol) to current industry standards (e.g., TCP/IP and the Network File System). As has been mentioned previously, in most pSeries installations, PCs are attached using local area networks or wide area networks (WANs) to allow users to monitor and control the system, share data, exchange information, and use shared devices such as printers. To recap, IBM started with the UNIX operating system base, incorporated enhancements made by many organizations, and added some new ideas, all without losing compatibility with industry standards (POSIX, SVID2, or Open Group). The resulting AIX 5L operating system is an open system, which has evolved to conform to new industry standards as they emerge. One organization that has a major influence on the development of AIX 5L is the Open Group, a not-for-profit consortium of computer vendors (including IBM, HP, DEC, and others) formed in 1996 by the merger of X/Open and the Open Software Foundation (OSF). The mission of the Open Group is to develop specifications and software for the open-system arena and make the resulting specifications and software available to computer vendors under fair and equitable licensing terms. The Open Group solicits members and nonmembers for submissions of concepts and software to solve a particular problem, then evaluates each submission and selects the best. This submission then becomes the Open Group-endorsed standard for the open-system environment. This process is designed to foster the development of vendor-neutral, open-system standards that many different computer vendors can implement in a compatible fashion. IBM has committed to support Open Group technologies and standards as they emerge in AIX 5L.

Application Programs and Operating Systems

209

A Closer Look at AIX 5L The previous section provided an overview of the AIX 5L operating system, which has many complex features and functions, a complete description of which would warrant a separate book. The remainder of this chapter will look at some of the most important topics: •

User interfaces/services

•

Systems management

•

Disk management

•

Application development

•

Communications support

User Interfaces/Services The manner in which a user interacts with a computer system is determined by the user interface provided by the program(s) being executed by the computer system. Like other things concerning computers, the style, ease of use, and productivity of user interfaces have evolved over time. The AIX 5L operating system offers several different user interfaces selectable by the user. These user interfaces can be broken down into two types: •

Command shells

•

Graphical user interfaces

An example of a command shell is shown in Figure 3.8. This is a very simple user interface in which the user must type in AIX 5L operating system commands at a command prompt in order to accomplish operating system tasks such as starting application programs or examining the contents of a disk. For example, the user would type in “ls” (the list command) at the command prompt, as shown in Figure 3.9, to see a list of the files contained on disk. Three different command shells are provided with the AIX 5L operating system, differing in the command syntax and prompt:

210

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

AIX command

$

Figure 3.8. with AIX.

AIX command prompt presented by a command shell provided

•

Korn shell

•

Bourne shell

•

C shell

With any of these command shells, the user traditionally must remember (or look up) somewhat cryptic commands and type them in using the keyboard. For this reason, command shells are more useful to experienced users. Of course, it is much easier—not to mention being expected as the norm—for users to interact with pSeries systems using a graphical user interface. Everyone is used to using a mouse and icons to initiate ac-

Application Programs and Operating Systems

Figure 3.9. shown.

211

The “ls” command is used to list the files contained on a disk, as

tions. The AIXwindows environment provides a graphical user interface. Figure 3.10 shows a typical image as presented by AIXwindows. By selecting various icons with a mouse, the user can quickly start an application program, browse existing files, create new files, and delete files. The many different styles and sizes of text available through the PostScript standard can be displayed on the screen, making for effective and attractive presentation of information to the user. This feature of AIXwindows, called Display PostScript, allows the user to view PostScript text and images on the screen. The Common Desktop Environment (CDE) is provided with AIXwindows and provides an iconbased interface for working with files and other basic tasks. Also included with AIX 5L as part of the Linux affinity tools are the GNOME and

212

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Figure 3.10.

Graphical user interface provided by AIXwindows environment.

KDE interfaces familiar to Linux users. The user can select any of the CDE, GNOME, or KDE desktop environments. In addition to the programming needed to perform traditional operating system tasks, AIX 5L includes some commonly needed programs that provide various services of interest to AIX users. The on-line documentation for AIX is available in HTML format and is searchable and viewable with a Web browser. The HTML documentation CD ships as a part of the base AIX operating system. InfoExplorer, which provides an interface to basic “help” information (Figure 3.10), continues to be supported as an optional AIX feature. More detailed technical reference documentation is available on-line in a Web browser-viewable format.

Application Programs and Operating Systems

213

The standard UNIX mail facilities are also provided in AIX 5L. The user can choose from two different mail programs. The more basic mail program commonly found in today’s UNIX operating systems allows users to create and send simple documents or messages to one another. For more advanced mail functions, users can choose to install the message handling program, which offers additional capabilities such as message sequencing, message annotation, mail folders, date sorting, and so forth.

Systems Management With any computer system, various tasks must be performed in support of the computer system itself by someone trained to be a systems administrator. These are called systems management tasks and involve things such as authorizing new users and making backup copies of the disk information. These basic operating system tasks can be done by stepping through menus in the Systems Management Interface Tool of AIX 5L. More experienced administrators may use AIX 5L operating system commands from a command shell, as previously described. In today’s distributed world, this is no simple task, especially if one is managing a large number of machines that are geographically dispersed. For managing one or a small number of pSeries systems, the tools provided with AIX 5L are adequate. But for situations in which hundreds of systems and/or a heterogeneous mix of pSeries and other systems must be managed, IBM offers the Tivoli 7 suite of systems management products, which form the basic infrastructure to link together a vast array of systems from various suppliers and running a variety of operating systems. One of the first jobs to be done by a systems administrator is to tell the system who is authorized to use it. This is done by creating a user profile for each system user. The user profile contains information such as the user’s nickname (called a user identification, or user ID), password, and security level, and accounting information for departmental billing for computer services. The AIX 5L operating system’s built-in security, if enabled, will require the user to enter the correct password before being allowed access to the system. If desired, security can be defined so that the user is restricted to specific functions. In fact, security enhancements were made to AIX 5L based on the stringent security

214

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

requirements of the National Computer Security Center Trusted Computer System Evaluation Criteria Class C2. Several useful security enhancements in AIX 5L involving password management and login controls are covered in more detail at the end of the chapter. Now that the users can begin to use the pSeries system, the disks will begin to accumulate information that may be vital to the day-today operations of the organization. This information becomes an asset to the organization and should be protected as such. AIX 5L provides several functions that allow the systems administrator to protect against the loss of this information, be it from user errors, hardware failures, intentional corruption, or whatever. Through AIX 5L operating system facilities, the systems administrator can make backup copies of the information on disks to magnetic tape. These backups should be done on a regular basis (e.g., daily), and the backup tapes are stored in a safe place at another physical location. If the information on the system disks is somehow lost, the backup tape can be used to restore the system to the state when the last backup was made. Several programs familiar to UNIX administrators (tar, cpio, and backup) are available within AIX 5L or as additional products (Sysback and Tivoli Storage Manager) to facilitate backing up the system. In environments in which quick recovery from disk failures is even more important, a function of AIX 5L called mirroring allows for duplicate copies of information to be kept current on two or three different disk drives. This function allows for immediate recovery from disk failures. We will cover mirroring further in the next section. Because pSeries systems are often used in environments in which operating system experience is limited, the AIX 5L operating system provides assistance in this area. SMIT provides menus to guide the systems administrator through administrative functions such as creating a user profile, adding a new printer, managing disk storage, or changing a password. Rather than having to remember and type in the somewhat cryptic commands, the user can select menu items and will be prompted for needed information. Then AIX 5L automatically builds, issues, and logs the command(s) needed to accomplish the task. While the user is interacting with SMIT, on-line help text is available to help resolve any confusion. More experienced systems administrators can still choose to directly issue traditional commands to accomplish these same tasks. Figure 3.11 shows a typical screen using the Web-based System Manager. This interface allows the systems administrator to monitor and control one or more systems either from a graphics terminal attached to the

Application Programs and Operating Systems

215

pSeries system or on the Internet from a PC with a Java 1.3-capable Web browser. The names of the host system(s) to be managed are shown in the navigation area at the left, and the contents area at the right shows the items that the Web-based System Manager can handle for that host. As can be seen in Figure 3.11, rather than using terminology that is unique to UNIX, the Web-based System Manager uses concepts and symbols that are familiar to users experienced in managing systems using the Microsoft Windows 7 operating system. Many customers take advantage of ordering pSeries systems with AIX already installed on the disks at the factory. The installation can be customized to include only those components of AIX 5L that the customer will use. For an additional fee, IBM manufacturing offers a service of installing other software and configuring pSeries systems to the customer’s specifications. Some IBM Business Partners may offer installation and customization services for pSeries systems purchased from

Figure 3.11. A Web-based System Manager screen showing the monitoring and control tasks which the systems administrator can select.

216

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

them. While the installation of AIX 5L (at no extra charge) is used by many customers, the custom system configuration service is usually of interest only to customers who are buying multiple pSeries systems, all of which must be configured identically. An example of this type of customer is a large retailer who must deploy many pSeries systems to stores throughout the nation or throughout the world. An additional software package called the Service Agent is available at no additional charge if your pSeries system is covered by an IBM Warranty or IBM Maintenance Service Agreement. The Service Agent for pSeries does the following: •

Monitors and analyzes all recoverable system errors, and, if needed, can automatically place a service call to IBM without user intervention.

•

Performs problem analysis on a subset of hardware-related problems and can automatically report the results to IBM Service with customer authorization (and a modem). The Service Agent analysis and problem reporting is based on default values, but the customer may modify those values. This may be important during periods when hardware upgrades or testing are in progress in order to prevent placing an unnecessary service call.

With Service Agent, it is possible for IBM Service to show up to perform preventive maintenance that the user had no idea was needed. In this way catastrophic failures can be avoided. Alternatively, the customer may configure Service Agent to alert its own IT personnel by e-mail. This can be done in lieu of or in combination with placing a call to the IBM Service Center.

Disk Management One of the jobs performed by the systems administrator of a computer system is to subdivide and allocate (manage) the available disk storage to meet the needs of the users. The systems administrator uses functions of the operating system to manage the disks. Many UNIX operating systems conceptually subdivide a computer’s disk storage into many smaller disks called file systems. These file systems can then be used to hold programs, data files, and so on. The systems administrator must

Application Programs and Operating Systems

217

decide how large each file system needs to be during the initial installation of the application program. However, it is often difficult to judge how large a given file system needs to be until the system has been in productive use for a while. Because it is difficult to increase the size of a file system after the system is in productive use, herein lies a problem with the disk management approach taken by most traditional UNIX operating systems. Another limitation commonly found in UNIX operating systems is that a single file system cannot span more than one physical disk drive. That is, the file system size is limited by the size of each individual disk drive installed in the computer system rather than by the total amount of disk storage in the computer system. As application programs grow more sophisticated, file systems larger than a single physical drive are desirable. To address these limitations, the AIX 5L operating system has expanded on the file system concept of the UNIX operating systems (and earlier AIX versions) with the Logical Volume Manager (LVM). The LVM conceptually partitions a group of physical disk drives (up to 128) into equal-sized sections called physical partitions. A logical volume is a collection of these physical partitions, conceptually equivalent to a file system. One key difference in this approach is that a single logical volume can consist of physical partitions from multiple disk units in the computer system. This means that a logical volume can be larger than any individual disk unit in the system if necessary. Another difference is that physical partitions can easily be added to a logical volume to increase its size without disrupting normal operation or moving any other partition. One other function of the LVM is mirroring. This feature allows for multiple (or mirror) copies of a logical volume to be automatically maintained in disk storage. Each physical partition of a mirrored logical volume has one or two other physical partitions allocated on different physical disks to hold identical copies of the data. If a permanent disk error occurs while reading a mirrored logical volume, the LVM will automatically read the data from one of the mirror physical partitions and write any new data to a new area of disk. Thus the mirroring function of the LVM often allows a pSeries system to recover from permanent disk errors without disrupting normal system operation. Systems providing redundancy for automatic error-recovery purposes are said to be designed for high availability. Be aware, however, that because you are keeping multiple copies of information in the disk system, more disk space will be required when the mirroring function is used.

218

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

The JFS2 file system introduced in AIX 5L has been tested to support file sizes up to 16 terabytes, with an architectural limit of 4 petabytes (4 PB = 4000 TB). It also uses a B-tree directory structure that provides improved performance. JFS2 supports on-line disk defragmentation and software level striping and mirroring (RAID 0 and RAID 1). AIX 5L v5.2 provides “large page” support. That is, software may define pages as large as 16 MB to help improve throughput for computation-intensive workloads that require large amounts of data to be transferred to and from disk storage.

Application Development Many organizations find that writing their own custom application programs is the best method of solving problems through computers. We will discuss various features within AIX 5L and additional products that can be used to develop applications. A large number of development tools are available for AIX; after all, that’s where UNIX began, as a development system. First, let’s look at what comes with AIX 5L itself. AIX 5L Development Tools With the AIX 5L operating system, several development tools are available to you. AIX 5L comes with the “vi” full-screen editor and tools to support the development and maintenance of custom application programs. These include traditional UNIX commands and utilities such as the Make command, used to easily rebuild complex systems of programs after changes have been made. Another traditional UNIX operating system function supported by AIX 5L is the Source Code Control System, which provides a mechanism to record and control when, why, and by whom changes are made to the source code of a program under development. Subroutine libraries provided include libc.a, the enhanced floating-point math library, the 4.3 BSD compatibility library, and a DCE threads compatibility library. AIX 5L also provides a type of programming structure for automating a series of operating system commands, called “shell scripts.” Shell scripts can be used to issue a single operating system command or to define a complex series of operating system commands that present the user with menus and initiate other application programs. No matter how many operating system commands are contained in a shell script,

Application Programs and Operating Systems

219

all commands in the shell script can be executed by simply typing in the name of the shell script. Shell scripts are a shorthand for users or systems administrators, allowing them to automatically execute long lists of operating system commands. When the graphical Common Desktop Environment is used, several additional development tools are included, such as a graphical languagesensitive editor, a program build manager, static analysis tools, development and tool managers, a graphical debugger, integrated file transfer, and so forth. Compilers The IBM VisualAge C Compiler, a separately ordered product for AIX 5L, supports the development of programs written in the popular C programming language. A programming language can be thought of as a library of instructions from which a programmer constructs a program. The instructions of C (and other programming languages) are designed to be easily understood by the programmer, facilitating productivity while writing programs. However, the resulting list of instructions (the program) cannot be directly understood by the pSeries hardware. The VisualAge C Compiler takes the list of C instructions written by the programmer and automatically converts them to a series of instructions that are executable by the pSeries processor circuitry. Other languages available include C++ and FORTRAN. Additional compilers for AIX 5L are also available from companies other than IBM. All of these compilers are designed to meet existing industry standards that specifically define the elements of each language. The language you select depends on the requirements of the application program and the skills of your programmer(s). Although not a programming tool in the same sense as are compilers, it is important to note that AIX 5L provides runtime execution for programs written in the popular industry-standard Java 2 language. One may think of this capability as a Java 2 language interpreter. Both the 64-bit and the 32-bit kernels of AIX 5L are fully Java 2 compatible. Libraries Several subroutine libraries are offered for the AIX 5L programming environment, including the AIX Engineering Scientific Subroutine Library (ESSL). These subroutines use algorithms tailored to specific op-

220

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

erational characteristics of the hardware such as cache size, page size, and floating-point operations. ESSL provides prewritten routines for such things as matrix operations, eigensystem analysis, interpolation, linear algebraic equations, Fourier transforms, convolutions and correlations, and others. This subroutine library is designed to accelerate application program development by allowing the programmer to simply embed highly tuned, prewritten mathematical routines rather than write them from scratch. Through the X development environment, AIXwindows (discussed earlier in the chapter) provides a multiwindow (based on OSF/Motif) programming environment. This allows an application programmer to do things such as examine source code in one window and monitor the executing program in another. Alternately, programmers may be accessing AIX 5L on-line documentation in one window while writing a program in another, looking at both simultaneously. AIXwindows also provides tools to ease the development of effective graphical user interfaces for programs—namely, the X Windows Graphics Support Library and Display PostScript for AIXwindows product. Support for three-dimensional (3D) graphics is provided by two software components for use with IBM’s UNIX workstations—OpenGL and GL 3.2, and PHIGS. The OpenGL and GL 3.2 component provides support for the popular Graphics Library developed by Silicon Graphics. The PHIGS component provides a set of subroutines for generating and manipulating graphical images through the ANSI and ISO standard known as the Programmer Hierarchical Interactive Graphics System (PHIGS). Programs specially written to these APIs can usually be migrated to AIXwindows with minimal programming efforts. Additional Tools Many of today’s larger program development projects have become extremely complex—involving tens, hundreds, or even thousands of people who may be geographically dispersed around the world. Managing such projects and ensuring a quality result has become a discipline in and of itself, known as computer-aided software engineering (CASE). Although CASE methods were developed to address the needs of large application development projects, CASE concepts and tools can be employed for any size project. Today, many computer-based CASE tools are emerging to help implement a structured application development process. In fact, there are so many different tools and approaches

Application Programs and Operating Systems

221

intended to improve the process of custom application development that the diversity itself can lead to incompatibilities and a fragmented development process. This problem has been rectified by the Common Desktop Environment. The CDE provides a common framework for many CASE tools to work coherently together. This open approach allows the CASE tool user to choose from a wide array of CASE tools (that adhere to the framework) from many different companies with the confidence that they will work together. Many of the standard AIX 5L development tools are integrated via the CDE. A product similar to the standard SCCS called Configuration Management Version Control (CMVC) can be especially important in larger projects, where multiple programmers may be working on a single project. CMVC can handle the check-in, check-out, versioning, and reporting procedures on any number of development items such as source code, object code, documentation, and design changes. The built-in features of the AIX 5L operating system along with additional tools (AIXwindows, optional compilers, the CASE framework/tools, and so on) make for productive and flexible application program development and maintenance.

Distributed Computing Among the most far-reaching extensions to AIX 5L are the AIX Distributed Computing Environment products. In the open-system environment, many different brands of computers are typically found in the same communications network. An environment in which many small computers (rather than one large central computer) are used to satisfy the computing needs of users is called a distributed computing environment. Although the computer systems are physically attached via the network, often the application program(s) running on one computer system or operating system can’t interact effectively with an application program running on a different computer system or operating system— even when no one is breaking open-system rules. This problem becomes more apparent as networks grow and users on one workstation (a client workstation) need access to the resources located on another computer (a server). One way to address the need for a more homogeneous environment for distributed computing is to provide a set of common services that are always present in a distributed computing environment. Then any

222

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

application programs that are designed to use only those services will work on any type of computer system and network. The Open Group (discussed earlier in this chapter in “AIX 5L—An Executive Overview”) has selected and endorsed a set of distributed computing technologies taken from many different vendors and collectively called them the distributed computing environment. IBM’s AIX DCE products are built on the Open Group’s DCE. Many of the base “run-time” services of DCE and its major service, the Distributed File System (DFS), are integrated into AIX 5L. These client services include configuration, security, cell directory, time, RPC, and DFS. The DFS base services allow users to share files stored in a network of computers without knowing the physical location of the files.

Communications Support Communications facilities included in AIX 5L allow a properly equipped pSeries system to communicate with almost any kind of computer in a variety of ways. Traditional open systems used terminals and printers that communicated with the computer system over asynchronous communications links using the American Standard Code for Information Interchange protocol. With this communications method, one character at a time (letter, number, period, comma, and so on) was sent from the computer’s communications port through a simple cable to the communications port of the attached device. This is how all ASCII terminals and printers communicated with the UNIX operating system. This simple ASCII method was also used to send information from one computer system to another over a similar type of cable. Although pSeries systems and AIX 5L still support ASCII communications with other computer systems, they are much less frequently used than the methods described here. As more and more vendors offered computer systems and the need for intercomputer communications evolved, the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) was developed. As an industry standard, TCP/IP allows systems from many different vendors to communicate with each other in a single network. The AIX 5L operating system supports TCP/IP over Ethernet/802.3 networks, Token-Ring networks, the Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON7), Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), and the Block Multiplexer Channel Adapter if the computer systems are near each other (for example, on the same campus). AIX 5L also supports the TCP/IP protocol between distant computer

Application Programs and Operating Systems

223

systems—over asynchronous communications networks or X.25 packetswitching networks, for example. Communications functions have emerged to meet the needs of more sophisticated communications environments, such as the Network File System (NFS) and the Distributed Computing Environment, both of which are supported in the AIX 5L operating system. The NFS and application programs written to use it allow one computer system to access information located on another computer system over a local area network or other networks using TCP/IP. This allows information to be distributed in a network so as to make that information most available to those who need it and so that it can best be managed. The DCE extensions to AIX 5L support application programs designed to take advantage of DCE by distributing a computer’s workload across the various computer systems in a network. However, with recent advances in communications technology, DCE is of less importance today than in the past. Although the requirement for pSeries users to access applications on other types of systems in native mode (e.g., emulating an IBM 3270 or 5250 terminal) is rapidly going away, AIX 5L supports the IBM Host Access Client Package for Multiplatforms v3.0 product. The IBM Host Access Client Package provides access to applications and data on iSeries (5250), zSeries7 (3270), and DEC/UNIX (VT) hosts for traditional and Web users in either intranet or SNA environments. AIX 5L is supported both as a client and as a host. Tivoli NetView7 provides network management tools based on the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) commonly used in the open-system environment. It works like this: When a device in the network (called the SNMP agent) senses it has a problem, it sends an SNMP message to the computer system running NetView (the SNMP manager). NetView then notifies the network support personnel that a problem has been detected and provides detailed information about the problem. Thus, NetView allows for centralized management of a distributed, open-system network, which typically improves the productivity of the network support personnel and the availability of the network. Tivoli NetView also provides firewall support with a single unidirectional port for use in e-business networks and provides the systems administrator many tools for managing the network, including diagnostic aids and a graphical representation of the network. An optional, layered product for AIX 5L is AIX Fast Connect for POWER Version 3.1, which allows a pSeries system to cooperate with personal computers. AIX Fast Connect provides file and print services

224

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

for connecting many types of client workstations, such as Windows 9X, Windows NT client, Windows 2000 client, Macintosh, and NetWare clients. These components all use the same record locking, file locking, and security functions, enabling users to share files between AIX Connections, NWserver, and MAC Server and AIX applications, and to transparently and concurrently share files with each other’s clients. The IPX/SPX, TCP/IP, NetBIOS, RFC 1001/1002, and AppleTalk protocols are supported, as well as an embedded gateway support for NetWare, server message block (SMB), and DCE-DFS file systems. AIX Fast Connect provides for the free exchange of information between the PC and the pSeries system. For example, information in pSeries files can be brought down to the PC and manipulated using a spreadsheet program. Further, a file created on the PC (using a word processor, for example) can be transferred up to the pSeries system and accessed by AIX 5L like any other file. Finally, the pSeries disks can be used as an extension to the PC’s disk space through the use of shared volumes—areas of the disk that can be accessed by either a PC or AIX 5L. Through these shared volumes, the pSeries system can be the central storage element in a network of PC and pSeries system users, allowing any authorized user access to the information. In the same way that information can be shared, printers and communications links can also be shared. For example, through the AIX Fast Connect virtual printer function, a PS/2 user can automatically send documents to printers attached to a pSeries system. AIX Fast Connect allows the PC and the pSeries system to cooperate in such a way that the user can take advantage of the best of both. The PC can be used for such operations as spreadsheet programs, graphics, and word processing, providing functions and response times tuned to these applications. At the same time, the pSeries system contributes information security, centralized systems management, large disks, extensive communications, high-speed printers, and so forth. AIX Fast Connect allows the user to perform the needed functions on the system best suited for the job.

Internet Software The explosion of the World Wide Web has caused an outpouring of software for the Internet from vendors. IBM is no exception, and in fact much of its Internet-related software for AIX 5L is included as a free Expansion Pack. In general, the software falls into a few catego-

Application Programs and Operating Systems

225

ries: browsers, server enablers, and development tools. For more information on the Internet and its business possibilities, read Dr. Livingstone’s Online Shopping Safari Guidebook, by Frank Fiore (Maximum Press), Marketing on the Internet, by Michael Mathiesen (Maximum Press), or Building Intranets with Lotus Notes, by Steve Krantz (Maximum Press), or you can check out the Maximum Press home page at http://www.maxpress.com. Web Browsers Browsers are basic enablers that allow any client machine to search for, retrieve, and navigate (browse) HTML (HyperText Markup Language) data. The AIX 5L Expansion Pack for AIX 5L includes the Netscape Communicator Web Browser, which allows Web pages to be accessed from the Internet and viewed locally on the client desktop. The Netscape Navigator built-in scripting language, called JavaScript, is supported in this version of the Netscape Navigator and is what allows much of the moving elements that you see. JavaScript extends and enhances the capabilities of HTML documents. A Mail Window allows you to read your e-mail, sort the messages, file them in folders, and mail replies. The News Reader provides a concise view of the news hosts, newsgroups, and messages. The address book allows organization of e-mail addresses, and it looks and works very much like the bookmarks. Support for progressive JPEG images gives high-quality images that load faster than regular JPEG or GIF images. For easier browsing of Internet documents, the AIX 5L Bonus Pack also includes the Adobe Acrobat Reader. The Acrobat Reader is part of the Adobe Acrobat family of software, which lets you view, distribute, print, and save documents in Portable Document Format (PDF) regardless of the computer, operating system, fonts, or application used to create the original file. Portable Document Format files retain all the formatting, fonts, and graphics of the original document, and virtually any PostScript document can be converted into a PDF file. The Acrobat Reader software package includes the Acrobat Reader program file, associated files, and several on-line documents. Web Server Enablers These enablers allow businesses that have information to be shared either within the company (intranet) or with the outside world (Internet) to use a pSeries system as the server of that information. In fact, pSeries

226

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

systems have proven themselves to be quite good at Web serving. For example, at the time of this edition, the 16-way pSeries 690 result of 21,000 and the 8-way pSeries 650 result of 12,400 are numbers one and six, respectively, on the Ideas International list of top performers on the SPECweb99 benchmark, which measures the number of Internet connections that can be handled per second. Check the Maximum Press home page at http://www.maxpress.com for the latest information. AIX 5L includes the IBM HTTP Server, a Web server based on the popular Apache Web Server. It is also used in the Web-based System Manager and to access Help on-line. It supports such security features as SSL (Secure Socket Layer) connections and hardware cryptography. The WebSphere Application Server, a separate program product, is designed for nonprogrammers to use at home, at work, or in a small business. If you can use the Netscape Navigator browser, then you can publish your own Web site with WebSphere Application Server. It is a userfriendly, entry-level Web application server that installs quickly. Development Tools The AIX 5L Bonus Pack and Web Download pack include the IBM AIX Developer Kit, Java 2 Technology Edition, Version 1.3.1. This software package supports the Java programming environment. Java is an object-oriented programming environment that operates independent of any operating system or microprocessor. Java programs, called applications or applets, can be entirely developed using the compiler, debugger, and applet viewer tools provided in IBM’s implementation for the AIX for Java development environment. (C and C++ compilers and tools are not needed to create/run Java-based applets.) The same applets can be dynamically transmitted over a network and run on any client that has been enabled for Java. Because applet execution is platform independent, an applet developed with the AIX 5L tools can be executed on any Java-enabled platform (for example, Solaris). Typically, end users run Java applets from a Java-enabled Web browser (such as Netscape’s Navigator). Clicking on a link in a Web page results in an automatic download of the applet over the Internet to the client machine, with subsequent execution of the applet on that machine. Native Java-based security technology is used to enhance the secure execution of Java applets. Applets enable World Wide Web users to deliver more visually compelling Web content, such as through the use of animation. For example,

Application Programs and Operating Systems

227

the end user would potentially be able to view and interact with an applet by rotating a product image dynamically. Applets can also be created to take advantage of native tools on specific platforms. For example, an applet could be written to specifically interact with a database running on AIX 5L to dynamically extract and post live information on a user’s graphics display such as live weather maps or 10-minutedelayed stock prices. Applets can be discarded easily after they have been run, or they can be saved to media for future use. A set of sample applets is included to demonstrate a number of features of Java.

AIX Workload Manager AIX Workload Manager (WLM) is a standard feature of AIX 5L and is intended to help system administrators apply resource management policies to different workloads and help manage peak system demands. This capability can also be used to consolidate workloads from several different systems onto one pSeries system. The WLM function provides a policy-based method for managing system workload and system resources, including the following: •

System resource allocation with fine granularity to specific jobs

•

Logical job separation on the server

•

Keeping applications in memory for more predictable performance

•

Dynamically changing policies as job requirements change

•

Control options that include minimum and maximum percentage limits, shares, or a combination of both

As a function of AIX 5L, WLM will operate on any pSeries system from the smallest to the largest. WLM can also be used in an LPAR environment. Within each logical partition, the system resources assigned to that LPAR can be allocated to certain applications, just as if the LPAR were an independent server. This feature is extremely useful in guaranteeing proportional or minimal levels of resource to various applications.

228

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

AIX WLM is a very important tool used by the system administrator to allocate system resources (processors, memory, I/O) to processes and applications, so that the specified applications will always have available the resources needed to maintain adequate performance. In other words, with WLM, the administrator can prevent certain applications from being “starved” for resources due to peak demands from other application workloads. WLM allows management of subsets of workloads and control of subsets of total system resources. In addition to a graphical user interface, new functions available to the system administration are the ability to allocate disk I/O bandwidth and a subsystem to perform resource usage accounting per workload class, in addition to accounting per user or group of users.

Performance Analysis Tools The IBM Performance Toolbox (PTX) and AIX Performance Aide v3.1 provide a complete set of tools for analyzing and presenting in visual form the performance of the system resources, both in local and distributed environments. When used with AIX 5L v5.2, these tools can monitor resources that are dynamically assigned to LPARs. PTX v3.1 includes an application that presents simple snapshot views of overall system performance. With Performance Aide v3.1, the system administrator can continuously monitor the top resource consumption of processors, memory, and disk storage. These tools provide the detailed data that the system administrator needs in order to use AIX Workload Manager, dynamic LPAR, and pSeries Capacity Upgrade on Demand features in the most cost-effective way. Networking Performance In today’s “connected world” in which users access a server via the Internet and in which multiple servers within an enterprise are networked together, AIX 5L provides many capabilities to help ensure the best possible network performance. The administrator has the option of configuring multiple routes for load balancing or of setting up alternate routes for network traffic when the best route cannot perform its task for some reason. Using the Virtual IP Address (VIPA) function, system administrators can define a virtual IP address for a host, thus decoupling the IP

Application Programs and Operating Systems

229

address from a physical interface for TCP connections. A Dynamic Feedback Protocol (DFP) provides load statistics so that load can be balanced by sending future connections to available servers. To help improve TCP/IP performance over congested networks, AIX 5L provides increased initial windows, explicit congestion notification, and limited transmission mechanism functions. Sendmail Version 8.11 improves performance with multiple queues, memory-buffered pseudo-files, and more control over resolver timeouts. Also, AIX 5L supports the Cisco EtherChannel technology, which allows aggregation of up to four Gigabit Ethernet ports into a single channel. These network technology functions may seem a bit esoteric and of little interest to the average person, but for the systems administrator responsible for a company’s e-business network, these tools and programming interfaces provided in AIX 5L can make a significant difference in the system responsiveness that will be perceived by the end users of the system. Linux Affinity AIX provides the AIX Toolbox for Linux Applications, packaged on separate media for the convenience of users who may not need to take advantage of this package. This toolbox contains a collection of opensystem software built for AIX with APIs to AIX so that recompiled Linux applications using these routines do not have to supply their own libraries. IBM does not support these open-system tools, but they have been tested on AIX 5L. So, for those customers who want to port applications written for Linux to run as AIX 5L applications on their pSeries server, IBM has provided the tools to make that as easy as possible. Alternatively, users may choose to run Linux in one or more partitions of pSeries servers that support LPAR or may choose to run Linux only (i.e., “natively”) on their pSeries system.

Other AIX Features When AIX 5L is preinstalled, a pSeries Welcome Center is optionally available at no extra charge. The pSeries Welcome Center is a userfriendly introduction to the pSeries and AIX 5L product families that provides information about the end-user’s pSeries system and software, facilitates quick setup and configuration, demonstrates system capabilities, and provides links to other valuable resources of pSeries and AIX

230

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

information such as service and support. The Welcome Center uses the Netscape Communicator as the presentation tool with a default “home page” and a library of local HTML-format documents. These take up about 20 MB of local disk space, but, after viewing, there are options to remove them. The Welcome Center covers four major topics: •

“About Your System” familiarizes the end user with the features of the pSeries and AIX.

•

“System Setup and Registration” facilitates quick setup and system configuration.

•

“Just Imagine” contains a variety of topics including a demonstration of multimedia capabilities.

•

“Contact IBM” provides quick access to the service and support organization.

From a mail server standpoint, AIX includes support for the industry-standard Post Office Protocol III (POP III) and Internet Mail Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4). With AIX 5L, it is possible to boot a pSeries server from a storage area network (SAN) disk, so the systems administrator can manage and control the boot image from a central storage subsystem. There are other tools in AIX 5L to help the systems administrator manage multiple systems in a distributed system framework. Reliable Scalable Cluster Technology allows the administrator to monitor system resources and optionally run automatic responses if certain thresholds are met, and the Web-based System Manager provides a management console capable of managing multiple hosts without a Web browser. For users of pSeries and RS/6000 systems with the GXT4500P and GXT6500P 3D graphics accelerators, OpenGL applications can now support 64-bit direct window access, which should increase performance of 64-bit OpenGL applications. AIX 5L Bonus Pack, Expansion Pack, and Web Download Pack When AIX 5L media is ordered, IBM provides at no additional charge two CD-ROMs with additional software offerings. The AIX 5L Bonus Pack and Web Download Pack offer a large number of additional tools

Application Programs and Operating Systems

231

and applications, including evaluation software. The AIX 5L Expansion Pack provides AIX extensions, such as the IBM HTTP Server, Netscape Communicator, and Data Encryption Standard Library Routines. These offerings are provided mainly for users who need to take advantage of the Internet. For instance, there are Java development tools, security and cryptographic tools, network management tools, and the software for viewing AIX 5L documentation on-line. Links to the IBM Web site for a complete, up-to-date listing of the contents of the Bonus Pack, Expansion Pack, and Web Download Pack are available on the companion Web site for this book (www.maxpress.com). The Bonus Pack contains both ready-to-use applications and evaluation software packages. Over time, IBM plans to phase out the Bonus Pack on CD-ROM and provide these programs for users via the Web Download Pack. At this time, the following are some of the Bonus Pack contents: •

Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.06

•

AIX Developer Kit, Java 2 Technology Edition, Version 1.3.1, both 32-bit and 64-bit versions

•

AIX Fast Connect V3.1.2, Evaluation Software

•

Geodesic Systems Great Circle Version 6.0.1.5, Evaluation Software

•

Modular I/O Library V2.3

•

Tivoli Storage Manager v5.1, Evaluation Software

The contents of the AIX 5L Expansion Pack are primarily security and encryption tools. Since many of these programs are not suitable for downloading on the Internet, it is anticipated that the Expansion Pack will continue to be provided on CD-ROM. At this time, some of its contents include the following: •

IBM HTTP Server v1.3.19.4

•

Certificate Authentication Service v5.2

•

Crytographic Library v5.2

232

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

•

Network Authentication Service v1.2.0.1

•

IBM Web-based System Manager Security v5.2

•

Tools to Build Secure Java Applications v1.3.1

•

Netscape Communicator 4.8 with 128-bit encryption

The Web Download Pack requires registration, which is free, for first-time users. Rather than being a direct repository for the software (as are the CD-ROMs), the Web Download Pack contains information about the offerings and pointers to the actual download sites—whether IBM sites or those of third-party software vendors. The Web Download Pack is more flexible because users do not need to have the CD-ROM at hand. Also, its offerings will be more up-to-date since new software and updated programs will be available right away, without having to wait for the next release of a CD-ROM.

Open-System Standards AIX 5L is UNIX 98 compliant and conforms to standards for compatibility with other UNIX systems, including support for a range of standards and specifications including POSIX 1003.4a Draft 7 and X/Open XPG4 Base Profile. In addition, AIX 5L meets the common application interface defined by the Single UNIX Specification (formerly Spec 1170). Spec 1170 is a common API specification that is a collection of the most popular and most widely used UNIX application programming interfaces (XPG4, SVID3, OSF, and so on). Many vendors are expected to implement this specification, making UNIX application programs more portable. As a result of meeting the specification, AIX 5L has been granted the UNIX brand from X/Open (now the Open Group) as discussed earlier. Security Enhancements AIX 5L has obtained an Information Technology Security Evaluation Criteria (ITSEC) F-C/2/E3 and an International Computer Security Association (ICSA) Virtual Private Network (VPN) evaluation. This is a lot of technospeak to say that AIX 5L has been certified as very secure by organizations that know security. Two of the most used and most

Application Programs and Operating Systems

233

useful security enhancements are password management and login control. Password management is designed to do the following: •

Define and restrict words that cannot be chosen as passwords

•

Set password expiration warnings

•

Restrict the reuse of previous passwords

•

Lock out users after a password exceeds a specified lifetime

The second security enhancement provided is login control, which provides the following features: •

Time of day/day of week restriction at the user level

•

Time of day/day of week restriction at the login port level

•

Lock out user after a specified number of failed login attempts

•

Disable login port after specified number of failed login attempts

•

Login retry delay

•

Login completion time-out

Desktop User Interface AIX 5L includes the industry-standard graphical user interface called the Common Desktop Environment. This is a Motif-based user interface based on the joint development efforts of IBM, Hewlett-Packard, Sunsoft, and others. The CDE is an easier to use, iconic interface for the graphics system user. It includes productivity tools such as a calendar system, e-mail, and an editor, clock, file manager, icon painter, and trash can. In addition, AIX 5L includes the GNOME and KDE desktop environments familiar to Linux users. File System The JFS2 file system in AIX 5L v5.1 supports both file systems and individual files up to 1 TB in size, and JFS2 in AIX 5L v5.2 provides

234

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

files and file systems up to 16 TB in size. AIX 5L provides support for disk defragmentation and software level striping. The software striping is similar to RAID 0 (discussed in Chapter 2) and allows parallel reading or writing of sections of data across multiple disks. Striping can enhance the performance of many applications. Software striping and mirroring can be combined on the same logical volume, providing a RAID 0+1 implementation via software. Installation If you don’t have AIX 5L preloaded onto your system, tools to allow easy installation are provided. You can use the Web-based System Manager, which allows access from PC clients running Web browsers (e.g., Netscape Navigator, MicrosoftTM Internet Explorer) that accept the Java plug-in. Other alternatives are a guided tour through the installation process, called Installation Assistant or the Network Install Manager (NIM), which installs the operating system from a server onto clients on the network. AIX 5L can install many of its components automatically as it detects the types of hardware options installed. It also has a deinstallation facility.

What About 64-Bit Capability? Before we go into further detail, let’s discuss this whole notion of 64-bit computing capability and what it means to you. This is an issue that has been confusing to many people for a number of years. After all, not too long ago we were all running operating systems with just 16-bit addressing on our desktops. The primary advantage to using more bits is in gaining addressability for more memory. Until very recently, most UNIX operating systems were 32-bit systems, allowing memory up to 4 GB to be addressed. Now, 4 GB is an awful lot of real memory, but the performance of very large applications can be improved by having even more. When you go to 64-bit addressability, the theoretical limit on your memory goes up to a whopping 16 million TB (16,000,000,000,000,000,000 bytes). Figure 3.12 illustrates the exponential growth in addressability as the number of bits available grows. It should be several years before we outgrow the capabilities in 64-bit addressing (notice, we don’t say never).

Application Programs and Operating Systems

Number of Bits

Addressable Bytes

Theoretical Memory Limit

8 16 32 64

2 raised to the power 8 2 raised to the power 16 2 raised to the power 32 2 raised to the power 64

256 bytes 64 KB 4 GB 16 million TB

235

Figure 3.12. Memory addressability for operating systems with varying numbers of bits.

Let’s assume that you are a manufacturing firm and that you have a relatively large database of, say, 30 GB, which you make available to your enterprise applications such as human resources, accounting, and distribution. If you have a UNIX system with 16 GB of main memory, you can load very large segments of your database into real memory, increasing the likelihood that the data you require will be in main memory. This allows you to avoid the performance hit of going to the disks for the information, swapping or paging this data into real memory, and writing the replaced data back out to the disk. The preceding example assumed a 64-bit database as well as operating system and hardware, thus allowing big “chunks” (more than 4 GB) to be manipulated at one time. However, even if an individual database is not that large, performance advantages can still be realized by having a 64-bit operating system and larger memory available. In this case, you may have several applications and many processes running concurrently on your system. Even though no one of them wants more than, say, 2 GB or 3 GB of memory (or even considerably less), greater amounts of total memory will reduce memory contention between the processes that are running. AIX 5L gives the application developer and the end user a full 64bit environment. It supports 64-bit hardware, which includes all pSeries systems and currently available RS/6000 systems except Models B50 and 150, and 64-bit applications, such as Oracle 8 and IBM DB2. AIX 5L has preserved full binary compatibility with previous hardware and applications. Existing 32-bit applications will run absolutely unchanged and without performance degradation on AIX 5L. Furthermore, AIX 5L will run on all of the existing 32-bit RS/6000 systems that are still supported. This is important to many users because they prefer, for ease of management, to have all of the systems in their enterprise at the same

236

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

operating system level. With AIX 5L, 64-bit and older 32-bit systems can have the same operating system installed, and 64-bit systems can also run 32-bit and 64-bit applications at the same time. Since AIX 5L provides either a 32-bit kernel or a 64-bit kernel (selection made at installation), a word about compatibility using AIX 5L is in order. The 32-bit kernel provides compatibility with existing 32-bit AIX applications, while the 64-bit kernel includes 64-bit device drivers and APIs, enabling increased use of system resources and larger application workloads on 64-bit hardware. Obviously, since most pSeries systems have 64-bit architecture, it is advantageous to install the 64-bit kernel in most situations. From a compatibility standpoint, applications written to earlier AIX 32-bit versions are binary compatible and will run on AIX 5L (both 32bit and 64-bit kernels), except in some unusual circumstances, such as the programmer having used undocumented software interfaces. Note that 64-bit applications produced using AIX Version 4 will not execute directly on AIX 5L. Those applications must be recompiled before they will execute on AIX 5L. The next question you may have about your 32-bit applications is, “Should I recompile them to 64 bits to gain further performance advantage?” The answer is simple: Unless your application is under address space constraint, you will not improve performance by a recompile. In fact, all you will really end up doing is increasing the application footprint because your pointers take up twice as much space in 64-bit applications. One last point about compatibility between 32- and 64-bit systems is this: Application developers can develop 64-bit applications even if they are using AIX 5L on a 32-bit system. The ability to build 64-bit objects does not depend on having 64-bit hardware. Of course, running these objects does require the full 64-bit environment. AIX 5L has been designed to industry standards. The most predominant standard at this time is the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2 (http://www.rdg.opengroup.org/public/tech/unix/version2/). This specification addresses such issues as the API, large file support (AIX 5L v5.2 supports files as large as 16 TB), and more. Compliance with this standard has been verified to the satisfaction of the Open Group, and AIX 5L has received the UNIX 98 brand. AIX 5L has also adopted the 64-bit data standard called LP64, as is shown in Figure 3.13. This defines for developers how many bits should be allocated for the various data types.

Application Programs and Operating Systems

Data Type

LP64

ILP32

char short int long pointer

8 bits 16 bits 32 bits 64 bits 64 bits

8 bits 16 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits

237

Figure 3.13. AIX uses the industry 64-bit data standard LP64. This chart shows the number of bits used by the different data types in the LP64 standard as well as the 32-bit ILP32 standard.

AIX 5L Summary AIX 5L, together with the Bonus Pack, Expansion Pack, and Web Download Pack, provides an open, high-performance UNIX operating system with a rich set of networking and security features, systems management and performance analysis tools, and application development facilities. AIX 5L supports the most recent pSeries hardware technology as well as the latest open-system standards and technologies. As has been the case since AIX was introduced in 1986, AIX 5L will continue to be enhanced as hardware, software, and network technologies evolve.

The Linux Operating System It’s easy to see that the Linux operating system, once a phenomenon of academic or investigative interest, has moved fully to the stage of commercial implementation. Just walk through your local computer store and notice all the Linux distributions and Linux applications that are available. Or browse some computer software sites on the Internet, and it will be obvious that Linux is here to stay. Most of the Linux products in the stores are designed for Intel-based systems for small business and home use. But there are several distributors of Linux and suppliers of Linux services that provide the products and services that businesses require in order to embrace Linux as one of their operating system options—or perhaps as their only operating system.

238

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

IBM in general, and pSeries in particular, have embraced Linux and open source software as key components in taking e-business to the next level. Along with other open standards, such as HTTP, XML, and TCP, Linux plays a pivotal role in bringing interoperability to disparate server platforms and providing customers with an open, integrated e-business structure. Linux has evolved into an industry standard, and IBM continues to work with the Linux and open source communities to support open source software and related standards across its servers. Linux is UNIX related in the sense that it is based on the open-system design philosophy used in the original UNIX development, but Linux is not a UNIX operating system. Whereas UNIX has split into several competing UNIX operating system, such as IBM’s AIX 5L and Sun Microsystem’s Solaris, Linux is a distinct single-source operating system. Because of its strict adherence to open-system standards, Linux does not have all the extensions that have been developed for the various UNIX implementations, since those enhancements may depend on unique capabilities of one particular manufacturer’s systems. But since Linux is an outgrowth of the UNIX heritage, it is a natural fit for companies that use UNIX servers to be interested in deploying Linux as well. And that’s where the pSeries comes into the Linux picture. IBM pSeries management believes that Linux will help drive the long-term growth of the Internet by providing an open application platform that can harness leading-edge technologies and simplify customer choice. The common application platform will help ensure software interoperability across heterogeneous servers. IBM is an active participant in the Open Source community, not only embracing its software, but also contributing significant skills, technology, and Open Source software where appropriate.

Background Linux, named after its original developer, a Finnish computer science student named Linus Torvalds, is an Open Source technology. The Open Source community of independent developers provides source code that is available free for anyone to use. As stated in the Introduction, this does not mean “free” in terms of price (a company may charge for distributing the software). But anyone is free to copy the source code and give it away to someone else, free to change the software by having full access to the source code, and free to distribute an improved version of the software.

Application Programs and Operating Systems

239

IBM has made and continues to make extensive commitments to support the Linux open computing environment by contributing software (mainly device driver code) to the Open Source community and by participating in activities such as the Linux Standard Base, the Free Standards Group, the Open Source Development Lab, and the Linux for the PowerPC Architecture project. IBM pSeries works with several Linux distributor partners—SuSE, Red Hat, and Turbolinux—to develop and test Linux distributions to run on the pSeries server family.

Linux on pSeries All of IBM’s server platforms are Linux friendly, including zSeries, iSeries, pSeries, and xSeries servers. xSeries servers are certified under the IBM ServerProven Program for Caldera, Red Hat, SuSE and Turbolinux distributions. In addition, selected models of IBM IntelliStations7 and ThinkPads7 are Linux enabled. For mainframe systems, Linux for zSeries and Linux for S/390 are available from distribution partners. IBM has enhanced the openness of the zSeries and iSeries systems by providing Linux interoperability that can extend file serving, data, printing, and other services to Linux clients throughout an enterprise. The Linux affinity APIs in AIX 5L that support the recompilation of applications written for Linux for execution on pSeries products running AIX 5L have already been described. While this approach is useful in some circumstances, companies whose businesses depend on running Linux applications are likely to want to run Linux “natively,” that is, directly on the pSeries hardware. There are several distributions available which run on pSeries. Recently, a Linux client for the Web-based System Manager was added in AIX 5L v5.2. Generally speaking, Linux performance does not scale as well as AIX 5L for SMP servers with more than eight processors. However, as development evolves in the open-system community, this situation will change. If their requirement is to run Linux only, pSeries users should consider entry and midrange systems such as p615 (1- and 2-way), p630 (1- to 4-way), and p650 (2- to 8-way). If they want to run Linux in one or more LPARs, then they may choose from the complete range of LPARcapable pSeries servers (p630, p650, p655, p670, p690). One other consideration for users who wish to run Linux on pSeries is that I/O device and adapter support is more limited than when running AIX 5L. The reason for this situation is that device driver code for supported devices has to be ported for Linux and made available to the

240

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Open Source community. Initial priorities for device drivers have been for SCSI, Ethernet, Fibre Channel, and 2D graphics adapters. Currently, Linux on pSeries can take advantage of Ultra-SCSI Differential and Ultra3-SCSI adapters (not yet RAID), up to Gigabit Ethernet adapters (UTP and fibre), the 2 Gbps Fibre Channel adapter, and the GXT135P graphics adapter (including digital support). A selected set of media devices and disk storage subsystems including IBM 2104 Expandable Storage Plus, IBM FAStT systems, and IBM Enterprise Storage Server (ESS) are also supported.

Linux Distributions for pSeries SuSE was the first to offer a Linux distribution for pSeries and RS/6000 systems. After offering two PowerPC versions using the 32-bit kernel, SuSE introduced the 64-bit SMP-capable SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 8 (SLES 8) for iSeries and pSeries in December 2002. SLES 8 is now supported on all available pSeries and RS/6000 servers except the 32-bit RS/6000 Models B50 and 150. It is also supported in LPARs on the pSeries systems that provide that capability, namely p630, p650, p655, p670, and p690. Red Hat introduced a Linux distribution for pSeries and RS/6000 systems with Red Hat 7.1 in early 2002, using the 32-bit Linux kernel. An update in December 2002 uses the 64-bit kernel, but still supports only 32-bit applications. Red Hat Linux 7.1 for pSeries (64-bit) runs on a few RS64 IVB and POWER3-based servers—pSeries 620, pSeries 640, and pSeries 660. Since these models are near the end of their life, this 32-bit distribution is of limited interest. IBM has recently entered an agreement with Red Hat with the goal of making Red Hat Enterprise Linux Advanced Server with a 64-bit kernel available to support both 32-bit and 64-bit applications for pSeries in late 2003. Turbolinux recently introduced in Japan and is anticipated to announce in other Asia Pacific countries their Turbolinux Linux Enterprise Server 8 (TLES 8) product. Previously, the only Turbolinux distribution for pSeries was a 32-bit product for the p640 server. Turbolinux is a key distributor in the Asia Pacific market, and it is anticipated that TLES 8 will have broad support for pSeries systems in the near future. IBM does not sell and support the Linux operating system, but several Linux distributors provide software, support, and services for pSeries

Application Programs and Operating Systems

241

users who choose to install Linux. IBM Global Services will, for a fee, provide Linux services and support, also. As was mentioned in Chapter 1, IBM offers the pSeries 615, 630, and 650 servers in “Linux-ready” Express Configurations, which come without an AIX 5L license. Customers are responsible for purchasing and installing Linux. As a convenience for the customer, when one of these Linux-ready configurations is ordered, IBM will accept and pass through to SuSE an order for SLES 8. This pass-through order is available only for initial system purchases, and SuSE provides the software, license, and support.

IBM Applications Software for Linux on pSeries A version of IBM DB2 Universal Database (UDB) for Linux on pSeries is now available. In addition to DB2 UDB, IBM has announced its intention to support many other software products on pSeries with Linux, including WebSphere Application Servers (powered by the Apache HTTP engine) and selected Tivoli systems management tools. Also, the IBM Journaled File System and IBM Developer Kit for Linux, Java 2 Technology Edition are certified on SLES 8 and Red Hat 7.1. IBM is also working with its business partners and third-party software suppliers to port, recompile, and test their applications on pSeries platforms. Users should check with the appropriate software vendor regarding support of a specific application on pSeries servers.

Linux on pSeries Summary AIX 5L, IBM’s high-performance UNIX operating system, will continue to be the key operating system around which pSeries servers are developed and with which all pSeries innovations—processor and memory scalability, dynamic LPAR, dynamic processor and memory CUoD, RAS functions, and support for a wide range of I/O devices—are fully utilized. But IBM provides extensive support for users who need to incorporate the Linux applications into their pSeries computing environments, whether that means running Linux as the sole operating system or running Linux for selected applications. With respect to operating systems for pSeries servers, the key word is “choice.”

242

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

4 pSeries Communications

T

he standard features and options of pSeries systems, along with the AIX 5L operating system and its extensions, provide users with flexibility to configure systems for various communications environments. However, this flexibility can also cause confusion when trying to determine which options and programs are needed for a particular environment. This chapter will help guide you through the communications options available for pSeries systems. Chapter 2, “Options and Peripherals,” examined some communications hardware options used with pSeries systems and provided a brief tutorial on communications interfaces and protocols. Chapter 3 looked at a few of the communications software offerings available with the AIX operating system. This chapter will examine some of the most popular communications environments and provide example configurations for each.

Computer Communications—An Introduction In today’s fast-paced and connected world, the impact and importance of communications are obvious. For both personal and business reasons, we communicate with people all over the world using telephones

242

pSeries Communications

243

and e-mail. For businesses, which are the customers for pSeries systems, it is vital that timely, accurate information be available to decision makers and that employees be able to share information rapidly. It is also vital that business communications be secure so that personal information about customers and employees is kept confidential and a company’s assets are protected. As improvements are made in communications within an organization, it is very likely that improvements in productivity and effectiveness will follow. Ironically, as an organization grows, it becomes more important and at the same time more difficult to maintain efficient, secure, and accurate communications—the very thing that facilitated growth in the first place. Communications difficulties grow with the size of the organization. Today’s businesses, universities, research facilities, and government agencies are quickly finding in computers a communications tool unequaled in significance since Bell invented the telephone. Communications can occur in several ways—between a server and the users at their personal computers (PCs), between two computers, or among a group of computers in a complex communications network. pSeries systems, together with AIX 5L and its extensions, provide the hardware features and software support needed for operation in almost any communications network.

Distributed Computer Communications In some cases, the computing needs of an organization can be satisfied by a very simple communications arrangement. Users work at PCs attached by a local area network (LAN) to a single pSeries server. For outside communications (e.g., to the Internet), the server is attached by an appropriate modem. Such an arrangement is adequate for small organizations in which most computer users are at a single location. When the needs of an organization require multiple systems, then a more complex communications network is required. For example, a retail chain may want a computer system at each retail location as well as a computer system at headquarters (Figure 4.1). As shown, all computer systems are joined through a communications network that allows them to easily move information (such as daily cash register receipts) from place to place as necessary. This is called a distributed computer network. Several benefits occur when you place (or distribute) the computer systems at the sites where they are needed. First, because all users are

244

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Figure 4.1. Example of a distributed computer network for a retail chain headquartered in New York City.

locally attached to their respective computer systems, they enjoy improved system performance (reduced response time) compared with remotely attached workstations, which often are slowed down by communications-line limitations. Further, the distributed computer system can act to consolidate communications. This is especially true at remote locations with many users, since it avoids the need for a large number of communications lines to support all of the remote users directly. Instead, the remote users are locally attached by LAN to the distributed system at their location, and they communicate to the central site through the distributed system using a single communications line. Although a large distributed computer network is more difficult to manage than a single computer system, pSeries systems and AIX 5L are designed for such distributed environments. When the size of the network grows to hundreds of systems, possibly a heterogeneous mix of systems running other operating systems, the Tivoli management products provide additional network management tools to help ease the task. We will look at two of the types of distributed networks in which pSeries systems are used: pSeries distributed networks, and pSeries and zSeries distributed networks.

pSeries Communications

245

pSeries Distributed Network Multiple pSeries systems can be attached together through communications lines to create a distributed computer network. Our example distributed network consists of three small pSeries systems (e.g., pSeries 610), each distributed to a remote location, and a larger pSeries server (e.g., pSeries 670) at the organization’s headquarters. Figure 4.2 shows an example hardware and software configuration for the headquarters location and one of the remote locations. The remote location configuration (pSeries 610) would be duplicated for every remote location. Further, the pSeries system at each end would be equipped with the appropriate local workstations to support the users at the respective locations. These are not shown in the figure so as not to be confused with options needed to support the communications link. The pSeries 610 at the remote location is equipped with an X.25 Interface adapter. This adapter, along with a modem, allows the pSeries system to communicate over an X.25 network. Because the remote pSeries 610 system communicates only with the central pSeries 670 sys-

Application(s)

AIX 5L - TCP/IP

Application Program Network Mgr.

Device Drivers X.25 Interface

Leased telephone lines Modem

pSeries 610

AIX 5L - TCP/IP Modem

Device Drivers

TCP/IP

To other remote locations

Modem Modem

X.25 Interface pSeries 670

Remote Location

Central Location

Figure 4.2. Example configuration used to communicate between distant pSeries computers.

246

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

tem, this is the only adapter needed. The TCP/IP functions furnished with the AIX 5L operating system and the AIX link/X.25 product provide the necessary programming to support the TCP/IP protocol. At the central location, the pSeries 670 system is in constant communication with all remote locations. It collects the summary information needed by headquarters to consolidate all remote location activity. In our example, one communications line is used for each remote location. This means that the central pSeries system must have at least three X.25 interfaces, so the 4-Port Multiprotocol Communications Controller (#2947) is a logical choice. At the central site there is one modem for each communications line, for a total of three. With this communications configuration, the distributed pSeries systems can work together in many different ways. First of all, the AIX 5L mail facilities are fully available, allowing any user to, for example, send a document to any other user attached to any system in the distributed network. Further, the basic networking utilities included with the AIX 5L operating system allow users attached to the central p670 to sign on to remote p610 systems just as if the users were physically attached to those systems. This can be especially convenient if a user of the central system provides technical support to the other network nodes, because he or she can now directly sign on to any pSeries system in the network. These utilities also allow users to execute commands and run application programs on any pSeries system in the network or to freely exchange files between systems. Further, application programs can interact directly with other application programs to provide information to users without the users having to know where the needed information is located. When at least one of the pSeries systems in the network has the NetView product, more tools are provided to manage the network. Special messages called Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Traps can be sent by any pSeries system (or any other open system supporting the popular SNMP) to report problems to NetView. Once a problem is detected, the Tivoli Framework provides tools with which to diagnose and fix the problem. pSeries and zSeries Distributed Network In some cases, it is desirable to distribute pSeries systems while having a zSeries or System/390 (S/390) computer system at the central or headquarters location. The larger zSeries computers can provide more com-

pSeries Communications

247

putational resource than even the largest pSeries system in the areas of performance, capacity, and peripherals, and the central location may need this kind of muscle. In other cases, the central location may already have a zSeries or System/390 computer system and may wish to distribute a small or medium-sized computer system or systems to remote locations or departments within the business to better meet user needs. In any case, distributed computer networks consisting of pSeries systems and zSeries systems are possible. SNA communications is rapidly being replaced by TCP/IP networks (the previous example uses TCP/IP). In fact, IBM has withdrawn from marketing its long-time workhorse SNA 3745 and 3746 Communications Controllers. Nevertheless, Figure 4.3 shows an example pSeries configuration that can be used to communicate with a zSeries system in an existing SNA network. The 4-Port Multiprotocol Communications Controller will communicate using the SDLC protocol used by the central zSeries. A modem allows the computers to communicate over leased telephone lines. In addition to the SNA environment shown in our example, pSeries and zSeries systems can effectively interact in many other environments, including non-SNA and TCP/IP environments. Although

Application(s) Host Access Package Communications Server NetView Service Point AIX 5L Device Drivers

To other locations

Modem

NetView Modem

Leased line Modem

SDLC

Application(s)

Modem

Operating System(s) LIC

4-Port MultiProtocol Cntrl.

pSeries System Remote Location

zSeries System Central Location

Figure 4.3. Example of a communications configuration used to attach a pSeries system to a zSeries system computer.

248

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

the need for 3270 emulation is rapidly going away, there are cases in which users of the pSeries system require access to “legacy” applications running on the zSeries that were not written for or modified to provide a GUI interface or a Web browser interface. In that case, the IBM Host Access Client Package for Multiplatforms provides the programming necessary for a pSeries to act like (emulate) the 3270 terminals and printers commonly used with zSeries systems. This allows a pSeries user to log in to the zSeries and interact with any OS/390 applications for which he or she has authorization. The Host Access Client Package for Multiplatforms also interacts with the zSeries to affect file transfers between the pSeries and the zSeries systems. Virtual Private Networks With the pervasiveness of the Internet, one choice for a company’s communications with customers, employees, and suppliers is simply to use the Internet. Most often, some security measures will be used, such as password protection and routers with firewall and network address translation capability. Such an arrangement may be adequate for routine communications, such as e-mail and non-confidential data transmissions. However, if the customer or business data to be communicated is sensitive—data that could be used by an Internet “eavesdropper” to steal proprietary information or cause denial of service attacks—then there are security concerns that must be considered. One alternative is the implementation of a private TCP/IP-based private-line network, in which the communications links are controlled by the company and probably operated by a telecommunications provider. The previous two examples of distributed communications (Figures 4.2 and 4.3) show a leased line as the link between two locations, and Figure 4.2 is a leased-line network using the TCP/IP communications protocol. But rather than incur the costs of a private-line network using leased telecommunications facilities, a company may choose to implement a Virtual Private Network (VPN). A VPN refers to the use of the Internet (or any public network, for that matter) as the vehicle for implementing a private network or extension of a company’s “intranet.” It is “private” in the sense that the data flowing through it is private. But since a VPN operates over a public network (i.e., the Internet), it really is not “private” in the physical sense. And, it is a “virtual” network because it has to operate over any physical infrastructure.

pSeries Communications

249

How is this done? The design of a VPN is a complex undertaking and is the subject of many books and technical papers. Many services organizations, IBM Global Services among them, have the skills and experience to design and manage a VPN project—for a fee, of course. But the basic idea is that techniques called “protocol tunneling” are used, probably in conjunction with data encryption. As depicted in Figure 4.4, when a corporation channels its private information via the Internet to various remote locations, the information has to pass through many systems not controlled by the company—the dial-up or other Internet access path, the ISP (Internet Service Provider) systems of both sender and receiver, and routers along the way. And this company’s data will be mixed with traffic from thousands of other sources. In the figure, the solid lines represent the physical links among the routers along the way. Routers are designed to optimize the path from the sending site to the recipient, and paths through the Internet change all the time. And, without use of special protocols and encryption, there are many points at which a hacker could intercept or at least copy the company’s private data. So a complex set of industry-standard protocols recognized by gateways and routers is used to create a secure “tunnel” (represented by the

Internet

Secure "tunnel" Remote Employee

Internet Routers Company Intranet

Supplier Intranet

Figure 4.4.

Conceptual diagram of a Virtual Private Network (VPN).

250

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

dotted line) through the Internet for a transmission. Such tunnels are created, used for one transmission or sequence of transmissions, and then terminated. Thus, the VPN is “virtual” (it is not permanently associated with any specific set of physical transmission facilities), “private” (protocols and encryption protect the company’s data from others), and a “network” (it interfaces to and extends the company’s intranet network in a well-structured way that is transparent to the computers at each end). There are many trade-offs to be considered in designing a VPN. First, there are security concerns, which involve both the transmission across the public Internet and the internal security policies and facilities at the company and remote sites. Next, there is performance. In particular, encryption and transmission logging take a lot of processor power and storage. There are also availability and responsiveness considerations. Service-level agreements and methodologies must be established with the ISP. Another consideration is the people involved. Does the VPN provide timely, easy-to-use communications, and are the users trained and instructed with regard to security policy? Finally, there is the question of initial and recurring costs. What is the value to a specific company of various levels of security, performance, and responsiveness in a proposed VPN? There is no single right answer for every situation, but a competent networking consultant can help a company make informed cost/benefit tradeoff decisions. VPNs are not the private province of any one manufacturer. In fact, the whole VPN concept is designed to allow implementation across a heterogeneous set of servers, routers, and communications links. In summary, pSeries servers and the AIX 5L operating system provide the features (e.g., Ethernet adapters, cryptographic coprocessors, and accelerators) and the networking software that conform to industry standards to allow users to integrate pSeries servers into cost-effective and secure VPNs. pSeries and LANs A LAN provides one way for groups of computers located in the same building or on a single campus to communicate very efficiently. The most common arrangement for attaching user PCs to a pSeries server is by LAN, and, of course, multiple pSeries systems can also be attached to the LAN. LANs can move information around very quickly. This is important because the speed of a communications link can directly af-

pSeries Communications

251

fect the overall productivity of the users participating in it. Slow communications can translate to slow response time, leading to frustration and reduced concentration. The price one pays for the high-speed communications available with LANs is limited distance, as the term “local” in “local area network” indicates. Because of electrical limitations, LANs can’t be used as a direct communications link between distant computers (e.g., computers across town from one another). However, multiple LANs can be linked together over more traditional communications links (e.g., WANs—wide area networks). Each computer that participates in a LAN is called a node in the network. A pSeries system can act as either a client node or a server node. A client node can operate as any normal standalone pSeries system and can also participate in LAN communications. Any shared resources on the network are accessible by a client node, but the client node itself offers no resource for other nodes to use. A server node can do everything a client node can do and can also offer resources, such as disk storage or a printer, for use by the other nodes in the network. pSeries users participating in a LAN have three basic advantages over similar users not connected by a LAN: •

Data sharing

•

Program sharing

•

Equipment sharing

Today, data sharing is often the major reason to connect computers via a LAN. It is typical for many users to need access to the same body of information (e.g., design standards, image libraries, telephone directories, inventory information, etc.). With a LAN and the proper application programs, multiple users can simultaneously share access to a single body of information. Further, that information can be located on any computer (or even many computers) in the LAN. Because programs are stored in files, just like data, application programs available on one pSeries system can be loaded and executed by another pSeries in the network, subject to the applicable software licensing terms. An even more powerful use of program sharing is when one application program on a client (a client application) communicates directly with an application program on a server (a server applica-

252

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

tion). This direct program-to-program interaction allows for the development of very powerful systems of application programs that run on different computers in a LAN and work together. In such an environment, information located anywhere in the network can be placed at the fingertips of any authorized user on the network. Also, specific server applications can be located on the computer system best suited for the task yet provide services to all network users. Equipment sharing is another reason to connect computers via a LAN. Equipment sharing allows server nodes participating in a LAN to share their disk space, printers, communications equipment, and so forth with other nodes in the LAN. This equipment-sharing function allows for more efficient use of the computing equipment participating in the LAN. With this understanding of LANs, we will now examine two LANs commonly used with pSeries systems: Ethernet and Token-Ring. It should be understood that many variations and combinations of the simple examples that follow are also possible. pSeries and the Ethernet LAN Ethernet is a type of LAN commonly used in the open-system arena. The Ethernet LAN is widely supported by many different computer manufacturers, which is why it is commonly found in open-system environments. Ethernet LANs often consist of a mixture of different types and brands of computers. Figure 4.5 shows the basic structure of an Ethernet LAN using the Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD) protocol described in Chapter 2. Since each computer is attached as a tap-off from a common cable or information bus, this type of Ethernet is called a bus-wired network. As was pointed out in Chapter 2, most Ethernet systems today use hubs to which each node is attached rather than the bus structure shown in the figure, eliminating the need for each node to handle collisions. Instead, the Ethernet hub handles the contention among the nodes. Today’s Ethernet networks can transfer information at rates of 10 million bits per second (10 Mbps), 100 million bits per second (100 Mbps), or 1 billion bits per second (1 Gbps). The Ethernet LAN is probably the most commonly supported LAN technology, available with almost every type of computer and every operating system. An Ethernet LAN can, for example, consist of pSeries systems, personal computers running Microsoft Windows, shared printers, or any open-system computer, as long as TCP/IP communication is

pSeries Communications

253

Transmitted message

Computer (Node #1)

Computer (Node #3) Computer (Node #2)

Figure 4.5.

Computer (Node #N) Computer (Node #4)

The basic structure of an Ethernet local area network.

supported over an Ethernet LAN. There are many Ethernet attachment options available for pSeries systems. In Chapter 2, eight Ethernet adapters are described (see Figure 2.13) in addition to the integrated Ethernet ports on pSeries systems. With the availability of gigabit Ethernet adapters for fiber-optic connection and 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet adapters for UTP (copper) links, Ethernet is the primary technology for high-speed links among servers. Integrated 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet controllers, as available on the p615, will probably become standard in future pSeries designs, and there are dual-port Ethernet adapters that can operate at gigabit speeds. So the Ethernet options for pSeries servers enable many high-speed Ethernet connections with minimal use of I/O slots. In order to build complex, long-distance networks, these adapters must be integrated with networking products like hubs, switches, and routers. These are available from third-party suppliers such as Cisco Systems, with whom IBM has recently announced an alliance to integrate IBM’s system products and services with Cisco’s leadership networking products for the Internet. Figure 4.6 shows one possible wiring arrangement on a company’s premises. This diagram could represent, for example, the intranet connections inside either the company or the supplier building of Figure 4.4. In Figure 4.6, various employees’ PC workstations are connected to Ethernet hubs located in a wiring closet or communications room. We have shown some hubs supporting 10 Mbps on the input side and others supporting 100 Mbps input. It is possible, of course, for each PC

254

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Internet (or private line network)

1000 Mbps Router/Firewall

Switch pSeries Server

Hub

100 Mbps

100 Mbps 100 Mbps .......

Hub 100 Mbps

10 Mbps

PCs - Dept. 1

Figure 4.6.

PCs - Dept. 2

Hub

100 Mbps

PCs - Dept. N

Ethernet LAN Network.

to have gigabit Ethernet capability, but that is not cost-justifiable in most cases. Hubs are connection points, and all the PCs connected to a hub share the input bandwidth, as if they were wired like an Ethernet bus (Figure 4.5). The hubs are connected into one or more Ethernet switches, which are intelligent devices that provide processing and data buffering so that each input device (hubs, in our example) operates at the full 100 Mbps bandwidth. Finally, the switch is attached to a gigabit link (“backbone”), to which also a router and one or more pSeries servers are attached. The router manages communications traffic to/from the external Internet or private-line network. Routers function as a security firewall, perform network address translation, and provide any required protocol conversions. There are many hubs, switches, and routers on the market, along with all the supporting hardware and software. With a variety of Ethernet adapters to choose from and the availability of the necessary software

pSeries Communications

255

interfaces for AIX 5L or Linux, pSeries servers provide all the tools required for integration into Ethernet LAN networks. pSeries and the Token-Ring Network The Token-Ring LAN technology, developed by IBM, is less pervasive in the industry than Ethernet. Although pSeries systems and AIX still support Token-Ring communications, it is not widely used. Figure 4.7 shows the basic structure of the Token-Ring network. The nodes of the network are arranged in a ring pattern, thus giving the network its name. Information is transferred over the network at either 4 or 16 million bits per second using the token-passing protocol. With this protocol, a single packet of information called a message frame or a frame is passed around the

Computer (Node #6)

Computer (Node #5)

Message frame Computer (Node #1)

CAU

Computer (Node #2)

CAU

Computer (Node #3)

Token Destination Source Trailer MESSAGE symbol address address symbol

Figure 4.7.

The basic structure of a Token-Ring network.

Computer (Node #4)

256

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

ring from node to node in a continuous circle. The token is the “mailbag” of the network. It carries the network messages (one at a time) from the transmitting node to all other nodes in the network until the recipient is reached and the message is delivered. When a node receives a frame, it looks to see if it is a message or a token frame. If it is a token frame, this means the network is idle and that node can send a message. If it is a message frame, the node will examine the address contained in the token message to see if the message is intended for that node. If not, the frame will be passed unchanged to the next node in the ring. Although IBM offers a 100/16/4 Mbps Token-Ring card for some series servers and personal computers, the pSeries emphasis is on Ethernet communications and only a 16/4 Mbps Token-Ring adapter (#4959) is available for pSeries servers. ASCII Terminal Networks Although the use of ASCII terminals attached to pSeries systems is almost a thing of the past, it should be noted that pSeries systems and AIX provide support for users at ASCII terminals. Local terminals and printers are attached via industry-standard EIA-232 async communications ports (one port per terminal or printer). pSeries systems come standard with two or more such ports. The 8-Port async Adapter EIA-232 (#2943) will provide the additional ports needed in our example configuration, for a total of 10 EIA-232 ports. The AIX operating system comes with the necessary support for the EIA-232 ports and the async communications protocol they use. If it is necessary to attach a remote ASCII terminal to the pSeries system, a modem must be attached to a telephone line at each end (server and remote terminal). “Modem” stands for “modulator-demodulator” and is a device for modulating or translating digital computer signals into analog telephone-line signals for transmission, and vice versa (demodulating) for receiving signals from other systems. IBM does not sell modems, but many industry-standard modems are available. With dialup telephone lines, 56 KBps modems are commonly used, and higherspeed modems are available for use on leased telephone circuits. Clustering for High Availability We have already seen that pSeries systems can communicate with one another over various types of LANs to implement data sharing, pro-

pSeries Communications

257

gram sharing, equipment sharing, and electronic mail. LAN connections between pSeries systems can also be used to increase the availability of a LAN resource. “Availability” is a term used to describe the degree of access a computer user has to a computing resource. For example, an environment in which the users are frequently prevented from logging on to a computer system because of computer system failures, communications network failures, scheduled maintenance, or any other reason is said to have poor availability. An environment in which the needed computing resources seem always to be available to the users is said to have very good availability. Now let’s consider a LAN environment in which we have one server and a group of client computers/users that rely heavily on the server. These clients might be diskless workstations or a network computer that can’t perform any useful work without the server’s help, or they might be workstations that frequently need the server’s help to do useful work. If the server has a hardware or software failure, the server goes down. When the server goes down, the users immediately and unexpectedly become unable to do useful work until the server is fixed. The degree of pain felt when a group of users is interrupted varies widely from one environment to another. If the users are simply doing word processing, being down for four hours might not be a problem, because the letters can go out in tomorrow’s mail rather than today’s. However, if the LAN is supporting the front desk of a large resort hotel, four hours of downtime means four hours of delay for checkins, check-outs, reservations, wake-up calls, and room service—and a hotel full of angry guests. When you are selecting and configuring servers in a LAN, you must consider the availability requirements of the environment. Many things have been done in the design of both hardware and the AIX operating system to maximize the reliability and availability of pSeries systems. Still, computer systems do fail, and it is difficult to predict exactly when the failure will occur—and, of course, there is always the risk of software errors in the applications being run that could cause system outages. If failures are critical to the particular business environment being served, steps should be taken to increase the availability of the computer resources. There are two basic techniques or approaches to increasing the availability of LAN resources: Rely on a specially designed fault-tolerant computer that has redundant hardware elements, or make the resource available from more than one computer in the LAN. Here, we will look at IBM’s software package that

258

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

helps improve the availability of pSeries server resources, IBM High Availability Cluster Multiprocessing (HACMP). Figure 4.8 shows a simple example of two pSeries systems connected together (or clustered) in a high-availability configuration using HACMP. Two pSeries servers are attached to an Ethernet LAN, each server running the HACMP software product in addition to other application programs. Each pSeries system is also equipped with two Ethernet LAN adapters to provide redundant connections to the Ethernet LAN in the event of a failure of the adapter or cabling in one of those connection paths. Under normal circumstances (no failures), these servers operate independently and offer the clients access to two different databases in the LAN. The IBM 2104 Expandable Storage Plus unit (available in either tower or rack-mount packaging) houses disk drives for each of the two databases. Although both pSeries systems share a common SCSI bus connection to the disk drives in the 2104, under normal circumstances each system is controlling only those disk drives assigned to its applications. The HACMP software is configured for “mutual take-

Client

Client

Client

Ethernet Dual LAN Interfaces

“Heart Beat”

Server A

SCSI Bus

Database A

Database B

Server B

SCSI Bus

2104

Figure 4.8.

Example of a high availability configuration of pSeries systems.

pSeries Communications

259

over.” That is, if one server should fail, the other server should take over the failed server’s data and processing. Now let’s see what happens when one of the pSeries systems (server A) fails. When server A fails, the HACMP program in server B detects that the HACMP program in server A has stopped sending its periodic messages. First, server B tries to contact the alternate Ethernet adapter in server A in case the problem is simply a failure in the primary Ethernet adapter. If communication is reestablished between the two servers via server A’s alternate Ethernet adapter, then no further action is required. However, let’s say that server A has a complete system failure. In that case, when server B finds that it can’t reestablish communication with server A, server B automatically takes over for server A. First, server B programs its alternate Ethernet adapter to assume the identity (network address) of server A’s Ethernet adapter. Thus, all communications traffic intended for server A will now automatically go to server B. Then, server B takes control of server A’s disk drives in the 2104. This allows server B to make the database of server A available to the LAN clients normally assigned to server A. In effect, server B has become server B and server A, and the clients on the network get uninterrupted access to the resources of both servers (high availability). In fact, except for a short “stall time” as the switchover is made, the clients never know that server A failed. This is one simple example (mutual takeover) of how HACMP configurations can be used to improve the availability of LAN resources in the event of server failure. The AIX disk mirroring function described in Chapter 3 can be used in conjunction with HACMP configurations to automatically respond to a disk drive failure by switching to an upto-date copy of the information on another disk drive. The HACMP software can also be configured such that both systems access the same data concurrently (called concurrent access). Refer back to Figure 4.8. With concurrent access, both server A and server B would access a single database residing on the 2104’s disk drives. This can provide a higher level of performance than a single server might deliver. This is especially true when you consider that up to eight systems can share disks. However, database applications on the servers must coordinate (via locking) their activities on the shared database. This can impose overhead that can lower the overall performance of the cluster. A concurrent access cluster can provide very fast takeover for a failing server because the same data is available via a different server to all client machines.

260

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

High Availability Cluster Multiprocessing configurations with more than two pSeries systems are possible. The HACMP program can support up to 32 servers per cluster. Because the HACMP program allows the user to define (through AIX shell scripts) the actions to be taken in the event of various failures, configurations can be tailored to the needs of specific environments. The High Availability Subsystem component of the HACMP program provides base services for cluster membership, system management, cluster management, configuration integrity and control, and base recovery services for failover and recovery. The Concurrent Resource Manager component provides concurrent shared access to disk, group, file system, network, or application resources. HACMP configurations can be built with a number of different networks (Ethernet, Token-Ring, ATM) and using either SCSI or SSA disks (Chapter 2). Recent enhancements to HACMP increase availability further by allowing system administrators to reconfigure cluster resources without making the cluster unavailable. HACMP/XD (Extended Distance) HACMP/XD, an optional feature of HACMP Version 5.1, provides long-distance data mirroring, fallover, and resynchronization. HACMP/XD allows widely separated pSeries systems to operate in a fashion similar to that just described. It provides real-time mirroring of user data between systems connected by local or long-distance networks, bringing a complete disaster recovery capability to a pSeries cluster placed in two widely separated geographic locations. Support for IBM Enterprise Storage System (ESS) peer-to-peer remote copy (PPRC) means that HACMP supports fallover of disks that are PPRC pairs within an ESS unit, as well as between physically separate disk storage subsystems. HACMP/XD’s support for IP (Internet protocol) based mirroring provides data mirroring across unlimited distances. Figure 4.9 shows a conceptual model. Data mirroring with HACMP/XD can be synchronous, ensuring realtime data consistency, or asynchronous, for maximum performance while maintaining sequential data consistency. In a synchronous configuration, the data is written first at the remote site, then at the local site. No more input is handled until both writes are complete. With asynchronous mirroring, the data is written first to the local site, then to the remote site. Input can continue at the local site while the previously entered data is being mirrored. Each site in this geographic cluster can

pSeries Communications

Figure 4.9.

261

Conceptual view of geographic high availability.

be a single system or multiple systems, with the entire geographic cluster containing no more than eight nodes. HACMP/XD automatically responds to site and communication failures and provides for automatic site takeover. Tools are available for data resynchronization after an outage, configuration management, capacity planning, performance monitoring, and problem determination. The HACMP/XD feature of HACMP v5.1 is based on the technology introduced originally in IBM High Availability Geographic Cluster for AIX (HAGEO). Although HAGEO has been replaced by the extended distance feature of HACMP v5.1, IBM Geographic Mirror for AIX (GeoRM) is still available. For users who require a data mirroring solution without the fallover and resynchronization capabilities of HACMP/XD, GeoRM provides a lower-cost option. We have seen that a wide array of communications hardware and software options are available to users of pSeries systems. When coupled with appropriate middleware, such as HACMP and the HACMP/XD feature, these options can be used to configure a more highly available computing environment.

262

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

5 pSeries and Your Environment

A

n important first step in bringing a pSeries system or any computer into a business environment is planning. Largely depending on how well planning is done, introducing new computer resource(s) can be like pouring water or gasoline on a fire. Many readers will already have computer systems installed in their businesses and are considering the addition of a pSeries system to their computer arsenal. Others are considering a pSeries system as their first computer. In either case, the information in this chapter should help in understanding how to introduce pSeries systems into a particular environment. The chapter starts by discussing the evaluation process critical to any automation project and then covers software selection, followed by a brief general discussion of differences among PCs, pSeries, iSeries, and zSeries systems. Finally, some specific pSeries hardware configurations appropriate for example environments are offered. The latter part of the chapter includes discussions on financial decisions, physical planning, education, technical support, ergonomics, security, and service. This chapter is by no means a complete guide to introducing pSeries systems into a business environment, but it will give you a starting point for developing your plan and will discuss some important issues. Perhaps you will find in this chapter some new considerations that are applicable to your situation.

262

pSeries and Your Environment

263

What Are My Computing Needs? Many people today use some type of computer system(s) to do their job or run their business. These users must constantly ask themselves if their current system is good enough. Those organizations that are still operated using manual methods must ask themselves how automating their organization might help. This book certainly can’t answer the question for every customer, but it does give some of the relevant considerations. Whether an organization has millions of dollars’ worth of computer systems or none at all, the place to begin answering the question of how automation (or additional automation) can help a company is to look very closely at the organization and its needs. Too often, organizations buy computer systems and then look for problems to solve. A properly managed computer project should start with careful introspection into the collective needs of all functional areas within the organization. Independently attacking specific problems can often result in a “dead-end” computer solution that provides no coherent growth strategy for the future. From the very start, key people from all areas of the organization should be collected into a project team. Because all areas will likely be involved, the top management of the organization must consistently demonstrate a commitment to the project. Without top management involvement, disagreements among the peer business areas are slow to be resolved and the sense of priority is diminished. Lack of consistent top management commitment at either the investigation or the implementation phase of a computer project is a common cause of unsuccessful projects. The cost of a computer project’s failure is much higher than the cost of doing it right in the first place. The project team should start by reviewing the overall goals of the organization (or segment of a larger organization) over the next few years. In some cases these goals will be well known, but in others a great deal of soul-searching will be necessary. These goals should be as specific as possible and should include organizational strategies in place to achieve the goals. After the organization’s goals are clearly defined, the project team should look closely at the current day-to-day operations of the organization as it is. Consider the movement of information through the entire organization. Only after the information flow is understood can the team candidly discuss what is good and what is bad about the current way of doing things. Work to identify the sources of problems rather

264

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

than focusing on symptoms. Understand the interaction among the various areas of the organization. Consider the flow of information from one group to another as you trace the activities. Chances are, not every problem you uncover will have a computer solution. For example, an inventory management application program will not solve inventory problems in a business if unauthorized people can walk casually into the storeroom and get what they need. Computers and application programs are simply tools that can be used to effectively manage an organization. People, not computer systems, manage organizations. After the current operation has been examined with a critical eye, it will become clear whether a computer solution makes sense for an organization. In a small organization, this type of analysis can be done in a matter of weeks or even days. In larger organizations, it can span months or even years and typically is done on an ongoing basis. Some organizations choose to do the analysis on their own. For assistance in solving problems with computers, there are plenty of places to turn to, such as consultants, software companies, and computer manufacturers.

Choosing the Software Computer systems become a useful tool only when they are executing the appropriate application programs. There are many ways of generating a strategy for introducing computers, but considering software needs before selecting detailed hardware configurations usually makes sense. The hardware requirements, such as processor speed, memory size, disk space, and so on, will be based in part on the needs of the application program(s) selected. The application programs selected must perform the tasks needed by the end users in a company—both today and in the foreseeable future. Chapter 3 has already discussed some basic types of application programs commonly used today. Selecting the basic type of application program usually is fairly simple. For example, an accounting department needs an accounting application program, a secretary needs a wordprocessing application program, and an engineer needs a computer-aided design application program. What is more difficult is identifying the specific application program that best fits a company’s particular needs. Is a custom application program preferred, or will a prewritten application program be acceptable? If a prewritten application program is desired, exactly which one is best? If a custom application program is desired, who should write it and what should it include?

pSeries and Your Environment

265

The answers to these questions depend largely on the specifics of a given environment and are thus beyond the scope of this book. However, a few basics remain the same whether a program is being selected for a multinational corporation or for a corner fish market. First of all, the task to be done must be precisely understood before pursuing any application program alternatives. A thorough knowledge of the task helps to identify specific requirements an application program must meet. After a detailed understanding of the task is attained, a search can begin through the sea of prewritten, or “off-the-shelf,” application programs. If an appropriate prewritten application program is found that fits a company’s needs, then the expense, delay, and effort associated with custom application program development can be avoided. Good prewritten application programs can be quite flexible. However, because everyone typically has slightly different needs and methods, even within a given business function, it is likely that any prewritten application will have some features not needed in a specific company and won’t have some features that would be desirable. There are many sources of information about the prewritten application programs on the market. Software companies and consultants can recommend application programs to fit the needs of a business. Many popular computer magazines consistently conduct extensive reviews of prewritten application programs. These can be excellent and timely sources of information. For specific or highly specialized needs, prewritten application programs may not be adequate. In this case, custom-developed software may be desirable. The development and maintenance of custom software involves a long-term commitment that typically is expensive, but it may be less costly in the long run to pay for the development of custom software than to settle for a prewritten application program that doesn’t do the job. If the custom software route is chosen, an important step is to select the proper developer. Organizations that have their own programming staff can do their own custom application program development. Companies that don’t have their own programmers (probably most small and medium-sized businesses) will find it necessary to seek outside help (i.e., an outside software developer). In either case, it is the developer who will have the largest effect on the ultimate success or failure of the custom development activity. The developer’s job is not an easy one. Besides programming expertise, developers must become experts in all aspects of the organization’s activities right down to every step performed. They must be good communicators to understand and discuss users’ requirements. They must understand human psychology

266

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

when defining the user interface for the program. They must be proficient teachers to train the end users on the new program. Finally, they must be dependable and reliable so that there will be technical support and software maintenance for any required modifications after initial installation of the application program.

Is a pSeries System the Right Choice? When looking for ways to meet computing needs, one is faced with a seemingly endless series of questions. Before we get into the details of how to select pSeries system hardware, let’s pause and glance at some other hardware alternatives.

What About Personal Computers? We covered this topic at the introduction of this book because it seems to be the first question that everyone asks. For more information about the personal computer (PC) family, read Exploring IBM eServer xSeries by Jim Hoskins and Bill Wilson (Maximum Press).

What About iSeries Systems? iSeries systems are IBM’s midrange computer system based on the OS/400® operating system, replacing the popular AS/400® computer family. iSeries computers are multiuser systems designed to meet the needs of business applications. The pSeries family, on the other hand, offers models suitable for either commercial or high-performance computing (HPC) environments, as described in Chapter 1. Because the iSeries family has no capability to be used for technical or HPC applications, the pSeries family is clearly the pick for situations where those applications prevail. In the general-purpose multiuser computer system arena, however, there is certainly room for confusion when deciding between the pSeries and the iSeries families of servers. To resolve this confusion, let’s look at some of the design points of each family.

pSeries and Your Environment

267

The iSeries systems architecture includes a built-in relational database. In other words, the iSeries hardware and operating system have been designed specifically to provide the database function commonly needed in business environments. Most other computer systems (including the pSeries) require separately purchased database programs that sit on top of the operating system to provide users with a relational database. Because the iSeries system’s database is implemented in the hardware and operating system, the performance and elegance of database implementation are improved. Further, the programmer productivity afforded by the built-in iSeries database makes it a good system for those writing and maintaining their own business application programs. iSeries systems are designed around an advanced application architecture that provides open client/server computing environments and facilitates the implementation of distributed computing systems. Other things being equal, if there is a requirement to coexist with a network of other IBM systems following this application-centric architecture or to run applications written for the OS/400 operating system, then an iSeries system is probably the right choice. iSeries computers can also participate in “open” environments through their support of TCP/IP communications. The pSeries has no built-in database, but many relational database programs are available that add this capability to the system. For those who currently have a multiuser computer system running the UNIX operating system, migrating to a pSeries system will be much more natural than migrating to an iSeries system. If there is a need to coexist with computer systems of many different brands, the open-system approach taken by the pSeries system will be a plus. By supporting many pervasive industry standards, pSeries systems and the AIX 5L operating system are designed to participate with other types of computing equipment. For more information about the iSeries family, read Exploring IBM eServer iSeries by Jim Hoskins and Roger Dimmick (Maximum Press).

What About zSeries Systems? Like pSeries systems, zSeries servers are multiuser computer systems that allow many users to share the system. Either zSeries or pSeries systems might provide better performance, depending on the specific applications, the number of users involved, and other variables. Because zSeries computers can also run UNIX and Linux applications on the

268

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

OS/390® operating system, some of the same applications that run on the pSeries are available for the zSeries, and vice versa. For these reasons, the choice between pSeries and zSeries systems is not always clear and will depend heavily on the details of a situation. However, here are some general things to consider. The zSeries family spans the computational power range that overlaps with high-end pSeries models and extends to very large mainframe computing systems. To maintain a zSeries computer system, a highly trained programmer, called a systems programmer, is needed, because the operating systems used by zSeries computers are both powerful and complex. Experienced personnel are needed to install and manage these operating systems. Although remote zSeries computers can easily be managed by systems programming personnel at a central site, the expertise must be available at some level. pSeries systems and the AIX 5L operating system, on the other hand, require a systems operator and a programming staff only if custom application software is being developed and supported. Another way of comparing a single zSeries computer with a group of pSeries systems connected via a LAN brings us to the discussion of centralized computing versus decentralized computing. A single system being shared by a community of users is considered a centralized computer environment because the significant processing and all auxiliary storage are resident in a single computer. One advantage of the centralized approach is easier system management because the computer operators, system programmers, and programming staff have complete control over the computer system. Important practices such as nightly tape backup of disk storage are easier to monitor and enforce. The decentralized approach is represented by multiple systems located throughout a building, throughout a campus, or around the world, connected via a LAN and/or other telecommunications links. Advantages of this approach are physical separation for security and greater independence of operations at each location while retaining the ability to share data. There are good and bad points to both the centralized and the decentralized approaches. zSeries systems, being larger than most pSeries models, offer less granular choices for decentralization. Using Cluster 1600 technologies, pSeries systems can be clustered to help achieve the best of the decentralized and centralized models. Users can have separate systems for a distributed client/server environment, while management of the cluster is centralized in a single point of control, the cluster management server.

pSeries and Your Environment

269

Many times, the decision between pSeries and zSeries systems will be based on the current situation. For instance, if a zSeries or S/390 computer is already in place, it may be natural to expand with zSeries systems. On the other hand, if the UNIX operating system is being used today, it probably makes sense to migrate those applications to a pSeries system, which can easily interface with zSeries servers as required. The decision may become a matter of philosophy. For more information about the zSeries family, read Exploring IBM eServer zSeries and S/390 Servers by Jim Hoskins and Bob Frank (Maximum Press).

When Should a pSeries System Be Considered? As is evident from the foregoing discussions, there is no magic formula for selecting a particular type of computer. There are many complex and interrelated factors to be considered—application software, operating system, user and IT skills, existing equipment, workload, number of users, and so on. If the appropriate application software is available for the UNIX environment, then there is probably a pSeries model that will handle the workload and number of users. In addition, the scalability of processing and storage capacity of individual pSeries models (and the software compatibility across the pSeries family) are designed to accommodate increased workloads as business growth occurs. Finally, the support of pSeries and AIX 5L for open-systems standards and a broad range of communications options can help users incorporate pSeries systems into environments with other types of computers.

Choosing pSeries Configurations Even after the question of application software and operating system has been settled, selecting the proper pSeries hardware and system software components to meet a company’s specific needs can still be confusing. The pSeries system model, disk storage and I/O adapter features, peripherals such as tape drives, operating system, and supporting software must be selected. We looked at a few guiding principles during the introduction of the book, but to aid in this activity, let’s examine three hypothetical business scenarios and outfit them with the appropriate pSeries configurations. These admittedly simplified examples of a small,

270

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

a medium-sized, and a large business are intended to help potential pSeries users be better prepared to select the proper system components for their environments. Small Business—Bob’s Gearbox Company Our hypothetical small business is a gearbox manufacturer named Bob’s Gearbox Company. Bob’s has a standard line of gearboxes and also accepts orders for custom gearboxes. It is a private corporation (owned by Bob, of course) with 32 employees. Bob has been in business for five years and has experienced moderate growth. He currently conducts business by noncomputer methods but finds himself needing to streamline his operation as the business grows. Bob is especially concerned that his profits seem to be shrinking as his sales increase. A study of Bob’s business shows two basic causes for this. First, his salespeople often commit to discounted pricing on a gearbox order to capture the business. The trouble is that Bob never really knows what it actually costs him to produce a given gearbox. He uses standard cost estimates to price a customer’s order and hopes that his actual costs to build the gearbox are somewhere close. The second basic problem uncovered in the study is that Bob’s inventory is not well managed. The production department is often hampered by not having the right parts and raw materials in inventory. This often causes slips in the delivery of customer orders, hurting customer satisfaction and fueling heated arguments among the marketing manager, the production manager, and the materials manager. Finger pointing is commonplace. The study also showed that 25% of the inventory items in stock are obsolete and will never be used. In this scenario, it is clear that Bob has outgrown his manual methods of doing business and needs a better way to track the actual costs associated with manufacturing his products. This may uncover the fact that his salespeople often sell gearboxes at or below cost. Bob also needs help tracking his inventory. He needs to know when critical parts are getting low and what parts are slow moving. The deficiencies in Bob’s business can be addressed with the proper computer solution. After looking through manufacturing trade journals and having informal discussions with others in the industry, Bob finds several prewritten industry-specific application programs that seem to fit his needs. After seeing demonstrations and having detailed conversations with others using the application programs, Bob selects one of the packages written for UNIX operating systems, including AIX 5L. The se-

pSeries and Your Environment

271

lected package will allow Bob to track manufacturing costs more closely by letting him know more accurately the costs of the labor, outside purchases, and inventory that are used in making his products. Bob will also gain better control over his inventory through improved procedures and the inventory-management function of this new application program. Bob also chooses to take advantage of the computer system to automate the general accounting functions of his business, such as payroll, accounts receivable, accounts payable, and general ledger. The order entry and invoicing functions of the application program will allow Bob to track orders better and to bill customers more quickly. Based on the requirements of the chosen application program and his small number of users, Bob selected a pSeries 615 Model 6E3, shown in Figure 5.1, running the AIX 5L v5.2 operating system. The p6156E3 was selected for its low cost, more than ample computing power, and expandability as Bob’s business grows. Bob decides to order a second 36.4 GB disk drive to augment the standard 36.4 GB of storage that comes with the p615-6E3. The total storage of 72.8 GB will be sufficient to hold the operating system software, application programs, and associated data. The 1 GB of main memory, expandable all the way to 16 GB, will meet his needs for now. Since the selected manufacturing and accounting applications use a client/server design, Bob selects six personal computers as user workstations, connected on an Ethernet LAN using one of the integrated Ethernet adapters that is standard with the p615-6E3. One PC is for the inventory clerk, one is for the purchasing agent, two are for the accounting department, one is for the production department, and one is for Bob so that he can get the management information he needs to make intelligent decisions. Bob will select moderately priced PCs because the users will primarily be interacting with the applications running on the pSeries 615 and because he must control system costs. He will, of course, need an Ethernet adapter in each PC. As the future computing needs of his business grow, he can easily add more PCs on the LAN. For now, Bob selects a printer attached to the parallel port of the p615-6E3. In the future, he can easily upgrade to a network printer attached on the Ethernet LAN. An IBM 4247 Multi-Form Printer is chosen to produce the various multipart form reports generated by the manufacturing application program at a rate of up to 700 characters per second. A 20/40 GB 4-mm Internal Tape Drive option provides a way to back up data on the disk, ensuring that important business information will not accidentally be lost. This tape drive attaches to one of the standard internal Ultra3-SCSI ports.

A pSeries system configured to suit the needs of Bob’s Gearbox Company.

AIX 5L v5.2 Manufacturing application Service agent

Software (for p615)

Printer Modem Personal Computers (6)

1.2 GHz POWER4+ processor 1 GB memory 36.4 GB 10,000 rpm disk drives (2) DVD-ROM drive Diskette drive Integrated Ultra3-SCSI adapter (2) Integrated Ethernet 10/100 Mbps adapter (2) Integrated Gigabit Ethernet adapter Service processor 20/40 GB 4-mm Internal Tape Drive (extra option)

Personal Computers

Other Devices

Modem

Ethernet LAN

pSeries 615 Model 6E3

Figure 5.1.

Printer

pSeries 615 Model 6E3

272 Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

pSeries and Your Environment

273

A high-speed modem will be needed to connect the p615-6E3 to the Internet so that Bob can take advantage of the Documentation Library Service provided with AIX 5L to allow reading, navigating, and searching on-line documentation. Although it is generally easier to view manuals on-line than to use printed manuals, the Documentation Library Service allows the download of manuals in printable format if hard copy is needed. Internet access will provide many other business communications and information benefits, as well. Bob will work with a local Internet Service Provider (ISP) to select the appropriate modem and software. For businesses such as Bob’s Gearbox Company, which has limited computer skills, the pSeries 615 offers some important serviceability advantages. The System Attention light-emitting diode (LED) on the front of the system indicates if there is a potential or actual component failure. There are other LEDs inside the system located near each customer replaceable unit to guide the user to the component that needs attention, in a manner similar to that used in most copiers to indicate paper jams. All components of the p615 except the system planar and the operator panel can be replaced by the user, and the attention LEDs will help an untrained user, possibly with some telephone support from service personnel, to take corrective action. With an IBM maintenance agreement, Bob can install the Service Agent software package at no additional charge. Service Agent works with the built-in service processor to monitor the system and send an e-mail message to a designated user in the event of system problems so that IBM Service can be contacted. The p615-6E3 system provides as standard almost all the components needed to configure Bob’s system, and there is plenty of room for future expansion to handle more applications and more users. The AIX 5L v5.2 operating system provides all the system support needed for the hardware components. Bob will work with the software providers he has selected to install the applications, train his employees, and provide ongoing application support services. Medium-sized Business—Johnson & Thornbush Our hypothetical medium-sized business is an advertising agency named Johnson & Thornbush. This company has been in business for 12 years. Their business started with one major account, and today they have 17 large clients. Steve Johnson and Perry Thornbush are both still actively

274

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

involved in managing the business. There are 74 employees, and almost all of them currently have PCs, which provide tools for such tasks as market analysis, trend analysis, word processing, financial modeling, and so on. Some Art Department employees use Macintosh workstations. Such applications as accounting and employee records are minimally automated at this time, and data is maintained on the PCs assigned to individuals in the relevant departments. Steve Johnson recently sponsored a company-wide study to find a way to address the business goals of increasing marketing effectiveness and reducing operating costs. This study quickly uncovered the fact that the campaign creation staff relies heavily on the overloaded Art Department to generate the complex proposals associated with marketing campaigns. The Art Department generates needed artwork on their PC or Macintosh workstations, and they often rely on costly outside subcontractors. They find themselves inundated with urgent requests for new artwork and changes to existing artwork. Even though the Art Department personnel constantly work overtime, they are unable to keep up with the workload, and the only way they can share images is by hard copy. Another situation confirmed by the study is that the market analysis being done by one PC user seldom correlates with the market analysis done by another PC user. The cause of the conflicting information turns out to be that different versions of the area demographic information reside on the various PCs used in market analysis. Even though one person has responsibility for periodically updating the demographic information and distributing the updates, it seems that eventually different versions of the information emerge, making the market analysis inaccurate. Further, as market coverage grows, the demographic information is growing in size and is becoming impractical to distribute via diskettes. It is apparent that more sophisticated data management and analysis techniques will become necessary as the company grows. The third major problem is that, although the company is now approaching 80 employees in size, it lacks centralized systems for e-mail, internal messaging, and applications such as accounting, payroll, and human resources. With almost every employee having a PC (Intel-based or Mac), there is little control over software levels of common applications and, as a result, limited ability to share or reassign work when required. The project team decided to find a solution that would increase the output of the Art Department, centralize the area demographic infor-

pSeries and Your Environment

275

mation, and provide the messaging system needed. They concluded that they could increase the output of the Art Department personnel by providing them with the ability to maintain a shared database of artwork and to enable collaboration among the employees in that department. Such a library of graphic images could easily be searched for artwork that might be applicable for new projects and could be modified and used more quickly than creating new images. To change an image, it could be recalled onto one of the personal computer workstations as required. Collaboration software, which supports multiple users modifying the same file, will enable Art Department employees to share their work and will facilitate contributions from more than a single person to the artwork. These capabilities will increase the productivity of the desktop publishing capability already available at individual workstations, which should allow the Art Department to create most of its proposals in-house and reduce expenses for outside contractors. Compared with current methods, these tools will help increase quality, decrease the turnaround time, and reduce the costs associated with artwork. The team also concluded that the simplest way to centralize the demographic information is to place the information in a database on a single computer system and use a LAN to provide all PC users with access to the information, ensuring that all are using the same current data for their marketing analysis. This will result in a more accurate market analysis and thus more effective marketing efforts for clients. Similarly, an e-mail server application will be implemented to support all employees. As needs for individual departments are identified, additional applications can be installed. After examining several database and messaging application programs, they selected the IBM DB2 Universal Database (UDB) Workgroup Server Edition and the Lotus Notes/Domino 6 server program, along with the Lotus Notes 6 client packages for the employees’ personal computers. The server selected is the pSeries 630 Model 6E4, which offers plenty of processing power and storage capacity, and, being a maximum 4-way SMP system, qualifies for workgroup pricing of the database software. Figure 5.2 is a schematic of a pSeries system configuration suitable for Johnson & Thornbush. Art Department employees will continue to use their existing PCs, most of which are Intel based and a few of which are Macs. Using DB2 UDB Workgroup, a database of images will be built and, to the degree that the image formats are readable on both types of workstations, all Art Department users will be able to share their work. Other company

Figure 5.2.

A pSeries system configured for the Johnson & Thornbush advertising agency.

AIX 5L v5.2 IBM DB2 UDB Workgroup Server Edition Lotus Notes/Domino 6 Service Agent Business applications

Printer Modem Plotter Personal Computers Software (for p615)

2-way 1.2 GHz POWER4+ processor card 2 GB memory 73.4 GB 10,000 rpm disk drives (2) CD-ROM drive Diskette drive Integrated Ultra3-SCSI adapters (2) Integrated Ethernet 10/100 Mbps adapter (2) Service processor 20/40 GB 4-mm Internal Tape Drive (extra option)

Color Plotter

Personal Computers

Other devices

Modem

Ethernet LAN

pSeries 630 Model 6E4

Network Printer

pSeries 630 Model 6E4

276 Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

pSeries and Your Environment

277

employees, who are not involved in the production of graphics images, will also be connected on the LAN with access (as authorized) to information on the database, such as market demographics, accounting data, and human resources and payroll information. All employees will use the Lotus Notes application for messaging within and outside the company, and a modem will provide access to the Internet. The Ethernet LAN was selected because it is supported by all the existing personal computers as well as by the p630-6E4 server. A shared network printer, such as the IBM Infoprint 1140, which can print about 40 pages per minute, will be managed by the p630-6E4 and will be available to all employees. An autofeed color plotter (e.g., Tektronix) will be used by the Art Department for high-quality image copies. A desirable plotter would be one that can create eight-color drawings and text on A- or B-sized paper or transparencies. The automatic sheet feed will allow the plotter to print multiple drawings unattended. The pSeries 630 will be used as a database, file, and printing server by all PC users on the network. The DB2 UDB Workgroup database will be the central repository for demographic information, which is needed by many PC users performing market research, and for the graphics files to be shared by users in the Art Department. A relational database application, such as DB2 UDB, allows files of various kinds to be indexed with multiple keywords so that users can search and sort information. As a file server, the p630-6E4 in effect becomes a giant PC disk shared by all PCs. As a print server, it will allow all PC users to print documents on either the IBM Network Printer or the plotter just as if these devices were attached to their PCs. These files will be stored in a Windows or Mac format on the pSeries disk so that the PC users can use the data with the application programs they currently use. The file and printing server functions will be provided by AIX Connections in the AIX 5L operating system. The p630-6E4 with a 2-way 1.2 GHz POWER4+ processor card will provide adequate performance for the initial implementation phase and has plenty of expansion capability for Johnson & Thornbush in terms of performance, storage, and memory. The base 1 GB of memory will be doubled to 2 GB, and rather than starting with the base 36.4 GB disk drive, they will start with two 73.4 GB drives, for 146.8 GB of SCSI storage. A 20/40 GB 4-mm internal tape drive will be used to back up the information on the pSeries 630 disk daily. Johnson & Thornbush selected AIX 5L v5.2, which includes the no-charge Bonus Pack and Expansion Pack of Internet and other soft-

278

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

ware. In the future, they plan to set up an internal (intranet) Web page to facilitate easier sharing of information and, over time, to expand this to include external Web-based advertising for their clients. The Lotus Notes/Domino 6 server package is designed to support Web access and Web-based applications. The electronic mail, on-line calendaring, and collaboration functions provided in the Lotus Notes/Domino 6 server package will allow any user to electronically send documents or quick notes to any other user. This will streamline the internal communications within Johnson & Thornbush. Since up to now each employee has been selecting his or her PC software, there is not much uniformity among the common desktop applications being used. The Lotus SmartSuite of word-processing, spreadsheet, and business graphics applications will be phased in as company standards. The Johnson & Thornbush system is a major undertaking and will require project management, programming, and network design skills for detailed design and implementation. They are working with an IBM Business Partner on a turnkey package for the pSeries system, development of their unique business applications, and associated consulting services. The pSeries 630 Model 6E4, along with the Lotus Notes/Domino and DB2 UDB database software packages they have selected, will be able to handle future growth at Johnson & Thornbush as they add employees and as requirements for new applications develop. Large Business—Atole Enterprises Our hypothetical large business is Atole Enterprises. This multinational corporation is a manufacturer of aircraft and enjoys financial prowess worthy of its Fortune 500 membership. The many benefits afforded by computers are no news to Atole Enterprises. They have been using computers in their day-to-day operations for many years. Atole has at least one large zSeries or S/390 system at every major Atole facility. These large computers are linked together in a computer network, enabling the electronic transfer of information all over the world. Atole has developed many custom application programs for zSeries and S/390 systems. We will look more closely at the hypothetical Atole site on the outskirts of Pensacola, Florida. Atole—Pensacola is a large manufacturing and advanced research facility. The company installed an Ethernet LAN several years ago and has a collection of workstations that run the UNIX operating system

pSeries and Your Environment

279

and participate in that network. These workstations support engineering, manufacturing, and research activities. There is also a large S/390 system with custom application programs and many terminals and printers attached. This system provides inventory management, basic accounting, order entry, and other financial reporting functions. Although the inventory and order-entry systems have been performing quite well for Atole, recent expansion of Atole’s product line has forced unforeseen upgrades to the S/390. In addition, Atole’s aging homegrown financial software is beginning to dull the company’s competitive edge. Continuous “enhancements” through the years have caused any new features to take many employee-hours to implement. Facing an upgrade of the mainframe environment and replacement of the financial package, Atole looks for a way to solve both problems at once: Purchase a new system to run an up-to-date, off-the-shelf financial product. Maintaining the same “rock-solid reliability” is paramount. Any new system must provide excellent reliability, communicate with the S/390, be easy to support, and meet the budget objectives for a new system. Atole evaluated several financial products and selected PeopleSoft Financials running on Oracle database software. They also selected the pSeries 690 system running the AIX 5L v5.2 operating system and IBM High Availability Cluster Multiprocessing software. With the large installed base of UNIX workstations at Atole, the support staff is comfortable that they can support the pSeries and implement the high-availability configuration that is planned. The dynamic logical partitioning capability of the p690 allows flexibility of adjusting system resources to the workloads of various applications. The Capacity Upgrade on Demand (CUoD) features will help manage cost of ownership by allowing installation of hardware at acceptable cost, with the ability to activate it quickly when the need arises to handle heavier workloads or to install new applications. Figure 5.3 shows the dual pSeries 690 configuration. One p690 (12-way 1.7 GHz POWER4+ with four inactive CUoD processors) will comfortably support the production users of the financial applications connected via Gigabit Ethernet LAN. The other p690 (also 12-way with four inactive processors) serves as both the failover (backup for production) HACMP system and the development system. Atole decides to configure both systems the same, even though this is not required for normal workload on the development system. Atole decides that, in the event of a takeover, they want to maintain a similar response time that the users had while in normal production. The IBM 7315-C02 Hard-

280

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Production System pSeries 690 1 8-way 1.7 GHz POWER4+ MCM 1 8-way 1.7 GHz POWER4+ MCM with 4-way active 64 GB memory 7040-61D I/O drawer - Gigabit Ethernet adapters (2) - Advanced SerialRAID Plus (SSA) (2) - S/390 ESCON adapter 7133-D40 Serial Disk System with 16 72.8 GB drives (primary database) Service processor IBM 7315-C02 Hardware Management Console

Development System and Hot Spare pSeries 690 1 8-way 1.7 GHz POWER4+ MCM 1 8-way 1.7 GHz POWER4+ MCM with 4-way active 64 GB memory 7040-61D I/O drawer - Gigabit Ethernet adapters (2) - Advanced SerialRAID Plus (SSA) (2) - S/390 ESCON adapter Service processor 7133 - D40 Serial Disk System with 16 72.8 GB drives (mirror of database) 3590 Magstar High Performance Tape Subsystem

Software

Software

AIX 5L v5.2 HACMP v4.5 Oracle Database PeopleSoft Applications

AIX 5L v5.2 HACMP v4.5 Oracle Database PeopleSoft Applications C++ Compiler

Figure 5.3.

High availability pSeries 690 systems at Atole Enterprises.

ware Management Console (HMC) will be attached to each system via the integrated HMC ports. Mirrored SSA disks in an IBM 7133-D40 Serial Disk System will be accessed via dual Advanced SerialRAID SSA adapters to provide high reliability and performance. The development system will have separate storage in another IBM 7133-D40 Serial Disk System. Dual Ethernet adapters are used for communications between the two p690s in an HACMP cluster. Each has an ESCON interface for accessing the orderentry and inventory data stored on the mainframe. An IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Subsystem 3590, attached to the development system, will be used to back up both systems. The high-availability components of this environment include the following:

pSeries and Your Environment

•

HACMP v4.5

•

Dual pSeries 690 systems

•

Dual Advanced SerialRAID SSA adapters

•

Dual Gigabit Ethernet adapters

•

Mirrored disks

•

Dual racks providing redundant power and cooling

281

Not shown in Figure 5.3 is the Ethernet LAN on which the employees’ PCs are attached. The network designer will distribute the users across multiple Gigabit Ethernet adapter cards (duplicated in each system) to optimize performance on the LAN. For those employees who use older (“legacy”) applications on the S/390 mainframe systems, 3270 emulation capability will be provided on their PCs by the IBM Host Access Client Package for Multiplatforms software product. As business needs increase, Atole can grow this cluster over time by activating the CUoD processors two at a time and by adding more processors (up to 32-way) and more memory and disk storage. Optionally, they can add additional systems to the cluster with a shared database partition using HACMP’s Concurrent Access. And, of course, they can add more users or other I/O devices as required. The Financial Decisions In addition to selecting the hardware and software to address identified needs, some financial questions must also be considered when installing a computer solution. Two important areas that must be addressed are cost justification and the “lease or buy” decision. Let’s look at these issues. Cost Justification All businesses are the same in one respect: They exist to make a profit. In the final analysis, the only reason for a business to buy a computer is to make the business more profitable. Although academic, governmental, and not-for-profit organizations don’t have the profit motive, they

282

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

still must decide how to invest their typically limited funds to best meet their objectives. In either case, therefore, the computer system must be cost-justified. There are two halves to the cost-justification analysis: costs and benefits. The price paid to the computer vendor is easily identified early in the project. What many people fail to consider are the other costs of owning a computer system. The costs of operating the computer installation should also be considered. This is called “total cost of ownership.” Some costs that should be considered beyond the price tag are discussed next. Total Hardware and Software Costs. This should be an obvious point, but one must include the costs for the pSeries system plus other hardware peripherals (e.g., external storage systems, printers, PCs, etc.) and the costs of all the software required for both the pSeries system and any PCs to be purchased. Hardware Maintenance. This is usually a monthly or annual fee that essentially provides an extended warranty for the computer hardware. There are various alternatives, but the basic deal is that if the computer system breaks down, the service company will come out and effect repairs at no charge. If the system is not on a maintenance contract, then service providers will charge an hourly fee and parts costs when the system breaks down. Because this parts/labor billing approach can be extremely expensive, most businesses choose to put their system on a maintenance contract. Software Maintenance. In many cases, the software supplier will have to pay an annual or monthly fee to get software fixes and updates for the programs purchased from that company. Technical Support. Some companies charge fees for technical support, whereas others include some level of support in the price of their products. This support is a way to get answers to questions and resolve any technical problems in either the hardware or software. This kind of support ranges from providing a telephone number to having permanently assigned personnel from the computer company on premises. Sometimes this support is provided free of charge; other times it is on a fee basis. Facilities. Often a company must modify its building to accommodate a computer system. These modifications might include running cable between workstations and the computer or modifying the electrical power services available. Fortunately, the cost of such building modifications is relatively low with pSeries systems as compared with larger computers, which may require water cooling and raised floors.

pSeries and Your Environment

283

Space. Whether raised floor construction is needed or not, one must pay for the floor space required for the systems to be installed. Customers who use rack-mounted systems should consider the “footprint” of each system being compared. This simply means to evaluate the area required for the entire system (processor drawer, I/O drawers, storage subsystems, other devices). How many systems can be installed per 19inch rack? One, or more? Or does the system require more than one rack? Using this approach, one can calculate a figure of merit called system density (systems per 19-inch rack footprint). Utilities. In the area of facilities, an increasingly important aspect of total cost of ownership is utilities cost. Computer systems can require a lot of electricity—both to power the hardware and to run the air conditioning to compensate for the heat generated by that hardware. So, when selecting among different computer systems, one should compare the power (in kilowatts, or kw) required for each system and the associated air conditioning load that amount of power consumption represents. All system components (server, storage, printers, etc.) must be considered in order to make a valid system comparison. Education/Training. The people who will be using the computer system may need training. The computer operators will need to understand how to manage the day-to-day operations of the computer. The users of the computer system will have to understand the application programs. It may also be necessary for a company to train its own programmers to write custom application programs. Although pSeries systems are designed for ease of use, some training will still be necessary. Many different types of training are available, as is discussed later in the chapter. Computer-based courses that allow a user to sit at a terminal and learn about various subjects are available for a fee from IBM Education Services. Some courses are for the users; others are for the systems administrator and any programmers who may use the system. In addition, pSeries systems provide access to the IBMLink network, which allows the users and the systems administrator to electronically research technical issues, ask questions through electronic mail, resolve technical problems, place service calls, and so on. The services provided by IBMLink are available seven days a week around the clock. Communications-Line Costs. If the computer system will be attached to remote workstations, to other remote computers, or to the Internet (very likely), there will be communications costs. Many different communications services are available today, and these costs should be considered in your justification.

284

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

On the plus side of the ledger, the computer solution is being purchased to solve identified problems or address known needs. In other words, there will be benefits to the company after the computer system is installed. (Or else why install it?) Although it is fairly easy to identify and quantify the costs associated with a computer system, it is often difficult to do the same for the benefits. This doesn’t mean that benefits are any less real than costs, it simply means that they require some more work to uncover. Benefits are specific to a particular situation, so it would be impossible to list them all. Some common benefits associated with the application of computer systems are discussed here. Improved Business Cycle. The basic cycles of most businesses and other organizations have the same components. The business buys goods or equipment, takes orders for goods or services, delivers the goods, and bills the customer. The classic application of computer systems to these areas produces improvements in the basic business cycle, resulting in real dollar savings. These can be the result of many basic things such as collecting accounts receivable more quickly or taking better advantage of accounts payable discount terms. Inventory Reduction. Many carrying costs are associated with inventory. These include warehouse space, insurance, taxes, and interest expense. The proper application of computers can reduce the level of inventory that must be kept on hand, thus reducing carrying costs. Improved Productivity. Given the proper tools, anyone in any part of an organization can do his or her job more efficiently. This allows an organization to get the same amount of work done in less time or with fewer people. Excess personnel can then be redirected to perform other tasks that help meet the organization’s objectives. Further, as natural attrition reduces the workforce, it may be possible not to hire replacements, allowing for a reduction of the workforce over time. Improved Quality. By providing more timely or better organized information to personnel, organizations often can improve the quality of the services or products they provide. For example, in manufacturing environments, computers can be applied to everything from design simulations to statistical quality control. Improved Customer Service. By allowing an organization to respond to customer orders, questions, and special requests, computer systems can improve customer service. These improvements can include, for example, quickly responding to requests for price quotations and accurately quoting or meeting delivery dates.

pSeries and Your Environment

285

Competitive Advantage. The items just discussed, which contribute to reducing costs, improving quality, and improving customer service, all work to improve the effectiveness of an organization. The flexibility provided by a computer system can also help the competitiveness of a business by allowing it to respond more quickly to changing market demands. Change is inevitable, and it represents opportunity for the flexible and doom for the inflexible. This list of general benefits is in no way complete. Each organization will be able to add to the list based on its current situation and objectives. Once benefits have been identified, however, the job is still not done. The benefits should be quantified in dollars and cents where possible to help focus on the areas with the largest payoff first. However, quantifying benefits can be difficult and subject to judgment. Unlike the price of a computer, which can be looked up in a catalog, benefits must be calculated based on expected results. For example, if it is estimated that inventory can be reduced by 10% by installing an inventory management application program, one would multiply 10% of inventory value times the carrying costs to determine the annual benefit. Other areas that are more difficult to quantify accurately include increased employee productivity, increased sales (resulting from improved customer service), or lower employee turnover (resulting from improved working conditions and pride). The fact that these benefits (and others like them) are difficult to quantify doesn’t make them any less valuable, but they are often overlooked. Lease or Buy? After evaluating all the software and hardware alternatives and doing the cost/benefit analysis, a company must then decide on the acquisition method to be used. Several methods are commonly used to acquire a computer system. The most obvious alternative is to simply pay cash for the computer system, called an outright purchase. This is usually the least expensive way to acquire a computer system, but it has a direct impact on the organization’s cash flow and capital position. The next acquisition alternative is to finance the purchase price over a period of time, just as one would finance a new home. In this case, there is simply a down payment (of 10%, for example) and a loan for the balance. Since interest must be paid on the loan, this is a more expensive alternative than a cash purchase, but it can reduce cash flow re-

286

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

quirements. In either of these cases, the title of the computer system passes to the business, as do any tax benefits such as depreciation. The purchaser of a computer also has the ability to sell the computer when it is replaced or no longer required, thus recovering the residual value of the computer system. Another acquisition alternative is the term lease. In this alternative, the lessor (computer owner) grants use of a computer system to the lessee (the using company), which in turn agrees to make lease payments for some specified period of time (or term). Lease terms can be any length, but they typically run for two to five years. If the lessee decides to terminate the lease before the end of the term, there is usually a termination fee. Some of the advantages offered by the term lease alternative include the conservation of capital and lines of credit. Two common types of leases are a capital lease and an operating lease. Capital leases are “rent-to-own.” At the end of the term, the computer system can be purchased for a relatively small fee (e.g., 5 or 10% of the original cost), and the lessee is considered the owner and gets the tax benefits of ownership. Operating leases are “real” leases, in which there is no discounted purchase option at the end of the lease term. The lessor is the owner and retains the tax benefits of ownership, and capital lease payments are usually lower than with operating leases. One final acquisition alternative is to rent the computer system month by month. This provides the most flexibility because this kind of arrangement typically requires only one month’s notice to discontinue. Of course, higher rental payments are usually required to get this flexibility and, because the payment is usually not fixed, a company is subject to rental price increases. The acquisition of computer software is a whole different story. Typically, one does not have the option to “buy” software; most companies license software. A software license grants the licensee the right to use the software under the conditions specified in the document supplied by the software company, called the licensing agreement. These licenses usually allow the licensee to use the software on a specified computer system for a specified fee. Three common ways to pay for this license agreement are one-time charge, lease, and monthly charge. With the one-time charge, the licensee pays a set price and retains the right to use the software indefinitely. This charge can be paid in cash or financed. The leasing alternative is really just another way to finance the one-time charge with no down payment. Finally, the monthly charge is like renting the software month to month indefinitely.

pSeries and Your Environment

287

User Education The discussions in the chapter so far should assist you in selecting the appropriate software and hardware to fit your needs. However, no matter what computer hardware and software you select, you will need people to operate them. To maximize efficiency and morale, these people (or users) must be provided with education in the use of the computer system itself as well as its software. Proper education is critical to the success of any computer automation project. Inadequate education will prevent reaping the productivity benefits afforded by moving a task to the computer. The goal of education is to make the users proficient at using the computer hardware and software and to make their interaction with the computer system enjoyable. If using the computer is enjoyable, users will be more highly motivated. If using the computer represents a frustrating struggle because of inadequate education, users will be less productive or perhaps will avoid the computer altogether. The education should cover the pSeries hardware, the AIX 5L operating system, and the application software that will be used. Both pSeries hardware and AIX 5L have been designed with close attention to making them as easy to use as possible. The documentation and on-line education courses provide a self-guided tour through pSeries and AIX 5L basics. These offerings should provide adequate education for most users. For programmers and IT personnel who will be responsible for installing and managing a pSeries system, more detailed on-line courses and many classroom training offerings are available from IBM and others. The amount of education needed will depend on the tasks being performed and the experience of the student with AIX 5L or another UNIX operating system. Again, the on-line education courses offered by IBM are a good starting point for learning the AIX 5L operating system. Although the systems administrator will probably need such formal AIX 5L operating system education, often the operating system can be all but hidden from the users, minimizing their educational needs in this area. Education in the use of the application program is usually the most important thing for the users. The content of this education depends on the particular application program selected. Typically, manuals provided with the application program will contain step-by-step tutorials designed to train the user. Depending on the complexity of the application program, the experience of the user, and the quality of the tutorial, this

288

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

education method achieves varying levels of success. There are other ways of getting application program education. Software companies offer classes tailored to teaching how to use their application programs. Businesses will sometimes send one person to a class of this type and then have the person teach other users upon returning. IBM, other software vendors, and consultants can provide information about various classes, books, and on-line courses. Access to IBM technical education offerings for pSeries and AIX 5L products is available on the companion Web site (www.maxpress.com) for this book. Once you have logged onto the “Exploring pSeries” site, look under “Access Other IBM eServer pSeries Resources.” “AIX and pSeries Curriculum” will be one of the selections in that list.

IBMLink Support No matter what computer system a business chooses, the system and its users will require ongoing support. The users will have questions that need answering, hardware problems that must be addressed, software updates that must be installed, and so forth. This support can be delivered in many different ways. Personnel from the computer manufacturer, the software company, the business’s own staff, and so on are generally involved in supporting the computer system and its users. In an effort to make this support more effective and convenient, IBM offers IBMLink. Just as electronic mail and on-line business information streamline a business’s operation, IBMLink streamlines the support provided to the business. Access to IBMLink is available on the companion Web site (www.maxpress.com) for this book. Once you have logged onto the “Exploring pSeries” site, click on “Access Other IBM eServer pSeries Resources.” “IBMLink” will be one of the selections in that list. Many of the information resources on IBMLink are publicly accessible, including the IBM sales manual, announcement letters, IBM news, a publications catalog, lists of local dealers, and IBM education. Others, such as product pricing and discounts and support services, are available only to registered users with a user ID and password. Generally speaking, registered users will be either IBM customers or IBM Business Partners.

pSeries and Your Environment

289

ServiceLink allows customers who have maintenance agreements with IBM to communicate electronically with IBM service personnel to report problems. Further, it is possible to search electronically through IBM’s software updates (e.g., Program Temporary Fixes, or PTFs), to receive the software update electronically and to apply the fix. There are interfaces to provide some simple e-mail functions between IBM personnel and the users, thus reducing “telephone tag.” With IBMLink, support is delivered electronically, improving access to technical and product information and streamlining communications between IBM and the users.

Ergonomics No plan would be complete without addressing the human needs that directly affect the day-to-day productivity of computer users—ergonomics. pSeries systems have been designed with careful attention to ergonomics. Everything from the power switch location to the length of the keyboard cable is scrutinized. Much effort is also expended fine-tuning the ergonomics of most application programs. To get the most out of your pSeries system, you must also provide an ergonomic environment for the users. Organizations such as the American Optometric Association (AOA) and the New York Committee for Occupational Safety and Health (NYCOSH), as well as IBM, have probed deeply into the relationship between the computer and the user. Items such as desks, chairs, lighting, noise, and the like are important to productivity.

Comfort for the Eyes Like any other part of the human body, the eyes can get tired as a result of intensive use. This fatigue, called eyestrain, is nothing new to people who read for many hours at a time. With the increase in computer use over recent years, we have seen an increase in eyestrain. Although eyestrain is only a temporary condition, it can cause a user to feel tired and irritated, especially if he or she continues to work because of the pressures of deadlines. Some simple actions that will help include taking breaks

290

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

or working on tasks that do not involve the computer. Also, it is desirable to put any paper that is frequently referenced during a computer session at the same distance and orientation as the computer screen. A clip-type holder used by typists to hold documents works well for this. Another contributor to eye fatigue commonly found in offices is improper lighting. The amount of glare caused by windows can be reduced by positioning the display at right angles to any window. Curtains or horizontal blinds can also be used to direct light away from the screen. Diffused office lighting will provide fewer “hot spots” and tend to provide the most uniform light and soften harsh shadows, or lower intensity bulbs or dimmer switches may be installed. To help reduce the glare in the user’s environment, pSeries displays and terminals have antiglare screens.

Workstation Comfort The workstation furniture being used can also affect productivity. For this reason, attention should be given to the details of the user’s workstation, that is, the chair and desk or table to be used. A properly designed chair can help reduce back problems and make the user more comfortable and more productive. An improperly designed chair can lead to reduced alertness and shorter concentration spans. Users may not even realize they are uncomfortable as they unconsciously but constantly seek a more comfortable position. Once the user is seated, his or her relationship with the computer display and keyboard will directly affect comfort and thus productivity, so the computer display should be positioned properly. The top of the computer display should be positioned at 10 degrees below eye level, the center of the display at about 20 degrees below eye level and between 14 and 20 inches away. A tilt/swivel stand under the terminal or display allows the user to adjust the display screen angle as desired. Users should avoid using bifocal lenses, which make them tip their heads back while reading the screens. This can lead to discomfort in the back and shoulders. The keyboard should also be in a comfortable position. pSeries systems and associated terminals all provide separate keyboards attached by a flexible cable, which allows the user to position the keyboard as desired. The keyboard height should allow the elbow to be bent at about 90 degrees during typing. Finally, provide sufficient desk space for documents used during the computer session.

pSeries and Your Environment

291

What About Noise? Noise is not conducive to efficiency. Irregular noise is more distracting than constant noise. Unfortunately, irregular noise is commonplace in almost any busy environment. It results from nearby conversations, telephones, printers, copy machines, and many other things. If possible, isolate noise sources such as impact printers and copy machines by placing them in isolated areas or separate rooms. Noise can also be reduced by installing doors, carpets, and other sound-insulating materials.

Security In many environments, computer systems are the backbone of day-today operations. This makes the information stored on the computers an asset at least as valuable as cash. Like an organization’s cash, computer information must be protected from loss or theft. Let’s look at how this vital information can be protected.

Loss Prevention An ever-present hazard when dealing with information (with or without computers) is the possibility that the information will be lost. This loss can occur in many different ways. A computer system’s breakdown, such as a disk failure, can result in lost information. Further, operator error can cause data to be accidentally corrupted, resulting in lost information. Finally, a disaster (such as a fire or flood) can result in a loss of vital information. For this reason, recovery from the loss of vital information must be addressed. One way to deal with the risk of losing vital information is to make backup copies of computer information at regular intervals (for example, daily). Multiple backup copies should be made on a revolving basis and kept in a place safe from damage or loss. Three copies will allow at least one copy to be kept in safe storage at all times and provide for different levels of backup. In the event of an information loss, the computer system can be restored to the point at which the most recent backup copy was made. The AIX 5L operating system and the various tape and DVDRAM devices discussed in Chapter 2 are designed for these kinds of save/restore operations. Any changes to information after the point of

292

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

the last backup will have to be re-created after the backup copy is used to restore the system. This may involve manually re-entering the transactions since the last backup. Mirroring, discussed in Chapter 3, can also be used to decrease the likelihood of losing valuable information.

Theft Prevention Theft prevention deals with protecting sensitive information from unauthorized disclosure. Security requirements vary widely from environment to environment and should be considered early in your planning. pSeries systems provide various levels of security that help deter unauthorized access. Security is provided by the computer system itself along with the associated operating system. In fact, pSeries systems and the AIX 5L operating system have been designed to meet the stringent security requirements defined by the National Computer Security Center Trusted Computer System Evaluation Criteria Class C2. Depending on the needs of the environment, various levels of security can be activated, from no security to detailed access control. A security officer is usually assigned to manage the security of the system. For sensitive environments, some customers may consider restricting access to areas where pSeries systems or associated terminals are located. These site-planning considerations should be considered early in a computer automation project.

Service Although every effort has been made to make pSeries systems as reliable as possible, some computers will fail, and if a computer does have a problem, there must be a way of getting it fixed. All pSeries systems come with a warranty from IBM. For many systems, the standard offering is a 1-year warranty that provides free on-site repairs from IBM’s service division 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. In order to be competitive in the entry and midrange UNIX server markets, IBM has begun to offer on some models a standard 1-year warranty with “9 to 5, nextbusiness-day” service. Upgrading to “7 × 24” support is available for an additional charge on these systems. These alternate warranty options are not available in every geography, so the local IBM Service Representative or IBM Business Partner should be consulted. The vari-

pSeries and Your Environment

293

ous terminals, storage systems, and printers associated with pSeries systems each have their own warranty terms and conditions. After the warranty period, the customer becomes responsible for maintenance of the system. IBM and others offer service agreements that, for a fee, provide postwarranty on-site service just like that provided during the warranty, as well as less expensive options for other than 7 × 24 support. Various maintenance discounts are available, depending on the level of systems management procedures implemented in a specific situation. If the system fails and there is no service contract, the user will have to pay for parts and labor, which can quickly become extremely expensive. For this reason, most businesses choose to keep their systems on maintenance after warranty as a type of insurance policy. Many factors affect the choice of computer system for a particular use. These factors include application availability, total cost of ownership, ergonomics, and the availability of qualified support providers. Where a UNIX solution fits the bill, IBM eServer pSeries systems, the AIX 5L operating system and associated software products, and the support offerings available from IBM and IBM Business Partners, deliver solutions that merit careful consideration.

294

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Index

2D (two-dimensional) graphics accelerators, 175–176 capability in pSeries family, 117 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel Adapter for the 64-bit PCI Bus (#6228), 171 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel PCI-X Adapter (#6239), 171 2-Port 10/100/1000 Base-TX Ethernet PCI-X Adapter (#5706), 165, 166–167 2-Port Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI-X Adapter (#5707), 165, 167 2-Port Multiprotocol PCI Adapter (#2962), 169 3D geometry (PLBsurf93), 178, 179 3D (three-dimensional) graphics accelerators, 176–178 AIX 5L support, 220 capability in pSeries family, xxiii, 2, 117–121 displays (monitors), 174–175 4-mm Tape Options, 147 8-Port Asynchronous Adapter EIA-232/ RS-422, PCI Bus (#2943), 162, 256 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet PCI Adapter (#2975), 164–165 10/100/1000 Base-TX Ethernet PCI-X Adapter (#5701), 165, 166 10/100 Mbps Ethernet PCI Adapter II (#4962), 165, 166 20/40 GB 4-mm Internal Tape Drive (#6158, #6185), 146 32-bit vs. 64-bit architectures, 194, 235–236, 237 60/150 GB 16-bit 8-mm Internal Tape Drive (#6134), 146–147 64-bit vs. 32-bit architectures, 194, 235–236, 237 80/160 GB 8-mm Internal Tape Drive with VXA Technology (#6120, #6169), 146 294

128-Port Asynchronous Controller, PCI Bus (#2944), 162–162 801 project (IBM), xx 2104 SCSI Expandable Storage Plus (EXP Plus), 133–134, 138, 258 2105 TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server (ESS) “Shark,” 142–143 3494 TotalStorage Virtual Tape Server Models B10 and B20 (3494 Tape Library Dataservers), 151–152 3552 TotalStorage FAStT Fibre Channel Storage Servers, 139–142, 170–171 3995 Optical Library Dataservers, 145 4247 Multi-Form Printer, 180–181 6400 Printer family, 180–181 7133 TotalStorage Serial Disk System, 134–135, 138 7204 External Disk Drive, 135 7205 Model 440/550 Digital Linear Tape Drive, 149 7206 External 4-mm Tape Drive Model 220, 147 7206 External Tape Drive Model VX2, 147–148 7207 Model 122 External 3-inch Cartridge Tape Drive, 148 7208 Model 345 External 8-mm Tape Drive, 149 7210 External DVD-RAM Drive, 145 7212 Model 102 TotalStorage Device Enclosure, 136 7316 Model TF2 Rack-mounted Flat Panel Console, 182–183 7332 4-mm Tape Autoloader, 148 A

ACF (Automatic Cartridge Facility), 151 adapters (feature cards), 123. See also options and peripherals Adobe Acrobat Reader, 225

Index

Advanced Interactive eXecutive. See AIX Advanced Serial RAID Adapter (#6230), 134 Advanced Serial RAID Plus SSA Adapter (#6230), 156–157 Advanced SSA Fibre-Optic Extender (7133 Feature 8851), 157 Advanced SSA Optical Extender, 135 AIX 4.3, 199 AIX 5L, 204–237. See also application development (AIX 5L); communications support (AIX 5L); Internet software (AIX 5L); operating systems; systems management (AIX 5L); user interfaces/services (AIX 5L) 64-bit capability (LP64), 234–237 AIXwindows7 graphical user interface (GUI), 208, 211, 220 application programs for, 3–4 binary compatibility of, xxv Bonus Pack, 225, 226, 230–231 communications functions, 208 desktop user interface, 211–212, 219, 221, 233 disk management, 216–218 distributed communications support, 246 Distributed Computing Environment (DCE) products, 221–222, 223 Distributed File System (DFS), 222 dynamic kernel, 207 evolution of, 205–206, 208 Expansion Pack, 224, 225, 231–232 extensions to, 190, 207 file system, 217–218, 233–234 installation, 215–216, 234 JFS2 file system, 218, 233–234 “large page” support, 218 Linux affinity tools, 194, 211–212, 229, 239 Logical Volume Manager (LVM), 217 login controls, 214, 233 mirroring, 214, 217, 259 modular nature of, 190 Network Install Manager (NIM), 234

295

Open Group impact on, 208, 222, 232, 236 open system, 3–4, 205, 208, 232–234 overview of, xx, xxi–xxii, 3, 204–208 password management, 214, 233 PCs and, 208 Performance Aide v3.1, 228 performance analysis tools, 228–229 Performance Toolbox (PTX), 228 physical partitions, 217 security enhancements, 213–214, 232–233 static kernel, 207 structure of, 207 summary, 237 SVR4 affinity tools, 194 UNIX and, 204–205 UNIX source-code compatibility, 194 user interface, 207–208 Web-based System Manager, 208, 214–215, 226, 230, 234 Web Download Pack, 226, 230–231, 232 Welcome Center, 229–230 Workload Manager (WLM), 66, 203, 227–228 AIX (Advanced Interactive eXecutive), xxi, 199, 205, 206. See also AIX 5L AIX Developer Kit, Java 2 Technology Edition, Version 1.3.1, 226 AIX Fast Connect for POWER Version 3.1, 223–224 AIX Realtime Interface Coprocessors (ARTIC) adapters, 169 AIX Toolbox for Linux Applications, 229 AIXwindows7 graphical user interface (GUI), 208, 211, 220 All-Points-Addressable (APA) image, 118 American Optometric Association (AOA), 289 American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) protocol, 222 ANSI X3T10.1 committee, 111 antiglare coating of displays, 174, 290

296

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

AOA (American Optometric Association), 289 APA (All-Points-Addressable) image, 118 API (application program interface) and operating systems, 199–200 Apple/IBM/Motorola alliance, 80, 86 applets (Java), 226–227 application development (AIX 5L), 218–221. See also AIX 5L AIXwindows7 graphical user interface (GUI), 208, 211, 220 C++ and, 219 Common Desktop Environment (CDE) for, 211–212, 219, 221, 233 compilers, 219 computer-aided software engineering (CASE), 220–221 Configuration Management Version Control (CMVC), 221 Display PostScript for AIXwindows, 211, 220 Engineering Scientific Subroutine Library (ESSL), 219–220 FORTRAN and, 219 Java 2 and, 219 libraries, 219–220 Make command, 218 OpenGL and GL3.2, 220, 230 Programmer Hierarchical Interactive Graphics System (PHIGS), 220 runtime execution for Java 2, 219 shell scripts, 218–219 Source Code Control System, 218 subroutine libraries, 218 three-dimensional (3D) graphics support, 220 “vi” full-screen editor and tools, 218 VisualAge C Compiler, 219 X development environment, 220 application environments and pSeries family, xxiv application program interface (API) and operating systems, 199–200 application programs, 195–199. See also operating systems; software AIX 5L and, 3–4 choosing for pSeries, 264–266

common functions of, 189 cross-industry application programs, 195 custom application programs, 198–199, 264, 265–266 database applications, 195–197, 267 fields within records, 196 files, 196 industry-specific application programs, 197–198 logical partitioning (LPAR) and, 96 middleware products, 196 modular software products, 197 open system and, 3–4 operating systems layer, 187, 189–191, 193 prewritten (off-the-shelf) application programs, 195, 198, 264, 265 proprietary extensions, 3–4 pSeries family, xxv, xxvi records, 196 software layer, 187, 188, 189, 192–193 application program software base, 192 Application Service Providers (ASPs) users of pSeries family, xxiii, 13 architecture. See hardware architecture ARTIC960Hx 4-Port Multiprotocol PCI Adapter (#2947), 169, 246 ARTIC960RxD Quad Digital Trunk PCI Adapter (#6310), 170 ARTIC (AIX Realtime Interface Coprocessors) adapters, 169 ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) protocol, 222 ASCII terminals and distributed communications, 256 ASCI White, 12 ASPs (Application Service Providers) users of pSeries family, xxiii, 13 assumptions for benchmark testing, 74 asynchronous (async) protocol, 158–159 ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode), 168 Atole Enterprises (large business), 278–281 AT&T Bell Labs, xx, 204 Austin, Texas (IBM), xxi

Index

Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF), 151 autonomic computing, 46 availability of pSeries family, xxiv, xxvi. See also RAS (reliability, availability, serviceability) functions average latency of the drive, 107 average seek time, 107

297

choosing pSeries, questions for, xxvi–xxvii configurations for pSeries, 269–286 developers for application programs, 265–266 display (monitor) placement, 290 education/training, 283, 287–288 ergonomics, 289–290 eye comfort, 289–290 B goals of organization, identifying, “backbone,” 254 263 background processing, 202 IBMLink, 283, 288–289 backups, 214, 291–292 information flow of business, batch vs. interactive processing, 200–201 understanding, 263–264 benchmark testing, 73–74 iSeries family, 239, 266–267 benefits, quantifying for financial keyboard placement, 290 decisions, 284–285 large business (Atole Enterprises), Berkeley Software Distribution 4 (BSD 278–281 4), xx lighting, 290 BI (business intelligence), 198 management commitment to, 263 BIFF command, xx medium-sized business (Johnson & binary compatibility of AIX 5L, xxv Thornbush), 273–278 Binary Synchronous Communication needs of organization, identifying, (BSC), 159 263–264 bits, 81 noise in environment, 291 bit scattering technique, 98 personal computers (PCs), 266 bit steering technique, 98 planning importance, 262 black color for pSeries systems, 122 project team for, 263 blind-swap technology, 116 questions for choosing pSeries, Bob’s Gearbox Company (small busixxvi–xxvii ness), 270–273 ServiceLink, 289 Bonus Pack (AIX 5L), 225, 226, small business (Bob’s Gearbox 230–231 Company), 270–273 branch processor, 83, 84 user education/training, 283, 287–288 bridges, 172–173 workstation comfort, 290–291 brightness of graphics, 118–119 zSeries family, 239, 246–248, 267–269 browsers, 225 business cycle improvement, 284 BSC (Binary Synchronous Communica- business intelligence (BI), 198 tion), 159 Business Partners (IBM), xxvi, 215, BSD 4 (Berkeley Software Distribution 288, 292 4), xx buying vs. leasing, 285–286 Building Intranets with Lotus Notes bytes, 81 (Krantz), 225 C business and communications, 243 business and pSeries, 262–293. See also cache coherency, 105 cache hit, 82, 83, 85 financial decisions; security cache miss, 82–83, 85 application programs, choosing, C++ and AIX 5L, 219 264–266 capacity required by pSeries family, xxvii chairs, 290

298

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Capacity Upgrade on Demand. See CUoD capital lease (rent-to-own), 286 Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD) protocol, 160, 164, 252 CASE (computer-aided software engineering), 220–221 cash purchases, 285 CDE (Common Desktop Environment) of AIX 5L, 211–212, 219, 221, 233 CD-ROM (#2633), 144 CD-ROMs, 106, 114–115 central processing unit (CPU), 81. See also main memory; processor chairs, ergonomics, 290 Channel Service Units (CSUs), 169 checksum offload, 167 Chipkill memory Entry pSeries and RS/6000 servers, 30, 34 High-end pSeries servers, 70 Midrange pSeries servers, 51, 55 overview of, 99, 100, 124 choosing pSeries, questions for, xxvi–xxvii. See also business and pSeries CISC (Complex Instruction Set Computing), 80 Cisco Systems/IBM alliance, 173 class numbers, pSeries family, 5 client node, 251 client workstations, 223–224 clock rate, Entry pSeries and RS/6000 servers, 18 Cluster 1600, 5, 11, 12, 34, 46, 71–73 clustering for high availability, 256–261 CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor), 122 CMVC (Configuration Management Version Control), 221 Cocke, John, xx colors for graphics, 118–119, 120 command prompt, 209, 210 command shells, 209–210, 211, 213 commercial users of pSeries family, xxiii, 2–3

Common Desktop Environment (CDE) of AIX 5L, 211–212, 219, 221, 233 common functions of application programs, 189 communications, 157–162. See also distributed communications AIX 5L and, 208 asynchronous (async) protocol, 158–159 Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), 168 Binary Synchronous Communication (BSC), 159 business and, 243 Carrier Sense Multiple Access/ Collision Detect (CSMA/CD) protocol, 160, 164, 252 Channel Service Units (CSUs), 169 Data Encryption Standard (DES), 172 e-business impact on, 173 Enterprise Systems CONnection (ESCON), 169 interfaces, 158 Internet impact on, 173 Internet Protocol (IP), 160 local area networks (LANs), 157 message frame, 161–162, 255, 256 overview of, 242–243 packet-switched networks, 160 parity bit, 159 protocols, 158–162 Secure Socket Layer (SSL), 171, 226 start bit, 159 stop bit, 159 Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC), 159–160 Systems Network Architecture (SNA), 159–160, 247–248 token frame, 161, 162, 255, 256 Token-Ring protocol, 160–162 wide area networks (WANs), 157, 168 X.25 protocol, 160 communications-line costs, 283 communications options, 162–173. See also Ethernet adapters 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel Adapter for

Index

the 64-bit PCI Bus (#6228), 171 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel PCI-X Adapter (#6239), 171 2-Port Multiprotocol PCI Adapter (#2962), 169 8-Port Asynchronous Adapter EIA232/RS-422, PCI Bus (#2943), 162, 256 128-Port Asynchronous Controller, PCI Bus (#2944), 162–162 AIX Realtime Interface Coprocessors (ARTIC) adapters, 169 ARTIC960Hx 4-Port Multiprotocol PCI Adapter (#2947), 169, 246 ARTIC960RxD Quad Digital Trunk PCI Adapter (#6310), 170 bridges, 172–173 cryptographic coprocessors, 171–172 digital trunk adapters, 170 e-business Cryptographic Accelerator (#4960), 171 fibre channel adapters, 170–171 Gigabit Fibre Channel Adapter (#6227), 171 local area network (LAN) communications adapters, 164 modulator-demodulators (modems), 186, 256 multiprotocol communications adapters, 168–169 network processors, 172–173 PCI Cryptographic Coprocessor (FIPS-4) (#4963), 171–172 Remote Async Nodes (RANs), 162–162 routers, 172–173, 253, 254 RS/6000 SP System Attachment Adapter (#8396), 170 S/390 ESCON Channel PCI Adapter (#2751), 169–170 SP switch, 170 SP Switch2 Attachment Adapter (#8397), 170 Token-Ring PCI Adapter (#4959), 167–168, 256 TURBOWAYS ATM Adapters, 168 wide area network (WAN) communications adapters, 168

299

communications support (AIX 5L), 222–224. See also AIX 5L AIX Fast Connect for POWER Version 3.1, 223–224 AIX Toolbox for Linux Applications, 229 American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) protocol, 222 client workstations, 223–224 Distributed Computing Environment (DCE) products, 221–222, 223 Dynamic Feedback Protocol (DFP), 229 EtherChannel technology support, 229 Host Access Client Package for Multiplatforms v3.0, 223, 248 Internet Mail Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4), 230 Network File System (NFS), 223 networking performance, 228–229 PCs and, 223–224 Post Office Protocol III (POP III), 230 Sendmail Version 8.11, 229 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), 223, 246 Tivoli NetView7, 223, 246 Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), 222–223, 229 Virtual IP Address (VIPA) function, 228–229 competitive advantage, 285 compiler directives limited (SPECbase), 76 compilers, 193, 219 Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS), 122 Complex Instruction Set Computing (CISC), 80 computer-aided software engineering (CASE), 220–221 conceptual model of software, 187–188 concurrent access to data, 259 condition register instructions, 84 Configuration Management Version Control (CMVC), 221

300

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

configurations for pSeries, 269–286 consolidation from distributed communications, 244 Continuous Composite WORM format, 145 continuous forms printers, 180–181 Control Workstation (CWS), 72 cost justification, 281–285 CPU (central processing unit), 81. See also main memory; processor critical component of your system and pSeries family, xxvi CRM (customer relationship management), 198 cross-industry application programs, 195 cryptographic coprocessors, 171–172 CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect), 160, 164, 252 CSUs (Channel Service Units), 169 CUoD (Capacity Upgrade on Demand) High-end pSeries servers, 61, 66–70 logical partitioning (LPAR) and, 97, 204 Midrange pSeries servers, 46–47, 57, 59 overview of, xxv, xxvii custom application programs, 198–199, 264, 265–266 customer relationship management (CRM), 198 customer service improvement, 284 customization services (AIX 5L), 215–216 CWS (Control Workstation), 72 D

DASD (Direct Access Storage Devices), 106–108. See also external disk systems database applications, 195–197, 267 data cache, 83, 85, 88, 89, 94 Data Encryption Standard (DES), 172 data sharing on LAN, 251 data transfer rate, 107, 109–110 DAT (digital audio tape), 147 DB2 Universal Database (UDB), 196, 241

DCE (Distributed Computing Environment), 221–222, 223 DCM (Dual Chip Module), 22 decision support (TPC-H), 78 Deep Blue, 12 DES (Data Encryption Standard), 172 deskside models, xxiii, 9–10, 122 desktop user interface (AIX 5L), 211–212, 219, 221, 233 Developer Kit for Linux, Java 2 Technology Edition, 241 developers for application programs, 265–266 development tools, Internet software (AIX 5L), 226–227 device drivers layer, 187, 191–192, 193 device drivers support (Linux), 239–240 DFP (Dynamic Feedback Protocol), 229 DFS (Distributed File System), 222 digital audio tape (DAT), 147 digital linear tape. See DLT digital trunk adapters, 170 Dimmick, Roger, 267 DIMMS (Dual In-Line Memory Modules), 18, 22, 24, 27, 44, 94 Direct Access Storage Devices (DASD), 106–108. See also external disk systems Direct Memory Access (DMA), 85–86, 96 disk (Direct Access Storage Devices, DASD) storage, 106–108. See also external disk systems diskette storage, 106, 132 disk management (AIX 5L), 216–218 Display PostScript for AIXwindows, 211, 220 displays (monitors), 173–180. See also graphics adapters 7316 Model TF2 Rack-mounted Flat Panel Console, 182–183 antiglare coating, 174, 290 emission standards, 174 energy guidelines for, 174 “Energy Star” program, 174 ergonomic guidelines for, 174, 290 graphics and, 117 L200p Flat Panel Monitor, 174–175

Index

liquid crystal display (LCD) technology, 174 P260/P275 Color Monitor, 174 placement, ergonomics, 290 power management function, 174 T541 15-inch TFT Color Monitor, 174, 175 thin-film technology (TFT), 174 three-dimensional (3D) imaging, 174–175 tilt/swivel stand, 174 VGA Switch (#4200), 183 distributed communications. See also communications AIX 5L support, 246 ASCII terminals, 256 “backbone,” 254 client node, 251 clustering for high availability, 256–261 concurrent access to data, 259 consolidation from, 244 data sharing on LAN, 251 equipment sharing on LAN, 252 Ethernet LAN, 252–255 Geographic Mirror for AIX (GeoRM), 261 High Availability Cluster Multiprocessing/Extended Distance (HACMP/XD), 260–261 High Availability Cluster Multiprocessing (HACMP), 258–260 High Availability Geographic Cluster for AIX (HAGEO), 261 hubs, 253, 254 local area networks (LANs), 250–256 “mutual takeover,” 258–259 node in a network, 251 performance, 244, 250 program sharing on LAN, 251–252 protocol tunneling technique, 249–250 pSeries and zSeries distributed network, 246–248 pSeries distributed network, 245–246 routers, 172–173, 253, 254 server node, 251 switches, 253, 254 Token-Ring LAN, 255–256

301

Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), 246, 247 virtual private networks (VPNs), 248–250 X.25 Interface adapter, 245 Distributed Computing Environment (DCE), 221–222, 223 Distributed File System (DFS), 222 DLT (digital linear tape) options, 149–151. See also storage 7205 Model 440/550 Digital Linear Tape Drive, 149 Linear Tape—Open (LTO) products, 149–150 TotalStorage UltraScalable Tape Library 3584, 150–151 TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Libraries, 149–150 DMA (Direct Memory Access), 85–86, 96 dot-matrix impact printers, 180–181 double words, 81 Dr. Livingstone’s Online Shopping Safari Guidebook (Fiore), 225 Dual-Channel Ultra3-SCSI Adapter (#6203), 154 Dual Chip Module (DCM), 22 dual-frame buffer technique, 119 Dual In-Line Memory Modules (DIMMs), 18, 22, 24, 27, 44, 94 DVD-RAM drive (#2623), 144–145 DVD-RAMs, 106, 115 DVD-ROMs, 115 Dynamic Feedback Protocol (DFP), 229 dynamic kernel, 207 dynamic LPAR, 95, 97, 204 Dynamic Processor Deallocation Entry pSeries and RS/6000 servers, 30, 41 High-end pSeries servers, 67–68 Midrange pSeries servers, 55 E

e-business Cryptographic Accelerator (#4960), 171 e-business impact on communications, 173

302

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

ECC (Error Checking and Correction) techniques, 98–99, 124 Education Services (IBM), 283 education/training, 283, 287–288 electrophotographic (EP) process, 181 emission standards of displays, 174 end-user systems, xxv energy guidelines for displays, 174 “Energy Star” program, 174 Engineering Scientific Subroutine Library (ESSL), 219–220 Enhanced Keyboard, 185 enterprise resource planning (ERP), 198 Enterprise Systems CONnection (ESCON), 169 Entry pSeries and RS/6000 servers, 14–42. See also pSeries family Chipkill memory, 30, 34 clock rate, 18 comparison tables, 6, 8, 15–16 Dual Chip Module (DCM), 22 Dual In-Line Memory Modules (DIMMs), 18, 22, 24, 27 Dynamic Processor Deallocation, 30, 41 Express Configurations, 34 “Express Configurations,” 20, 22 Light Path Diagnostics, 18 logical partitioning (LPAR), 32–33 p610 Models 6C1 and 6E1, 4, 6, 9, 14, 15, 17–20, 125 p615 Models 6C3 and 6E3, 4, 6, 9, 13, 15, 20–24, 75, 94, 125 p620 Models 6F0 and 6F1, 4, 6, 9–10, 15, 24–30, 126–127 p630 Models 6C4 and 6E4, 4, 5, 6, 10, 13, 16, 30–34, 75, 117, 125–126 p640, 4, 5, 6, 10, 16, 34–37, 79, 117, 126 processor book, 27 processor-to-memory bus, 18, 19 reliability, availability, serviceability (RAS) functions, 18, 20, 24, 29–30, 34, 37, 40–41 remote I/O (RIO) subsystem, 27 RS/6000 Models 150, 170, 270, and B50, 4, 8, 12–13, 37–42, 97, 117, 178–179

service processor, 18, 20 synchronous memory interface (SMI) chips, 22, 24 workgroup pricing, 25 Environmental Protection Agency, 174 environment (your) and pSeries. See business and pSeries EP (electrophotographic) process, 181 equipment sharing on LAN, 252 ergonomics, 174, 289–290 ERP (enterprise resource planning), 198 Error Checking and Correction (ECC) techniques, 98–99, 124 ESCON (Enterprise Systems CONnection), 169 eServer brand, xvii ESS (2105 TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server) “Shark,” 142–143 ESSL (Engineering Scientific Subroutine Library), 219–220 EtherChannel technology support, 229 Ethernet adapters, 164–167. See also communications options 2-Port 10/100/1000 Base-TX Ethernet PCI-X Adapter (#5706), 165, 166–167 2-Port Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI-X Adapter (#5707), 165, 167 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet PCI Adapter (#2975), 164–165 10/100/1000 Base-TX Ethernet PCIX Adapter (#5701), 165, 166 10/100 Mbps Ethernet PCI Adapter II (#4962), 165, 166 checksum offload, 167 Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI-X Adapter (#5700), 165, 166 Gigabit SX Ethernet PCI Adapter (#2969), 164, 165 “large send” function, 164, 165, 166–167 TCP segmentation, 166–167 Universal 4-Port 10/100 Ethernet Adapter (#4961), 165–166 Ethernet LAN, 252–255 evolution of AIX 5L, 205–206, 208 Exide Uninterruptible Power Systems, 184

Index

Expansion Pack (AIX 5L), 224, 225, 231–232 expansion slots, 115–116 Exploring IBM eServer iSeries (Hoskins and Dimmick), 267 Exploring IBM eServer xSeries (Hoskins and Wilson), 266 Exploring IBM eServer zSeries and S/390 Servers (Hoskins and Frank), 269 EXP Plus (2104 SCSI Expandable Storage Plus), 133–134, 138, 258 Express Configurations, 20, 22, 34, 47, 57 extensions to AIX 5L, 190, 207 external disk systems, 132–138. See also storage 2104 SCSI Expandable Storage Plus (EXP Plus), 133–134, 138, 258 7133 TotalStorage Serial Disk System, 134–135, 138 7204 External Disk Drive, 135 7212 Model 102 TotalStorage Device Enclosure, 136 Advanced Serial RAID Adapter (#6230), 134 Advanced SSA Optical Extender, 135 High Availability Cluster Multiprocessing (HACMP), 134 mirroring (RAID 1), 137, 138, 155, 156 PCI 4-Channel Ultra3-SCSI RAID Adapter (#2498), 134, 155 Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive Disks (RAID) technology, 136–138 SSA Fast-Write Cache card (#6235), 134 striping and mirroring (RAID 10), 138 striping (RAID 0), 136, 137, 138, 155, 156 striping with distributed parity (RAID 5), 137, 138, 155, 156 external tape options, 147–149. See also storage 4-mm Tape Options, 147 7206 External 4-mm Tape Drive

303

Model 220, 147 7206 External Tape Drive Model VX2, 147–148 7207 Model 122 External 3-inch Cartridge Tape Drive, 148 7208 Model 345 External 8-mm Tape Drive, 149 7332 4-mm Tape Autoloader, 148 digital audio tape (DAT), 147 Quarter-Inch Serpentine (QIC) format, 148 serpentine format, 148 eye comfort, 289–290 F

Fabric Controller, 89 facilities costs, 282 FC-AL (Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop), 112–113, 139 FCC (Federal Communication Commission), 174 FCS (Fibre Channel Standard), 6, 112, 139 feature cards (adapters), 123. See also options and peripherals Federal Communication Commission (FCC), 174 fibre channel adapters, 170–171 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL), 112–113, 139 Fibre Channel Standard (FCS), 6, 112, 139 fields within records, 196 files, 196 file system of AIX 5L, 217–218, 233–234 financial decisions, 281–286. See also business and pSeries benefits, quantifying, 284–285 business cycle improvement, 284 buying vs. leasing, 285–286 capital lease (rent-to-own), 286 cash purchases, 285 communications-line costs, 283 competitive advantage, 285 cost justification, 281–285 customer service improvement, 284 education/training costs, 283 facilities costs, 282 financing purchase, 285–286

304

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

hardware costs, 282 inventory reduction, 284 leasing vs. buying, 285–286 licensing of software, 286 maintenance costs, 282, 293 monthly charge for software, 286 one-time charge for software, 286 operating lease, 286 productivity improvement, 284 quality improvement, 284 renting, 286 software costs, 282 software licensing, 286 space costs, 283 technical support costs, 282 term lease, 286 total cost of ownership, 282 utilities costs, 283 Fiore, Frank, 225 fixed-point instructions, 84, 88, 91 floating-point instructions, 84, 88, 91 floating-point mathematics (SPECfp2000), 6, 7, 8, 74–76 “footprint” of system, 283 FORTRAN and AIX 5L, 219 frame buffer, 118, 119 Frank, Bob, 269

graphics, 117–121. See also displays (monitors); hardware architecture All-Points-Addressable (APA) image, 118 brightness, 118–119 colors, 118–119, 120 display (monitor) for, 117 dual-frame buffer technique, 119 frame buffer, 118, 119 hidden-line/surface removal, 119–120 overlay frame, 119 pixels (PELs), 118, 119, 120 resolution of display (monitor), 117, 119 three-dimensional (3D) graphics capability, xxiii, 2, 117–121 true color, 119 two-dimensional (2D) graphics capability, 117 Z-buffer, 119–120 graphics adapters (accelerators), 175–180 graPHIGS API support, 176, 177 OpenGL API support, 176, 177 overview of, 117–119, 120–121 performance, 178–180 PLBsurf93 (3D geometry), 178, 179 PLBwire93 (wireframe manipulaG tions), 178, 179 Geographic Mirror for AIX (GeoRM), POWER GXT135P (#2848), 175–176 261 POWER GXT135P with Digital geometric mean of wireframe and Support (#2849), 176 shaded model tests (ProCDRSPOWER GXT4500P, 176–177 03), 178, 179 POWER GXT6500P, 177–178, 180 GeoRM (Geographic Mirror for AIX), ProCDRS-03 (geometric mean of 261 wireframe and shaded model Gigabit Ethernet-SX PCI-X Adapter tests), 178, 179 (#5700), 165, 166 three-dimensional (3D) graphics Gigabit Fibre Channel Adapter (#6227), accelerators, 176–178 171 two-dimensional (2D) graphics Gigabit SX Ethernet PCI Adapter accelerators, 175–176 (#2969), 164, 165 graPHIGS API support, 176, 177 Global Services (IBM), 241 growth of business and pSeries family, GNOME interface of AIX 5L, 211–212, xxvii 233 H GNU General Public License, xxii HACMP (High Availability Cluster goals of organization, identifying, 263 Multiprocessing) graphical user interface (AIX 5L), distributed communications, 258–260 210–212

Index

external disk systems, 134 Midrange pSeries servers, 49–50 overview of, xxvi HACMP/XD (High Availability Cluster Multiprocessing/Extended Distance), 260–261 HAGEO (High Availability Geographic Cluster for AIX), 261 half-words, 81 hard disk (Direct Access Storage Devices, DASD), 106–108. See also external disk systems hardware architecture, 80–122. See also graphics; LPAR (logical partitioning); processor; storage bits, 81 black color for pSeries systems, 122 blind-swap technology, 116 bytes, 81 Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS), 122 deskside models, xxiii, 9–10, 122 double words, 81 expansion slots, 115–116 half-words, 81 mechanical packaging, 5, 121–122 packaging, 5, 121–122 parallel ports, 117 PCI/X I/O slots, 116 Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, 5–6, 115–116 ports, 116–117 PowerPC architecture, 1, 2, 12, 37, 80–81, 86–88 rack-mount units, 10–11, 122 Reduced Instruction Set Computing (RISC), xx–xxi, 1, 2, 80 RISC Technology Personal Computer (IBM RT PC), xx–xxi, 1, 80 serial ports, 117 standard ports, 116–117 Surface Mount Technology (SMT), 122 Very Large Scale Integration (VLSI), 122 words, 81 hardware costs, 282 Hardware Management Console (HMC), 96, 117

305

“help” information (AIX 5L), 212 hidden-line/surface removal, 119–120 High Availability Cluster Multiprocessing/Extended Distance (HACMP/XD), 260–261 High Availability Cluster Multiprocessing (HACMP). See HACMP High Availability Geographic Cluster for AIX (HAGEO), 261 High-end pSeries servers, 60–73. See also pSeries family Capacity Upgrade on Demand (CUoD) functions, 61, 66–70 Chipkill memory, 70 comparison table, 7 Control Workstation (CWS), 72 Dynamic Processor Deallocation, 67–68 “hot sparing” capability, 68 IBM eServer Cluster 1600, 5, 11, 12, 34, 46, 71–73 LAN consolidation, 72–73 logical partitioning (LPAR), 61, 65–66 Massively Parallel Processing (MPP), 72 Memory Capacity Upgrade on Demand, 68–69 On/Off Capacity on Demand (On/Off CoD), 69 p690, 5, 7, 11, 14, 60–73, 75, 78, 97, 129–131 parallel database software, 72 Processor Capacity Upgrade on Demand, 66–67 reliability, availability, serviceability (RAS) functions, 70–71 server consolidation, 72–73 Trial Capacity on Demand, 70 high-performance computing (HPC) users of pSeries family, xxii–xxiii, 2 history of pSeries family, xx–xxii HMC (Hardware Management Console), 96, 117 Hoskins, Jim, 266, 267, 269 Host Access Client Package for Multiplatforms v3.0, 223, 248 “hot sparing” capability, 68 HPC (high-performance computing) users of pSeries family, xxii–xxiii, 2

306

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

HTML (HyperText Markup Language), 225 hubs, distributed communications, 253, 254 HyperText Markup Language (HTML), 225 hypervisor function (LPAR), 96, 97 I

IBM applications software for Linux, 241 IBM Business Partners, xxvi, 215, 288, 292 IBM/Cisco Systems alliance, 173 IBM Education Services, 283 IBM eServer Cluster 1600, 5, 11, 12, 34, 46, 71–73 IBM eServer pSeries. See pSeries family “IBM eServer pSeries 690, Configuring for Performance” (IBM), 131 IBM Global Services, 241 IBM HTTP Server, 226 IBM IntelliStation family (UNIX workstations), xvii, xxiii IBM IntelliStations7, 239 IBMLink, 283, 288–289 IBM Maintenance Service Agreement, 216 IBM/Motorola/Apple alliance, 80, 86 IBM RT PC (RISC Technology Personal Computer), xx–xxi, 1, 80 IBM Warranty, 216 ICSA (International Computer Security Association) Virtual Private Network (VPN), 232 ICU (Instruction Cache Unit), 82–84, 88 IDE DVD-ROM drive (#2635), 144 IDE Slimline DVD-ROM (#2640), 144 image printing from Web, 182 ImageQuick card, 182 IMAP4 (Internet Mail Access Protocol 4), 230 industry-specific application programs, 197–198 Infoprint 62, 181 Infoprint 1000 family, 181–182 information flow of business, understanding, 263–264

Information Technology Security Evaluation Criteria (ITSEC) F-C/2/E3, 232 initiator (SCSI I/O controller), 108, 109 input devices, 184–185 installation of AIX 5L, 215–216, 234 Instruction Cache Unit (ICU), 82–84, 88 instruction execution pipeline of POWER4, 91, 93–94 integer arithmetic (SPECint2000), 6, 7, 8, 74, 75–76 integrated SCSI controllers, 155–156 IntelliStation family (UNIX workstations), xvii, xxiii interactive vs. batch processing, 200–201 interfaces, communications, 158 interleaving technique, 99, 101 internal disk drives, 132, 133 internal optical drives, 144–145 internal tape storage, 146–147. See also storage 20/40 GB 4-mm Internal Tape Drive (#6158, #6185), 146 60/150 GB 16-bit 8-mm Internal Tape Drive (#6134), 146–147 80/160 GB 8-mm Internal Tape Drive with VXA Technology (#6120, #6169), 146 International Computer Security Association (ICSA) Virtual Private Network (VPN), 232 International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 174 Internet impact on communications, 173 Internet Mail Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4), 230 Internet Protocol (IP), 160 Internet Service Providers (ISPs) users of pSeries family, xxiii, 12–13 Internet software (AIX 5L), 224–227. See also AIX 5L Adobe Acrobat Reader, 225 AIX Developer Kit, Java 2 Technology Edition, Version 1.3.1, 226 applets (Java), 226–227 Bonus Pack, 225, 226, 230–231 browsers, 225 development tools, 226–227

Index

Expansion Pack, 224, 225, 231–232 HyperText Markup Language (HTML) and, 225 IBM HTTP Server, 226 Internet Mail Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4), 230 Java programming environment, 226–227 JavaScript and, 225 JPEG images and, 225 Netscape Communicator Web Browser, 225, 230 Portable Document Format (PDF) and, 225 Secure Socket Layer (SSL), 226 Web-based System Manager, 208, 214–215, 226, 230, 234 Web browsers, 225 Web Download Pack, 226, 230–231, 232 Web server enablers, 225–226 WebSphere Application Server, 226 interrupt-driven environment, 202 inventory reduction, 284 inward-facing memory cards, 129–130 I/O architecture direction, 6 I/O device and adapter support (Linux), 239–240 I/O slots for logical partitioning (LPAR), 96 I/O Unit, 83, 85–86 IP (Internet Protocol), 160 iSeries family, 239, 266–267 ISO (International Organization for Standardization), 174 ISPs (Internet Service Providers) users of pSeries family, xxiii, 12–13 ITSEC (Information Technology Security Evaluation Criteria) F-C/2/E3, 232

307

JFS2 file system, 218, 233–234 Johnson & Thornbush (medium-sized business), 273–278 Journaled File System, 241 JPEG images and AIX 5L, 225 K

Kasparov, Garry, 12 KDE interface of AIX 5L, 212, 233 keyboards, 121, 185–186, 290 Krantz, Steve, 225 L

L1/2/3 (Level 1/2/3) cache, 89, 94, 101 L200p Flat Panel Monitor, 174–175 LANs (local area networks) communications adapters, 164 consolidation with High-end pSeries servers, 72–73 distributed communications, 250–256 overview of, 157 pSeries family and, 2, 3 large business (Atole Enterprises), 278–281 “large page” support of AIX 5L, 218 “large send” function, 164, 165, 166–167 laser continuous form printers, 181 Lawrence Livermore National Lab, 12 LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, 174 leasing vs. buying, 285–286 Level 1/2/3 (L1/2/3) cache, 89, 94, 101 libraries for application development (AIX 5L), 219–220 licensing of software, 286 lighting ergonomics, 290 Light Path Diagnostics, 18 Linear Tape—Open (LTO) products, 149–150 Linux, 237–241 J DB2 Universal Database (UDB), 241 Java 2 and AIX 5L, 219 Developer Kit for Linux, Java 2 Java-based applications (SPECjbb2000), Technology Edition, 241 78 device drivers support, 239–240 Java programming environment (AIX distributions for pSeries, 240–241 5L), 226–227 IBM applications software for, 241 JavaScript, 225

308

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

I/O device and adapter support, 239–240 Journaled File System, 241 logical partitioning (LPAR) and, 204, 239 Open Source technology, 4, 238–239, 240 overview of, 237–239 performance, 239 pSeries family and, xxii, 4, 190–191 Red Hat, 240 summary, 241 SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 8 (SLES 8) for iSeries and pSeries, 4, 191, 240 Turbolinux Linux Enterprise Server 8 (TLES 8), 4, 240 Linux affinity tools, 194, 211–212, 229, 239 liquid crystal display (LCD) technology, 174 local area networks (LANs). See LANs logical partitioning. See LPAR Logical Volume Manager (LVM), 217 login controls of AIX 5L, 214, 233 look-ahead logic, 91 loop configurations (SSA), 111, 112 loss prevention, 291–292 LP64 (64-bit capability), 234–237 LPAR (logical partitioning), 94–97. See also hardware architecture; main memory AIX Workload Manager (WLM) and, 227 application programs and, 96 Capacity Upgrade on Demand (CUoD) and, 97, 204 Direct Memory Access (DMA), 96 dynamic LPAR, 95, 97, 204 Entry pSeries and RS/6000 servers, 32–33 Hardware Management Console (HMC) for, 96, 117 High-end pSeries servers, 61, 65–66 hypervisor function, 96, 97 I/O slots for, 96 Linux and, 204, 239 memory requirements for, 97

Midrange pSeries servers, 50, 59 multiple operating systems and, 94–95 operating systems and, 94–95, 96, 97, 203–204 overview of, xxv, 10, 11, 94–96 page tables, 97 planning, help with, 97 resources and, 97 static LPAR, 95, 97, 204 Translation Control Entries, 97 usage scenarios, 95–96 “ls” command, 209, 211 LTO (Linear Tape—Open) products, 149–150 LVM (Logical Volume Manager), 217 M

Magellan XT 3D Input Device (#8423), 184–185 mail programs (AIX 5L), 213 main memory, 97–103. See also Chipkill memory; hardware architecture; LPAR (logical partitioning); memory expansion options bit scattering technique, 98 bit steering technique, 98 Error Checking and Correction (ECC) techniques, 98–99, 124 interleaving technique, 99, 101 Level 1/2/3 (L1/2/3) cache, 89, 94, 101 logical partitioning (LPAR) requirements, 97 management scheme, 101–103 memory bus parity technique, 98 parity bit, 98 processor and, 83, 85 Random Access Memory (RAM), 97 swapping (paging) programs and information, 102–103 thrashing, 103 virtual memory, 102–103 “workspace” for main processor, 97 main processor. See processor maintenance costs, 282, 293 Make command, 218

Index

management commitment to pSeries, 263 management scheme for memory, 101–103 Marketing on the Internet (Mathiesen), 225 Massively Parallel Processing (MPP), 72 Mathiesen, Michael, 225 Maximum Press Web site, xix MCA (Micro Channel) bus, 6 MCMs (multichip modules), 11, 91 mechanical packaging, 5, 121–122 medium-sized business (Johnson & Thornbush), 273–278 “Members Only” Web site, xix memory. See main memory memory bus parity technique, 98 Memory Capacity Upgrade on Demand, 68–69 memory expansion options, 124–131 inward-facing memory cards, 129–130 outward-facing memory cards, 129–130 p610 Models 6C1 and 6E1, 125 p615 Models 6C3 and 6E3, 125 p620 Models 6F0 and 6F1, 126–127 p630 Models 6C4 and 6E4, 125–126 p640, 126 p650, 127 p655, 127–128 p660 Model 6M1, 128–129 p660 Models 6H0 and 6H1, 126–127 p670, 129–131 p690, 129–131 RS/6000 Models 150, 170, 270 and B50, 124–125, 126 message frame, 161–162, 255, 256 Micro Channel (MCA) bus, 6 Microsoft Windows, xxv middleware products, 196 Midrange pSeries servers, 42–60. See also pSeries family autonomic computing, 46 Capacity Upgrade on Demand (CUoD) functions, 46–47, 57, 59 Chipkill memory, 51, 55

309

comparison table, 6–7 Dual In-Line Memory Modules (DIMMs), 44 Dynamic Processor Deallocation, 55 Express Configurations, 47, 57 High Availability Cluster Multiprocessing (HACMP), 49–50 logical partitioning (LPAR), 50, 59 p650, 4, 6, 10, 13, 42–47, 67, 68, 70, 74, 75, 127 p655, 4, 7, 10–11, 12, 13, 47–50, 75, 127–128 p660 Model 6M1, 5, 7, 11, 52, 54–57, 78, 128–129 p660 Models 6H0 and 6H1, 5, 7, 11, 50–54, 78, 126–127 p670, 5, 7, 11, 14, 57–60, 67, 68, 70, 75, 129–131 processor book, 44 reliability, availability, serviceability (RAS) functions, 46, 49–50, 59 remote I/O (RIO) subsystem, 44–45, 53 mirroring of AIX 5L, 214, 217, 259 mirroring (RAID 1), 137, 138, 155, 156 model numbers, pSeries family, 5 model of software, 187–188 modular nature of AIX 5L, 190 modular software products, 197 modulator-demodulators (modems), 186, 256 monitors. See displays monthly charge for software, 286 Motorola/IBM/Apple alliance, 80, 86 MPP (Massively Parallel Processing), 72 multiapplication (multitasking), 201–202 multichip modules (MCMs), 11, 91 multiple operating systems, logical partitioning (LPAR) and, 94–95 multiprocessing, 202–203 multiprotocol communications adapters, 168–169 multitasking (multiapplication), 201–202 multiuser systems, xxv–xxvi, xxvi, 201 “mutual takeover,” 258–259

310

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

open system AIX 5L as, 3–4, 205, 208, 232–234 application programs and, 3–4 pSeries family, 5–6, 173 software and, 194 storage area networks (SANs) and, 139 operating lease, 286 operating systems, 199–204. See also AIX 5L; Linux; UNIX application program interface (API) and, 199–200 background processing, 202 batch vs. interactive processing, 200–201 interactive vs. batch processing, 200–201 interrupt-driven environment, 202 logical partitioning (LPAR) and, 94–95, 96, 97, 203–204 multiprocessing, 202–203 multitasking (multiapplication), 201–202 multiuser systems, xxv–xxvi, xxvi, 201 single-user systems, 201 software layer, 187, 189–191, 193 “window” into computer system, 201 optical disk storage, 144–145. See also O storage object-code compatibility, 193–194 3995 Optical Library Dataservers, off-the-shelf (prewritten) application 145 programs, 195, 198, 264, 265 7210 External DVD-RAM Drive, 145 “on demand” capabilities. See CUoD CD-ROM (#2633), 144 (Capacity Upgrade on Demand) Continuous Composite WORM one-time charge for software, 286 format, 145 on-line documentation (AIX 5L), 212 DVD-RAM drive (#2623), 144–145 on-line transaction processing, 77, 86 IDE DVD-ROM drive (#2635), 144 On/Off Capacity on Demand (On/Off IDE Slimline DVD-ROM (#2640), CoD), 69 144 OpenGL and GL3.2, 220, 230 internal optical drives, 144–145 OpenGL API support, 176, 177 Permanent WORM format, 145 Open Group impact on AIX 5L, 208, Write-Once-Read-Many (WORM), 222, 232, 236 145 Open Software Foundation (OSF), 208 optical storage, 114–115 Open Source technology, 4, 238–239, options and peripherals, 123–186. See 240 also communications options; N

naming conventions, pSeries family, 5, 123–124 National Computer Security Center Trusted Computer System Evaluation Criteria Class C2, 214, 292 needs of organization, identifying, 263–264 Netscape Communicator Web Browser, 225, 230 Network File System (NFS), 223 networking performance, AIX 5L, 228–229 Network Install Manager (NIM), 234 network printers, 181–182 network processors, 172–173 New York Committee for Occupational Safety and Health (NYCOSH), 289 NFS (Network File System), 223 NIM (Network Install Manager), 234 node in a network, 251 noise in environment, 291 nonvolatile storage, 105–106 Nordic MPR-II emission standards, 174 NYCOSH (New York Committee for Occupational Safety and Health), 289

Index

displays (monitors); graphics adapters; memory expansion options; printers; SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) options; storage 7316 Model TF2 Rack-mounted Flat Panel Console, 182–183 Enhanced Keyboard, 185 Exide Uninterruptible Power Systems, 184 input devices, 184–185 keyboards, 121, 185–186, 290 Magellan XT 3D Input Device (#8423), 184–185 naming conventions, 123–124 Quiet Touch Keyboard, 121, 185–186 Spaceball 3D Input Device (#8422), 184 Three-Button Mouse (#6041 and #8741), 185 Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPSs), 184 USB keyboards, 186 VGA Switch (#4200), 183 Oracle 9i Database, 196 OSF (Open Software Foundation), 208 out-of-order design, 91, 93–94 outward-facing memory cards, 129–130 overlay frame, 119 P

P2SC (POWER2 Super Chip), 81 P260/P275 Color Monitor, 174 p610 Models 6C1 and 6E1 memory expansion options, 125 overview of, 4, 6, 9 performance of, 6 specifics of, 14, 15, 17–20 p615 Models 6C3 and 6E3 memory expansion options, 125 overview of, 4, 6, 9, 13 performance of, 6, 75 specifics of, 15, 20–24, 94 p620 Models 6F0 and 6F1 memory expansion options, 126–127 overview of, 4, 6, 9–10 performance of, 6 specifics of, 15, 24–30

311

p630 Models 6C4 and 6E4 memory expansion options, 125–126 overview of, 4, 5, 6, 10, 13 performance of, 6, 75 specifics of, 16, 30–34 p640 memory expansion options, 126 overview of, 4, 5, 6, 10 performance of, 6, 79 specifics of, 16, 34–37, 117 p650 memory expansion options, 127 overview of, 4, 6, 10, 13 performance of, 6, 74, 75 specifics of, 42–47, 67, 68, 70 p655 memory expansion options, 127–128 overview of, 4, 7, 10–11, 12, 13 performance of, 7, 75 specifics of, 47–50 p660 Model 6M1 memory expansion options, 128–129 overview of, 5, 7, 11 performance of, 7, 78 specifics of, 52, 54–57 p660 Models 6H0 and 6H1, 5, 7, 11, 50–54, 78, 126–127 memory expansion options, 126–127 overview of, 5, 7, 11 performance of, 7, 78 specifics of, 50–54 p670 memory expansion options, 129–131 overview of, 5, 7, 11, 14 performance of, 7, 75 specifics of, 57–60, 67, 68, 70 p690 memory expansion options, 129–131 overview of, 5, 7, 11, 14 performance of, 7, 75, 78 specifics of, 60–73, 97 packaging, 5, 121–122 packet-switched networks, 160 page tables, 97 paging (swapping) programs and information, 102–103 parallel database software, 72 parallel ports, 117

312

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

Parallel System Support Programs for AIX (PSSP), 12 parity bit, 98, 159 password management of AIX 5L, 214, 233 PCI 4-Channel Ultra3-SCSI RAID Adapter (#2498), 134, 155 PCI Cryptographic Coprocessor (FIPS4) (#4963), 171–172 PCI/ISA (Peripheral Component Interconnect/Industry Standard Architecture), 5–6 PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus, 5–6, 115–116 PCI Single-Ended Ultra-SCSI Adapter (#6206), 154–155 PCI/X I/O slots, 116 PCs (personal computers) AIX 5L and, 208 communications support (AIX 5L) for, 223–224 pSeries family vs., xxiv–xxvi, 2, 266 PDF documents and printers, 182 PDF (Portable Document Format), 225 PELs (pixels), 118, 119, 120 performance, 73–79. See also graphics; hardware architecture; LPAR (logical partitioning); main memory; storage AIX 5L, performance analysis tools, 228–229 assumptions for benchmark testing, 74 benchmark testing, 73–74 distributed communications, 244, 250 floating-point mathematics workloads, 74–76 graphics adapters (accelerators), 178–180 integer arithmetic workloads, 74, 75–76 Linux, 239 on-line transaction processing, 77, 86 overview of, xxiv, xxv–xxvi, xxvii PLBsurf93 (3D geometry), 178, 179 PLBwire93 (wireframe manipulations), 178, 179

price per tpmC, 77, 78 ProCDRS-03 (geometric mean of wireframe and shaded model tests), 178, 179 relative performance (rPerf), 6, 7, 8, 79 Systems Performance Evaluation Cooperative (SPEC)base (compiler directives limited), 76 Systems Performance Evaluation Cooperative (SPEC)fp2000 (floating-point mathematics), 6, 7, 8, 74–76 Systems Performance Evaluation Cooperative (SPEC)int2000 (integer arithmetic), 6, 7, 8, 74, 75–76 Systems Performance Evaluation Cooperative (SPEC)jbb2000 (Java-based applications), 78 Systems Performance Evaluation Cooperative (SPEC)rate (SMP systems), 76 Systems Performance Evaluation Cooperative (SPEC)web99 (Web server), 78, 226 Transaction Processing Performance Council (TPC-C), 77–78 Transaction Processing Performance Council (TPC-H) (decision support), 78 Transaction Processing Performance Council (TPC-W) (Web transactions), 78–79 Performance Aide v3.1 (AIX 5L), 228 Performance Optimized With Enhanced RISC (POWER) architectures, xxi–xxii, 1–2, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 80–81 Performance Toolbox (PTX) of AIX 5L, 228 Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, 5–6, 115–116 Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI)/Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, 5–6 peripherals, 123. See also options and peripherals

Index

313

Permanent WORM format, 145 image printing from Web, 182 personal computers (PCs). See PCs ImageQuick card, 182 PHIGS (Programmer Hierarchical Infoprint 62, 181 Interactive Graphics System), Infoprint 1000 family, 181–182 220 Infoprint 1140, 181–182 physical partitions of AIX 5L, 217 Infoprint 1145, 182 pixels (PELs), 118, 119, 120 laser continuous form printers, 181 planning importance, 262 network printers, 181–182 planning logical partitioning, help with, PDF documents and, 182 97 ports for, 180, 181 PLBsurf93 (3D geometry), 178, 179 ProCDRS-03 (geometric mean of PLBwire93 (wireframe manipulations), wireframe and shaded model 178, 179 tests), 178, 179 POP III (Post Office Protocol III), 230 processor, 81–94. See also hardware Portable Document Format (PDF), 225 architecture; LPAR (logical porting software, 194 partitioning); main memory; ports, 116–117 SMP (symmetric multiprocessPost Office Protocol III (POP III), 230 ing systems) POWER2 and POWER3 microprocesbranch processor, 83, 84 sors, 83, 88–89, 90 cache coherency, 105 POWER2 Super Chip (P2SC), 81 cache hit, 82, 83, 85 POWER4 and POWER4++ microprocache miss, 82–83, 85 cessors, 63, 89, 91–94, 95 condition register instructions, 84 POWER GXT135P (#2848), 175–176 data cache, 83, 85, 88, 89, 94 POWER GXT135P with Digital Direct Memory Access (DMA), Support (#2849), 176 85–86, 96 POWER GXT4500P, 176–177 Dual In-Line Memory Modules POWER GXT6500P, 177–178, 180 (DIMMs), 18, 22, 24, 27, 44, 94 power management function of disFabric Controller, 89 plays, 174 fixed-point instructions, 84, 88, 91 PowerPC architecture, 1, 2, 12, 37, floating-point instructions, 84, 88, 91 80–81, 86–88 Instruction Cache Unit (ICU), 82–84, PowerPC RS64 microprocessor, 86–88 88 POWER (Performance Optimized With instruction execution pipeline of Enhanced RISC) architectures, POWER4, 91, 93–94 xxi–xxii, 1–2, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, I/O Unit, 83, 85–86 80–81 Level 1/2/3 (L1/2/3) cache, 89, 94, prewritten (off-the-shelf) application 101 programs, 195, 198, 264, 265 look-ahead logic, 91 price factor of pSeries family, xxvii main memory and, 83, 85 price per tpmC, 77, 78 multichip modules (MCMs), 11, 91 printers, 180–182 on-line transaction processing, 77, 86 4247 Multi-Form Printer, 180–181 original implementation, 81–86 6400 Printer family, 180–181 out-of-order design, 91, 93–94 continuous forms printers, 180–181 Performance Optimized With dot-matrix impact printers, 180–181 Enhanced RISC (POWER) electrophotographic (EP) process, architectures, xxi–xxii, 1–2, 9, 181 10, 11, 12, 13, 80–81

314

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

POWER2 and POWER3 microprocessors, 83, 88–89, 90 POWER2 Super Chip (P2SC), 81 POWER4 and POWER4++ microprocessors, 63, 89, 91–94, 95 PowerPC RS64 microprocessor, 86–88 programmed I/O, 86 remote I/O (RIO) subsystem, 27, 44–45, 53, 94, 95 RISC Single Chip (RSC), 86 set associativity, 85 speculative superscalar out-of-order design, 91–93 superscalar implementation, 84, 87, 88 system clock, 83, 86, 88 zero-cycle branches, 84 processor book, 27, 44 Processor Capacity Upgrade on Demand, 66–67 processor-to-memory bus, 18, 19 productivity improvement, 284 programmed I/O, 86 Programmer Hierarchical Interactive Graphics System (PHIGS), 220 programming language, 193 program sharing on LAN, 251–252 project team for pSeries, 263 proprietary extensions, 3–4 protocols, communications, 158–162 protocol tunneling technique, 249–250 pSeries and zSeries distributed network, 246–248 pSeries distributed network, 245–246 pSeries family, xvii–5. See also AIX 5L; application programs; business and pSeries; communications; Entry pSeries and RS/6000 servers; hardware architecture; High-end pSeries servers; LPAR (logical partitioning); main memory; Midrange pSeries servers; operating systems; options and peripherals; performance; processor; storage 801 project (IBM), xx Advanced Interactive eXecutive

(AIX), xxi, 199, 205, 206 application environments and, xxiv application programs for, xxv, xxvi Application Service Providers (ASPs) users of, xxiii, 13 availability of, xxiv, xxvi Berkeley Software Distribution 4 (BSD 4), xx capacity required, xxvii choosing pSeries, questions for, xxvi–xxvii class numbers, 5 commercial users of, xxiii, 2–3 critical component of your system and, xxvi GNU Project, xxii growth of business and, xxvii high-performance computing (HPC) users of, xxii–xxiii, 2 history of, xx–xxii IBM eServer Cluster 1600, 5, 11, 12, 34, 46, 71–73 Internet Service Providers (ISPs) users of, xxiii, 12–13 I/O architecture direction, 6 model numbers, 5 multiuser environment, xxv–xxvi, xxvi, 201 naming conventions, 5, 123–124 open-systems design, 5–6, 173 Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI)/Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, 5–6 personal computer (PC) family vs., xxiv–xxvi, 2 price factor, xxvii questions for choosing pSeries, xxvi–xxvii reliability of, xxiv, xxvi robustness of, xxiv RS/6000 computers and, xxi, 1, 6 selecting pSeries, questions for, xxvi–xxvii server farms and, xxiii, 36 systems overview, 5–14 technical and scientific users of, xxii–xxiii, 2 users of, xxii–xxiv, 2–3

Index

315

Web site for, xix Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive Disks workloads and, xxvii (RAID) technology, 136–138 PSSP (Parallel System Support Programs relative performance (rPerf), 6, 7, 8, 79 for AIX), 12 reliability of pSeries family, xxiv, xxvi. PTX (Performance Toolbox) of AIX 5L, See also RAS (reliability, 228 availability, serviceability) publication, 187. See also software functions Reliable Scalable Cluster Technology, Q 230 QIC (Quarter-Inch Serpentine) format, Remote Async Nodes (RANs), 162–162 148 remote I/O (RIO) subsystem, 27, 44–45, quality improvement, 284 53, 94, 95 Quarter-Inch Serpentine (QIC) format, renting, 286 148 rent-to-own (capital lease), 286 questions for choosing pSeries, resolution of display (monitor), 117, 119 xxvi–xxvii resources and logical partitioning Quiet Touch Keyboard, 121, 185–186 (LPAR), 97 RIO (remote I/O) subsystem, 27, 44–45, R 53, 94, 95 rack-mount units, 10–11, 122 RISC (Reduced Instruction Set ComputRAID 0 (striping), 136, 137, 138, 155, ing), xx–xxi, 1, 2, 80. See also 156 processor RAID 1 (mirroring), 137, 138, 155, 156 RISC Single Chip (RSC), 86 RAID 5 (striping with distributed RISC Technology Personal Computer parity), 137, 138, 155, 156 (IBM RT PC), xx–xxi, 1, 80 RAID 10 (striping and mirroring), 138 robustness of pSeries family, xxiv RAID (Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive routers, 172–173, 253, 254 Disks) technology, 136–138 rPerf (relative performance), 6, 7, 8, 79 RAM (Random Access Memory), 97. RS/6000 family, xxi, 1, 6. See also See also main memory pSeries family RANs (Remote Async Nodes), 162–162 RS/6000 Models 150, 170, 270, and B50 RAS (reliability, availability, serviceabilmemory expansion options, ity) functions 124–125, 126 Entry pSeries and RS/6000 servers, overview of, 4, 8, 12–13 18, 20, 24, 29–30, 34, 37, performance of, 8 40–41 specifics of, 37–42, 97, 117 High-end pSeries servers, 70–71 RS/6000 SP System Attachment Midrange pSeries servers, 46, 49–50, Adapter (#8396), 170 59 RSC (RISC Single Chip), 86 “read-ahead” function and Small RT PC (RISC Technology Personal Computer System Interface Computer), xx–xxi, 1, 80 (SCSI), 109 runtime execution for Java 2, 219 read/write heads, 106, 107, 114 records, 196 S Red Hat, 240 S/390 ESCON Channel PCI Adapter Reduced Instruction Set Computing (#2751), 169–170 (RISC), xx–xxi, 1, 2, 80. See SANs (storage area networks), 138–143. also processor See also storage

316

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

2105 TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server (ESS) “Shark,” 142–143 3552 TotalStorage FAStT Fibre Channel Storage Servers, 139–142, 170–171 booting with, 230 Fibre Channel Standard (FCS), 6, 112, 139 open system and, 139 pSeries family support of, 6 storage, 113 SCM (supply chain management), 198 SCSI Adapter Cards, 153–155 SCSI I/O adapters, 152–153 SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) disk storage, 108–112. See also storage initiator (SCSI I/O controller), 108, 109 loop configurations (SSA), 111, 112 “read-ahead” function and, 109 Serial Storage Architecture (SSA), 110–112 Ultra-SCSI, 109 SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) options, 152–157 Advanced Serial RAID Plus SSA Adapter (#6230), 156–157 Advanced SSA Fibre-Optic Extender (7133 Feature 8851), 157 Dual-Channel Ultra3-SCSI Adapter (#6203), 154 integrated SCSI controllers, 155–156 PCI 4-Channel Ultra3-SCSI RAID Adapter (#2498), 134, 155 PCI Single-Ended Ultra-SCSI Adapter (#6206), 154–155 SCSI Adapter Cards, 153–155 SCSI I/O adapters, 152–153 Serial System Architecture (SSA) adapters, 156–157 Universal Differential Ultra-SCSI Adapter (#6204), 154 Very High Density Cable Interconnect (VHDCI), 154 SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control), 159–160 Secure Socket Layer (SSL), 171, 226

security, 291–293. See also business and pSeries AIX 5L enhancements, 213–214, 232–233 backups, 214, 291–292 loss prevention, 291–292 maintenance, 282, 293 service, 292–293 theft prevention, 292 warranties, 292–293 selecting pSeries, questions for, xxvi–xxvii. See also business and pSeries Sendmail Version 8.11, 229 serial ports, 117 Serial Storage Architecture (SSA), 110–112 Serial System Architecture (SSA) adapters, 156–157 serpentine format, 148 server consolidation with High-end pSeries servers, 72–73 server farms and pSeries family, xxiii, 36 server node, 251 service, 292–293 Service Agent, 216 ServiceLink, 289 service processor, 18, 20 set associativity, 85 “Shark” (2105 TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server, ESS), 142–143 shell scripts, 218–219 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), 223, 246 Single UNIX Specification (Spec 1170), 232, 236 single-user systems, 201 64-bit vs. 32-bit architectures, 194, 235–236, 237 SLES 8 (SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 8) for iSeries and pSeries, 4, 191, 240 small business (Bob’s Gearbox Company), 270–273 Small Computer System Interface. See SCSI SMI (synchronous memory interface) chips, 22, 24

Index

SMIT (Systems Management Interface Tool), 208, 213, 214–215 SMP (symmetric multiprocessing) systems overview of, 104–105, 202–203 POWER processors and, 87, 88, 89, 91 pSeries family and, xxiv–xxv, 9–10 SPECrate, 76 SMT (Surface Mount Technology), 122 SNA (Systems Network Architecture), 159–160, 247–248 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), 223, 246 software, 187–195. See also application programs; operating systems 32-bit vs. 64-bit architectures, 194, 235–236, 237 application programs layer, 187, 188, 189, 192–193 compatibility, 192–195 compiling programs, 193, 219 conceptual model, 187–188 costs, 282 device drivers layer, 187, 191–192, 193 importance of, 192–193 licensing, 286 model, 187–188 object-code compatibility, 193–194 open system and, 194 porting, 194 programming language, 193 source-code compatibility, 193, 194 upward compatibility, 194 user’s view of software, 188, 189 Solaris (Sun Microsystem), xxii, 238 source-code compatibility, 193, 194 Source Code Control System, 218 Spaceball 3D Input Device (#8422), 184 space costs, 283 Spec 1170 (Single UNIX Specification), 232, 236 SPECbase (compiler directives limited), 76 SPECfp2000 (floating-point mathematics), 6, 7, 8, 74–76 SPECint2000 (integer arithmetic), 6, 7, 8, 74, 75–76

317

SPECjbb2000 (Java-based applications), 78 SPECrate (SMP systems), 76 speculative superscalar out-of-order design, 91–93 SPECweb99 (Web server), 78, 226 SP switch, 170 SP Switch2 Attachment Adapter (#8397), 170 SSA Fast-Write Cache card (#6235), 134 SSA (Serial Storage Architecture), 110–112 SSA (Serial System Architecture) adapters, 156–157 SSL (Secure Socket Layer), 171, 226 standard ports, 116–117 start bit, 159 static kernel, 207 static LPAR, 95, 97, 204 stop bit, 159 storage, 105–115, 131–151. See also DLT (digital linear tape) options; external disk systems; external tape options; hardware architecture; internal tape storage; optical disk storage; SANs (storage area networks); SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) disk storage; TotalStorage 2-inch Tape Libraries average latency of the drive, 107 average seek time, 107 CD-ROMs, 106, 114–115 data transfer rate, 107, 109–110 disk (Direct Access Storage Devices, DASD) storage, 106–108 diskette storage, 106, 132 DVD-RAMs, 106, 115 DVD-ROMs, 115 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL), 112–113, 139 internal disk drives, 132, 133 nonvolatile storage, 105–106 optical storage, 114–115 read/write heads, 106, 107, 114 Storage Area Networks (SANs), 113

318

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

tape storage, 113–114 track of disk storage, 107 storage area networks. See SANs striping and mirroring (RAID 10), 138 striping (RAID 0), 136, 137, 138, 155, 156 striping with distributed parity (RAID 5), 137, 138, 155, 156 subroutine libraries, 218 Sun Microsystem’s Solaris, xxii, 238 superscalar implementation, 84, 87, 88 supply chain management (SCM), 198 Surface Mount Technology (SMT), 122 SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 8 (SLES 8) for iSeries and pSeries, 4, 191, 240 SVR4 affinity tools, 194 swapping (paging) programs and information, 102–103 switches, distributed communications, 253, 254 symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) systems. See SMP Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC), 159–160 synchronous memory interface (SMI) chips, 22, 24 system clock, 83, 86, 88 systems management (AIX 5L), 213–216. See also AIX 5L backups, 214 customization services, 215–216 installation, 215–216, 234 login controls, 214, 233 mirroring, 214, 217, 219 password management, 214, 233 Reliable Scalable Cluster Technology, 230 security enhancements, 213–214, 232–233 Service Agent, 216 storage area network (SAN) disk for booting, 230 Tivoli 7 suite of systems management products, 213 user profiles, 213 Web-based System Manager, 208, 214–215, 226, 230, 234

Systems Management Interface Tool (SMIT), 208, 213, 214–215 Systems Network Architecture (SNA), 159–160, 247–248 systems overview of pSeries family, 5–14 Systems Performance Evaluation Cooperative (SPEC), 6, 7, 8, 74–76, 78, 226 T

T541 15-inch TFT Color Monitor, 174, 175 tape storage, 113–114. See also DLT (digital linear tape) options; external tape options; internal tape storage; TotalStorage 2-inch Tape Libraries TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol) AIX 5L, 222–223, 229 distributed communications, 246, 247 TCP segmentation, 166–167 technical and scientific users of pSeries family, xxii–xxiii, 2 technical support costs, 282 Technology Corporation, 178 term lease, 286 TFT (thin-film technology), 174 theft prevention, 292 thin-film technology (TFT), 174 thrashing, 103 Three-Button Mouse (#6041 and #8741), 185 three-dimensional graphics. See 3D (three-dimensional) graphics 32-bit vs. 64-bit architectures, 194, 235–236, 237 tilt/swivel stand of displays, 174 Tivoli 7 suite of systems management products, 213 Tivoli NetView7, 223, 246 TLES 8 (Turbolinux Linux Enterprise Server 8), 4, 240 token frame, 161, 162, 255, 256 Token-Ring LAN, 255–256 Token-Ring PCI Adapter (#4959), 167–168, 256 Token-Ring protocol, 160–162

Index

319

Torvalds, Linus, xxii, 238 total cost of ownership, 282 TotalStorage 2-inch Tape Libraries, 151–152. See also storage 3494 TotalStorage Virtual Tape Server Models B10 and B20 (3494 Tape Library Dataservers), 151–152 Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF), 151 TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 (3590 Magstar Tape Subsystem), 151, 152 TotalStorage UltraScalable Tape Library 3584, 150–151 TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Libraries, 149–150 TPC-C (Transaction Processing Performance Council), 77–78 TPC-H (decision support), 78 TPC-W (Web transactions), 78–79 track of disk storage, 107 training/education, 283, 287–288 Transaction Processing Performance Council (TPC-C), 77–78 Translation Control Entries, 97 Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. See TCP/IP Trial Capacity on Demand, 70 true color, 119 tunneling technique, 249–250 Turbolinux Linux Enterprise Server 8 (TLES 8), 4, 240 TURBOWAYS ATM Adapters, 168 two-dimensional graphics. See 2D (twodimensional) graphics

UNIX AIX 5L and, 204–205 pSeries family and, xx, xxiv, 192, 193, 204–205 source-code compatibility, 194 UNIX servers. See pSeries family UNIX workstations (IBM IntelliStation family), xvii, xxiii UPSs (Uninterruptible Power Systems), 184 upward compatibility, 194 usage scenarios for logical partitioning (LPAR), 95–96 USB keyboards, 186 user education/training, 283, 287–288 user interface of AIX 5L, 207–208 user interfaces/services (AIX 5L), 209–213. See also AIX 5L command prompt, 209, 210 command shells, 209–210, 211, 213 Common Desktop Environment (CDE), 211–212, 219, 221, 233 Display PostScript for AIXwindows, 211, 220 GNOME interface, 211–212, 233 graphical user interface, 210–212 “help” information, 212 KDE interface, 212, 233 “ls” command, 209, 211 mail programs, 213 on-line documentation, 212 user profiles (AIX 5L), 213 users of pSeries family, xxii–xxiv, 2–3 user’s view of software, 188, 189 utilities costs, 283

U

V

UDB (DB2 Universal Database), 196, 241 Ultra-SCSI, 109 Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPSs), 184 Universal 4-Port 10/100 Ethernet Adapter (#4961), 165–166 Universal Differential Ultra-SCSI Adapter (#6204), 154 University of California at Berkeley, xx, 205

Very High Density Cable Interconnect (VHDCI), 154 Very Large Scale Integration (VLSI), 122 VGA Switch (#4200), 183 VHDCI (Very High Density Cable Interconnect), 154 “vi” full-screen editor and tools, 218 VIPA (Virtual IP Address) function, 228–229 virtual memory, 102–103

320

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries

virtual private networks (VPNs), 248–250 virtual servers. See LPAR (logical partitioning) VisualAge C Compiler, 219 VLSI (Very Large Scale Integration), 122 VPNs (virtual private networks), 248–250 W

WANs (wide area networks), 157, 168 warranties, 292–293 Web-based System Manager, 208, 214–215, 226, 230, 234 Web browsers, 225 Web Download Pack (AIX 5L), 226, 230–231, 232 Web server enablers (AIX 5L), 225–226 Web server (SPECweb99), 78, 226 Web site for pSeries family, xix WebSphere Application Server, 226 Web transactions (TPC-W), 78–79 Welcome Center (AIX 5L), 229–230 wide area networks (WANs), 157, 168 Wilson, Bill, 266 “window” into computer system, operating system as, 201

wireframe manipulations (PLBwire93), 178, 179 wireless communications, xxv WLM (Workload Manager), 66, 203, 227–228 words, 81 workgroup pricing, Entry pSeries and RS/6000 servers, 25 Workload Manager (WLM), 66, 203, 227–228 workloads and pSeries family, xxvii “workspace” for main processor, 97. See also main memory workstation comfort, 290–291 WORM (Write-Once-Read-Many), 145 Write-Once-Read-Many (WORM), 145 X

X.25 Interface adapter, 245 X.25 protocol, 160 X development environment, 220 X/Open, 208, 232 xSeries family, 239 X Windows Graphics Support Library, 220 Z

Z-buffer, 119–120 zero-cycle branches, 84 zSeries family, 239, 246–248, 267–269

Reader Feedback Sheet

Your comments and suggestions are very important in shaping future publications. Please e-mail us at [email protected] or photocopy this page, jot down your thoughts, and fax it to (850) 934-9981 or mail it to: Maximum Press Attn: Jim Hoskins 605 Silverthorn Road Gulf Breeze, FL 32561

Exploring IBM ~ pSeries, Twelfth Edition by Jim Hoskins and Robert Bluethman 352 pages $54.95 ISBN: 1-931644-04-7

Exploring IBM ~ iSeries, Eleventh Edition by Jim Hoskins and Roger Dimmick 386 pages $54.95 ISBN: 1-885068-92-1

Exploring IBM ~ zSeries and S/390 Servers, Eighth Edition by Jim Hoskins and Bob Frank 464 pages $59.95 ISBN: 1-885068-91-3

Exploring IBM ~ xSeries, Twelfth Edition by Jim Hoskins, Bill Wilson, and Ray Winkel 208 pages $49.95 ISBN: 1-885068-83-2

Exploring IBM e-business Software, Second Edition by Casey Young 360 pages $49.95 ISBN: 1-931644-00-4

Exploring IBM Technology, Products & Services, Fifth Edition edited by Jim Hoskins 272 pages $54.95 ISBN: 1-885068-82-4

Building Intranets with Lotus Notes & Domino 5.0, Third Edition by Steve Krantz 320 pages $39.95 ISBN: 1-885068-41-7

Internet Marketing for Information Technology Companies, Second Edition by Barry Silverstein 464 pages $29.95 ISBN: 1-885068-67-0

To purchase a Maximum Press book, visit your local bookstore or call 1-800-989-6733 (US/Canada) or 1-850-934-4583 (International) online ordering available at www.maxpress.com

101 Ways to Promote Your Web Site, Fourth Edition by Susan Sweeney, C.A. 528 pages $29.95 ISBN: 1-885068-90-5

Marketing with E-mail, Third Edition by Shannon Kinnard 352 pages $29.95 ISBN: 1-885068-68-9

Business-to-Business Internet Marketing, Fourth Edition by Barry Silverstein 432 pages $34.95 ISBN: 1-885068-72-7

Marketing on the Internet, Sixth Edition by Jan Zimmerman 488 pages $34.95 ISBN: 1-885068-80-8

The e-Business Formula for Success by Susan Sweeney, C.A. 360 pages $34.95 ISBN: 1-885068-60-3

The Business Guide to Selling Through Internet Auctions by Nancy Hix 608 pages $29.95 ISBN: 1-885068-73-5

101 Internet Businesses You Can Start From Home by Susan Sweeney, C.A. 520 pages $29.95 ISBN: 1-885068-59-X

Internet Marketing for Less Than $500/Year, Second Edition by Marcia Yudkin 352 pages $29.95 ISBN: 1-885068-69-7

To purchase a Maximum Press book, visit your local bookstore or call 1-800-989-6733 (US/Canada) or 1-850-934-4583 (International) online ordering available at www.maxpress.com